Class 10

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

HBSE 10th Class English Madam Rides the Bus Textbook Questions and Answers

Activity

1. Look at the words and phrases given below. Then put a tick against the ones you think you will find in the text.

______ a set of passengers
______ get on the bus
______ get off the bus
______ platform
______ Tickets, please
______ a roar and a rattle
______ a row of seats
______ slowing down to a crawl
______ blowing a whistle
Answer:
a set of passengers
get on the bus
get off the bus
a roar and a rattle

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

2. You must have travelled by bus more than once. What can you see from a fast-moving bus ? Given below are some suggestions. Speak briefly about some of these scenes, or about other such scenes that you have seen; or write a sentence or two about them.

rivers
roadside shops
moving trains
a crowd
green fields
market places
vehicles on the road
clothes in shops
hills
railway tracks
trees
animals
Answer:
Usually the following scenes can be seen from a fast-moving bus :

• green fields
• roadside shops
• market places
• grazing animals
• moving trees
• a crowd
• vehicles on the road
• crops in fields
• people walking on the road
• factories
• distant hills
• rivers
• valleys

The above scenes are generally visible when the bus is moving in the plains and passing through cities. When the bus leaves the city, we can see green fields on both side of the road. In these fields we can see the grazing animals, standing crops, etc. We also see the trees moving towards us when the bus runs. We also see factories and the people walking on the road. When the bus passes through the cities, we can see market places, crowds of people and roadside shops. But when the bus passes through a hilly area, we can see hills, far off mountains, rivers, valleys, etc. All these things look very charming and beautiful.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 119)

1. What was Valli’s favourite pastime ? (वल्ली का प्रिय शौक क्या था?)
Answer:
Valli’s favourite pastime was to stand in the doorway of her house and watch what was happening in the street outside.
(अपने घर के सामने वाले दरवाजे पर खड़े होकर गली में घट रही घटनाओं को देखना वल्ली का प्रिय शौंक था।)

2. What was a source of unending joy for Valli ? What was her strongest desire ?
(वल्ली के लिए प्रसन्नता का कभी समाप्त न होने वाला स्रोत क्या था? उसकी सबसे मज़बूत इच्छा क्या थी?)
Answer:
The sight of the bus filled each time with a new set of passengers was a source of unending joy for Valli. Her strongest desire was to enjoy a ride on that bus.
(हर बार नए यात्रियों के समूह से भरी हुई बस का दृश्य वल्ली के लिए कभी समाप्त न होने वाला प्रसन्नता का स्रोत था। . उसकी सबसे अधिक मज़बूत इच्छा उस बस पर सवार होकर सफर करने की थी।)

3. What did Valli find out about the bus journey ? How did she find out these details ? (बस यात्रा के बारे में वल्ली को क्या जानकारी हासिल हुई? उसने ये जानकारियाँ कैसे हासिल की?)
Answer:
Valli found out about the bus journey that the bus fare was thirty paise one way.The town was six miles from the village. She found out these details after hearing the conversation between her neighbours and those who had travelled by the bus.
(वल्ली को बस यात्रा के बारे में पता चल गया कि बस यात्रा का एक तरफ का किराया तीस पैसे था। कस्बा गाँव में छह मील की दूरी पर था। उसने ये जानकारियाँ अपने पड़ोसियों और उन लोगों की बातचीत से हासिल की थीं जो बस की यात्रा कर चुके थे।)

4. What do you think Valli was planning to do? (आपके विचार में वल्ली क्या करने की योजना बना रही थी?)
Answer:
She was planning to save money so that she could ride on the bus. She could take the one-o’clock afternoon bus, reach the town at one forty-five and be back home by about two forty-five.
(वह पैसे बचाने की योजना बना रही थी ताकि वह बस पर सवार हो सके। वह दोपहर बाद एक बजे वाली बस ले सके, एक बजकर पैंतालिस मिनट पर कस्बे में पहुँच सके और दो पैंतालिस पर अपने घर लौट सके।)

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 122)

1. Why does the conductor call Valli ‘madam’?
(परिचालक वल्ली को ‘मैडम’ क्यों कहता है?) ।
Answer:
The conductor was amused to see the self-confidence of Valli. She behaved like a grown up woman. She was quick in her answers to the conductor’s questions. So he addresses Valli as ‘madam.’
(परिचालक वल्ली के आत्मविश्वास से अति प्रसन्न था। वह एक सयानी महिला की तरह व्यवहार कर रही थी। वह परिचालक के प्रश्नों का तेजी के साथ उत्तर दे रही थी। इसलिए वह वल्ली को ‘मैडम’ कहता है।)

2. Why does Valli stand up on the seat ? What does she see now ? (वल्ली सीट पर क्यों खड़ी हो जाती ? अब वह क्या देखती है?)
Answer:
Valli stands up on the seat because she couldn’t see outside as the bus curtain had covered the lower part of her window. Now she sees the outside scenes and is filled with wonder.
(वल्ली सीट पर खड़ी हो जाती है क्योंकि वह बस से बाहर नहीं देख सकती है क्योंकि बस में लगे पर्दो ने उसकी खिड़की के निचले भाग को ढक रखा है। अब वह बाहर के दृश्यों को देखती है और आश्चर्य से भर जाती है।)

3. What does Valli tell the elderly man when he calls her a child ? (वल्ली वृद्ध आदमी को क्या बताती है जब वह उसे बच्ची कहकर पुकारता है?)
Answer:
Valli feels angry when the elderly man calls her a child. She tells him that she is not a child and that she has a full ticket for the bus journey.
(वल्ली क्रोधित हो जाती है जब वृद्ध आदमी उसे बच्ची कहकर पुकारता है। वह उसे बताती है कि वह बच्ची नहीं है और उसके पास बस यात्रा का पूरा टिकट है।)

4. Why didn’t Valli want to make friends with the elderly woman ? (वल्ली वृद्ध महिला के साथ मित्रता क्यों नहीं करना चाहती थी?)
Answer:
Valli did not want to make friends with the elderly woman because she looked ‘repulsive’ and ‘smelled foul.’
(वल्ली वृद्ध महिला के साथ मित्रता नहीं करना चाहती थी क्योंकि वह ‘घृणित’ लग रही थी और उससे ‘बुरी गंध’ आ रही थी।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 125)

1. How did Valli save up money for her first journey ? Was it easy for her ?
(वल्ली ने अपनी पहली यात्रा के लिए धन कैसे बचाया? क्या यह उसके लिए आसान था?)
Answer:
Valli saved up money for her first journey by resisting the temptation to buy peppermints, toys, balloons, etc. It was difficult for her. She even suppressed her desire to enjoy a merry-go-round at the village fair.
(वल्ली ने पिपरमिंट की गोलियाँ, खिलौने, गुब्बारे इत्यादि खरीदने से अपने आपको रोककर धन बचाया। यह उसके लिए कठिन था। उसने गाँव के मेले में झूले का आनन्द लेने की अपनी इच्छा को भी दबाया।)

2. What did Valli see on her way that made her laugh ? (वल्ली ने रास्ते में क्या देखा जिससे वह हँसने लगी?)
Answer:
Suddenly a cow which came before the bus with her raised tail. The driver sounded the horn. But more he honked, the animal became more frightened and the faster it galloped. This made Valli laugh.
(अचानक ही एक गाय जिसने अपनी पूँछ उठा रखी थी बस के आगे आ गई। चालक ने हॉर्न बजाया। लेकिन जितना ज्यादा वह हॉर्न बजाता था, जानवर उतना ज्यादा डर जाता था और तेजी से भागने लग जाता था। इससे वल्ली हँस पड़ी।)

3. Why didn’t she get off the bus at the bus station? (वह बस स्टेशन पर बस से नीचे क्यों नहीं उतरी?)
Answer:
Valli didn’t get off the bus at the bus station because she was going back on the same bus. So she gave the money to the conductor for the ticket for her return journey.
(बस स्टैण्ड पर वल्ली बस से नीचे नहीं उतरी क्योंकि वह उसी बस से वापस जा रही थी। इसलिए उसने चालक को उसकी वापसी की यात्रा के टिकट के पैसे दे दिए।)

4. Why didn’t Valli want to go to the stall and have a drink? What does this tell you about her?
(वल्ली दुकान पर जाकर शीतल पेय क्यों नहीं पीना चाहती थी? इससे आपको उसके बारे में क्या जानकारी मिलती है?)
Answer:
Valli did not want to go to the stall and have a drink because she didn’t have the money for that. The conductor offered to pay for her. But she declined this offer. It tells that she was a wise and confident girl.
(वल्ली दुकान पर नहीं जाना चाहती थी और पेय पदार्थ नहीं लेना चाहती रो क्योंकि उसके पास इसके लिए धन नहीं था। परिचालक ने इसके लिए पैसे देने की पेशकश की। लेकिन उसने इस पेशकश को इंकार कर दिया। इससे पता चलता है कि वह एक बुद्धिमान और विश्वस्त लड़की थी।)

Thinking about the Text

1. What was Valli’s deepest desire ? Find the words and phrases in the story that tell you this.
(वल्ली की तीव्रतम इच्छा क्या थी? कहानी में से वे शब्द या वाक्यांश छाँटिए जो इसके बारे में आपको बताते हैं।)
Answer:
Valli’s deepest desire was to ride on the bus which ran from her village to the nearby town. The words and phrases which tell this are : ‘Day after day she watched the bus’, ‘she wanted to ride on that bus’, “This wish became stronger and stronger.’ ‘until it was an overwhelmin
(वल्ली की तीव्रतम इच्छा थी कि वह अपने गाँव से निकटतम कस्बे में जाने वाली बस की सवारी करे। जो शब्द या वाक्यांश हमें इसके बारे में बताते हैं कि-‘दिन-प्रतिदिन वह बस को निहारती थी’, ‘वह बस पर सफर करना चाहती थी’, ‘यह इच्छा मज़बूत-से-मजबूत होती गई’, ‘जब तक कि यह एक अनियंत्रित इच्छा नहीं बन गई।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

2. How did Valli plan her bus ride? What did she find out about the bus, and how did she save up the fare?
(वल्ली ने अपनी बस की यात्रा की योजना कैसे बनाई? उसने बस के बारे में क्या जानकारी हासिल की, और उसने किराया कैसे बचाया?)
Answer:
Valli planned her bus ride after knowing all the related facts like the fare, the time it took to reach the town, when it started to and fro. She found out all these details by listening carefully to conversation between her neighbours and the persons who had travelled by the bus. :
(वल्ली ने बस के बारे में सारे तथ्यों; जैसे किराया, शहर पहुँचने में लिया जाने वाला समय, यह यहाँ और वहाँ से किस समय चलती थी जानने के बाद अपनी बस यात्रा की योजना बनाई। उसने ये सारी जानकारियाँ अपने पड़ोसियों और उन लोगों की बातचीत को जो बस की यात्रा कर चुके थे ध्यान से सुनकर हासिल की थीं।)

3. What kind of a person is Valli? To answer this question, pick out the following sentences from the text and fill in the blanks. The words you fill in are the clues to your answer.
(वल्ली किस प्रकार की लड़की है? इस प्रश्न के उत्तर के लिए पाठ से निम्नलिखित वाक्य लो और खाली स्थान को भरो। जो शब्द आप भरेंगे वही आपके उत्तर के लिए संकेत होंगे।)
(i) “Stop the bus ! Stop the bus!” And a tiny hand was raised
(ii) “Yes,I .go to town,” said Valli, still standing outside the bus.
(iii) “There’s nobody here ______.” she said haughtily.“I’ve paid my thirty paise like everyone else.”
(iv) “Never mind,” she said, “I can ____ . You don’t have to help me. I’m not a child, I tell you,” she said,
(v) “You needn’t bother about me. I _____________. “Valli said, turning her face toward the window and staring out.
(vi) Then she turned to the conductor and said, “Well, sir, I hope ____.”
Answer:
(i) commandingly
(ii) simply have to
(iii) who’s a child
(iv) get on by myself
(v) can take care of myself
(vi) to see you again

4. Why does the conductor refer to Valli as ‘madam’ ?
(परिचालक वल्ली को मैडम क्यों कहता है?)
Answer:
The conductor was impressed by Valli’s self-confidence. She behaved like a grown up woman. She was quick in her answers to the conductor’s questions. She was self-dependent. So he addressed Valli as ‘madam.’

(परिचालक वल्ली के आत्मविश्वास से अति प्रसन्न था। वह एक सयानी महिला की तरह व्यवहार कर रही थी। वह परिचालक के प्रश्नों का तेजी के साथ उत्तर दे रही थी। वह आत्म-निर्भर थी। इसलिए वह वल्ली को ‘मैडम’ कहता है।) .

5. Find the lines in the text which tell you that Valli was enjoying her ride on the bus. (अध्याय में से पंक्तियाँ छाँटिए जो आपको बताती हैं कि वल्ली अपनी यात्रा का आनन्द ले रही थी।)
Answer:
The following lines tell us that Valli was enjoying the bus ride : ‘Suddenly Valli clapped her hands with glee,’ ‘Somehow this was very funny to Valli,’ ‘She laughed and laughed …,’ ‘Struck dumb with wonder, Valli gaped at everything.’

6. Why does Valli refuse to look out of the window on her way back ? (घर वापसी में वल्ली खिड़की से बाहर देखने से क्यों मना कर देती है?)
Answer:
On her way back, Valli sees the dead cow. It makes her sad. So she refuses to look out of the window on her way back because what was so beautiful a little while ago now looked so horrible. The memory of the dead cow haunts her. It dampens her enthusiasm.
(वापसी में, वल्ली एक मृत गाय को देखती है। इससे वह उदास हो जाती है। इसलिए घर वापसी पर वह खिड़की से बाहर देखने से मना कर देती है क्योंकि थोड़ी देर पहले जो कुछ इतना सुन्दर था अब इतना भयानक लग रहा था। मृत गाय की याद उसे परेशान कर रही है। यह उसके उत्साह को ठंडा कर रही है।)

7. What does Valli mean when she says, “I was just agreeing with what you said about things happening without our knowledge.”
(वल्ली का क्या भाव है जब वह कहती है “मैं तो सिर्फ आपकी बात से सहमत हो रही थी जो हमारी जानकारी के बिना चीजों के घटित होने के विषय में आप ने कहा था।”)
Answer:
Valli means to say that many things happen in our midst and in the world outside. We do not know about them all. Even if we know them, we can’t understand them completely.
(वल्ली के कहने का भाव है कि हमारे बीच में और बाहर संसार में बहुत-सी चीजें घटित होती हैं। हम उनके बारे में सब कुछ नहीं जानते। यदि हम उनके बारे में जानते भी हैं तो हम उन्हें पूर्णतया समझ नहीं सकते हैं।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

8. The author describes the things that Valli sees from an eight-year-old’s point of view. Can you find evidence from the text for this statement ?
(लेखक चीज़ों का वर्णन उस रूप में करता है जिस रूप में एक आठ साल की लड़की वल्ली उन्हें देखती है। क्या आप अध्याय से कुछ प्रमाण ढूँढ सकते हैं जो इस कथन की पुष्टि करते हैं?)
Answer:
The following evidence from the text tells us that the poet describes the things that Valli sees from an eight-year old’s point of view :
“The most fascinating thing of all was the bus that travelled between her village and the nearest town,’
“Valli devoured everything with her eyes,’
‘Oh, it was all so wonderful!’ palm trees, grassland, distant mountains, and the blue, blue sky,”
‘Valli’s stands to look outside as the bus curtain covers the lower part of her window,’
‘Somehow this was very funny to Valli’ (seeing the cow run ahead of the bus),
“She laughed and laughed until there were tears in her eyes.

Speaking

This story has a lot of people talking in it. The conductor jokes and laughs with Valli, some passengers try to show their concern for her, and her mother and her aunt spend time chatting.
Read the conversations carefully. Then think of similar people, or similar situations that you have experienced. Mimic a person or persons who spoke to you, saying what they said, along with your replies.
Answer:
I often travel by a bus. The memory of one such journey is till fresh in my mind. The conductor of the bus was a very jolly person. He was perhaps a man who could never be sad. He replied to every question in a humorous way. I saw the bus stand. I went near it asked the conductor where the bus would go. He looked at me and said, “How can the bus go? Do you find any legs attached to the bus?” Everyone laughed. I too enjoyed the joke. In the meantime someone had told me that the bus was going to Delhi. It was the right bus so I boarded it. After sometime a person asked the conductor as to what was the last stop of the bus. At this conductor replied, “The last stop of every bus is the junk dealer’s shop.” Again everybody laughed. At next stop, an old man boarded the bus. He was a stammered while talking. He said something to the conductor, who replied, “Sir, applying the brakes is the driver’s job. Why do you apply brakes when speaking?” Thus the conductor kept making humorous remarks. As a result, I and the other passengers had a good time.

Writing

Write a page—about three paragraphs on one of the following topics.

1. Have you ever planned something entirely on your own, without taking grown-ups into your
confidence ? What did you plan, and how ? Did you carry out your plan ?
Answer:
What I Planned Entirely on My Own

I remember that once I planned a visit to the International book fair on my town, without taking any elders into confidence. I am a book lover. When I learnt that an international book fair was being held in Delhi, I could not resist the temptation of visiting it. I told my father that I wanted to visit my uncle who lived in Delhi. After some hesitation, my father agreed. A few days ago I had won a cash prize at a declamation contest held in our school. So I had money in my pocket for the books. My father gave me the bus fare. I was very happy. On reaching Delhi, I boarded a local bus for the Pragati Maidan. After one hour, I reached the book fair site. I was thrilled to see so many book stalls there. I kept money only for the return fare and spent the rest of money on the books. I purchased some very good books. I shall always remember that visit.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

2. Have you made a journey that was unforgettable in some way? What made it memorable ?
Answer:
My Unforgettable Journey

Once I went to Ludhiana by bus. That journey will always remain fresh in my mind. Everything went wrong from the start to the finish. First of all I was late for the bus. I hired an auto-rickshaw for the bus stand. But the auto-rickshaw struck an electric pole and turned over. Luckily I escaped without any injury. I rushed to the bus stand and found the bus just leaving. I ran very hard and was able to catch it. But as I entered the bus, I collided against a lady who was standing. She asked me if I was blind. Everyone laughed at me. I was red in the face. Then the bus broke down on the way. After waiting for one hour for the bus to be repaired, I finally took another bus. I reached Ludhiana at night. Then I forgot the adder’s of my friend. I kept wandering in his colony. However, all is well that ends well. Luckily I found my friend coming in the street. I went to his room and heaved a sigh of relief.

3. Are you concerned about traffic and road safety ? What are your concerns ? How would you
make road travel safer and more enjoyable ?
Answer:
My Concern about Traffic and Road Safety

I am concerned about the traffic and the road safety. In India, the traffic rules are very commonly ignored. As a result, there are many accidents in which numerous people lose their lives.

We must follow the traffic rules for our own and others’ safety. We should keep to the left while driving on the road. We should use the zebra crossing while crossing the road. When we are driving a vehicle, we must slow it when we approach the zebra crossing. The most important thing is that public should be educated about traffic rules and traffic safety. The police must check the traffic violations strictly. Those who violate the traffic rules should be punished severely.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

HBSE 10th Class English Madam Rides the Bus Important Questions and Answers

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Who was Valli?
Answer:
Valli was an eight years old village girl.

Question 2.
What was Valli’s favourite pastime ?
Answer:
Her favourite pastime was standing in the front doorway of her house, watching what was happening in the street outside.

Question 3.
How old was Valli ?
Answer:
Valli was eight years old.

Question 4.
Who did Valli live with ?
Answer:
Valli lived with her mother.

Question 5.
What was the most fascinating thing for Valli ?
Answer:
The sight of the bus, filled each time with a new set of passengers was the most fascinating thing for Valli.

Question 6.
When would Valli be jealous ?
Answer:
Valli would be jealous when one of her friends described the sight of the town to her.

Question 7.
What did Valli carefully listen to ?
Answer:
Valli carefully listened to conversations of her neighbours who used the bus regularly.

Question 8.
How far was the town from the village ?
Answer:
It was at a distance of six miles.

Question 9.
What type of a man was the bus conductor ?
Answer:
The bus conductor was a jolly and fun loving type of person.

Question 10.
How much money did Valli save for the bus ride ?
Answer:
She saved sixty paisa for the bus ride.

Question 11.
What made Valli sad ?
Answer:
The sight of the dead cow made Valli sad.

Question 12.
What was Valli’s deepest desire?
Answer:
Valli’s deepest desire was to have a bus ride to the town.

Question 13.
What does the bus conductor call Valli?
Answer:
The bus conductor calls her ‘madam’.

Question 14.
What did Valli buy from the town?
Answer:
She bought nothing from the town.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write down the conductor’s advice to Valli?
(परिचालक के द्वारा वल्ली को दी गई सलाह लिखिए।)
Answer:
Calling Valli a child, the conductor requested her to sit down. It will make her comfortable. Standing up again and again can make her fall and get hurt because the bus can make a sharp turn.
(वल्ली को बच्ची कहते हुए, परिचालक ने उसे नीचे बैठ जाने को कहा। इससे वह आरामदायक रहेगी। बार-बार खड़े होने से वह गिर सकती है और उसे चोट लग सकती है क्योंकि बस को तीव्र मोड़ काटने पड़ते हैं।)

Question 2.
How did Valli manage to leave the house?
(वल्ली ने घर से जाने का प्रबंध कैसे किया?)
Answer:
Valli knew that after lunch her mother would nap for about one to four or so. It was Valli’s habit to engage these hours for her excursions and move outside the village.
(वल्ली जानती थी कि दोपहर का खाना खाने के बाद उसकी माँ एक बजे से लेकर चार बजे तक हल्की नींद लेती थी। वल्ली की आदत थी कि वह इन घंटों का प्रयोग भ्रमण करने या गाँव में इधर-उधर घूमने में करती थी।)

Question 3.
What did Valli calculate and plan?
(वल्ली ने क्या गणना की और क्या योजना बनाई?)
Answer:
Valli calculated and planned that if she took one o’clock afternoon bus, she would reach the town at one forty-five. On reaching town if she stayed in her seat and paid another thirty paise she could return home by the same bus by about two forty-five.
(वल्ली ने गणना की और योजना बनाई कि यदि उसने दोपहर बाद एक बजे वाली बस पकड़ ली तो वह एक पैंतालिस पर शहर पहुँच जाएगी। शहर पहुँचकर यदि वह अपनी सीट पर ही बैठी रही और अतिरिक्त तीस पैसे का भुगतान कर दिया तो वह उसी बस से दो बजकर पैंतालिस मिनट तक घर पहुंच जाएगी।)

Question 4.
What type of person was the conductor?
(परिचालक किस प्रकार का व्यक्ति था?)
Answer:
The conductor was very wise man and knew how to tackle and talk with the passengers. He was fond of jokes and in his jolly tone interrogated Valli many times.
(परिचालक बहुत ही बुद्धिमान व्यक्ति था और जानता था कि यात्रियों से किस तरह व्यवहार किया जाना चाहिए। वह मजाक पसंद करने वाला था और उसने कई बार मजाक की मुद्रा में वल्ली से बात की।)

Question 5.
What did Valli’s mother say about the things happening without our knowledge?
(वल्ली की माँ ने हमारी जानकारी के बिना घटित होने वाली चीज़ों के बारे में क्या कहा?) ।
Answer:
Valli’s mother said that so many things happen amidst us and in the world outside. We cannot know about everything. Even when we know about something we often can’t understand it completely.
(वल्ली की माँ ने कहा कि कितनी सारी चीजें हमारे बीच में और हमारे से बाहर की दुनिया में घटित होती हैं। हम प्रत्येक चीज़ के बारे में नहीं जान सकते हैं। यहाँ तक कि यदि हम कभी किसी चीज़ के बारे में जान भी लेते हैं तो हम उसे पूर्ण रूप से समझ नहीं सकते हैं।)

Essay Type Question

Question 1.
Who was Valli? What was her overwhelming desire?
(वल्ली कौन थी? उसकी तीव्र इच्छा क्या थी?)
or
Who was valli? What was her favourite pastime?
(वल्ली कौन थी? उसका प्रिय शौंक क्या था?)
Answer:
Valli was an eight-year old girl. She was a curious girl. She wanted to know many things. She did not have playmates of her own age. Her favourite pastime was standing in the front doorway of her house to see what was happening outside. The most fascinating thing of all was the bus that passed through the street each hour. The bus travelled between her village and the nearest town. The sight of the bus was a source of unending joy for Valli. It was a great joy for her to watch new sets of passengers everytime the bus passed through the street. As she watched the bus day after day, she developed a wish to have a ride on that bus. Her wish became stronger and stronger until it was an overwhelming desire.

(वल्ली एक आठ वर्ष की लड़की थी। वह एक जिज्ञासु लड़की थी। वह बहुत-सी चीजें जानना चाहती थी। उसके पास उसकी उम्र के साथी नहीं थे जिनके साथ वह खेल सके। उसका प्रिय शौक था अपने घर के सामने वाले दरवाजे में खड़े होकर गली में हो रही घटनाओं को निहारना। उसके लिए सबसे आकर्षक चीज़ थी गली में से हर घंटे गुजरने वाली बस। यह बस उसके गाँव और निकटतम कस्बे के बीच चलती थी। बस का दृश्य वल्ली के लिए कभी न समाप्त होने वाली प्रसन्नता का स्रोत था। जैसे-जैसे वह गली में से प्रतिदिन बस को गुजरते हुए देखती गई बस में सवार होने की उसकी इच्छा विकसित होती रही। उसकी इच्छा मजबूत-से-मजबूत होती रही, जब तक कि वह अनियंत्रित इच्छा में नहीं बदल गई।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Question 2.
How did Valli plan to have a bus ride?
(वल्ली ने बस की यात्रा करने की योजना कैसे बनाई?)
or
How did Valli plan her visit to the town ?
(वल्ली ने अपने शहर जाने की योजना कैसे बनाई? व्याख्या करें।).
Answer:
Valli carefully listened to the conversations between her neighbours and people who had travelled on the bus or who regularly used it. She asked some casual questions also. She came to know that the town was six miles away from her village. It took forty-five minutes to reach there. The fare was thirty paise for one way. Valli planned her journey to the town and back. It would be her first journey out of her village. She saved every paisa by resisting her desire to buy icecream, toys, balloons, etc. She had also killed her desire to visit the village fair and have a ride in the merry-go-round. When she had saved sixty paise, she was ready for her first bus journey. Then she planned how she would slip out of house. She knew that her mother slept daily after lunch. She decided to use these hours for her journey.

(वल्ली अपने पड़ोसियों तथा उन लोगों के वार्तालाप को बड़े ध्यान के साथ सुनती थी जो बस की यात्रा कर चुके थे या बस का नियमित रूप से प्रयोग करते थे। वह कुछ सामान्य प्रश्न भी पूछती थी। उसे पता चल गया था कि कस्बा उसके गाँव से छह मील की दूरी पर है। वहाँ पहुँचने में पैंतालिस मिनट लगते हैं। एक तरफ का किराया तीस पैसे था। वल्ली ने शहर जाने और वापस आने की योजना बनाई। गाँव से बाहर की यह उसकी पहली यात्रा थी। उसने आईसक्रीम खाने, खिलौने खरीदने, गुब्बारे खरीदने इत्यादि की इच्छा को दबाकर पैसे बचाए। उसने गाँव के मेले में जाने और झूला झूलने की इच्छा को भी दबा दिया। जब उसने साठ पैसे बचा लिए, तो वह अपनी पहली बस यात्रा के लिए तैयार थी। तब उसने योजना बनाई कि वह घर से बाहर कैसे निकलेगी। वह जानती थी कि उसकी माँ दोपहर का खाना खाने के बाद सोती है। उसने इन घंटों का प्रयोग अपनी यात्रा के लिए करने का निर्णय लिया।)

Question 3.
What did Valli notice after she boarded the bus? (बस में सवार होने के पश्चात् वल्ली ने क्या देखा?)
Answer:
Valli looked around in the bus. It had soft and comfortable seats. It had a beautiful clock above the wind screen. The overhead bars shone like silver. Then she tried to look outside. She found her view cut off by a curtain that covered the lower part of her window. So she stood on her seat to enjoy the outside scene. The bus was going along the bank of a canal. She saw palm trees, mountains and the blue sky. On the other side, there were green fields. Suddenly an elderly man warned Valli not to stand on the seat. He called her a child and said that she could fall and get hurt. But Valli did not care for him. She told him proudly that she was not a ‘child’. She had paid the full fare like the others. The conductor told the man that Valli was a grown up madam. Valli looked at the conductor angrily and said that she was not a madam.

(वल्ली ने बस में चारों ओर देखा। इसमें नरम और आरामदायक सीटें थीं। हवा रोकने वाले शीशे के ऊपर एक सुन्दर घड़ी लगी हुई थी। ऊपर लगी हुई सलाखें चाँदी की तरह चमक रही थीं। तब उसने बाहर देखने का प्रयास किया। उसने पाया कि उसकी खिड़की के निचले भाग पर लगा हुआ पर्दा उसके बाहर देखने में बाधा बना हुआ था। इसलिए वह अपनी सीट पर खड़ी होकर बाहर के दृश्यों का आनन्द लेने लगी। बस एक नहर के किनारे-किनारे जा रही थी। उसने खजूर के वृक्ष, पर्वत और नीला आसमान देखे। दूसरी ओर हरे वृक्ष थे। अचानक ही एक वृद्ध आदमी ने वल्ली को सीट पर खड़ा न होने की चेतावनी दी। उसने उसे बच्ची कहकर सम्बोधित किया और कहा कि वह गिर जाएगी और चोट खा लेगी। लेकिन वल्ली ने उसकी बात पर ध्यान नहीं दिया। उसने उसे गर्व से कहा कि वह ‘बच्ची’ नहीं है। उसने भी दूसरों की भाँति पूरा टिकट खरीदा है। परिचालक ने उस आदमी को बताया कि वल्ली एक समझदार मैडम है। वल्ली ने परिचालक की ओर क्रोधपूर्वक देखा और कहा कि वह मैडम नहीं है।)

Question 4.
Describe Valli’s return journey. (वल्ली की वापसी यात्रा का वर्णन करो।) .
Answer:
The bus resumed its return journey. There were the same wonderful sights. Valli enjoyed the scene again. But suddenly she saw a young cow lying dead, by the roadside. It had been struck by a fast moving vehicle. She asked the conductor if it was the same cow they saw earlier. The conductor nodded. Valli became sad. It had been a lovable, beautiful creature just a little ago. But now the cow was without its charm and its life. The bus moved on. The memory of the dead cow haunted Valli. She no longer wanted to see out of the window. She kept sitting on her seat until her village came. She got down and wished the conductor to see him again. The conductor smiled. He told Valli that whenever she felt like riding the bus she could come and join them.

(बस ने अपनी वापसी की यात्रा आरम्भ की। रास्ते में वही अद्भुत दृश्य थे। वल्ली ने पुनः दृश्यों का आनन्द लिया। लेकिन अचानक ही उसने एक छोटी गाय को सड़क के किनारे मृत पड़े हुए पाया। इसको किसी तेज गति वाले वाहन ने टक्कर मार दी थी। उसने परिचालक से पूछा कि क्या यह वही गाय है जो उन्होंने पहले देखी थी। परिचालक ने हाँ में सिर हिलाया। वल्ली उदास हो गई। थोड़ी देर पहले तो वह एक प्यारा, सुन्दर जीव था। लेकिन अब गाय अपने आकर्षण और जीवन के बिना थी। बस आगे बढ़ गई। मृत गाय की याद वल्ली को परेशान कर रही थी। अब वह खिड़की से बाहर नहीं देखना चाहती थी। जब तक उसका गाँव नहीं आया वह सीट पर ही बैठी रही। वह बस से नीचे उतरी और परिचालक से पुनः मिलने की कामना की। परिचालक मुस्कराया। उसने वल्ली को बताया कि जब भी उसका दिल बस की सवारी करने को करे तो वह उनके पास आ जाए।)

Question 5.
Why does Valli refuse to look out of the window on her way back?
(घर लौटते समय वल्ली खिड़की से बाहर देखने से क्यों मना कर देती है?)
Answer:
On her way to the town Valli laughed heartily to see a young cow running at high speed in the middle of the road just in front of their bus. But on her way back, she saw a young cow lying dead near the road. She asked the bus conductor if it was the same cow that was running in front of the bus. The bus conductor nodded. She was shocked and sad. So she refuses to look out of the window on her way back because what was so beautiful a little while ago now looked so horrible. The memory of the dead cow haunts her. It dampens her enthusiasm.

(शहर जाते समय वल्ली अपनी बस के आगे-आगे सड़क के बीच में तेज गति से भागती हुई एक युवा गाय को देखकर खूब जोर से हँसी। लेकिन घर लौटते समय उसने एक युवा गाय को सड़क किनारे मृत पड़े पाया। उसने बस कंडक्टर से पूछा कि क्या यह वही गाय है जो बस के आगे दौड़ रही थी। बस कंडक्टर ने हाँ में सिर हिलाया। उसे आघात लगा और वह उदास हो गई। अतः वह घर लौटते समय बस से बाहर देखने से भी मना कर देती है क्योंकि थोड़ी देर पहले जो चीज इतनी सुंदर लग रही थी अब वह बहुत दर्दनाक दिख रही थी। मृत गाय की याद उसे परेशान कर रही है। यह उसके उत्साह को ठंडा कर रही है।)

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
How old was Valli ?
(A) eight years
(B) ten years
(C) twelve years
(D) fourteen years
Answer:
(A) eight years

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Question 2.
Valli’s favourite pastime was :
(A) riding the bus
(B) visiting the town
(C) standing at her door
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(C) standing at her door

Question 3.
How far was the town from Valli’s village ?
(A) four miles
(B) six miles
(C) eight miles
(D) ten miles
Answer:
(B) six miles

Question 4.
Who did Valli live with ?
(A) her father
(B) her mother
(C) her aunt
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(B) her mother

Question 5.
What type of a man was the bus conductor ?
(A) jolly
(B) wise
(C) fun loving
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(D) all of the above

Question 6.
Valli had the strongest desire of :
(A) swimming
(B) riding on the bus
(C) playing
(D) dancing
Answer:
(B) riding on the bus

Question 7.
How much time the bus takes from her village to the town?
(A) forty-five minutes
(B) one hour
(C) an hour and half
(D) two hours
Answer:
(A) forty-five minutes

Question 8.
The conductor called Valli as :
(A) child
(B) madam
(C) baby
(D) auntie
Answer:
(B) madam

Question 9.
Who did Valli find in her home when she returned from the town?
(A) her father
(B) her teacher
(C) her aunt
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(C) her aunt

Question 10.
What did Valli buy from the town ?
(A) a set of bangles
(B) cold drinks
(C) a frock
(D) nothing
Answer:
(D) nothing

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Question 11.
What made Valli sad?
(A) the cow running in front of the bus
(B) the dead cow
(C) the sights in the town
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(B) the dead cow

Question 12.
Who is the author of the lesson ‘Madam Rides the Bus’?
(A) Gavin Maxwell
(B) Vallikkannan
(C) Anton Chekov
(D) Arup Kumar Datta
Answer:
(B) Vallikkannan

Madam Rides the Bus Important Passages for Comprehension

Read the following passages and answer the questions that follow :

PASSAGE 1

There was a girl named Valliammai who was called Valli for short. She was eight years old and very curious about things. Her favourite pastime was standing in the front doorway of her house, watching what was happening in the street outside. There were no playmates of her own age on her street, and this was about all she had to do.
But for Valli, standing at the front door was every bit as enjoyable as any of the elaborate games other children played. Watching the street gave her many new unusual experiences.
The most fascinating thing of all was the bus that travelled between her village and the nearest town. It passed through her street each hour, once going to the town and once coming back. The sight of the bus, filled each time with a new set of passengers, was a source of unending joy for Valli.

Word-meanings : Curious = eager (उस्तुक); pastime = hobby (शौका); elaborate = detailed (विस्तृत)

Questions :
(a) Name the chapter and its author.
(b) What was full name of Valli.
(c) What was Valli’s favourite pastime ?
(d) How many playmates of her age did Valli have ?
(e) Find words from the passage which mean the same as : (a) eager, (b) hobby.
Answers :
(a) Chapter : Madam Rides the Bus, Author : Vallikkannan.
(b) The full name of Valli was ‘Valliammai’.
(c) Valli’s favourite pastime was standing in the front doorway of her house, watching what was happening in the street outside.
(d) She had no playmates of her own age
(e) (a) curious, (b) pastime.

PASSAGE 2

Day after day she watched the bus, and gradually a tiny wish crept into her head and grew there: she wanted to ride on that bus, even if just once. This wish became stronger and stronger, until it was an overwhelming desire. Valli would stare wistfully at the people who got on or off the bus when it stopped at the street corner. Their faces would kindle in her longings, dreams and hopes. If one of her friends happened to ride the bus and tried to describe the sights of the town to her, Valli would be too jealous to listen and would shout, in English: ‘Proud ! proud” Neither she nor her friends really understood the meaning of the word, but they used it often as a slang expression of disapproval.

Word-meanings : Gradually = slowly (धीरे धीरे); overwhelming = strong (मजबूत); wistfully = with longing (इचासे); disapproval = refusal (असहमति).

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Questions :
(a) What was Valli’s ‘tiny wish’?
(b) What would Valli wistfully stare at?
(c) When were Valli’s longings, hopes and dreams kindled?
(d) When would Valli be jealous?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means “excite’.
Answers :
(a) Valli’s tiny wish was to travel by a bus.
(b) She would stare wistfully at the people who got on or off the bus.
(c) The sight of the bus passengers would kindle in her longings, dreams and hopes.
(d) She felt jealous when one of her friends described the sights of the town to her.
(e) “kindle.

PASSAGE 3

Over many days and months Valli listened carefully to conversations between her neighbours and people who regularly used the bus, and she also asked a few discreet questions here and there. This way she picked up various small details about the bus journey. The town was six miles from her village. The fare was thirty paise one way— “which is almost nothing at all,” she heard one well-dressed man say, but to Valli, who scarcely saw that much money from one month to the next, it seemed a fortune. The trip to the town took forty-five minutes. On reaching town, if she stayed in her seat and paid another thirty paise, she could return home on the same bus. This meant that she could take the one-o’clock afternoon bus, reach the town at one forty-five, and be back home by about two forty-five …

Word-meanings : Discreet = quiet (शांत); various = many (कई); scarcely = hardly (मुश्किल से )

Questions :

(a) What did Valli carefully listen to?
(b) What seemed ‘a fortune’ to Valli ?
(c) How much time did the bus take from Valli’s village to the city?
(d) How far was the town from the village?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘hardly.’
Answers :
(a) Valli listened carefully to conversations of her neighbours who used the bus regularly.
(b) “Thirty paise’ seemed ‘a fortune’ to Valli.
(c) It took forty-five minutes.
(d) It was six miles away.
(e) ‘scarcely.’

PASSAGE 4

The conductor was a jolly sort, fond of joking. “Oh, please don’t be angry with me, my fine madam,” he said. “Here, have a seat right up there in front. Everybody move aside please – make way for madam.”.
It was the slack time of day, and there were only six or seven passengers on the bus. They were all looking at Valli and laughing with the conductor. Valli was overcome with shyness. Avoiding everyone’s eyes, she walked quickly to an empty seat and sat down.

“May we start now, madam?” the conductor asked, smiling. Then he blew his whistle twice, and the bus moved forward with a roar.
It was a new bus, its outside painted a gleaming white with some green stripes along the sides. Inside, the overhead bars shone like silver. Directly in front of Valli, above the windshield, there was a beautiful clock. The seats were soft and luxurious.

Word-meanings : Slack time = when there is not much work ( जब अधिक काम न हो); luxurious = comfortable (आरामदाकाया))!

Questions :

(a) How does the author describe the conductor?
(b) By what name did the conductor call Valli?
(c) What does the author mean by ‘the slack time of day’ ?
(d) How were the seats of the bus?
(e) Find a word from the passage which is the opposite of ‘serious’.
Answers :
(a) The conductor was a jolly sort of man.
(b) He called Valli ‘madam’.
(c) The author means that there were not many passengers riding the bus at that time.
(d) The bus had soft and luxurious seats.
(e) “jolly’.

PASSAGE 5

Valli devoured everything with her eyes. But when she started to look outside, she found her view cut off by a canvas blind that covered the lower part of her window. So she stood up on the seat and peered over the blind.
The bus was now going along the bank of a canal. The road was very narrow. On one side there was the canal and, beyond it, palm trees, grassland, distant mountains, and the blue, blue sky. On the other side was a deep ditch and then acres and acres of green fields—green, green, green, as far as the eye could see. Oh, it was all so wonderful!

Word-meanings : Devoured = looked attentively (ध्यान से देखना); peered over = looked over (ऊपर देखना); ditch = pot hole (खड्डा) !

Questions :

(a) How was Valli’s view cut off?
(b) Why did Valli stand up on the seat?
(c) There were fields on one side of the road. What was there on the other side?
(d) Was the road wide?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘curtain’.
Answers :
(a) Vallli’s view was cut off by a canvas curtain.
(b) She stood up on the seat because a canvas blind cut off the view for her.
(c) There was a canal on the other side.
(d) No, the road was narrow.
(e) ‘blind.’

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

PASSAGE 6

An elderly woman came and sat beside her. “Are you all alone, dear?” she asked Valli as the bus started again.
Valli found the woman absolutely repulsive – such big holes she had in her ear lobes, and such ugly earrings in them! And she could smell the betel nut the woman was chewing and see the betel juice that was threatening to spill over her lips at any moment. Ugh! – who could be sociable with such a person?

“Yes, I’m travelling alone,” she answered curtly. “And I’ve got a ticket too.” “Yes, she’s on her way to town,” said the conductor. “With a thirty-paise ticket.”
“Oh, why don’t you mind your own business,” said Valli. But she laughed all the same, and the conductor laughed too.

Word-meanings : Absolutely = compulsive (पूरी तरह से); ugly = dirty (गंदी); betel = a chewing leaf (पान); spill over = fall (गिरना)

Questions :

(a) What did the elderly woman ask Valli?
(b) How were the woman’s ear lobes and earrings?
(c) What was the woman chewing?
(d) Did Valli like the elderly woman sitting beside her?
(e) Find a word in the passage which means “completely’.
Answers :
(a) She asked Valli if she was travelling all alone.
(b) Her ear lobes had big holes and her earrings were ugly.
(c) She was chewing a betel nut.
(d) ‘No, she found the woman repulsive.
(e) “absolutely.

PASSAGE 7

After she had enough money saved, her next problem was how to slip out of the house without her mother’s knowledge. But she managed this without too much difficulty. Every day after lunch her mother would nap from about one to four or so. Valli always used these hours for her “excursions’ as she stood looking from the doorway of her house or sometimes even ventured out into the village; today, these same hours could be used for her first excursion outside the village.

Word-meanings : Slip out = go to secretly (चुपके से जाना), excursion = a short journey (सैर), ventured ont = going somewhere (बहार निकलना)

Questions :

(a) What was her next problem?
(b) What time did she use for her excursions?
(c) What was Valli’s first excursion outside the village?
(d) Find the word from the passage which means ‘went cautiously’.
(e) Name the chapter and its author.
Answers :
(a) Her next problem was how to slip out of the house without her mother’s knowledge.
(b) When her mother would nap from about one to four or so.
(c) Going to the town by bus was her first excursion outside the village.
(d) Ventured
(e) Chapter : Madam Rides the Bus, Author : Vallikkannan.

PASSAGE 8

Sometimes the bus seemed on the point of gobbling up another vehicle that was coming towards them or a pedestrian crossing the road. But lo! somehow it passed on smoothly, leaving all obstacles safely behind.

Trees came running towards them but then stopped as the bus reached them and simply stood there helpless for a moment by the side of the road before rushing away in the other direction.
Suddenly Valli clapped her hands with glee. A young cow, tail high in the air, was running very fast, right in the middle of the road, right in front of the bus. The bus slowed to a crawl, and the driver sounded his horn loudly again and again. But the more he honked, the more frightened the animal became and the faster it galloped – always right in front of the bus.

Word-meanings : obstacles = hindrances (रुकावटें); honked = sounded (बजाया); galloped = ran (भागी) :

Questions :
(a) Name the chapter.
(b) What did the bus seem on the point of gobbling up ?
(c) Why did Valli clap her hands with glee?
(d) Why did the driver sound the horn again and again ?
(e) Find a word from the passage similar in meaning of ‘gobbling up.’
Answers :
(a) The name of the chapter is ‘Madam Rides the Bus’.
(b) The bus seemed on the point of gobbling up another vehicle that was coming up towards them.
(c) Valli clapped her hands with glee to see a young cow, tail high in the air, running fast in the middle of the road just in front of the bus.
(d) The driver sounded the horn again and again for the cow to get away.
(e) Swallow.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

Madam Rides the Bus Summary in English

Madam Rides the Bus Introduction in English

This is a story about the first bus journey of an eight year old girl, Valli. She was a curious girl. She had a strong desire to go to the nearest town by riding on a bus. She saves money for this purpose. When she has money for the ticket, she boards the bus. She enjoys her first bus journey. She does not get down the bus in the town. She remains sitting at her seat. She pays another thirty paise for the ticket and reaches home back.

Madam Rides the Bus Summary in English

This is a story about the first bus journey of an eight-year old girl. Her name was Valliammai. She was called Valli for short. She was a curious girl. She wanted to know many things. She did not have playmates of her own age. Her favourite pastime was standing in the front doorway of her house to see what was happening outside.

Watching the happenings in the street gave her many new unusual experiences. The most fascinating thing of all was the bus that passed through the street each hour. The bus travelled between her village and the nearest town: The sight of the bus was a source of unending joy for Valli. It was a great joy for her to watch new sets of passengers everytime the bus passed through the street. As she watched the bus day after day, she developed a wish to have a ride on that bus. Her wish became stronger and stronger until it was an overwhelming desire.

Valli carefully listened to the conversations between her neighbours and people who had travelled on the bus or who regularly used it. She asked some casual questions also. In this way, she learnt about small details about the journey. She came to know that the town was six miles away from her village. It took fortyfive minutes to reach there. The fare was thirty paise for one way. One could keep sitting in the bus and return to the village by paying another thirty paise. Valli planned her journey to the town and back. It would be her first journey out of her village. She saved every paisa by resisting her desire to buy ice cream, toys, balloons, etc. She had also killed her desire to visit the village fair and have a ride in the merry-go-round. When she had saved sixty paise, she was ready for her first bus journey.

Then she planned how she would slip out of house. She knew that her mother slept daily after lunch. She decided to use these hours for her journey. She decided to board the bus at one o’clock so that she could be back by two forty-five. So one fine spring day Valli boarded the bus. The conductor was surprised; but seeing her confidence, he allowed her to board the bus. He was a jolly fellow. He understood that Valli spoke with pride. He called her Madam and offered a seat. He asked others to make way for the ‘madam’. There were only six or seven passengers in the bus. They were all looking at Valli. They and the conductor were laughing. Valli overcame her shyness, quickly walked to an empty seat and sat down.

Valli looked around her in the bus. The bus had a fine painting of green stripes on the white. It had soft and comfortable seats. It had a beautiful clock above the wind screen. The overhead bars shone like silver. Then she tried to look outside. She found her view cut off by a curtain that covered the lower part of her window. So she stood on her seat to enjoy the outside scene. The bus was going along the bank of a canal. She saw palm trees, mountains and the blue sky. On the other side, there were green fields. Suddenly an elderly man warned Valli not to stand on the seat. He called her a child and said that she could fall and get hurt. But Valli did not care for him. She told him proudly that she was not a child’. She had paid the full fare like the others. The conductor told the man that Valli was a grown up madam. Valli looked at the conductor angrily and said that she was not a madam. The conductor told her that she should not stand on the seat. She could fall when the bus took sharp turns. But Valli ignored his remarks also.

On the way bus stopped and some new passengers got on. Afraid of losing her seat, Valli finally sat down. An elderly woman came and sat beside her. Valli looked at the woman. She found her repulsive. She had big and ugly earrings. She was chewing a betel. Valli could see that the betel juice was likely to spill over her lips. That woman asked Valli whether she was travelling all alone. Valli told her that she was alone and she had got a ticket too. Then the old woman asked her if it was proper for a child to travel alone. She also asked whether Valli knew exactly where she was going in town. Valli told the old woman that she need not bother about her. Then she turned her face towards the window.

The bus moved on across a bare landscape. Valli enjoyed the outside scene. Trees came running towards them. Sometimes, the bus seemed to strike the oncoming vehicle. But both passed safely. Suddenly Valli clapped her hands with joy. A cow was running in the middle of the road, in front of the bus. The bus slowed down. The driver sounded the horn again and again. But the cow became more frightened and continued running before the bus. Valli laughed and laughed until there were tears in her eyes. At last the cow moved off the road. The bus passed by the side of a railway crossing. Valli enjoyed the scene of trains. Then the bus entered the city area. There were huge crowds of people. Valli looked at different things with surprise. Then the bus reached the city bus stand and stopped. Everybody got off the bus except Valli. The conductor asked Valli to get down.

But she told him that she was going back on the same bus. He was surprised and asked her why she had come to the city. She replied that she just wanted to take a ride on the bus. He asked Valli if she would like to have look at the sights outside the bus. Valli said that she was afraid of that. He asked to have a cold drink. Valli said that she had not enough money for that. The conductor offered to pay for her drink. But Valli did not accept the offer.

The bus resumed its return journey. There were the same wonderful sights. Valli enjoyed the scene again. But suddenly she saw a young cow lying dead, by the roadside. It had been struck by a fast moving vehicle. She asked the conductor if it was the same cow they saw earlier. The conductor nodded. Valli became sad. It had been a lovable, beautiful creature just a little ago. But now the cow was without its charm and its life. The bus moved on. The memory of the dead cow haunted Valli. She no longer wanted to see out of the window. She kept sitting on her seat until her village came. She got down and wished the conductor to see him again. The conductor smiled. He told Valli that whenever she felt like riding the bus she could come and join them.

Valli reached home. She found her mother was awake. She was talking to her aunt who lived in the South Street. She was a chatterbox. She asked Valli where she had been. But Valli just smiled. Her mother and the aunt were discussing about the things outside the world. Her mother said that no one could know about everything. At this Valli remarked that there were many things happening without our knowledge. Her mother asked her what she meant. Valli’s aunt called her a chit of a girl She took interest in things which did not concern her. She behaved as if she were a grown up lady. Valli smiled to herself. She didn’t want them to understand her smile.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

A Letter to God Summary in Hindi

Madam Rides the Bus Introduction in Hindi

(यह एक आठ वर्षीय वल्ली नाम की लड़की की पहली बस यात्रा की कहानी है। वह एक जिज्ञासु लड़की थी। उसकी तीव्र इच्छा थी कि वह बस में सवार होकर निकटतम कस्बे की यात्रा करे। इस उद्देश्य के लिए वह पैसे एकत्र करती है। जब उसके पास टिकट के पैसे हो जाते हैं, तो वह बस में सवार हो जाती है। वह बस की अपनी पहली यात्रा का आनंद लेती है। वह कस्बे में बस से नीचे नहीं उतरती है। वह अपनी सीट पर बैठी रहती है। वह टिकट के लिए और तीस पैसे का भुगतान करती है तथा वापस घर पहुँच जाती है।)

Madam Rides the Bus Summary in Hindi

यह कहानी आठ साल की एक लड़की की पहली बस यात्रा की है। उसका नाम वलियामायी था। उसे संक्षेप में वल्ली कहा जाता था। वह एक जिज्ञासु लड़की थी। वह बहुत-सी चीज़ों के बारे में जानना चाहती थी। उसके अपनी उम्र के खेल के साथी नहीं थे। उसका पसंदीदा शौक था अपने घर के दरवाजे में खड़ा हो जाना और देखना कि बाहर क्या हो रहा है।

गली की घटनाओं को देखने से उसे बहुत-से असाधारण अनुभव हुए। इनमें से सबसे अधिक आकर्षक चीज़ थी वह बस जो गली में से हर घंटे बाद गुज़रती थी। वह बस उसके गाँव और नजदीक के शहर के बीच चलती थी। बस को देखना वल्ली के लिए असीमित प्रसन्नता का स्रोत था। जब भी बस गली में से गुजरती थी तो वल्ली के लिए हर बार नए प्रकार के यात्रियों को बस में देखना एक बड़ी खुशी की बात थी। बस को दिन-प्रतिदिन देखते रहने से उसके अन्दर एक इच्छा पैदा हो गई कि वह भी बस की सवारी करे। उसकी यह इच्छा अधिक मज़बूत होती गई और एक दिन यह बहुत तीव्र इच्छा बन गई।

वल्ली अपने पड़ोसियों और उन लोगों के बीच की बातचीत को ध्यान से सुनती थी जो बस में सफर कर चुके थे या जो नियमित रूप से इसका प्रयोग करते थे। उसने कुछ सामान्य से प्रश्न भी पूछे। इस प्रकार, उसने यात्रा के बारे में छोटी-छोटी बातें भी जान लीं। उसे पता चला कि शहर गाँव से छह मील दूर है। वहाँ तक पहुँचने में पैंतालिस मिनट लगते हैं। एक तरफ का किराया तीस पैसे है। कोई व्यक्ति चाहे तो तीस पैसे और देकर बस में बैठा रह सकता है और वापस गाँव में आ सकता है। वल्ली ने शहर जाने और फिर वहाँ से वापस आने की यात्रा की योजना बनाई। यह उसकी अपने गाँव से बाहर पहली यात्रा होगी। उसने आईसक्रीम, खिलौने, गुब्बारे आदि खरीदने की अपनी इच्छा को दबाकर प्रत्येक पैसा बचाया। उसने गाँव के मेले में जाने और वहाँ पर झूले का आनन्द उठाने की अपनी इच्छा को भी दबाया। जब उसके पास साठ पैसे इकट्ठे हो गए तो वह अपनी पहली बस की यात्रा करने के लिए तैयार थी।।

तब उसने योजना बनाई कि वह घर से बाहर कैसे निकलेगी। वह जानती थी कि उसकी माता रोज़ दोपहर के खाने के बाद सोती है। उसने उन घंटों को अपनी यात्रा के लिए प्रयोग करने की बात सोची। उसने फैसला किया कि वह बस में एक बजे सवार होगी ताकि वह दो बजकर पैंतालिस मिनट तक वापस लौट आए। इस प्रकार, बसंत के एक सुंदर दिन को वल्ली बस में सवार हुई। परिचालक हैरान हो गया; मगर उसके विश्वास को देखकर, उसने उसे बस में सफर करने दिया। वह एक हँसमुख व्यक्ति था। वह समझता था कि वल्ली गर्व से बोल रही है। उसने वल्ली को ‘मैडम’ कहकर पुकारा और उसे एक सीट दी। उसने दूसरों को भी ‘मैडम’ के लिए रास्ता बनाने के लिए कहा। बस में केवल छह या सात यात्री ही थे। वे सभी वल्ली को देख रहे थे। वे और परिचालक हँस · रहे थे। वल्ली ने अपने शर्मीलेपन पर काबू पाया, जल्दी से एक खाली सीट पर गई और बैठ गई।

वल्ली ने बस में अपने चारों ओर देखा। बस में सफेद रंग पर सुंदर हरी धारियों का पेंट किया हुआ था। इसकी सीटें नरम और आरामदायक थीं। हवा रोकने वाले शीशे के ऊपर एक सुंदर दीवार घड़ी लगी हुई थी। ऊपर का डंडा चाँदी की तरह चमक रहा था। तब उसने बाहर झाँकने का प्रयत्न किया। उसने देखा कि बाहर का दृश्य एक पर्दे से रुका हुआ है जिसने खिड़की के नीचे के भाग को ढक रखा था। इसलिए बाहर के नज़ारे को देखने के लिए वह अपनी सीट पर खड़ी हो गई। बस एक नहर के किनारे के साथ-साथ जा रही थी। उसने खजूर के वृक्षों, पहाड़ों और नीले आसमान को देखा। दूसरी तरफ, हरे खेत थे। अचानक एक वृद्ध व्यक्ति ने उसे चेतावनी दी कि वह सीट पर खड़ी न हो। उसने उसे बच्ची कहकर पुकारा और कहा कि वह गिर सकती है और उसे चोट लग सकती है। मगर वल्ली ने उसकी परवाह नहीं की। उसने उसे गर्व से बताया कि वह ‘बच्ची’ नहीं है। उसने अन्य लोगों की तरह पूरा किराया दिया है। परिचालक ने उस व्यक्ति को बताया कि वल्ली एक विकसित मैडम है। वल्ली ने परिचालक को गुस्से से देखा और कहा कि वह मैडम नहीं है। परिचालक ने कहा कि उसे सीट पर खड़ी नहीं होना चाहिए। जब बस एकदम मोड़ लेगी तो वह गिर सकती है। मगर वल्ली ने उसकी बातों की भी उपेक्षा कर दी।

रास्ते में बस रुकी और कुछ अन्य यात्री सवार हुए। अपनी सीट को खो देने के भय से वल्ली आखिर बैठ गई। एक बुजुर्ग महिला आई और वल्ली के पास बैठ गई। वल्ली ने महिला को देखा। उसे वह महिला घृणित लगी। उसने बड़ी और गंदी बालियाँ पहनी हुई थीं। वह पान चबा रही थी। वल्ली ने देखा कि पान की पीक उसके होठों से कभी भी गिर सकती है। उस महिला ने वल्ली से पूछा कि क्या वह अकेली सफर कर रही है। वल्ली ने उसे बताया कि वह अकेली है और उसके पास टिकट भी है। तब उस बूढ़ी महिला ने पूछा कि क्या एक बच्ची के लिए अकेले सफर करना उचित है। उसने यह भी पूछा कि वल्ली जानती है कि शहर में वह निश्चित रूप से कहाँ जा रही है। वल्ली ने उस बूढ़ी महिला से कहा कि वह उसके बारे में चिंता न करे। तब उसने अपना चेहरा खिड़की की ओर कर लिया।

बस एक खाली भू-दृश्य के बीच से गुजरी। वल्ली ने बाहर के दृश्य का आनंद उठाया। वृक्ष उनकी तरह भागते हुए प्रतीत होते थे। कई बार, ऐसा लगता था कि बस सामने से आते हुए किसी वाहन से टकराने वाली है। मगर वे दोनों सुरक्षित गुजर जाते थे। अचानक वल्ली ने खुशी से तालियाँ बजाईं। एक गाय बस के आगे-आगे सड़क के बीचों-बीच भाग रही थी। बस धीमी हो गई। ड्राइवर ने बार-बार हॉर्न बजाया। मगर गाय और भी भयभीत हो गई और बस के आगे भागती रही। वल्ली तब तक हँसती रही जब तक उसकी आँखों में आँसू नहीं आ गए। आखिर गाय सड़क से हट गई। बस एक रेलवे फाटक के पास से गुजरी। वल्ली ने गाड़ियों के दृश्य का आनंद लिया। तब बस ने शहर के क्षेत्र में प्रवेश किया। वहाँ पर लोगों की बहुत भीड़ थी। वल्ली ने विभिन्न वस्तुओं को हैरानी से देखा। तब बस शहर के बस स्टैंड पर पहुँची और रुक गई। वल्ली के अलावा हर व्यक्ति बस से उतर गया। परिचालक ने वल्ली से उतर जाने को कहा।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

मगर उसने उसे बताया कि वह उसी बस से वापस जा रही है। वह हैरान हो गया और पूछा कि वह शहर में क्यों आई है। उसने कहा कि वह केवल बस की सवारी करना चाहती थी। उसने वल्ली से पूछा कि क्या वह बस से बाहर के दृश्यों को देखना चाहेगी। वल्ली ने कहा कि उसे इन सबसे डर लगता है। उसने उससे कहा कि वह शीतल पेय ले ले। वल्ली ने कहा कि उसके पास इसके लिए पैसे नहीं हैं। परिचालक ने उसके पेय के लिए पैसे देने की पेशकश की। मगर वल्ली ने उसकी पेशकश को स्वीकार नहीं किया।

बस ने वापसी की यात्रा आरंभ की। वे अद्भुत दृश्य फिर से आए। वल्ली ने दृश्य का फिर से आनंद उठाया। मगर अचानक उसने सड़क के किनारे पड़ी एक मरी हुई गाय देखी। वह किसी तेज़ चलते हुए. वाहन से टकरा गई थी। उसने परिचालक से पूछा कि क्या वह वही गाय है जिसे उन्होंने पहले देखा था। परिचालक ने हाँ में अपना सिर हिलाया। वल्ली उदास हो गई। केवल कुछ समय पहले से यह एक प्यारी और सुंदर प्राणी थी। मगर अब यह गाय बिना आकर्षण और बिना जीवन के थी। बस चलती रही। मरी हुई गाय की याद वल्ली को बार-बार आती रही। अब खिड़की से बाहर देखने की उसकी इच्छा नहीं थी। वह तब तक अपनी सीट पर बैठी रही जब तक कि उसका गाँव नहीं आ गया। वह उतर गई और उसने परिचालक को कहा कि वे फिर मिलेंगे। परिचालक मुस्कराया। उसने वल्ली को बताया कि जब भी उसका बस में सफर करने का मन करे तो वह आ सकती है।

वल्ली घर पहुँची। उसने देखा कि उसकी माता जाग गई है। वह उसकी चाची से बात कर रही है जो दक्षिण गली में रहती थी। वह बहुत बातूनी थी। उसने वल्ली से पूछा कि वह कहाँ थी। मगर वल्ली केवल मुस्करा दी। उसकी माता और चाची बाहर के संसार की वस्तुओं के बारे में बात कर रही थीं। उसकी माँ ने कहा कि कोई भी हर चीज़ के बारे में नहीं जान सकता। इस पर वल्ली ने कहा कि ऐसी बहुत-सी बातें हो रही हैं जिनका हमें ज्ञान नहीं है। उसकी माँ ने पूछा कि उसका अभिप्राय क्या है। वल्ली की चाची ने कहा कि वह तो एक छोटी-सी लड़की है। वह ऐसी बातों में रुचि लेती है जिनसे उसका कोई वास्ता नहीं है। वह ऐसे व्यवहार करती है जैसे कि वह एक बड़ी स्त्री हो। वल्ली अपने आप में मुस्कराई। वह नहीं चाहती थी कि वे उसकी मुस्कराहट का अर्थ समझें।

Madam Rides the Bus Translation in Hindi

[Part I]

[PAGE 116] : यह उसके जीवन और मृत्यु का रहस्य है। वह इस बात के अंतर को समझती है कि हम मौत के बारे में क्या जानते हैं और क्या समझते हैं।

[PAGE 117] : वलियामायी नाम की एक लड़की थी जिसे संक्षेप में वल्ली कहते थे। वह आठ साल की थी और चीज़ों के बारे में बहुत उत्सुक रहती थी। उसका प्रिय शौक अपने घर के सामने वाले दरवाजे में खड़े होकर यह देखना था कि बाहर गली में क्या हो रहा है। उसकी गली में उसके साथ खेलने के लिए उसकी उम्र के साथी नहीं थे और वह तो बस यही करती थी।
लेकिन वल्ली के लिए, अपने सामने वाले दरवाजे पर खड़ा होना उतना ही आनंददायक था जितना कि अन्य लड़कों के लिए कोई विस्तृत खेल खेलना । गली में देखना उसे बहुत-से नए असाधारण अनुभवों का ज्ञान कराता था।

[PAGE 118] : उसके लिए सबसे अधिक आकर्षक चीज़ वह बस थी जोकि उसके गाँव और निकटतम कस्बे के बीच चलती थी। यह हर घंटे बाद उसकी गली में से गुजरती थी, एक बाहर कस्बे में जाते समय और एक बार वहाँ से वापस आते समय । हर बार नए यात्रियों से भरी उस बस का दृश्य, वल्ली के लिए निरंतर आनंद का स्रोत था।

दिन-प्रतिदिन वह बस देखती थी, और धीरे-धीरे एक छोटी-सी इच्छा उसके दिमाग में रेंगने लगी और वहाँ पैदा हो गई। वह बस पर सवार होना चाहती थी चाहे सिर्फ एक बार ही। यह इच्छा मज़बूत-से-मज़बूत होती गई, जब तक कि वह एक तीव्र इच्छा नहीं बन गई। वल्ली बहुत ही गहन इच्छा के साथ एकटक भाव से लोगों को बस में चढ़ते और उतरते हुए देखती थी तब वह गली के कोने पर रुकती थी। उनके चेहरे उसकी इच्छाओं, सपनों और आशाओं को प्रकाशित करते थे। यदि उसकी कोई सहेली बस में सवार हो जाती है और वह उसे शहर के दृश्यों के बारे में बताती, तो वल्ली को उससे इतनी ईर्ष्या होती थी कि वह उसकी बात नहीं सुनती थी और अंग्रेजी में चिल्ला उठती थी ‘घमंडी! घमंडी!’ न तो वह स्वयं और न ही उसकी सहेलियाँ इस शब्द का अर्थ समझती थीं लेकिन वे असहमति का भाव प्रकट करने के लिए इस शब्द का प्रयोग करती थीं।

बहुत-से दिनों और महीनों तक वल्ली सावधानीपूर्वक अपने उन पड़ोसियों और लोगों के बीच की बातचीत को सुनती थी जो नियमित रूप से बस में सफर करते थे और कभी-कभार वह उनसे कुछ शांत से सवाल भी पूछ लिया करती थी। इस तरह से बस की यात्रा के बारे में उसने कई छोटी-छोटी जानकारियाँ हासिल कर ली थी। कस्बा उसके गाँव से छह मील की दूरी पर था। एक तरफ का किराया तीस पैसे था–“जोकि लगभग न के बराबर था” उसने एक अच्छी पोशाक पहने हुए व्यक्ति को कहते सुना, लेकिन वल्ली ने इतना अधिक धन कभी नहीं देखा था। एक महीने से दूसरे महीने, उसके लिए तो यह बड़ी धन-सम्पत्ति था। कस्बे तक की यात्रा में पैंतालिस मिनट लगते थे। शहर पहुँचकर यदि वह अपनी सीट पर बैठी रहती और तीस पैसे का भुगतान कर देती, तो वह उसी बस पर गाँव लौट सकती थी। इसका अर्थ था कि वह एक दोपहर बाद एक बजे की बस ले सकती थी और एक बजकर पैंतालिस मिनट पर कस्बे में पहुँच सकती थी और लगभग दो बजकर पैंतालिस मिनट तक घर लौट सकती थी…।।
जैसे-जैसे वह गणना और पुनर्गणना, योजना और पुनर्योजना बनाती गई उसके मन में विचार चलते रहे।

[PART-II]

[PAGE 119] : बसंत ऋतु में एक सुहावने दिन को जब दोपहर बाद वाली बस में गाँव से जाने ही वाली थी और मुख्य मार्ग पर मोड़ मुड़ने ही वाली थी, एक छोटी-सी बच्ची के चिल्लाने की आवाज़ सुनाई दी, ‘बस को रोको! बस को रोको!’ और आदेशात्मक मुद्रा में एक छोटा-सा हाथ उठा।
बस की गति धीमी हो गई और परिचालक ने दरवाजे से सिर बाहर निकालकर कहा, ‘जल्दी करो! जो कोई भी आ रहा है उसे जल्दी आने को कहो।’
‘यह मैं हूँ,’ वल्ली ने चिल्लाकर कहा, ‘मैं ही अकेली हूँ, जिसे बस में चढ़ना है।’
अब तक बस रुक चुकी थी और परिचालक ने कहा, ‘ओह, सचमुच! तुम ऐसा नहीं कहते!’
‘हाँ, मुझे तो सिर्फ कस्बे में जाना है,’ वल्ली ने अभी भी बस से बाहर खड़े हुए कहा, ‘और ये मेरे पैसे हैं’ उसने उसे कुछ सिक्के दिखाए।
‘ठीक है, ठीक है, लेकिन तुम पहले बस पर तो चढ़ जाओ’, परिचालक ने कहा और उसने उसे ऊपर चढ़ाने में मदद करने के लिए अपना हाथ आगे बढ़ाया।
‘चिन्ता मत करो, मैं स्वयं ही बस में चढ़ जाऊँगी। आपको मेरी मदद करने की आवश्यकता नहीं है,’ उसने कहा। __ परिचालक एक हँसमुख स्वभाव का मजाक का शौकीन व्यक्ति था, “ओह, मेरी सुन्दर मैडम कृपया मुझसे नाराज मत होइए’ उसने कहा, ‘वहाँ सामने एक सीट ले लीजिए। कृपया सभी रास्ते से हट जाइए। मैडम के लिए रास्ता बनाइए।”

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

यह दिन का मंदी वाला समय था और बस में केवल छह या सात सवारियाँ थीं। वे सभी वल्ली की ओर देख रही थी और परिचालक के साथ हँस रही थीं। वल्ली को शर्म आ रही थी। सभी की नज़रों से बचते हुए, वह तेजी से एक खाली सीट तक गई और बैठ गई।

[PAGE 120] : “मैडम, क्या अब हम चल सकते हैं?” परिचालक ने मुस्कराते हुए पूछा। तब उसने दो बार अपनी सीटी बजाई और एक शोर के साथ बस आगे चल दी।
यह एक नई बस थी, इसके बाहर चमकदार सफेद रंग हुआ था जिस पर हरे रंग की कुछ पट्टियाँ बनी थीं। अंदर ऊपर लगी लोहे की सलाखें चाँदी की तरह चमक रही थीं। वल्ली के बिल्कुल सामने हवा रोकने वाले शीशे के ऊपर वहाँ एक सुन्दर घड़ी लगी थी। सीटें नर्म और आरामदायक थीं।
वल्ली ने अपनी नज़रों से सब कुछ खोजा। लेकिन जब उसने बाहर देखना शुरु किया, उसने पाया कि उसकी नज़र को मोटे कपड़े से बने एक पर्दे से रुकावट पैदा हो रही थी जो उसकी खिड़की के निचले भाग को ढके हुए था। इसलिए वह उठकर सीट पर खड़ी हो गई और पर्दे के ऊपर से झाँकने लगी।
अब बस एक नहर के किनारे के साथ-साथ जा रही थी। सड़क बहुत तंग थी। उसके एक ओर तो नहर थी तथा इसके पार खजूर के पेड़, घास के मैदान, दूरी पर पर्वत व नीला-नीला आसमान था। दूसरी ओर एक गहरी खाई थी और फिर कई एकड़ में फैले हरे खेत, चारों ओर जहाँ तक नज़र जाती थी हरियाली-ही-हरियाली थी।।
‘ओह, यह सब कुछ कितना अद्भुत था।
अचानक ही वह एक आवाज़ सुनकर चौंक पड़ी, “सुनो, बच्चे,” आवाज़ ने कहा, “तुम्हें इस तरह से खड़े नहीं होना चाहिए, नीचे बैठ जाओ।”।

[PAGES 121-122] : नीचे बैठते हुए, उसने यह देखने का प्रयास किया कि कौन बोला था। वह एक बूढ़ा आदमी था जो सचमुच में उसके प्रति परवाह कर रहा था, लेकिन वह उसके ध्यान की वजह से नाराज़ हो रही थी।
“यहाँ ऐसा कोई नहीं है, जो बच्चा है,” उसने घमंडपूर्वक कहा, “मैंने भी अन्य सभी की तरह तीस पैसे का भुगतान किया है।”
परिचालक बीच में बोल पड़ा, “अरे, श्रीमान जी, लेकिन यह तो एक बहुत ही व्यस्क मैडम है। आपके विचार में क्या मात्र एक लड़की अपना किराया खुद दे सकती है और बिल्कुल अकेली शहर जा सकती है?”
वल्ली ने क्रोधित नज़रों से परिचालक की ओर देखा और कहा, ‘मैं मैडम नहीं हूँ। कृपया यह बात याद रखना कि आपने अभी तक मुझे मेरा टिकट नहीं दिया है।”
“मैं याद रखूगा,” परिचालक ने उसकी आवाज़ की नकल उतारते हुए कहा। हर कोई हँसने लगा और धीरे-धीरे वल्ली भी हँसी में शामिल हो गई।
परिचालक ने एक टिकट पर नम्बर छेदे और उसे वल्ली को पकड़ा दिया, “अब आराम से बैठ जाओ। जब तुमने सीट के पैसे दे रखे हैं तो तुम खड़ी क्यों हो?” .
“क्योंकि मैं खड़ा होना चाहती हूँ,” उसने उत्तर दिया, फिर से खड़ी होते हुए।
“लेकिन यदि तुम सीट के ऊपर खड़ी होती हो तो तुम गिर सकती हो और तुम्हें चोट लग सकती है। जब बस कोई तेज मोड़ काटेगी। बच्ची यही कारण है कि हम चाहते हैं कि तुम बैठ जाओ।” .
“मैं एक बच्ची नहीं हूँ, मैं आपको बता देती हूँ”, उसने चिढ़ते हुए कहा, “मैं आठ साल की हूँ।” ‘निःसंदेह, निःसंदेह। मैं भी कितना मूर्ख हूँ! आठ साल! हे भगवान!’
बस रुक गई, कुछ नए यात्री अंदर आए और थोड़ी देर के लिए परिचालक व्यस्त हो गया। अपनी सीट के खो जाने के भय से वल्ली अंततः नीचे बैठ गई।
एक वृद्ध महिला उसके पास आकर बैठ गई। “प्रिय, क्या तुम बिल्कुल अकेली हो?” जैसे ही बस पुनः चली उसने वल्ली से पूछा।
वल्ली को वह औरत पूर्णतया घृणाजनक लगी। उसके कानों के तलवों में कितने बड़े-बड़े सुराख थे और उनमें कितनी भद्दी बालियाँ थीं तथा वह उस सुपारी की गंध सूंघ सकती थी जिसे वह महिला चबा रही थी और पान के उस रस को देख सकती थी जो किसी भी पल उसके होठों से गिरने का भय पैदा कर रहा था। ओह! इस तरह के व्यक्ति के साथ कौन मिलनसार हो सकता है?

[PAGE 122] : “हाँ, मैं बिल्कुल अकेली यात्रा कर रही हूँ” उसने तीखे स्वर में उत्तर दिया। “और मैंने टिकट भी लिया है।” “हाँ, वह शहर जा रही है’ परिचालक ने कहा, तीस पैसे का एक टिकट लेकर”। “ओह, आप अपने काम पर ध्यान क्यों नहीं देते हो?” वल्ली ने कहा। लेकिन वह फिर भी हँस पड़ी और परिचालक भी हँसने
लगा।
लेकिन बूढ़ी औरत ने अपनी बकबक जारी रखी। “क्या इतने छोटे व्यक्ति के लिए अकेले यात्रा करना उचित है? क्या तुम्हें सही-सही पता है कि तुम शहर में कहाँ जा रही हो? कौन-सी गली है? क्या मकान नम्बर है?”
“आपको मेरे बारे में चिंता करने की आवश्यकता नहीं है। मैं अपना ख्याल खुद रख सकती हूँ।” वल्ली ने खिड़की की ओर अपना चेहरा घुमाते हुए कहा और बाहर देखने लगी।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

[PART-III]

उसकी पहली यात्रा इसके लिए उसको कितना ध्यानपूर्वक, परिश्रम के साथ और सोच-समझकर योजनाएँ बनानी पड़ी थीं! जो भी छोटे-छोटे सिक्के उसके हाथ लग जाते थे कितनी किफायत के साथ उन्हें बचाकर के रखा था और कैसे अपने-आपको पुदीने की गोलियाँ, खिलौने, गुब्बारे और इस तरह की अन्य चीजें खरीदने से रोककर रखा था और आखिरकार उसने 60 पैसे बचा लिए थे। यह सब कुछ उसके लिए कितना कठिन था, खासतौर पर गाँव के मेले वाले दिन लेकिन उसने दृढ़ निश्चय के साथ झूलों पर सवार होने की अपनी इच्छा को दबा दिया था, जबकि उसके पास पैसे भी थे।

उसने पर्याप्त धन बचा लिया था, उसके बाद उसकी अगली समस्या थी अपनी माँ को बिना बताए कैसे घर से बाहर निकले। लेकिन बिना किसी अधिक कठिनाई के उसने इसकी व्यवस्था कर ली। दोपहर का भोजन करने के पश्चात् उसकी माँ एक बजे से लेकर चार बजे तक हल्की नींद लिया करती थी। वल्ली इन घंटों का प्रयोग हमेशा अपने ‘सैर-सपाटे’ के लिए किया करती थी। जब वह अपने घर के दरवाजे पर खड़ी होकर बाहर देखती थी या फिर कई बार गाँव में भी जाने का साहस कर लेती थी। आज वह इन घंटों का प्रयोग गाँव से बाहर उसके पहले भ्रमण के लिए करेगी।

[PAGE 123] : कभी बस एक पेड़ रहित भूमि क्षेत्र, कभी किसी छोटे-से गाँव से भागती हुई तथा रास्ते के किनारे बनी किसी दुकान के पास से निकलती हुई आगे बढ़ रही थी। कई बार ऐसा प्रतीत होता था कि बस अपनी ओर आते हुए किसी दूसरे वाहन अथवा सड़क पार कर रहे किसी पद यात्री को निगल जाएगी। लेकिन यह तो सभी बाधाओं को सुरक्षित भय से पीछे छोड़ते हुए आराम से निकल जाती थी। वृक्ष उनकी ओर भागते हुए प्रतीत होते थे लेकिन जब बस उनके पास पहुँचती थी तो वे वहीं रुक जाते थे और सड़क के एक ओर एक पल के लिए असहाय हुए खड़े रहते और फिर दूसरी दिशा में भागने लगते।

अचानक ही वल्ली ने (खुशी से) अपने दोनों हाथों से ताली बजा दी। एक छोटी-सी गाय हवा में अपनी पूँछ को उठाकर बहुत तेजी से भाग रही थी, बिल्कुल सड़क के बीच में, ठीक बस के सामने। बस की गति धीमी हो गई और चालक बार-बार हॉर्न बजा रहा था। लेकिन वह जितना ज्यादा हॉर्न बजाता पशु उतना अधिक भयभीत हो जाता तथा और तेजी से भागता हमेशा ठीक बस के आगे।

[PAGE 124] : यह बात वल्ली को बहुत अधिक मनोरंजक लगी। वह तब तक हँसती रही जब तक कि उसकी आँखों से आँसू नहीं आ गए।
‘अरे युवती, क्या तुम बहुत ज्यादा नहीं हँस ली हो?’ परिचालक ने आवाज लगाई, ‘बेहतर होगा, कुछ हँसी कल के लिए बचाकर रख लो।’
अंततः गाय सड़क से हट गई और शीघ्र ही बस एक रेलवे क्रॉसिंग के पास आ गई। दूर से रेलगाड़ी एक छोटे-से धब्बे के समान दिखाई दे रही थी, जैसे-जैसे वह निकट आ रही थी, बड़ी और बड़ी होती जा रही थी। तब वह बहुत अधिक शोर और खट-खट के साथ क्रॉसिंग गेट को पार कर गई, बस को हिलाते हुए। तब बस चल दी और उसने स्टेशन को पार किया। वहाँ से उसने एक अच्छी तरह से सजी हुई दुकानों वाले बाजार को पार किया और मुड़ने के बाद एक अधिक चौड़े रास्ते पर आ गई। इतनी बड़ी, चमकदार दुकानें। वस्त्रों तथा बेचने की अन्य चीज़ों का कितना चमकदार प्रदर्शन हो रहा था। इतनी ज्यादा भीड़!
हैरानी के कारण मूक बनी वल्ली हर चीज़ को मुँह खोले देखती रही। ‘हे युवती,’ परिचालक ने कहा, ‘क्या तुम नीचे उतरने के लिए तैयार नहीं हो? तुम्हारे तीस पैसे तुम्हें यहीं तक ला सकते थे।’
‘नहीं, वल्ली ने कहा, ‘मैं इसी बस पर वापस जा रही हूँ।’ उसने अपनी जेब से और तीस पैसे निकाले तथा सिक्के परिचालक को सौंप दिए।
‘क्यों, क्या कुछ बात हो गई है?’ ‘नहीं, कोई बात नहीं है। मैं तो सिर्फ बस की सवारी करना चाहती थी और वह मैंने कर ली।’ ‘क्या तुम कुछ दृश्यों को नहीं देखना चाहोगी, अब तब तुम यहाँ आ ही गई हो।’ ‘बिल्कुल अकेली? अरे, मुझे बहुत अधिक डर लगेगा।’
लड़की के बोलने के ढंग से अत्यधिक प्रसन्न होकर परिचालक ने कहा, ‘लेकिन तुम्हें बस में आते समय तो डर नहीं लगा।
‘उसमें डर वाली कोई बात नहीं थी, उसने उत्तर दिया। ‘ठीक है, तो फिर तुम वहाँ उस दुकान पर जाकर कुछ पीना क्यों नहीं चाहोगी? उसमें तो डरने की भी कोई बात नहीं है।’ ‘अरे नहीं, मैं ऐसा नहीं कर सकती हूँ।’ ‘तो ठीक है, मुझे तुम्हारे लिए एक शीतल पेय लाने दो।’ .

[PAGES 125-126] : ‘नहीं, मेरे पास पर्याप्त पैसे नहीं हैं। बस मुझे तो मेरा टिकट दे दो, यही काफी है।’ यह मेरी तरफ से दावत रहेगी और इसका तुम्हें कोई खर्च नहीं करना पड़ेगा। ‘नहीं, नहीं’ उसने दृढ़तापूर्वक कहा, ‘कृपया नहीं।’
परिचालक ने अपने कंधे सिकोड़ लिए तथा वे प्रतीक्षा करते रहे जब तक कि बस की वापसी की यात्रा का समय नहीं हो गया। दोबारा बस में फिर से अधिक यात्री नहीं थे।

[PART-IV]

‘क्या तुम्हारी माँ तुम्हें ढूंढ नहीं रही होगी?’ परिचालक ने पूछा जब उसने उसे टिकट दिया। ‘नहीं, कोई भी मेरी तलाश नहीं कर रहा होगा,’ उसने कहा। बस चल दी और फिर से वहाँ वहीं अद्भुत दृश्य थे।
वल्ली का मन बिल्कुल भी नहीं ऊबा और वह प्रत्येक चीज़ का उसी उत्साह से स्वागत कर रही थी जैसा पहली बार देखने पर किया था। लेकिन अचानक ही उसने एक छोटी गाय को सड़क किनारे मृत पड़े हुए पाया, ठीक उसी स्थान पर जहाँ किसी तेज रफ्तार वाले वाहन ने उसे टक्कर मारी थी।
‘क्या यह वहीं गाय नहीं है जो शहर आते समय हमारी बस के आगे भाग रही थी?’ उसने परिचालक से पूछा।
परिचालक ने हाँ में सिर हिलाया और उस पर उदासी छा गई। कुछ ही समय पहले जो एक प्यारा, सुन्दर जीव था अब अचानक अपनी सुन्दरता और जीवन खो चुका था और इतना भयानक और डरावना लग रहा था। जब वह वहाँ पड़ा हुआ था, टाँगें फैली हुईं, बेजान आँखों में एक स्थायी टकटकी भरे हुए और सब जगह खून के साथ।
बस आगे चल दी। मृत गाय की याद उसे परेशान कर रही थी, उसके उत्साह को ठंडा कर रही थी। अब वह खिड़की से बाहर नहीं देखना चाहती थी।
वह अपनी सीट पर तब तक चिपकी हुई बैठी रही जब तक कि तीन चालीस पर बस उसके गाँव नहीं पहुंच गई। वह उठी और उसने एक अंगड़ाई ली। तब वह परिचालक की ओर मुड़ी और कहा, ‘अच्छा श्रीमान जी, मैं आपसे फिर मिलने की आशा रखूगी।’

[PAGE 126] : ‘ठीक है, मैडम,’ उसने उसे मुस्कराते हुए उत्तर दिया, ‘जब कभी भी बस की सवारी करने को तुम्हारा मन करे, तो हमारे साथ आ जाना और अपना किराया लाना मत भूलना।’
वह हँसी और उसने बस से छलाँग लगा दी। तब वह सीधी घर की ओर भाग गई।
जब वह घर में घुसी तो उसने अपनी माँ को जागा हुआ पाया और दक्षिणी गली में रहने वाली वल्ली की एक मौसी से बातें करते हुए पाया। वह मौसी वास्तव में एक बातूनी थी, यदि एक बार बोलना शुरु कर देती थी तो कभी अपना मुँह बंद नहीं करती थी।
‘और तुम कहाँ थी?’ उसकी मौसी ने पूछा जब वल्ली अंदर आई। वह बहुत बेरुखी से बोली, उसे उत्तर की आशा नहीं थी। इसलिए वल्ली सिर्फ मुस्कराई और उसकी माँ तथा मौसी अपने वार्तालाप को जारी रखती रही।
‘हाँ, तुम ठीक हो,’ उसकी माँ ने कहा, ‘कितनी सारी चीजें हमारे में और हमारे से बाहर की दुनिया में होती हैं। हम संभवतः हर चीज़ के बारे में कैसे जान सकते हैं और यदि हमें किसी बात के बारे में पता भी चल जाता है तो हम उसे पूर्णतया समझ नहीं पाते हैं, क्या समझ पाते हैं?’
‘ओह, हाँ!’ वल्ली ने सांस लेते हुए कहा।
‘ओह, वल्ली ने कहा, ‘मैं तो केवल उस बात से सहमति व्यक्त कर रही थी जो आप कह रही थी हमारी जानकारी के बिना घटित होने वाली बातों के बारे में।
‘एक छोटी-सी लड़की है वह,’ उसकी मौसी ने कहा।
‘और देखो वह हमारी बातचीत में बिना किसी मतलब के अपनी टाँग अड़ा रही है जैसेकि वह एक समझदार औरत हो।’
वल्ली स्वयं पर मुस्कराई। वह नहीं चाहती थी कि वे उसकी मुस्कराहट का अर्थ समझें। लेकिन फिर इसकी कोई ज्यादा सम्भावना भी नहीं थी, क्या थी?

Madam Rides the Bus Word-Meanings in Hindi

[PART-I]

[PAGE 116] : Induction = entry (प्रवेश); mystery = secret (रहस्य); gap = difference (अंतर)।
[PAGE 117] : Curious = eager (उत्सुक); pastime = hobby (शौक); elaborate = detailed (विस्तृत)।
[PAGE 118] : Fascinating = attractive (आकर्षक); gradually = slowly (धीरे-धीरे); overwhelming = strong (मज़बूत); stare = look fixedly (घूरना); wistfully = with longing (इच्छा से); kindle = create (पैदा करना, उकसानां); longings = strong desires (तीव्र इच्छाएँ); slang = informal language (अनौपचारिक भाषा); disapproval= refusal (असहमति); discreet = quiet (शांत); various = many (कई); scarcely = hardly (मुश्किल से); calculated = made a count (गिनती करना)।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus 1 HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus 2 HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus 3

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 9 Madam Rides the Bus Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

HBSE 10th Class English Glimpses of India Textbook Questions and Answers

Part I: A Baker From Goa

Discuss in class

1. What images of people and of places come to your mind, when you think of our country ? (जब आप अपने देश के बारे में सोचते हो तो आपके मन में लोगों और स्थानों की कौन-कौन सी तस्वीरें आती हैं?)
Answer:
When I think of my country the images of the variety of India come to my mind. I visualize people wearing different dresses, speaking different languages and having different customs. There is geographical variety also. I think of different places like snow-clad mountains, deserts, plains, forests, etc.
(जब मैं अपने देश के बारे में सोचता हूँ तो भारत की भिन्न-भिन्न तस्वीरें मेरे दिमाग में आती हैं। मैं लोगों को भिन्न-भिन्न तरह की पोशाकें पहने, भिन्न-भिन्न भाषाएँ बोलते और भिन्न-भिन्न रीति-रिवाज़ मनाते हुए देखता हूँ। इसमें भौगोलिक विभिन्नता भी है। मैं भिन्न-भिन्न स्थानों; जैसे बर्फ से ढके पर्वतों, मरुस्थलों, मैदानों और जंगलों इत्यादि के बारे में सोचता हूँ।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

2. What parts of India have you lived in, or visited ? Can you name some popular tourist destinations?
(आप भारत के किस भाग में रह चुके हैं या यात्रा कर चुके हैं? क्या आप कुछ प्रसिद्ध पर्यटक स्थलों के नाम बता सकते हो?)
Answer:
I have lived in the north of India. There are many popular tourist destinations in this part of India. These are : The Baradari of Patiala, The Red Fort of Delhi, The Taj Mahal in Agra, Qutub Minar, Humayun Tomb, Raj Ghat, etc. Forts, palaces and other monuments in Gwalior, Jaipur, etc.
(मैं भारत के उत्तर में रह चुका हूँ। भारत के इस भाग में बहुत-से प्रसिद्ध पर्यटक स्थल हैं। ये हैं-पटियाला की बारादरी, दिल्ली का लाल किला, आगरा का ताजमहल, कुतुबमीनार, हुमायु का मकबरा, राजघाट इत्यादि । ग्वालियर और जयपुर के किले, महल और अन्य यादगार चीजें।)

3. You may know that apart from the British, the Dutch and the French, the Portuguese have also played a part in the history of our country. Can you say which parts of India show French and Portuguese influences ?
(आप शायद जानते हो कि अंग्रेजों के अलावा डचों, फ्रांसीसियों और पुर्तगालियों ने भी हमारे देश के इतिहास में भूमिका निभाई है। क्या आप बता सकते हो कि हमारे देश के किन भागों पर फ्रांसीसियों और पुर्तगालियों का प्रभाव था?)
Answer:
We can see the French influence in Pondicherry because France ruled it for years. In the same way, we find the Portuguese influence in Goa as it was ruled by Portugal.
(हम फ्रांसीसी प्रभाव को पांडिचेरी में देख सकते हैं, क्योंकि फ्रांस ने उस पर वर्षों तक शासन किया था। उसी प्रकार से हम पुर्तगाली प्रभाव को गोआ में देख सकते हैं, क्योंकि गोआ पर पुर्तगाल का शासन था।)

4. Can you say which parts of India grow (i) tea, (ii) coffee ? (क्या आप बता सकते हो कि भारत के किन भागों में (i) चाय, (ii) कॉफी पैदा होती है?)
Answer:
Assam and Darjeeling in the north-east grow tea and Western Ghats grow coffee.
(उत्तर-पूर्व में आसाम, दार्जिलिंग में चाय का उत्पादन होता है और पश्चिमी घाटों पर कॉफी का उत्पादन होता है।)

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 86)

1. What are the elders in Goa nostalgic about?:
(गोआ के बुजुर्ग किस बात का शौक के साथ वर्णन करते हैं?)
Answer:
The elders of Goa are nostalgic about the Portuguese and their famous loaves of bread.
(गोआ के बुजुर्ग पुर्तगालियों और उनकी पावरोटियों का शौक के साथ वर्णन करते हैं।)

2. Is bread-making still popular in Goa ? How do you know ?
(क्या पावरोटी बनाना गोआ में अभी भी प्रसिद्ध है? आप कैसे जानते हो?)
Answer:
Yes, bread-making is still popular in Goa. The furnaces where bread is made still exist there. The thud and jingle of the traditional baker’s bamboo can still be heard in the morning. This is clear from the sentences, : ‘The fire in the furnaces has not yet been extinguished…’ ।
(हाँ, गोआ में पावरोटी बनाया जाना अभी भी प्रसिद्ध है। भट्टियाँ, जहाँ पावरोटी बनाई जाती है, गोआ में अभी भी पाई जाती हैं। बेकर की धानी की ठक-ठक और झंकार प्रातःकाल के समय में अभी भी सुनी जा सकती है। यह बात इस वाक्य से स्पष्ट है’भट्टी की आग अभी तक भी नहीं बुझाई जा सकी है…..।’) .

3. What is the baker called ?
(बेकर को किस नाम से पुकारा जाता है?)
Answer:
The baker is called pader in Goa.
(गोआ में बेकर को पेदर के नाम से पुकारा जाता है।)

4. When would the baker come everyday ? Why did the children run to meet him ?
(बेकर हर रोज कब आता था? बच्चे उससे मिलने के लिए क्यों भागते थे?)
Answer:
He would come twice a day. Once in the morning and again after selling all his breads. The children ran to meet him because they were fond of the ‘bread-bangles’ sold by him.
(बेकर दिन में दो बार आता था। एक बार तो वह सुबह के समय आता था और दोबारा तब आता था जब उसकी सारी पावरोटियाँ बिक जाती थीं। बच्चे उससे मिलने के लिए दौड़ते थे, क्योंकि वे उसके द्वारा बेचे जाने वाले पावगजरों को बहुत पसंद करते थे।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 87)

1. Match the following. What is a must
(i) as marriage gifts ? – cakes and bolinhas
(ii) for a party or a feast ? – sweet bread called bol
(iii) for a daughter’s engagement ?- bread
(iv) for Christmas ? – sandwiches.
Answer:
(i) as marriage gifts – sweet bread called bol
(ii) for a party or a feast – bread
(iii) for a daughter’s engagement – sandwiches
(iv) for Christmas – cakes and bolinhas

2. What did the bakers wear : (i) in the Portuguese days, ?
(बेकर क्या पहनते थे? (i) पुर्तगालियों के दिनों में?)
(ii) when the author was young?
(ii) जब लेखक छोटा था?)
Answer:
(i) In the Portuguese days, the bakers wore the kabai. It was a single-piece long frock that reached down to the knees. (ii) When the author was young, the bakers wore a shirt and trousers which were shorter than full-length ones and longer than half pants.
(i) पुर्तगालियों के दिनों में बेकर कबाई पहनते थे। यह एक ही कपड़े से बनी लंबी फ्रॉक होती थी जो घुटनों तक पहुँचती थी।
(ii) जब लेखक छोटा था तो उन दिनों बेकर कमीज और पैंट पहनते थे जोकि पूरी पैंट की लम्बाई से छोटी होती थी और निक्कर से लम्बी होती थी।)

3. Who invites the comment —“he is dressed like a pader” ? Why? .
(किस पर यह टिप्पणी की जाती है “उसने पेदर जैसी पोशाक पहन रखी है”? क्यों?)
Answer:
Any one who wears a half pant which reaches just below the knees invites this comment because trousers like that used to be the typical dress of a baker or pader.
(कोई भी जो घुटनों से नीचे आने वाली निक्कर पहनता है, उस पर यह टिप्पणी की जाती है क्योंकि इस तरह की पैंटे बेकर अर्थात् पेदर के द्वारा पहनी जाती थी।)

4. Where were the monthly accounts of the baker recorded ?
(बेकर का मासिक हिसाब कहाँ दर्ज किया जाता था?)
Answer:
They recorded the accounts on some wall in pencil.
(वे हिसाब को किसी दीवार पर पैंसिल के साथ दर्ज करते थे।)

5. What does a jackfruit-like appearance’ mean?
(‘कटहल जैसा लगने’ का क्या अर्थ है?) ।
Answer:
It means fat and plump like the jackfruit itself.
(इसका मतलब है कटहल की तरह मोटा और गोल-मटोल होना।)

Thinking about the Text

1. Which of these statements are correct ?

(i) The pader was an important person in the village in old times.
(ii) Paders still exist in Goan villages.
(iii) The paders went away with the Portuguese.
(iv) The paders continue to wear a single-piece long frock.
(v) Bread and cakes were an integral part of Goan life in the old days.
(vi) Traditional bread-baking is still a very profitable business.
(vii) Paders and their families starve in the present times.
Answer:
(i) correct,
(ii) correct,
(iii) incorrect,
(iv) incorrect,
(v) correct,
(vi) incorrect,
(vii) incorrect.

2. Is bread an important part of Goan life ? How do you know this ?
(क्या पावरोटी गोआ के जीवन का एक अभिन्न अंग है? आप यह कैसे जानते हो?)
Answer:
Yes, bread is an important part of Goan life. It is clear from marriage gifts, cakes and bolinhas for Christmas, etc.
(हाँ, पावरोटी गोआ के जीवन का एक अभिन्न अंग है। यह बात शादी के उपहारों, केक, बोलिनाह, क्रिसमस इत्यादि से स्पष्ट है।)

3. Tick the right answer. What is the tone of the author when he says the following ?

(i) The thud and the jingle of the traditional baker’s bamboo can still be heard in some places. (nostalgic, hopeful, sad)
(ii) Maybe the father is not alive but the son still carries on the family profession. (nostalgic, hopeful, sad)
(iii) I still recall the typical fragrance of those loaves. (nostalgic, hopeful, naughty)
(iv) The tiger never brushed his teeth. Hot tea could wash and clean up everything so nicely, after all. (naughty, angry, funny)
(v) Cakes and bolinhas are a must for Christmas as well as other festivals. (sad, hopeful, matter-of-fact)
(vi) The baker and his family never starved. They always looked happy and prosperous. (matter-of-fact, hopeful, sad)
Answer:
(i) nostalgic, (ii) hopeful, (iii) nostalgic, (iv) naughty, (v) matter-of-fact, (vi) matter-of-fact.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Writing

I. In this extract, the author talks about traditional bread-baking during his childhood days. Complete the following table with the help of clues on the left. Then write a paragraph about the author’s childhood days.

CluesAuthor’s childhood days
the way bread was baked
the way the pader sold bread
what the pader wore
when the pader was paid
how the pader looked

Answer:

CluesAuthor’s childhood days
the way bread was bakedAge-old time-tested furnaces still exist. The fire still burns in them. The baker still arrives in some places with the old thud and jingle.
the way the pader sold breadThe pader made his musical entry with ‘jhang, jhang’ sound with his bamboo staff. He wished ‘Good morning’ and breads were sold in minutes.
what the pader woreHe wore kabai, a single-piece long frock reaching down to the knees.
when the pader was paidHe was paid at the end of the month
how the pader lookedHe looked fat and plump.

Author’s Childhood Days

The author remembers his childhood days. He recollects that the baker was an important part of the village in those days. He was called pader. He used to come twice a day to sell his bread. He carried a bamboo stick. With this stick he made a musical sound, jhang, jhang’ sound with his bamboo staff. He placed his basket on the vertical bamboo. He wished ‘Good morning’ to the lady of the house. The bread was usually bought by the maid servant of the house. The author as a child would climb a bench or the parapet to peep into his basket of loaves of bread. He and other children longed for bread-bangles which were sweet bread of special make. Bread was an essential part of every function. The bread-seller collected his bills at the end of the month. The accounts were generally written on a wall in pencil. The bread-sellers were well off. It was evident from their plump bodies.

II.

1. Compare the piece from the text (on the left below) with the other piece on Goan bakers (on the right). What makes the two texts so different ? Are the facts the same ? Do both writers give you a picture of the baker ?

Our elders are often heard reminiscing nostalgically about those good old Portuguese days, the Portuguese and their famous loaves of bread. Those eaters of loaves might have vanished but the makers are stIll there. We still have amongst us the mixers, the moulders and those who bake the loaves. Those age-old, time-tested furnaces still exist. The fire in the furnaces had not yet been extinguished. The thud and the jingle of the traditional baker’s bamboo, heralding his arrival in the morning, can still be heard in some places.

May be the father is not alive but the son still carries on the family profession.

After Goa’s liberation, people used to say nostalgically that the Portuguese bread vanished with the paders. But the paders have managed to survive because they have perfected the art of door-to-door delivery service. The paders pick up the knowledge of bread-making from traditions in the family. The leavened, oven-baked bread is a gift of the Portuguese to india.

[Adaptedfrom Nandakumar Kama:  ‘The Unsung Lives of Goan Paders’]

Answer:
The two texts tell about the Goan Paders. But they are different because they differently about the same thing. The first text tells us about paders and the things with which they make bread. The
second text emphasises the fact that Portuguese bread vanished when Goa was liberated and the · Portugueses left Goa. The facts in both the texts relate to bread-making. The facts are almost the same. Both the writers give us a picture of the baker. But the first text gives a more elaborate picture than the one given by the second text.

2. Now find a travel brochure about a place you have visited. Look at the description in the brochure. Then write your own account, adding details from your own experience, to give the reader a picture of the place, rather than an impersonal, factual description.
Answer : For self-attempt.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Group Discussion

1. In groups, collect information on how bakeries bake bread now and how the process has · changed over time.
Answer:
For self-attempt.

2. There are a number of craft-based professions which are dying out. Pick one of the crafts below. Make a group presentation to the class about the skills required, and the possible reasons for the decline of the craft. Can you think of ways to revive these crafts ?
(i) Pottery,
(ii) Batik work
(iii) Dhurri (rug) weaving
(iv) Embroidery
(v) Carpentry
(vi) Bamboo weaving
(vii) Making jute products
(viii) Handloom
Answer:
For self-attempt.

Part II: Coorg

Thinking about the Text

1. Where is Coorg ?
(कुर्ग कहाँ पर है?)
Answer:
Coorg lies midway between Mysore and the coastal town of Mangalore. It is situated in the Karnatka state of India.
(कुर्ग मैसूर और तटीय नगर मंगलौर के मध्य मार्ग पर स्थित है। यह भारत के कर्नाटक राज्य में स्थित है।)

2. What is the story about the Kodavu people’s descent ? [B.S.E.H. 2019
(कोडावु लोगों के वंश के बारे में क्या कहानी प्रचलित है?)
Answer:
According to the story, a part of Alexander’s army moved south along the coast. As their return became impractical, they settled there. They married among the locals..
(कहानी के अनुसार, सिकन्दर की सेना का एक भाग तट के साथ-साथ दक्षिण की ओर चला गया। जब उनकी वापसी असंभव हो गई, तो वे वहीं बस गए। उन्होंने स्थानीय लोगों में शादी कर ली।)

3. What are some of the things you now know about
(i) the people of Coorg?
(ii) the main crop of Coorg?
(iii) the sports it offers to tourists ?
(iv) the animals you are likely to see in Coorg ?
(v) its distance from Bangalore, and how to get there?
(आप इनके बारे में अब कौन-कौन सी बातें जानते हो?) (कुर्ग के लोग?) (कुर्ग की मुख्य फसल?) (पर्यटकों के लिए यहाँ जो खेल हैं?) (आप कुर्ग में कौन-से पशु देख पाओगे?) (बंगलौर से इसकी दूरी और यहाँ पहुँचा कैसे जाता है?)
Answer:
I now know about all the things given from (i) to (v) here. The text gives the whole information in the following way:
(i) The people of Coorg are greatly independent. They are of Greek or Arabic descent.
(ii) The main crop of Coorg is coffee.
(iii) Coorg offers adventurous sports like river rafting, canoeing, rappelling, rock climbing and mountain biking to tourists.
(iv) The animals one is likely to see in Coorg are Macaques, Malabar squirrel, langurs and loris.
(v) The distance between Bangalore and Coorg is around 260 km. One can reach Coorg by Air, by Rail and by Road.

(मैं इन सभी चीज़ों के बारे में जानता हूँ जो यहाँ (i) से (v) तक दी गई हैं। अध्याय में इन सभी बातों के बारे में निम्नलिखित जानकारी दी गई है-

(i) कुर्ग लोग पूर्णतया स्वतंत्र रहने वाले लोग हैं। वे यूनानियों और अरबों के वंशज हैं।
(ii) missing
(iii) कुर्गों के साहसिक खेल हैं जैसे रिवर रैफ्टिंग, नौका चलाना, रस्सियों के सहारे पहाड़ियों पर चढ़ना-उतरना, चट्टानों पर चढ़ना और पर्वतारोहण इत्यादि
(iv) कुर्ग क्षेत्र में दिखाई दिए जाने वाले पशु हैं-अफ्रीकी लंगूर, मालाबारी गिलहरियाँ, लंगूर और तोते।
(v) बंगलौर और कुर्ग के बीच की दूरी लगभग 260 कि०मी० है। कुर्ग में हवाई जहाज से, रेल से और सड़क मार्ग द्वारा जाया जा सकता है।)

4. Here are six sentences with some words in italics. Find phrases from the text that have the same meaning. (Look at the paragraphs indicated)
(i) During monsoons it rains so heavily that tourists do not visit Coorg. (para 2)
(ii) Some people say that Alexander’s army moved south along the coast and settled there. (para 3)
(iii) The Coorg people are always ready to tell stories of their sons’ and fathers’ valour. (para 4)
(iv) Even people who normally lead an easy and slow life get smitten by the high-energy adventure sports of Coorg. (para 6)
(v) The theory of the Arab origin is supported by the long coat with embroidered waist-belt they wear. (para 3)
(vi) Macaques, Malabar squirrels observe you carefully from the tree canopy. (para 7)
Answer:
(i) to keep many visitors away.
(ii) as the story goes
(iii) more than willing to recount
(iv) the most laidback individuals become converts to
(v) draws support from
(vi) keep a watchful eye

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Thinking about Language

Collocations

Certain words ‘go together’. Such ‘word friends’ are called collocations. The collocation of a word is “the company it keeps’. For example, look at the paired sentences and phrases below. Which is a common collocation, and which one is odd ? Strike out the odd sentence or phrase.
(a) ‘How old are you?’
‘How young are you ?’
(b) a pleasant person
a pleasant pillow

1. Here are some nouns from the text.
culture
monks
surprise
experience
weather
tradition

Work with a partner and discuss which of the nouns can collocate with which of the adjectives given below. The first one has been done for you.

unique
terrible
unforgettable
serious
ancient
wide
sudden

(i) culture : unique culture, ancient culture
(ii) monks ……………………
(iii) surprise ……………………
(iv) experience : ……………………
(v) weather : ……………………
(vi) tradition : ……………………
Answer:
The following shall collocate together :
(ii) monks z serious monks, unique monks
(iii) surprise : terrible surprise, sudden surprise
(iv) experience : unique experience, terrible experience, unforgettable experience.
(v) weather : pleasant weather, terrible weather, unique weather
(vi) tradition : unique tradition, ancient tradition.

2. Complete the following phrases from the text. For each phrase, can you find at least one other word that would fit into the blank ?

(i) tales of……………………
(ii) coastal ……………………
(iii) a piece of ……………………
(iv) evergreen ……………………
(v) Plantations
(vi) ……………………bridge
(vii) wild ……………………
You may add your own examples to this list.
Answer:
(i) tales of valour
(ii) coastal town
(iii) a piece of heaven
(iv) evergreen rainforests
(v) coffee plantations
(vi) rope bridge
(vii) wild elephants

Some other examples :

Tales of heroism
hilly areas/terrains
river beds
Tibetan settlements
adventure sports

Part III: Tea from Assam

Thinking about Language

I. 1. Look at these words : upkeep, downpour, undergo, dropout, walk-in. They are built up from verb (keep, pour, go, drop, walk) and an adverb or a particle (up, down, under, out, in). Use these words appropriately in the sentences below. You may consult a dictionary.

(i) A heavy ___has been forecast due to low pressure in the Bay of Bengal.
(ii) Rakesh will ______major surgery tomorrow morning.
(iii) My brother is responsible for the ______of our family property.
(iv) The _______ rate for this accountancy course is very high.
(v) She went to the Enterprise Company to attend a _ ___ interview.
Answer:
(i) downpour
(ii) undergo
(iii) upkeep
(iv) dropout
(v) walk-in

2. Now fill in the blanks in the sentences given below by combining the verb given in brackets with one of the words from the box as appropriate.

over
by
through
out
updown

(i) The Army attempted unsuccessfully to ______ the Government. (throw)
(ii) Scientists are on the brink of a major ______ in cancer research. (break)
(iii) The State Government plans to build a ______ for Bhubaneshwar to speed up traffic on the main highway. (pass)
(iv) Gautama’s ______ on life changed when he realised that the world is full of sorrow.(look)
(v) Rakesh seemed unusually ______after the game. (cast)
Answer:
(1) overthrow (ii) breakthrough (iii) bypass (iv) outlook (v) downcast

II. Notice how these -ing and -ed adjectives are used.

(a) Chess is an interesting game. — I am very interested in chess.
(b) Going trekking in the Himalayas this summer is an exciting idea. — We are very excited about the trek.
(c) Are all your school books this boring? — He was bored as he had no friends there.

The -ing adjectives show the qualities that chess, trekking, or these books have : they cause interest, excitement, or boredom in you. The -ed/-en adjectives show your mental state, or your physical state: how you feel in response to ideas, events or things.

1. Think of suitable -ing or-ed adjectives to answer the following questions. You may also use words from those given above. How would you describe :

(i) a good detective serial on television ? _____
(ii) a debate on your favourite topic ‘Homework Should Be Banned’ ? _____
(iii) how you feel when you stay indoors due to incessant rain ? _____
(iv) how you feel when you open a present ? _____
(v) how you feel when you watch your favourite programme on television ? _____
(vi) the look on your mother’s face as you waited in a queue ? _____
(vii) how you feel when tracking a tiger in a tiger reserve forest ? _____
(viii) the story you have recently read, or a film you have seen ? _____
Answer:
(i) interesting
(ii) exciting
(iii) bored
(iv) thrilled
(v) excited
(vi) worrying
(vii) excited
(viii) interesting

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

2. Now use the adjectives in the exercise above, as appropriate, to write a paragraph about Coorg.
Answer:
A visit to Assam was really interesting. It was an invigorating. The magnificent scenery was invigorating. I felt excited and thrilled to visit this beautiful place. I was thrilled when I read that Assam tea is the best in the world. The wildlife and the panoramic view of the entire misty landscape excited me. A walk among the hills was thrilling. But the idea that man is creating pollution here also made me worried. However, the whole scene of tea plantations was breathtaking.

1. Read the following passage about tea.

India and tea are so intertwined together that life without the brew is unimaginable. Tea entered our life only in the mid-nineteenth century when the British started plantations in Assam and Darjeeling! In the beginning though, Indians shunned the drink as they thought it was a poison that led to umpteen diseases. Ironically, tea colonised Britain where it became a part of their social diary and also led to the establishment of numerous tea houses. Today, scientific research across the world has attempted to establish the beneficial qualities of tea-a fact the Japanese and the Chinese knew anyway from ancient times, attributing to it numerous medicinal properties.
[Source : ‘History : Tea Anytime’, by Ranjit Biswas from Literary Review, The Hindu, 1 October 2006]

Collect information about tea, e.g. its evolution as a drink, its beneficial qualities. You can consult an encyclopedia or visit Internet websites. Then form groups of five and play the following roles. Imagine a meeting of a tea planter, a sales agent, a tea lover (consumer), a physician and a tea-shop owner. Each person in the group has to put forward his/her views about tea. You may use the following words and phrases.

  • I feel _
  • It is important to know_
  • I disagree with you _
  • I think that tea _
  • I would like you to know _
  • I agree with _
  • It is my feeling _
  • I suggest _
  • May I know why you _
  • I am afraid _

Answer:
For self-attempt at class level. Students should consult an encyclopedia or visit some Internet sites for getting this information. Then they may form groups and play these roles.

2. You are the sales executive of a famous tea company and you have been asked to draft an advertisement for the product. Draft the advertisement using the information you collected for the role play. You can
draw pictures or add photographs and make your advertisement colourful.
Answer:
For self-attempt as in case of Question 1 above.

BSE 10th Class English A Baker From Goa Important Questions and Answers

Part I: A Baker From Goa

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What do the elders of Goa remember nostalgically?
Answer:
They remember nostalgically the old Portuguese days and the loaves of bread.

Question 2.
What are the time tested things which still exit in Goa?
Answer:
The furnaces of the bakers of Goa are time tested things which still exist there.

Question 3.
When did the baker come daily?
Answer:
He came daily twice. Once in the morning when he set out for his selling and the other time after selling the breads.

Question 4.
What was the baker’s place in Goa is the author’s childhood days?
Answer:
In those days the baker was the friend, companion and guide.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Question 5.
How is the entry of the baker described?
Answer:
The entry of the baker is described as musical.

Question 6.
What did the author and the other children do to look into the baker’s basket?
Answer:
They would climb a bench or the parapet to look into the baker’s basket.

Question 7.
What is the name of the dress worn by baker in olden days?
Answer:
It was known with the name of kabai.

Question 8.
What is the baker called in Goa?
Answer:
The baker is called ‘pader’in Goa.

Question 9.
What is the financial status of a baker of Goa?
Answer:
A bakes of Goa is mostly in a sound financially position.

Question 10.
What is a kabai?.
Answer:
A kabai is a type of frock made out of single piece of cloth.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are the childhood memories described by the author in this extract?
(इस अध्याय में लेखक के द्वारा बचपन की किन-किन यादों का वर्णन किया गया है?)
Answer:
The author passed his childhood days in Goa. In this extract, he remembers his old days in Goa when the village baker occupied an important place in life. Although, with the passage of time, people do not . eat so much bread, yet the village bakers are still there.
(लेखक ने अपने बचपन के दिन गोआ में बिताए थे। इस अध्याय में वह गोआ में अपने बचपन के दिनों को याद करता है जब गाँव के बेकर का जीवन में महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान होता था। यद्यपि समय बीतने के साथ-साथ लोगों ने पावरोटी खाना कम कर दिया है, फिर भी ग्रामीण बेकर वहाँ पर पाए जाते हैं।) .

Question 2.
What marks of the Portuguese way of life can still be seen in Goa?
(पुर्तगाली जीवन के तरीकों के कौन-कौन से संकेत अभी भी गोआ में देखे जा सकते हैं?)
Answer:
Goa was once occupied by the Portuguese. They were famous for preparing the loaves of bread. They left Goa long ago. But the traditional work of the bakers can still be seen in Goa. The furnaces in which the bread was baked still exist there.
(गोआ पर पुर्तगालियों का कब्जा था। वे पावरोटियाँ तैयार करवाने के लिए प्रसिद्ध थे। वे काफी समय पहले गोआ से चले गए। लेकिन गोवा में बेकरों का परंपरागत काम अभी भी देखा जा सकता है। जिन भट्टियों में पावरोटी पकाई जाती थी वे अभी भी वहाँ पर हैं।)

Question 3.
What does the author recall about the visit of the baker to his village?
(लेखक अपने गाँव में बेकर की यात्रा के बारे में क्या बातें याद करता है?)
Answer:
The author recalls that a baker used to visit the village twice a day. He used to be the author’s friend and guide. He used to carry a bamboo stick. The sound of this stick used to wake up the author and others from sleep.
(लेखक याद करता है कि एक बेकर दिन में दो बार उनके गाँव में आता था। वह लेखक का मित्र और मार्गदर्शक हुआ करता था। वह एक बाँस का डंडा उठाए रखता था। डंडे की आवाज़ लेखक और अन्य लोगों को नींद से जगा देती थी।)

Question 4.
How was the village baker very important for special occasions in the village?
(गाँव में विशिष्ट अवसरों पर गाँव का बेकर अति महत्त्वपूर्ण कैसे हो जाता था?) .
Answer:
The village baker was specially important for festive occasions. The villagers were much fond of the sweet bread known as ‘bol’. Marriage gifts were meaningless without these sweet breads. Sandwiches, cakes and bolinhas were a must for Christmas as well as other festivals. These were made with the bread.
(त्योहारों के अवसरों पर गाँव का बेकर अति महत्त्वपूर्ण हो जाता था। गाँव वाले उसकी मीठी पावरोटी ‘बोल’ के बहुत शौकीन थे। इन मीठी पावरोटियों के बिना शादी के उपहार अर्थहीन थे। क्रिसमस और अन्य त्योहारों के लिए सैंडविच, केक और बोलिनाह अति आवश्यक होते थे। ये पावरोटी से बनते थे।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Question 5.
Describe the bread-seller’s dress. (पावरोटी विक्रेता की पोशाक का वर्णन करें।).
Answer:
The baker or the bread-seller wore a special, peculiar dress. It was known as the ‘kabai’. It was a single-piece long frock. It reached down to his knees. During narrator’s childhood Bakers wore trousers which were shorter than full-length and longer than half pants.
(बेकर अर्थात् पावरोटी विक्रेता एक विशेष और विचित्र किस्म की पोशाक पहनता था। इसे कबाई के नाम से जाना जाता था। यह एक ही कपड़े से बनी लम्बी फ्रॉक होती थी। यह घुटनों से नीचे तक जाती थी। लेखक के बचपन के दिनों में बेकर कमीज़)

Question 6.
When did the baker collect his bills? What showed that the bakers were prosperous?
(बेकर अपने बिलों का संग्रह कब करता था? किस बात से पता चलता था कि बेकर अमीर थे?)
Answer:
The baker usually collected his bills at the end of the month. In the household, the baker’s monthly accounts used to be recorded on some wall in pencil. Baking was a profitable business in those days. Their families never starved. Their plump bodies showed that they were prosperous.
(बेकर प्रायः महीने के अंत में अपने बिलों का संग्रह करता था। घर में बेकर के महीने के हिसाब को किसी दीवार पर पेंसिल के साथ लिख दिया जाता था। उन दिनों में बेकिंग का कार्य बहुत फायदे वाला था। उनके परिवार कभी भूखे नहीं मरते थे। उनके मोटे-ताजे शरीर दिखाते थे कि वे सम्पन्न लोग थे।)

Question 7.
When would the baker come everyday? Why did the children run to the baker?
(बेकर हर रोज किस समय आता था? बच्चे बेकर के पास क्यों भागे आते थे?)
Answer:
The baker would come twice a day. Once in the morning when he set out on his selling round, and then again after emptying his basket. In the morning the children ran to him to have bread-bangles.
(बेकर दिन में दो बार आया करता था। एक बार तो सुबह के समय जब वह अपनी बिक्री की फेरी पर निकलता था और दूसरी बार तब जब अपनी टोकरी खाली करके लौटता था। सुबह के समय बच्चे उसके पास से पाव-गजरे लेने के लिए भाग कर जाते थे।)

Question 8.
How did the baker make his entry in the morning?
(सुबह के समय बेकर अपना आगमन कैसे करता था?)
Answer:
In the morning the baker made his musical entry on the scene with the “jhang-jhang’ sound of his specially made staff. One hand supported the basket on his head and the other banged the bamboo on the ground.
(सुबह के समय बेकर दृश्य पर आगमन एक विशेष रूप से बनाई गई बाँस की लंबी छड़ी की ‘झंग-झंग’ जैसी संगीतमयी आवाज़ के साथ करता था। उसका एक हाथ सिर पर टोकरी को थामे रखता था और दूसरा हाथ जमीन पर बाँस को पटकता रहता था।)

Essay Type Question

Question 1.
How is the effect of the traditional bread bakers can still be seen in Goa of today?
(परम्परागत बेकरों का प्रभाव आज के गोआ में भी कैसे देखा जा सकता है?)
Answer:
The author remembers his old days in Goa when the village baker occupied an important place in life. Bread eating was very common in those days. Apart from eating bread daily, bread held an important place at the time of Christmas, marriages and other functions. Although, with the passage of time, people do not eat so much bread today, yet the village bakers are still there. The Portugueses were famous for earns the loaves of bread. They left Goa long ago. But the traditional work of the bakers can still be seen in Goa. The furnaces in which the bread was baked still exist there. The sound of the traditional bakers’ bamboo can still be heard. These bakers are known as Pader in Goa even today. . .

(लेखक गोआ में अपने पुराने दिनों की याद करता है जब गाँव के बेकर का उनके जीवन में महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान होता था। उन दिनों में पावरोटी खाने का बहुत प्रचलन था। हर रोज पावरोटी खाए जाने के अतिरिक्त पावरोटी का क्रिसमस, शादियों तथा अन्य उत्सवों पर अति महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान होता था। यद्यपि समय के बीतने के साथ-साथ लोग अब इतनी ज्यादा पावरोटी नहीं खाते हैं लेकिन अभी भी गाँवों में बेकर हैं। पुर्तगाली पावरोटियाँ तैयार करवाने के लिए बहुत प्रसिद्ध थे। उन्होंने काफी समय पहले गोआ को छोड़ दिया। लेकिन बेकरों का परम्परागत काम अभी भी गोआ में देखा जा सकता है। जिन भट्टियों में पावरोटी पकाई जाती थी अभी भी वहाँ पर हैं। बेकर के परम्परागत बाँस (धानी) की आवाज़ अभी भी सुनी जा सकती है। इन बेकरों को गोआ में आज भी पेदर के नाम से जाना जाता है।)

Question 2.
What was the importance of the baker in the village? What kind of dress did he wear?
(गाँव में बेकर का क्या महत्त्व होता था? वह किस तरह की पोशाक पहनता था?)
Answer:
The village baker was specially important for all occasions. The villagers were much fond of the sweet bread known as ‘Bol’. Marriage gifts were meaningless without these sweet breads. San and bolinhas were a must for Christmas as well as other festivals. These were made with the bread. Thus the presence of a baker’s furnace was very essential in each village. The baker or the bread-seller wore a special, peculiar dress. It was known as the ‘kabai’. It was a single-piece long frock. It reached.down to his knees. During narrator’s childhood bakers wore trousers which were shorter than full-length and longer than half pants. Even today if someone wears a half pant, he is said to be dressed like a pader.

(गाँव का बेकर सभी अवसरों पर विशेष रूप से महत्वपूर्ण होता था। ग्रामीण उसकी मीठी पावरोटी, जिसे ‘बोल’ कहा जाता था, के बहुत अधिक शौकीन थे। इन मीठी पावरोटियों के बिना शादी के उपहार महत्त्वहीन होते थे। सैंडविच, केक और बोलिनाह क्रिसमस तथा अन्य अवसरों के लिए अति आवश्यक होते थे। ये पावरोटी से बनाए जाते थे। अतः प्रत्येक गाँव में बेकर की भट्टी का होना बहुत जरूरी था। बेकर अर्थात् पावरोटी विक्रेता एक खास तरह की और विचित्र पोशाक पहनता था। इसे ‘कबाई’ के नाम से जाना जाता था। यह एक ही कपड़े से बनी लम्बी फ्रॉक होती थी। यह उसके घुटनों से नीचे तक जाती थी। लेखक के बचपन के दिनों में बेकर पैंटें पहनते थे जोकि पूरी पैंट की लम्बाई से कम और निक्कर की लम्बाई से अधिक होती थी। यदि आज भी कोई निक्कर पहनता है, तो ऐसा कहा जाता है कि उसने पेदर की तरह पोशाक पहन रखी थी।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Question 3.
Give a pen-portrait of a Goan Village baker.
(गोवा के एक ग्रामीण बेकर का चित्रण कीजिए।)
Answer:
A Goan village baker used to sell all kinds of bread loaves. He used to come in the morning with a basket of breads loaves on his head. He made a musical entry on the scene with the ‘jhang-jhang’ of his bamboo stick. He used to wear a peculiar dress known as the ‘kabai’. It was a single-piece long frock reaching down to the knees. The baker usually collected his bills at the end of the month. Baking was indeed a profitable profession in the old days. The baker always looked happy and prosperous. He had a plump physique.

(गोवा का एक ग्रामीण बेकर सभी प्रकार के पाव बेचा करता था। वह सुबह के समय सभी प्रकार के पाव अपने सिर पर टोकरी में भरकर लाता था। वह अपनी बाँस की छड़ी की झंग-झंग की संगीतमयी आवाज़ के साथ दृश्य पर अपना आगमन करता था। वह एक विचित्र तरह की पोशाक पहनता था जिसे ‘कबाई’ कहते थे। यह कपड़े के एक ही टुकड़े से बनी विशेष प्रकार की फ्रॉक होती थी जो घुटनों से नीचे तक आती थी। बेकर महीने के अंत में अपने बिल एकत्र किया करता था। उन पुराने दिनों में बेकरी का व्यवसाय लाभ का काम था। बेकर हमेशा प्रसन्न और खुशहाल दिखाई देता था। शारीरिक रूप से वह गोल-मटोल होता था ।)

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Where were bakers specially found in India ?
(A) Goa
(B) Karnataka
(C) Assam
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(A) Goa

Question 2.
Who ruled over Goa?
(A) British
(B) Portuguese
(C) French
(D) Dutch
Answer:
(B) Portuguese

Question 3.
In the olden days baker in Goa was known as :
(A) baker
(B) pader
(C) kabai
(D) bolinhas
Answer:
(B) pader

Question 4.
What did the children like to buy ?
(A) bread
(B) bangle-bread
(C) bol
(D) cake
Answer:
(B) bangle-bread

Question 5.
Which name is used for the sweet bread?
(A) bol
(B) kabai
(C) pedar
(D) cake
Answer:
(A) bol

Question 6.
The bakers used to wear…………
(A) kabai
(B) bol
(C) pedar
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(A) kabai

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Question 7.
When were the bills collected?
(A) daily
(B) weekly
(C) fortnightly
(D) at the end of the month
Answer:
(D) at the end of the month

Question 8.
What type of people are bakers?
(A) poor
(B) prosperous
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) starving
Answer:
(B) prosperous

Question 9.
How are bakers in their physique?
(A) weak
(B) sick looking
(C) plump
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(C) plump

Question 10.
The elders in Goa are nostalgic about :
(A) the portuguese people
(B) the good old Portuguese days
(C) their famous loaves of bread
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(D) all of the above

Question 11.
The baker used to come ………….. daily.
(A) only once
(B) twice
(C) thrice
(D) four times
Answer:
(B) twice

Question 12.
Who is the author of the lesson “A Baker from Goa’?
(A) Lucio Rodrigues
(B) Lokesh Abrol
(C) Arup Kumar Datta
(D) Gavin Maxwell
Answer:
(A) Lucio Rodrigues

A Baker From Goa Important Passages for Comprehension

Read the following passages and answer the questions that follow :

PASSAGE 1

Our elders are often heard reminiscing nostalgically about those good old Portuguese days, the Portuguese and their famous loaves of bread. Those eaters of loaves might have vanished but the makers are still there. We still have amongst us the mixers, the moulders and those who bake the loaves. Those age-old, time-tested furnaces still exist. The fire in the furnaces has not yet been extinguished. The thud and jingle of the traditional baker’s bamboo, heralding his arrival in the morning, can still be heard in some places. Maybe the father is not alive but the son still carries on the family profession. These bakers are, even today, known as pader in Goa.

Word-meanings : Reminiscing = remembering (याद करना); vanished = disappeared (गायब हो गया); moulders = those who mould (फफूंद बनाने वाले); extinguished = put out (बुझा देना); furnaces = ovens (भट्ठियाँ)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Questions :

(a) What do the elders remember nostalgically?
(b) Whom do the residents of Goa still have among them?
(c) What are the time tested things which still exist there?
(d) How are the bakers known as in Goa?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means “put out’.
Answers :
(a) They remember nostalgically the old Portuguese days and the loaves of bread.
(b) They still have the mixers, the moulders and bakers of bread.
(c) The furnaces of the bakers are the time-tested things which still exist there.
(d) The bakers are known as pader.
(e) ‘extinguished’.

PASSAGE 2

During our childhood in Goa, the baker used to be our friend, companion and guide. He used to come at least twice a day. Once, when he set out in the morning on his selling round, and then again, when he returned after emptying his huge basket. The jingling thud of his bamboo woke us up from sleep and we ran to meet and greet him. Why was it so? Was it for the love of the loaf ? Not at all. The loaves were bought by some Paskine or Bastine, the maid-servant of the house! What we longed for were those bread-bangles which we chose carefully. Sometimes it was sweet bread of special make.

Word-meanings : Greet = welcome (स्वागत करना); longed for = wished for (इच्छा करना)

Questions :

(a). What was the baker’s place in Goa in the author’s childhood days?
(b) What happened after the author woke up on hearing the baker’s jingling sound?
(c) Who bought the loaves?
(d) What did the narrator long for?
(e) Find a phrase from the passage which means “wished for’.
Answers :
(a) In those days the baker was the friend, companion and guide.
(b) He ran to meet and greet him.
(c) The maid-servant of the house bought the loaves of bread.
(d) The author longed for ‘bread-bangles’.
(e) ‘longed for’.

PASSAGE 3

The baker made his musical entry on the scene with the ‘jhang, jhang’ sound of his specially made bamboo staff. One hand supported the basket on his head and the other banged the bamboo on the ground. He would greet the lady of the house with “Good morning” and then place his basket on the vertical bamboo. We kids would be pushed aside with a mild rebuke and the loaves would be delivered to the servant. But we would not give up. We would climb a bench or the parapet and peep into the basket, somehow. I can still recall the typical fragrance of those loaves. Loaves for the elders and the bangles for the children. Then we did not even care to brush our teeth or wash our mouths properly. And why should we? Who would take the trouble of plucking the mango-leaf for the toothbrush? And why was it necessary at all ? The tiger never brushed his teeth. Hot tea could wash and clean up everything so nicely, after all!

Word-meanings : Supported = helped (सहारा देना); banged = beat with (ठक-ठक करना); greet = welcome (स्वागत करना); fragrance = smell (सुगन्ध) |

Questions :

(a) Who would push aside the kids and why ?
(b) Why did the kids climb the bench or the parapet ?
(c) What did the baker have for the kids and the elders ?
(d) How did the narrator brush his teeth ?
(e) What did the writer (as a child) think about brushing his teeth ?
Answers :
(a) The baker pushed aside the kids to deliver the loaves to the servant.
(b) They climbed the bench or the parapet to peep into the bakers’s basket.
(c) The baker had loaves for the elders and bangles for the children.
(d) The narrator brushed his teeth with a mango leaf.
(e) The writer thought that there wasn’t any need of brushing teeth as hot tea can do it so nicely.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

PASSAGE 4

Marriage gifts are meaningless without the sweet bread known as the bol, just as a party or a feast loses its charm without bread. Not enough can be said to show how important a baker can be said to show how important a baker can be for a village. The lady of the house must prepare sandwiches on the occasion of her daughter’s engagement. Cakes and bolinhas are a must for Christmas as well as other festivals. Thus, the presence of the baker’s furnace in the village is absolutely essential.

Word-meanings : Feast = grand party (प्रीतिभोज, दावत); charmi = attraction (आकर्षण ); absolutely = completely (पूरी तरह ); essential = necessary (आवश्यक ) |

Questions :

(a) Name the chapter and the writer.
(b) What makes marriage gifts meaningless?
(c) When does a party or a feast lose its charm?
(d) What has the lady of the house to do on the occassion of her daughter’s engagement?
(e) What is a must for Christmas?
Answers :
(a) Chapter : A Baker From Goa.
Writer : Lucio Rodrigues.
(b). Marriage gifts are meaningless without the sweet bread known as the bol. . (c) A party or a feast loses its charm without bread.
(d) She must prepare sandwiches on such a occassion.
(e) Cakes or bolinhas are a must for Christmas.

PASSAGE 5

Not enough can be said to show how important a baker can be for a village. The lady of the house must prepare sandwiches on the occasion of her daughter’s engagement. Cakes and bolinhas are a must for Christmas as well as other festivals. Thus, the presence of the baker’s furnace in the village is absolutely essential.
The baker or bread-seller of those days had a peculiar dress known as the Kabai. It was a single-piece long frock reaching down to the knees. In our childhood we saw bakers wearing a shirt and trousers which were shorter than full-length ones and longer than half pants. Even today, anyone who wears a half pant which reaches just below the knees invites the comment that he is dressed like a pader !

Word-meanings : Furnace = an oven (बट्टी ); peculiar = strange (विचित्र ); childhood = the state of a child(बचपन)

Questions :

(a) Name the chapter.
(b) On which occasion must the lady of the house prepare sandwiches ?
(c) What is a must for Christmas ?
(d) When is one said to be dressed like a pader ?
(e) Find a word opposite in meaning to ‘partially’.
Answers :
(a) The name of the chapter is ‘A Baker from Goa’.
(b) The lady of the house must prepare sandwiches on the occasion of her daughter’s engagement.
(c) Cakes and bolinhas are a must for Christmas.
(d) When one is wearing a shirt and trousers which were shorter than full length ones and longer than half pants, he is said to be dressed like a pader.
(e) Absolutely

Part II. Coorg

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Where is Coorg situated ?
Answer:
Coorg is situated midway between Mysore and the coastal town of Mangalore.

Question 2.
What are the people of Coorg a descent of ?
Answer:
The people of Coorg are a descent of Greek and Arab people.

Question 3.
Which crops grow in Coorg in plenty ?
Answer:
Coffee and spices grow in Coorg in plenty.

Question 4.
What is the best time of the year to visit Coorg ?
Answer:
The best time of the year to visit Coorg is between September and March.

Question 5.
Why did a part of Alexander’s army settle here?
Answer:
A part of Alexander army settled here because their return had become impractical.

Question 6.
What is so similar between the Kodavus and the Arabs ?
Answer:
The long black coat with an embroidered waistbelt is so similar to the one worn by the Arabs.

Question 7.
What kind of tales do the Coorg people tell their children ?
Answer:
They tell them the stories of bravery of their sons and fathers.

Question 8.
Who was the first chief of Indian Army?
Answer:
The first chief of Indian Army was General Cariappa.

Question 9.
Which river flows through Coorg ?
Answer:
The river Kaveri flows through Coorg.

Question 10.
Which hills are found there in Coorg ?
Answer:
The Brahmagiri hills are found there in Coorg.

Question 11.
What is the district headquarters of Coorg ?
Answer:
Madikeri is the district headquarters of Coorg.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What does the writer say about Coorg ? (लेखक कुर्ग के बारे में क्या कहता है?)
Answer:
The writer says that Coorg is the smallest district of Karnataka. It is known as Kodagu also. Coorg lies between the coastal town of Mangalore and Mysore. It is a very beautiful place. The writer says that it must have come from the kingdom of God.
(लेखक कहता है कि कुर्ग कर्नाटक का सबसे छोटा ज़िला है। इसे कोडागु के नाम से भी जाना जाता है। कुर्ग तटीय नगर मंगलौर और मैसूर के मध्य मार्ग पर स्थित है। यह एक अति सुन्दर स्थान है। लेखक कहता है कि यह तो अवश्य ही भगवान् के राज्य से आया है।)

Question 2.
What is Coorg famous for ? What is the best season to visit Coorg ? (कुर्ग किसलिए प्रसिद्ध है? कुर्ग जाने के लिए सबसे बढ़िया मौसम कौन-सा है?)
Answer:
Coorg is famous for its coffee plantations, evergreen rainforests and spices. Thirty per cent of its area is covered with the evergreen rainforests. The best season to visit this place is from September to March. The air is full of coffee flavour.
(कुर्ग अपने कॉफी बागानों, सदाबहार वर्षा वनों और मसालों के लिए प्रसिद्ध है। इसके तीस प्रतिशत भू-क्षेत्र पर सदाबहार वर्षा वन पाए जाते हैं। इस क्षेत्र की सैर करने का सबसे बढ़िया मौसम सितंबर से लेकर मार्च तक है। हवा कॉफी की गंध से भरपूर होती है।)

Question 3.
What does the writer say about the people of Coorg ? (लेखक कुर्ग के लोगों के विषय में क्या कहता है?).
Answer:
The writer says that the people of Coorg are independent and brave. They are of Greek or Arabic descent. According to a story, a part of Alexander’s army did not return and was settled here. They married among the locals. This culture can be seen in the martial traditions, marriage and religious customs.
(लेखक,कहता है कि कुर्ग लोग स्वतंत्र और बहादुर हैं। वे यूनानियों और अरबों के वंशज हैं। एक कहानी के अनुसार, सिकन्दर की सेना का एक भाग वापस नहीं लौटा और यहीं पर बस गया। उन्होंने स्थानीय लोगों में शादियाँ कीं। यह संस्कृति उनकी युद्ध परम्पराओं, शादी और धार्मिक रीति-रिवाजों में झलकती है।)

Question 4.
What supports the theory that the people of Coorg originated from the Arabs ?
(इस सिद्धान्त को किस बात से बल मिलता है कि कुर्ग लोगों की उत्पत्ति अरबों से हुई है?)
Answer:
According to a theory, the people of Coorg originated from the Arabs. It is evident from the long, black coat worn by the people. It is like the kuffia worn by the Arabs and the Kurds.
(एक सिद्धान्त के अनुसार, कुर्ग लोगों की उत्पत्ति अरबों से हुई है। यह बात इन लोगों के द्वारा पहने जाने वाले काले लम्बे कोट से स्पष्ट होती है। यह अरबों और कुर्दो के द्वारा पहने जाने वाले कुफिया के समान है।)

Question 5.
What does the writer say about the bravery of the Coorgi people ? . (लेखक कुर्गी लोगों की बहादुरी के बारे में क्या कहता है?)
Answer:
The writer says that the Coorgi people are brave people. Their tales of bravery are famous. The Coorg regiment is one of the most decorated in the Indian Army. The first Chief of the Indian Army, General Cariappa, was a Coorgi. Even today, the Kodavus are the only people in India who are allowed to carry firearms without licence.
(लेखक कहता है कि कुर्गी लोग बहादुर लोग होते हैं। उनकी बहादुरी की कहानियाँ प्रसिद्ध हैं। भारतीय सेना की कुर्ग रेजिमेंट सबसे अधिक सुसज्जित है। भारतीय सेना का पहला मुखिया जनरल करियप्पा एक कुर्गी था। आज भी, भारत में कोडावु केवल मात्र ऐसे लोग हैं, जिन्हें बिना लाइसेंस के आग्नेयास्त्र रखने की अनुमति है।)

Essay Type Question

Question 1.
Where is Coorg situated ? What is it famous for ?
(कुर्ग कहाँ पर स्थित है? यह किसलिए प्रसिद्ध है?) ।
Answer:
Coorg is the smallest district of Karnataka. It is known as Kodagu also. Coorg lies between the coastal town of Mangalore and Mysore. It is a very beautiful place. The writer says that it must have come from the kingdom of God. Coorg is famous for its coffee plantations, evergreen rainforests and spices. Thirty per cent of its area is covered with the evergreen rainforests. The best season to visit this place is from September to March. The air is full of coffee flavour.

(कुर्ग कर्नाटक का सबसे छोटा जिला है। इसे कोडागु के नाम से भी जाना जाता है। कुर्ग तटीय नगर मंगलौर और मैसूर के मध्य मार्ग पर स्थित है। यह एक अति सुन्दर स्थान है। लेखक कहता है कि यह तो अवश्य ही भगवान के राज्य से आया है। कुर्ग अपने कॉफी बागानों, सदाबहार वर्षा वनों और मसालों के लिए प्रसिद्ध है। इसके तीस प्रतिशत भू-क्षेत्र पर सदाबहार वर्षा वन पाए जाते हैं। इस क्षेत्र की सैर करने का सबसे बढ़िया मौसम सितंबर से लेकर मार्च तक है। हवा कॉफी की गंध से भरपूर होती है।)

Question 2.
What does the author say about the people of Coorg ?
(लेखक कुर्ग लोगों के विषय में क्या कहता है?)
Answer:
The writer says that the people of Coorg are independent and brave. They are of Greek or Arabic descent. According to a story, a part of Alexander’s army did not return and was settled here. They married among the locals. This culture can be seen in the martial traditions, marriage and religious customs. According to an another theory Coorg people originated from the Arabs. It is evident from the long, black coat worn by the people. It is like the kuffia worn by the Arabs and the Kurds. Coorgi homes have a tradition of hospitality. They are brave people. Their tales of bravery are famous. The Coorg Regiment is one of the most decorated in the Indian Army. The first Chief of the Indian Army, General Cariappa, was a Coorgi. Even today, the Kodavus are the only people in India who are allowed to carry firearms without licence.
(लेखक कहता है कि कुर्ग लोग स्वतंत्र और बहादुर हैं। वे यूनानियों और अरबों के वंशज हैं। एक कहानी के अनुसार, सिकन्दर की सेना का एक भाग वापस नहीं लौटा और यहीं पर बस गया। उन्होंने स्थानीय लोगों में शादियाँ कीं। यह संस्कृति उनकी युद्ध परम्पराओं, शादी और धार्मिक रीति-रिवाज़ों में झलकती है। एक सिद्धान्त के अनुसार, कुर्ग लोगों की उत्पत्ति अरबों से हुई है। यह बात इन लोगों के द्वारा पहने जाने वाले काले लम्बे कोट से स्पष्ट होती है। यह अरबों और कुर्दो के द्वारा पहने जाने वाले कुफिया के समान है। कुर्गी लोगों की अतिथि-सत्कार की अपनी एक परंपरा है। वे बहुत बहादुर लोग हैं। उनकी बहादुरी की कहानियाँ प्रसिद्ध हैं। भारतीय सेना की कुर्ग रेजिमेंट सबसे अधिक सुसज्जित है। भारतीय सेना का पहला मुखिया जनरल करियप्पा एक कुर्गी था। आज भी, भारत में कोडावु केवल मात्र ऐसे लोग हैं, जिन्हें बिना लाइसेंस के आग्नेयास्त्र रखने की अनुमति है।)

Question 3.
What does the writer say about the natural beauty of Coorg?
(लेखक कुर्ग की प्राकृतिक सुंदरता का वर्णन कैसे करता है?)
Or
Write a note on the climate and natural wealth of Coorg.
(कुर्ग की प्रकृति और प्राकृतिक संपत्ति पर नोट लिखें।)
Answer:
Coorg is situated in Karnataka midway between Mysore and the coastal town of Mangalore. It looks like a piece of heaven that must have drifted from the kingdom of God. This is a land of rolling hills. It is a home of evergreen rainforests, spices and coffee plantations. Evergreen forests cover thirty percent of Coorg district. The river Kaveri flows through Coorg. Big elephants are also found here. Birds, bees and butterflies are there to give the visitors company. The climb to the Brahmagiri hills brings (the visitors) into a panoramic view of the entire misty landscape of Coorg. It is said that the people searching for the heart and soul of India visit Coorg.

(कुर्ग कर्नाटक राज्य में मैसूर और तटीय कस्बे मंगलौर के मध्य में स्थित है। यह स्वर्ग के एक अंश की तरह लगता है जो अवश्य ही भगवान के राज्य से भटक कर आया होगा। यह घुमावदार पहाड़ियों वाली भूमि है। यह सदाबहार-वर्षा वाले वनों, मसालों और कॉफी के बागानों का घर है। सदाबहार वन कुर्ग जिले के 30 प्रतिशत भू-भाग को घेरते हैं। कावेरी नदी कुर्ग से होकर बहती है। यहाँ पर बड़े-बड़े हाथी भी पाए जाते हैं। पर्यटकों को संगति प्रदान करने के लिए यहाँ पक्षी, मधुमक्खियाँ और तितलियाँ पाई जाती हैं। ब्रह्मगिरी पहाड़ियों की चढ़ाई चढ़ते समय हमें पूरे कुर्ग के धुंधले भू-भाग का नजारा नजर आ जाता है। ऐसा कहा जाता है कि भारत के दिल और आत्मा की खोज करने वाले भ्रमणकारी कुर्ग अवश्य आते हैं।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
In which state of India is Coorg situated ?
(A) Karnataka
(B) Goa
(C) Kerala
(D) Tamilnadu
Answer:
(A) Karnataka

Question 2.
Coorg is famous for its :
(A), coffee plantation
(B) evergreen rainforests
(C) spices
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(D) all of the above

Question 3.
The best season to visit Coorg is :
(A) September to March
(B) April to June
(C) July to August
(D) all the years
Answer:
(A) September to March

Question 4.
How much area of Coorg is covered by evergreen forests ?
(A) ten per cent
(B) twenty per cent
(C) thirty per cent
(D) forty per cent
Answer:
(C) thirty per cent

Question 5.
From which river do Coorg get water ?
(A) Krishna
(B) Kaveri
(C) Narmada
(D) Tapi
Answer:
(B) Kaveri

Question 6.
The Coorgi people are famous for the tradition of :
(A) enmity
(B) selfishness
(C) cleverness
(D) hospitality
Answer:
(D) hospitality

Question 7.
Coorg is descents of :
(A) Greeks
(B) Arabs
(C) Hindus
(D) both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(D) both (A) and (B)

Question 8.
Who was General Cariappa ?
(A) the first chief of Indian Army
(B) a great political leader
(C) a great coffee planter
(D) a british officer
Answer:
(A) the first chief of Indian Army

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Question 9.
The freshwater fish of Coorg is :
(A) whale
(B) shark
(C) mahaseer
(D) dolphin
Answer:
(C) mahaseer

Question 10.
We can reach Coorg by :
(A) air
(B) rail
(C) road
(D) all of the above of the above

Question 11.
What is the district headquarter of Coorg?
(A) Mangalore
(B) Bangalore
(C) Mysore
(D) Madikeri
Answer:
(D) Madikeri

Question 12.
What is the distance between Bangalore and Coorg?
(A) 135 kms
(B) 260 kms
(C) 300 kms
(D) 335 kms
Answer:
(B) 260 kms

Question 13.
What is Nisargadhama?
(A) a river
(B) an island
(C) a city
(D) a coffee plantation
Answer:
(B) an island

Question 14.
Who is the writer of the lesson ‘Coorg’?
(A) Lucio Rodrigues
(B) Lokesh Abrol
(C) Arup Kumar Datta
(D) Gavin Maxwell
Answer:
(B) Lokesh Abrol

Coorg Important Passages for Comprehension

Read the following passages and answer the questions that follow :

PASSAGE 1

Midway between Mysore and the coastal town of Mangalore sits a piece of heaven that must have drifted from the kingdom of god. This land of rolling hills is inhabited by a proud race of martial men, beautiful women and wild creatures.

Coorg, or Kodagu, the smallest district of Karnataka, is home to evergreen rainforests, spices and coffee plantations. Evergreen rainforests cover thirty per cent of this district. During the monsoons, it pours enough to keep many visitors away. The season of joy commences from September and continues till March. The weather is perfect, with some showers thrown in for good measure. The air breathes of invigorating coffee. Coffee estates and colonial bungalows stand tucked under tree canopies in prime corners.

Word-meanings :
Coastal =of the coast (तटीय); drifted = carried along (बह जाना); inhabited = resided by (निवासी); canopies = hanging covers (छतरी) |

Questions :

(a) Where is Coorg situated ?
(b) What does the author say about the people of Coorg?
(c) Which crops grow in Coorg in plenty ?
(d) What is the best time of the year to visit Coorg?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘health giving’.
Answers :
(a) Coorg is situated between Mysore and the coastal town of Mangalore.
(b) The author says that the Coorg is inhabited by proud race of martial men and beautiful women.
(c) Spices and coffee grow in Coorg in plenty.
(d) The best period to visit Coorg is between September and March.
(e) ‘invigorating.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

PASSAGE 2

The fiercely independent people of Coorg are possibly of Greek or Arabic descent. As one story goes, a part of Alexander’s army moved south along the coast and settled here when return became impractical. These people married amongst the locals and their-culture is apparent in the martial traditions, marriage and religious rites, which are distinct from the Hindu mainstream. The theory of Arab origin draws support from the long, black coat with an embroidered waist-belt worn by the Kodavus. Known as kuppia, it resembles the kuffia worn by the Arabs and the Kurds.

Word-meanings : Fiercely = great (बहुत अधिक); descent = ancestry (वंश); apparent = clear (स्पष्ट)

Questions :

(a) What does the author say about the descent of the people of Coorg ?.
(b) Why did a part of Alexander’s army settle here?
(c) Which things show that their culture is distinct from the Hindu mainstream ?
(d) What is so similar between the Kodavus and the Arabs ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘different’.
Answers :
(a) The author says that the people of Coorg are possibly of Greek or Arabic descent.
(b) They settled here because their return had become impractical.
(c) Their martial traditions, marriage and religious rites show that they are distinct from the Hindu mainstream.
(d) The long black coat with an embroidered waist-belt known as kuppia or kuffia is so similar to the one worn by the Arabs.
(e) ‘distinct.

PASSAGE 3

Coorgi homes have a tradition of hospitality, and they are more than willing to recount numerous tales of valour related to their sons and fathers. The Coorg Regiment is one of the most decorated in the Indian Army, and the first Chief of Indian Army, General Cariappa, was a Coorgi. Even now, Kodavus are the only people in India permitted to carry firearms without a licence.

The river, Kavery, obtains its water from the hills and forests of Coorg. MaHaseer — a large freshwater fish — abound in these waters. Kingfishers dive for their catch, while squirrels and langurs drop partially eaten fruit for the mischief of enjoying the splash and the ripple effect in the clear water. Elephants enjoy being bathed and scrubbed in the river by their mahouts.

Word-meanings : Hospitality = reception of guests (मेहमान-नवाज़ी); recount = narrate (वर्णन करना) I

Questions :

(a) What kind of tales do the Coorgi people tell their children ?
(b) Which famous Coorgi is mentioned in this paragraph ?
(c) What does the narrator say about the Coorg Regiment ?
(d) Which wild animals are described here ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘many’.
Answers :
(a) They tell them the tales of bravery of their sons and fathers.
(b) The first Chief of Indian Army, General Cariappa, was a Coorgi.
(c) The writer says that Coorg Regiment has won many medals and awards for actions of bravery in battlefields. .
(d) Squirrels, langurs, kingfishers, elephants, etc. are described here. (e) ‘numerous’. .

PASSAGE 4

The climb to the Brahmagiri hills brings you into a panoramic view of the entire misty landscape of Coorg. A walk across the rope bridge leads to the sixty-four acre island of Nisargadhama. Running into Buddhist monks from India’s largest Tibetan settlement, at nearby Bylakuppe, is a bonus. The monks, in red, ochre and yellow robes, are amongst the many surprises that wait to be discovered by visitors searching for the heart and soul of India, right here in Coorg.

Word-meanings : Panoramic = beautiful (सुन्दर); misty = full of mist (धुंध भरा); landscape = land scene (धरती का दृश्य) ; bonus = plus point (अच्छी बात) |

Questions :

(a) Name the chapter and its author.
(b) What view is seen from the Brahmagiri hills?
(c) How can one reach Nisargadhama island?
(d) What is bonus for the visitors who visit Coorg ?
(e) Find words from the passage which mean the same as :
(a) view of wide area of land, (b) full of mist.
Answers :
(a) Chapter : Coorg.
Author : Lokesh Abrol.
(b) A panoramic view of the entire misty landscape of Coorg is seen from the Brahmagiri hills.
(c) One can reach Nisargadhama island having a walk across the rope bridge.
(d) India’s largest Tibetan settlement, at nearby Bylakuppe, is a bonus for the visitors who visit Coorg.
(e) (a) landscape, (b) misty.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Part III. Tea from Assam

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Which state did Pranjol belong to?
Answer:
Pranjol belonged to Assam a North-Eastern State of India.

Question 2.
What was Pranjol’s father?
Answer:
Pranjol’s father was the manager of a tea garden in upper Assam.

Question 3.
Where were Pranjol and Rajvir going ?
Answer:
They were going to Assam to visit Pranjol’s home in summer vacation.

Question 4.
What could Rajvir see as far as his eyes could see?
Answer:
There were tea bushes as far as his eyes could see.

Question 5.
According to Rajvir how many cups of tea are drunk daily throughout the world?
Answer:
According to Rajvir over eighty crore cups of tea are drunk daily throughout the world.

Question 6.
When was tea drunk first in China ?
Answer:
Tea was first drunk in China 2700 B.C.

Question 7.
Where was Pranjol’s father Tea Estate situated ?
Ans.
It was situated at Dhekiabari.

Question 8.
Where was tea first drunk ?
Answer:
Tea was first drunk in China.

Question 9.
Why did Bodhidharma cut off his eyelids?
Answer:
He cut off his eyelids because he felt sleepy during meditations.

Question 10.
When did tea come to Europe ?
Answer:
Tea came to Europe in the sixteenth century.

Question 11.
Who cut off his eyelids?
Answer:
Bodhidharma, an ancient Buddhist ascetic, cut off his eyelids.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Who were Pranjol and Rajvir? Where were they going? (प्रांजल और राजवीर कौन थे? वे कहाँ जा रहे थे?)
Answer:
Pranjol and Rajvir were friends. Pranjol belonged to Assam. He was studying in a school in Delhi. Rajvir was his classmate. Pranjol’s father was the manager of a tea-garden in Upper Assam. Pranjol invited Rajvir to visit his home during the summer vacation. Both of them travelled to Assam in a train.
. (प्रांजल और राजवीर मित्र थे। प्रांजल आसाम का रहने वाला था। वह दिल्ली के एक स्कूल में पढ़ रहा था। राजवीर उसका . एक सहपाठी था। प्रांजल का पिता ऊपरी आसाम के एक चाय-बागान का प्रबंधक था। प्रांजल ने ग्रीष्मावकाश में राजवीर को अपने घर आमंत्रित किया। दोनों ने एक रेलगाड़ी से आसाम की यात्रा की।)

Question 2.
What did Rajvir and Pranjol do after the train pulled out of the station? (जब रेलगाड़ी स्टेशन से बाहर निकली तो राजवीर और प्रांजल ने क्या किया?)
Answer:
When the train pulled out of the station, Pranjol became busy in reading a detective book. Rajvir was looking out of the train. It was green, green everywhere. He had never seen so much greenery before.
(जब रेलगाड़ी स्टेशन से बाहर निकली तो प्रांजल एक जासूसी किताब पढ़ने में व्यस्त हो गया। राजवीर रेलगाड़ी से बाहर देख रहा था। चारों ओर हरा-ही-हरा था। उसने पहले कभी भी इतनी हरियाली नहीं देखी थी।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Question 3.
Which story of a Chinese emperor is associated with the discovery of tea? (चाय की उत्पत्ति के साथ चीनी सम्राट की कौन-सी कहानी जुड़ी हुई है?)
Answer:
According to one legend a Chinese emperor discovered tea by chance. He always boiled water before drinking it. One day a few leaves of the twigs burning under the pot fell into the water. As a result, the boiled water got a delicious flavour. It is said they were tea leaves.
(एक दंत कथा के अनुसार एक चीनी सम्राट् ने संयोगवश ही चाय की खोज कर दी। वह पानी को पीने से पहले हमेशा उबालता था। एक दिन बर्तन के नीचे जल रही टहनियों के कुछ पत्ते पानी में गिर गए। इसके परिणामस्वरूप, उबले हुए पानी से स्वादिष्ट गंध आने लगी। ऐसा कहा जाता है कि वे चाय की पत्तियाँ थीं।)

Question 4.
What is the Indian legend about the discovery of tea?
(चाय की खोज के बारे में भारतीय दंत कथा क्या है?)
OR
What is the Indian legend regarding tea ?
(चाय के बारे में भारतीय दंत कथा क्या है?)
Answer:
According to an Indian legend, Bodhidharma, an ancient Buddhist monk, felt sleep during meditations. So he cut off his eyelids. Ten tea plants grew out of the eyelids. The leaves of these plants when put in hot water and drunk banished sleep.
(एक भारतीय दंत कथा के अनुसार, बोधिधर्म, एक प्राचीन बौद्ध भिक्षुक को समाधि के दौरान नींद आती थी। इसलिए उसने अपनी पलकें काट दीं। इन पलकों पर चाय के दस पौधे उग आए। इन पौधों की पत्तियों को जब गर्म पानी में डालकर पिया गया तो नींद दूर भाग गई।)

Question 5.
Where was tea first drunk? When did tea come to Europe? (चाय पहली बार कहाँ पी गई? चाय यूरोप में कब आई?)
Answer:
It is believed that tea was first drunkinChina in2700 B.C.Words like chai’ and ‘chini areChinese. Tea came to Europe in the sixteenth century. At first it was used more as a medicine than as a beverage.
(ऐसा माना जाता है कि चाय पहली बार 2700 ई० पू० चीन में पी गई। ‘चाय’ और ‘चीनी’ जैसे शब्द चीन से संबंधित हैं। यूरोप में चाय का आगमन सोलहवीं सदी में हुआ। पहले-पहले तो इसका प्रयोग एक पेय पदार्थ की अपेक्षा एक औषधि के रूप में अधिक किया जाता था।)

Question 6.
What is the best season for tea Production? (चाय उत्पादन के लिए सर्वोत्तम मौसम क्या है?).
Answer:
Rajvir and Pranjol reached Assam in the sprouting season. This season lasts from May to July. The best tea is produced during this season.
(राजवीर और प्रांजल चाय के अंकुरण काल में आसाम पहुँचे। यह मौसम मई से जुलाई तक चलता है। इस मौसम के दौरान सर्वोत्तम चाय का उत्पादन होता है।)

Essay Type Question

Question 1.
Where were Pranjol and Rajvir going? What did Rajvir see when he looked out of the train on the way? .
(प्रांजल और राजवीर कहाँ जा रहे थे? जब राजवीर ने रेलगाड़ी से बाहर रास्ते पर देखा तो उसने क्या पाया?)
Answer:
Pranjol belonged to Assam. He was studying in a school in Delhi. Rajvir was his classmate. Pranjol’s father was the manager of a tea-garden in Upper Assam., Pranjol invited Rajvir to visit his home during the summer vacation. Both of them travelled to Assam in a train. When the train stopped on the way at a station, a vendor called, ‘chai-garam … garam-chai, they took tea and started sipping it. Rajvir told Pranjol that over eighty crore cups of tea are drunk every day throughout the world. Pranjol started reading his detective book again. But Rajvir looked out of the window of the moving train. There was beautiful scenery outside. Soon the soft green paddy fields were left behind and there were tea bushes everywhere. Rajvir was fascinated by the magnificent view of tea gardens.

(प्रांजल आसाम का रहने वाला था। वह दिल्ली के एक स्कूल में पढ़ रहा था। राजवीर उसका एक सहपाठी था। प्रांजल का पिता ऊपरी आसाम के एक चाय-बागान का प्रबंधक था। प्रांजल ने ग्रीष्मावकाश में राजवीर को अपने घर आमंत्रित किया। दोनों ने एक रेलगाड़ी से आसाम की यात्रा की। जब रेलगाड़ी रास्ते में एक स्टेशन पर रुकी तो एक फेरीवाले ने आवाज़ लगाई “चाय-गर्म, गर्म-चाय……”। उन्होंने चाय ली और पीना शुरु कर दिया। राजवीर ने प्रांजल को बताया कि पूरे विश्व में हर रोज 80 करोड़ से भी ज्यादा कप चाय पी जाती है। प्रांजल फिर से अपनी जासूसी किताब पढ़ने लग जाता है। लेकिन राजवीर चल रही गाड़ी की खिड़की से बाहर देखता है। बाहर सुंदर दृश्य था। शीघ्र ही धान के हरे-भरे खेत पीछे रह गए और चारों ओर चाय की झाड़ियाँ थीं। चाय के बागों के शानदार दृश्यों को देखकर राजवीर आकर्षित हो रहा था।)

Question 2.
What did Rajvir tell Pranjol about the discovery of tea ? (राजवीर ने प्रांजल को चाय की खोज के बारे में क्या बताया?)
Answer:
Rajvir said that no one really knows who discovered tea. He told Pranjol that there were many legends attached to discovery of tea. According to one story a Chinese emperor discovered tea by chance. He always boiled water before drinking it. One day a few leaves of the twigs burning under the pot fell into the water. As a result, the boiled water got a delicious flavour. It is said they were tea leaves. According to another Indian legend, Bodhidharma, an ancient Buddhist monk, felt sleep during meditations. So he cut off his eyelids. Ten tea plants grew out of the eyelids. The leaves of these plants when put in hot water and drunk banished sleep. It is believed that tea was first drunk in China in 2700 B.C. Words like ‘chai’ and ‘chini’ are Chinese. Tea came to Europe in the sixteenth century. At first it was used more as a medicine than as a beverage.

(राजवीर ने कहा कि वास्तव में कोई नहीं जानता कि चाय की खोज किसने की। उसने प्रांजल को बताया कि चाय की खोज के बारे में दंत कथाएँ प्रचलित हैं। एक दंत कथा के अनुसार एक चीनी सम्राट् ने संयोगवश ही चाय की खोज कर दी। वह पानी को पीने से पहले हमेशा उबालता था। एक दिन बर्तन के नीचे जल रही टहनियों के कुछ पत्ते पानी में गिर गए। इसके परिणामस्वरूप उबले हुए पानी से स्वादिष्ट गंध आने लगी। ऐसा कहा जाता है कि वे चाय की पत्तियाँ थीं। एक दूसरी भारतीय दंत कथा के अनुसार, बोधिधर्म, एक प्राचीन बौद्ध भिक्षुक, को समाधि के दौरान, नींद आती थी। इसलिए उसने अपनी पलकें काट दीं। इन पलकों पर चाय के दस पौधे उग आए। इन पौधों की पत्तियों को जब गर्म पानी में डालकर पिया गया तो नींद दूर भाग गई। ऐसा माना जाता है कि चाय पहली बार 2700 ई० पू० चीन में पी गई। ‘चाय’ और ‘चीनी’ जैसे शब्द चीन से संबंधित हैं। यूरोप में चाय का आगमन सोलहवीं सदी में हुआ। पहले-पहले तो इसका प्रयोग एक पेय पदार्थ की अपेक्षा एक औषधि के रूप में अधिक किया जाता था।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which state did Pranjol belong to ?
(A) Assam
(B) Goa
(C) Karnataka
(D) Delhi
Answer:
(A) Assam

Question 2.
Pranjol and Rajvir were student in a school in :
(A) Dhekiabari
(B) Mariani
(C) Delhi
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(C) Delhi

Question 3.
Pranjol and Rajvir go to Assam by :
(A) air
(B) train
(C) taxi
(D) ship
Answer:
(B) train

Question 4.
Assam is famous for the production of :
(A) tea
(B) coffee
(C) bread
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(A) tea

Question 5.
Tea was first drunk in ………..
(A) China
(B) Europe
(C) India
(D) America
Answer:
(A) China

Question 6.
What was Pranjol’s father ?
(A) a bank manager
(B) a school manager
(C) a tea-garden manager
(D) a transport manager
Answer:
(C) a tea-garden manager

Question 7.
Tea came to Europe in ……………………. century.
(A) fifteenth
(B) sixteenth
(C) seventeenth
(D) eighteenth
Answer:
(B) sixteenth

Question 8.
Tea was first drunk in China in :
(A) 2000 B.C
(B) 2300 B.C
(C) 2700 B.C
(D) 3100 B.C
Answer:
(C) 2700 B.C

Question 9.
How many cups of tea are drunk across the world daily?
(A) eighty thousand
(B) eighty lakh
(C) eighty crore
(D) eighty million
Answer:
(C) eighty crore

Question 10.
Tea was mainly drunk in Europe as ……..
(A) medicine
(B) sleep banishing drink
(C) soft drink
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(A) medicine

Tea from Assam Important Passages for Comprehension

Read the following passages and answer the questions that follow :

PASSAGE 1

The train pulled out of the station. Pranjol buried his nose in his detective book again. Rajvir too was an ardent fan of detective stories, but at the moment he was keener on looking at the beautiful scenery.
It was green, green everywhere. Rajvir had never seen so much greenery before. Then the soft green paddy fields gave way to tea bushes.
It was a magnificent view. Against the backdrop of densely wooded hills a sea of tea bushes stretched as far as the eye could see. Dwarfing the tiny tea plants were tall sturdy shade-trees and amidst the orderly rows of bushes busily moved doll-like figures. In the distance was an ugly building with smoke billowing out of tall chimneys.

Word-meanings : Pulled out = came out (बाहर आना); detective = suspenseful (जासूसी); dwarfing = making others look small (छोटा करते हुए)।

Questions :

(a) What was Rajvir looking at?
(b) What kind of a scenery was it ?
(c) What was there as far as the eye could see?
(d) What was there in the distance ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘spread’.
Answers:
(a) Rajvir was looking at the beautiful scenery outside.
(b) The scenery was very beautiful. There was greenery everywhere.
(c) There were tea bushes as far as the eye could see.
(d) In the distance there was an ugly building with smoke coming out of its chimney.
(e) ‘stretched’.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

PASSAGE 2

“I have been reading as much as I could about tea,” Rajvir said. “No one really knows who discovered tea but there are many legends.”
“What legends?”
“Well, there’s the one about the Chinese emperor who always boiled water before drinking it. One day a few leaves of the twigs burning under the pot fell into the water giving it a delicious flavour. It is said they were tea-leaves.”
“Tell me another !” scoffed Pranjol.“We have an Indian legend too. Bodhidharma, an ancient Buddhist ascetic, cut off his eyelids because he felt sleepy during meditations. Ten tea plants grew out of the eyelids. The leaves of these plants when put in hot water and drunk banished sleep.

Word-meanings : legends = myths (किवदंतियाँ); twigs = branches (टहनियाँ); delicious = tasty (स्वादिष्ट)।

Questions :

(a) What kind of water did the Chinese emperor drink?
(b) What happened when a few leaves of the twigs fell into the water kept for boiling ?
(c) What did Bodhidharma cut off his eyelids ?
(d) What banished sleep ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘tasty’.
Answers :
(a) He drank boiled water.
(b) The water got a delicious flavour.
(c) He cut off his eyelids because he felt sleepy during meditations.
(d) The tea leaves when put in hot water and drunk banished sleep.
(e) delicious’.

PASSAGE 3

We have an Indian legend too. Bodhidharma, an ancient Buddhist ascetic, cut off his eyelids because he felt sleepy during meditations. Ten tea plants grew out of the eyelids. The leaves of these plants when put in hot water and drunk banished sleep.

“Tea was first drunk in China,” Rajvir added, “as far as 2700 B.C.! In fact words such as tea, chai and chini are from Chinese. Tea came to Europe only in the sixteenth century and was drunk more as medicine than as beverage.”

Word-meanings : Meditation = deep thought (साधना चिन्तन); ascetic = monk (भिक्षु); banished = put off (दूर करना); beverage = a drink (पेय) |

Questions :

(a) Who cut off his eyelids and why?
(b) What kind of plants grew out of the eyelids?
(c) When was tea first drunk in China? When did it come to Europe?
(d) What purpose was tea drunk in Europe for?
(e) Find from the passage words that means :
(i) a story from the past that may or may not be true
(ii) any type of drink except water
Answers :
(a) Bodhidharma cut off his eyelids because he felt sleepy during meditation.
(b) Tea plants grew out of the eyelids.
(c) Tea was first drunk in China in 2700 B.C. Tea came to Europe in the sixteenth century.
(d) Tea was drink in Europe as medicine.
(e) (i) legend, (ii) beverage

A Baker From cha pater name Goa Summary

A Baker From Goa Introduction in English

This is a pen-portrait of a traditional Goan village baker who still has an important place in the society. What changes take place in the life of the baker with the passage of time a glimpse is presented in this extract.

A Baker From Goa Summary in English

In this extract, the author remembers his old days in Goa when the village baker occupied an important place in life. Although, with the passage of time, people do not eat so much bread, yet the village bakers are still there. The Portuguese were famous for preparing the loaves of bread. They left Goa long ago. But the traditional work of the bakers can still be seen in Goa. The furnaces in which the bread was baked still exist there. The sound of the traditional baker’s bamboo can still be heard. Someone in the baker’s family still carries on the business and the tradition. These bakers are known as Pader in Goa even today.

The author recalls that a baker used to visit the village twice a day. He used to be the author’s friend and guide. He used to carry a bamboo stick. The sound of this stick used to wake up the authors and others from sleep. The servants from the different houses bought loaves. But the author ran to the baker for buying breadbangles.

The baker’s bamboo stick was a special one. He made the sound “jhang, jhang’ by banging his bamboo on the ground. With one hand the baker supported the basket of bread on his head and with the other he struck the ground with the bamboo. Whenever, someone came to him buy bread, he placed the basket on the bamboo. The author and the others looked into his basket. In those times, it was a fashion to eat bread with hot tea. The author was so fond of bread that he would not even brush his teeth before eating it.

The village baker was specially important for all occasions. The villagers were much fond of the sweet bread known as ‘Bol’. Marriage gifts were meaningless without these sweet breads. Sandwiches, cakes and bolinhas were a must for Christmas as well as other festivals. These were made with the bread. Thus the presence of a baker’s furnace was very essential in each village. On all occasions the villagers needed one or another type of cake which could be baked in the furnace.

The baker or the bread-seller wore a special, peculiar dress. It was known as the “kabai’. It was a singlepiece long frock. It reached down to his knees. During narrator’s childhood, Bakers wore trousers which were shorter than full-length and longer than half pants. Even today if someone wears a half pant, he is said to be dressed like a pader.

The baker usually collected his bills at the end of the month. In the household, the baker’s monthly accounts used to be recorded on some wall in pencil. Baking was a profitable business in those days. The bakers used to be well off. Their families never starved. Their plump bodies showed that they were happy.

A Baker From Goa Introduction in Hindi

(गोआ के एक परम्परागत गाँव के बेकर, जिसका वहाँ के समाज में अभी भी एक महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान है, का इस पाठ में पैन-चित्रण किया गया है। समय के बीतने के साथ-साथ उस बेकर के जीवन में क्या परिवर्तन आते हैं, इसकी एक झलक इस पाठ में दी गई है।)

A Baker From Goa Summary in Hindi

इस अंश में लेखक गोआ में अपने पुराने दिनों को याद करता है जब गाँव का बेकर (पावरोटी आदि बनाने वाला) जीवन में एक महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान रखता था। यद्यपि, समय के बीतने के साथ लोग अब इतनी अधिक पावरोटी नहीं खाते, मगर गाँव में बेकर अब भी हैं। पुर्तगाली लोग पावरोटी बनाने के लिए प्रसिद्ध थे। वे गोआ को बहुत पहले ही छोड़ गए। मगर गोआ में बेकर के परम्परागत काम को अब भी देखा जा सकता है। वे भट्ठियाँ जिनमें पावरोटी बनाई जाती थी अब भी वहाँ विद्यमान हैं। परम्परागत बेकरों की बाँस की छड़ी की आवाज़ को अभी भी सुना जा सकता है। बेकर के परिवार में से कोई-न-कोई अभी भी उस व्यवसाय और परम्परा को आगे बढ़ाए हुए है। गोआ में इन बेकरों को आज भी पेदर कहा जाता है।

लेखक याद करता है कि एक बेकर गाँव में रोज दो बार आता था। वह लेखक का मित्र एवं पथ-प्रदर्शक होता था। उसने बाँस की एक छड़ी उठाई होती थी। इस छड़ी की आवाज़ से लेखक और अन्य लोग नींद से जाग जाते थे। अलग-अलग घरों के नौकर पावरोटी खरीदते थे। मगर लेखक पावगजरों को खरीदने के लिए बेकर के पास भाग जाया करता था।

बेकर की बाँस की छड़ी विशेष होती थी। उस बाँस को ज़मीन पर पटककर वह ‘बैंग-बैंग’ की आवाज़ पैदा करता था। बेकर एक हाथ से अपने सिर पर पावरोटी की टोकरी को सहारा देता था और दूसरे से वह बाँस को ज़मीन पर पटकता था। जब भी कोई उसके पास पावरोटी खरीदने के लिए आता था तो वह टोकरी को बाँस पर रखता था। लेखक और अन्य लोग उसकी टोकरी में देखते थे। उन दिनों में गरम चाय के साथ पावरोटी खाने का रिवाज़ था। लेखक पावरोटी का इतना शौकीन था कि वह इसे खाने से पहले अपने दाँत भी साफ नहीं करता था।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

गाँव का बेकर प्रत्येक अवसर पर विशेष तौर पर महत्त्वपूर्ण होता था। गाँव वाले उस मीठी पावरोटी, जिसे ‘बोल’ कहा जाता था, के विशेष शौकीन थे। इन मीठी पावरोटियों के बिना शादी के उपहारों का कोई अर्थ नहीं था। क्रिसमस एवं अन्य त्योहारों पर सैंडविच, केक और बोलिनाह बहुत जरूरी होते थे। ये पावरोटी से बनाए जाते थे। इस प्रकार बेकर की भट्ठी का प्रत्येक गाँव में होना बहुत आवश्यक था। सभी अवसरों पर गाँव वालों को किसी-न-किसी प्रकार के केक की जरूरत होती थी जिसे भट्ठी में बनाया जाता था।

बेकर या पावरोटी बेचने वाला एक विशेष प्रकार की पोशाक पहनता था। इसे ‘कबाई’ कहा जाता था। यह एक ही टुकड़े की लम्बी फ्रॉक होता था, यह उसके घुटनों तक आता था। लेखक के बचपन के दिनों में बेकर ऐसी पैन्टें पहनते थे जो पूरी लम्बी पैन्ट से छोटी होती थीं और आधी लंबाई की पैन्ट से लम्बी होती थीं। आज भी अगर कोई आधी लंबाई की पैन्ट पहनता है तो कहा जाता है कि उसने पेडर जैसे कपड़े पहने हैं। बेकर अपना बिल आमतौर पर महीने के अन्त में लेता था। घर में बेकर के महीने भर के हिसाब को किसी दीवार पर पेन्सिल से लिखा जाता था। उन दिनों में पावरोटी बनाना फायदे का कारोबार था। बेकर लोग समृद्ध होते थे। उनके परिवार कभी भी भूखे नहीं रहते थे। उनके मोटे शरीर इस बात को दर्शाते थे कि वे प्रसन्न हैं।

A Baker From Goa Word-Meanings

[PAGE 85] : Traditional = conventional (परम्परागत); baker = one who bakes bread (पावरोटी आदि बनाने वाला); reminiscing = remembering (याद करना); nostalgically = fondly (स्नेह से); loaves = pieces of bread (पावरोटी); vanished = disappeared (गायब हो गया); moulders = those who mould (फफूंद बनाने वाले); exist = being still there (मौजूद होना); furnaces = ovens (भट्ठियाँ); extinguished = put out (बुझा देना); thud and jingle = falling sound along with musical sound (गिरने की संगीतमय आवाज़ के साथ)।

[PAGE 86] : Heralding = announcing (घोषणा करना); carries on = continues (जारी रखना); profession = occupation (व्यवसाय); pader = a kind of baker (एक प्रकार का बेकर); longed = wished (इच्छा की); staff = a long stick (लम्बी छड़ी); supported = helped (सहारा देना); banged = beat with (ठक-ठक करना); greet= welcome (स्वागत करना); vertical = straight (सीधी); mild = light (हल्का ); rebuke = chide (डाँटना); parapet = wall on the edge of roof (मुंडेर); peep = see (देखना); fragrance = smell (सुगन्ध)।

[PAGE 87] : Feast = grand party (प्रीतिभोज, दावत); absolutely = completely (पूरी तरह); peculiar = strange (विचित्र); starved = die of hunger (भूख से मरना); prosperous = well to do (खुशहाल); plump = having a soft round body (गोल मटोल); testimony = statement (कथन, सबूत); jackfruit = a kind of vegetable (कटहल)। .

A Baker From Goa Translation in Hindi

गोआ से एक बेकर

[PAGES 85-86] : यह गोआ के एक परम्परागत गाँव के बेकर का पैन से किया गया चित्रण है जिसका समाज में अभी भी महत्त्वपूर्ण स्थान है।
हमारे पूर्वजों को प्रायः पुर्तगाल शासन के उन पुराने अच्छे दिनों को शौक के साथ याद करते हुए सुना जाता है, पुर्तगालियों और उनकी प्रसिद्ध पावरोटियों को। उन पांवरोटियों को खाने वाले तो लुप्त हो गए हैं, परन्तु बनाने वाले अभी वहीं पर हैं। हमारे बीच में अब भी मिश्रण तैयार करने वाले, साँचों में ढालने वाले और उन्हें पकाने वाले अभी भी विद्यमान हैं। वे युगों पुरानी समय की कसौटी पर खरी उतरने वाली भट्टियाँ अभी भी हैं। उन भट्टियों की आग अभी तक बुझाई नहीं जा सकी है। बेकर की परम्परागत धानी की संगीतमय आवाज़ अभी भी बंद नहीं हुई है, जो प्रातःकाल के आगमन की उद्घोषणा करती है और कुछ स्थानों पर अभी भी सुनाई देती है। इन बेकरों को गोआ में अभी भी पेदरों के नाम से जाना जाता है।

[PAGE 86] : गोआ में हमारे बचपन के दौरान, बेकर हमारा मित्र (साथी और मार्गदर्शक) हुआ करता था। वह दिन में कम-से-कम दो बार आता था। एक बार जब वह सुबह के समय अपनी बिक्री की फेरी पर आता था तब और दूसरी बार तब, जब वह अपनी बहुत बड़ी टोकरी को खाली करके आता था। उसकी धानी (बाँस) की संगीतमय आवाज़ करती झंकार हमें नींद से जगा देती थी और हम उससे मिलने और उसका स्वागत करने के लिए भागते थे। ऐसा क्यों था? क्या यह पावरोटियों के प्रति प्यार के कारण था? बिल्कुल भी नहीं। पावरोटियाँ तो घर की नौकरानी पेस्किन या बेस्टिन के द्वारा लाई जाती थीं। जिस चीज़ की हमें इच्छा होती थी वे पावगजरे थे जिनका हम बड़ी सावधानी के साथ चयन करते थे। कई बार तो वह एक मीठी पावरोटी होती थी।

बेकर उस दृश्य पर अपना संगीतमय प्रवेश विशेष रूप से बनाई गई बाँस की लम्बी छड़ी की ‘झंग-झंग’ जैसी आवाज़ के साथ करता था। उसका एक हाथ सिर पर टोकरी को थामे रखता था और दूसरा ज़मीन पर बाँस को ठक-ठक मारता रहता था। वह ‘प्रातःकाल’ के साथ घर की महिला का अभिवादन किया करता था और तब अपने लम्बवत् बाँस (धानी) के ऊपर टोकरी को रख देता था। बच्चों को एक हल्की-सी डाँट के साथ दूर कर दिया जाता था और पावरोटियाँ नौकरों को सौंप दी जाती थीं। लेकिन हम हार नहीं मानते थे। हम किसी बेंच या मुंडेर पर चढ़ जाते और किसी-न-किसी तरह उसकी टोकरी के अंदर झाँकते। मैं अब भी उन पावरोटियों की विशिष्ट गंध को महसूस कर सकता हूँ। बड़ों के लिए पावरोटियाँ और बच्चों के लिए गजरे। उस समय हम अपने दाँतों को ब्रश से साफ करने या अपना मुँह धोने की भी परवाह नहीं किया करते थे। और करते भी क्यों? दाँतों के ब्रश के लिए आम के पत्तों को तोड़ने का कष्ट कौन करता? और यह किसी भी तरह से जरूरी क्यों था? बाघ कभी भी अपने दाँतों पर ब्रश नहीं करता है। गर्म चाय इन्हें अच्छी तरह से धो देती थी और साफ़ कर देती थी।

[PAGE 87] : मीठी पावरोटी जो ‘बोल’ के नाम से जानी जाती है शादी के उपहार निरर्थक हैं, उसी प्रकार के जैसे कोई पार्टी या दावत पावरोटी के बिना। इस बात को व्यक्त करने के लिए कि गाँव के लिए बेकर कितना महत्त्वपूर्ण होता है पर्याप्त नहीं कहा जा सकता है। घर की मालकिन को अपनी बेटी की सगाई पर सैंडविच अवश्य तैयार करने होते हैं। क्रिसमस और अन्य त्योहारों के लिए केक और बोलिनाह जरूरी होते हैं। इस प्रकार से गाँव में बेकर की भट्टी की उपस्थिति अति आवश्यक है।

उन दिनों में बेकर अथवा पावरोटी-विक्रेता की एक विशेष पोशाक हुआ करती थी जिसे कबाई कहा जाता था। यह एक ही कपड़े से बनी लंबी फ्रॉक होती थी जो घुटनों तक आती थी। अपने समय में हमने बेकरों को कमीज और पैंट पहने देखा था जोकि पूरी लंबाई की पैंट से छोटी होती थी और आधी लंबाई की पैंट से लम्बी होती थी। यहाँ तक कि अगर आज भी कोई घुटनों से नीचे तक की निक्कर पहनता है तो उस पर यह टिप्पणी होती है कि उसने पेदर जैसी पोशाक पहन रखी है।

प्रायः महीने के अंत में बेकर अपनी वसूली किया करता था। महीने का हिसाब किसी दीवार पर पेंसिल के साथ लिख दिया जाता था। पुराने दिनों में बेकर का धन्धा सचमुच लाभकारी होता था। बेकर और उसका परिवार कभी भूखे नहीं मरते थे। वह, उसका परिवार और उसके नौकर हमेशा खुश और खुशहाल नज़र आते थे। उनका गोल-मटोल शरीर इस बात का खुला प्रमाण हुआ करता था। यदि आज भी देखने में कोई व्यक्ति कटहल जैसा शरीर रखता है तो उसकी तुलना आसानी से एक बेकर के साथ की जा सकती है।

Coorg Summary

Coorg Introduction in English

Coorg is a coffee producing area in Karnataka State of India. It is situated midway between Mysore and the coastal town of Mangalore. This land is famous for it rainforests and spices.

Coorg Summary in English

Coorg is a small district of Karnataka. It is known as Kodagu also. Coorg lies between the coastal town of Mangalore and Mysore. It is a very beautiful place. The writer says that it must have come from the kingdom of God. It is the smallest district of Karnataka.

Coorg is famous for its coffee plantations, evergreen rainforests and spices. Thirty per cent of its area is covered with the evergreen rainforests. The best season to visit this place is from September to March. The weather is perfect. The air is full of coffee flavour. There are beautiful colonial bungalows in prime corners.

The people of Coorg are independent and brave. They are of Greek or Arabic descent. According to a story, a part of Alexander’s army did not return and was settled here. They married among the locals. This culture can be seen in the martial traditions, marriage and religious customs. Another theory says that these people originated from the Arabs. It is evident from the long, black coat worn by the people. It is like the kuffia worn by the Arabs and the Kurds.
Coorgi homes have a tradition of hospitality. They are brave people. Their tales of bravery are famous. The Coorg regiment is one of the most decorated in the Indian Army. The first Chief of the Indian Army, General Cariappa, was a Coorgi. Even today, the Kodavus are the only people in India who are allowed to carry firearms without licence.

There are a variety of natural scenes which can be enjoyed by the tourists. Kaveri, the only river of the area, gets its water from Coorgi hill. This river is full of Mahaseer, a large freshwater fish. One can see elephants, kingfishers, squirrels and langurs enjoying themselves in the lap of nature. Birds, bees and butterflies give one a good company here. Elephants enjoy being bathed here by their mahouts. The river and mountain offer various adventurous games like river rafting, canoeing, rappelling, rock climbing and mountain biking. The trekkers find numerous walking trails in this area. From the Brahmagiri hills one can enjoy a panoramic view of the entire landscape of Coorg. There is a sixty-four acre island of Nisargadhama near by. It can be reached through a ropebridge. Buddhist monks are settled in Bylakuppe which is very close to this place. Their red, ochre and yellow robes are very attractive to look at.

Coorg Introduction in Hindi

(कुर्ग भारत के कर्नाटक राज्य का कॉफी उत्पादक क्षेत्र है। यह मैसूर और तटीय शहर मंगलौर के मध्य मार्ग में स्थित है। यह क्षेत्र वर्षा वनों और मसालों के उत्पादन के लिए प्रसिद्ध है।)

Coorg Summary in Hindi

कुर्ग कर्नाटक का एक छोटा-सा ज़िला है। इसे कोडागु भी कहा जाता है। यह तटीय शहर मंगलौर और मैसूर के बीच पड़ता है। यह एक बहुत सुन्दर स्थान है। लेखक कहता है कि यह अवश्य ही भगवान् के प्रदेश से आया होगा। यह कर्नाटक का सबसे छोटा ज़िला है।
कुर्ग अपने कॉफी के बागानों, सदाबहार जंगलों और मसालों के लिए प्रसिद्ध है। इस इलाके का तीस प्रतिशत भाग सदाबहार जंगलों से ढका हुआ है। इस इलाके में आने का सबसे अच्छा मौसम सितम्बर और मार्च के बीच में है। मौसम एकदम सही है। हवा कॉफी की सुगन्ध से भरी हुई है। हर सुन्दर कोने में सुन्दर अंग्रेजों के जमाने के बंगले हैं।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

कुर्ग के लोग स्वतन्त्र और बहादुर हैं। वे यूनानी या अरब वंश के हैं। एक कहानी के अनुसार, सिकन्दर की सेना का एक भाग वापस नहीं लौटा और यहीं पर बस गया। उन्होंने स्थानीय लोगों के बीच शादियाँ कर लीं। यह संस्कृति बहादुरी के रीति-रिवाज़ों, शादी और धार्मिक कार्यक्रमों में नज़र आती है। एक अन्य सिद्धांत कहता है कि ये लोग अरबों के वंशज हैं। यह बात इन लोगों द्वारा पहने जाने वाले लम्बे कोटों से झलकती है। ये कोट अरबों और कुर्ड लोगों द्वारा पहने जाने वाले कुफिया की तरह होते हैं।

कुर्गी-घरों में मेहमान-नवाजी की परम्परा है। वे लोग बहादुर हैं। उनकी बहादुरी के किस्से प्रसिद्ध हैं। कुर्ग रेजिमेन्ट भारतीय सेना में सबसे अधिक सम्मानित रेजिमेन्ट है। भारतीय सेना का पहला चीफ, जनरल करियप्पा एक कुर्गी था। आज भी कोडावु भारत के एकमात्र ऐसे लोग हैं जिन्हें बिना लायसेन्स के आग्नेयास्त्र रखने की अनुमति है।

यहाँ बहुत-से प्राकृतिक नज़ारे हैं, पर्यटक जिनका आनन्द ले सकते हैं। इस इलाके की एकमात्र नदी कावेरी को अपना पानी कुर्ग की पहाड़ियों से मिलता है। यह नदी ताजे पानी की मछली महासीर से भरी है। यहाँ पर हाथी, किंगफिशर, गिलहरियाँ और लंगूर प्रकृति का आनन्द उठाते हुए देखे जा सकते हैं। यहाँ पक्षी, मधुमक्खियाँ और तितलियाँ अच्छी संगत देती हैं। हाथी अपने महावतों द्वारा नहलाए जाने का आनन्द लेते हैं। नदी और पर्वत रोमांचकारी खेलों, जैसेकि रिवर रैफ्टिंग (रेफ्ट किश्ती में सफर), नौका विहार, रैपेलिंग, पर्वतारोहण और पर्वत हाइकिंग का अवसर प्रदान करते हैं। भ्रमणकारियों को इस इलाके में कई अच्छे रास्ते मिलते हैं। ब्रह्मगिरि की पहाड़ियों से व्यक्ति कुर्ग के सारे इलाके का मनोरम दृश्य देख सकता है। पास में ही चौंसठ एकड़ का निसर्गधाम नाम का द्वीप है। इस तक रस्से के एक पुल द्वारा जाया जा सकता है। बाइलाकुपे में बौद्ध भिक्षु बसे हुए हैं जोकि पास में ही है। उनके लाल, गेरुए और पीले पहनावे देखने में बहुत आकर्षक लगते हैं।

Coorg Word-Meanings

[PAGE 90] : Coastal = of the coast (तटीय); drifted = carried along (बह जाना); inhabited = resided by (निवासी); martial= concerning war (युद्ध-सम्बन्धी); wild = untamed, natural (जंगली); spices = condiments (मसाले); plantations = big fields (बड़े खेत, बागान); pours = rains (बरसात); commences = begins (आरम्भ होना); showers = rains (बरसात); invigorating = strength giving (शक्ति देने वाला); tucked = placed (रखा पड़ा); canopies = hanging covers (छतरी); prime = of the best quality (सर्वोत्तम); fiercely = (here) great (बहुत अधिक); descent = ancestry (वंश); apparent = clear (स्पष्ट); religious rites = religious ceremony (धार्मिक रिवाज़); distinct = separate (अलग); origin = lineage (वंश)।

[PAGE 91] : Embroidered = work of needle and thread (कढ़ाई का काम); resembles = being similar (शक्ल का मिलना); hospitality = reception of guests (मेहमान-नवाज़ी); recount = narrate (वर्णन करना); numerous = many (कई); valour = bravery (बहादुरी); most decorated = most rewarded (सबसे अधिक पुरस्कृत); firearms = weapons, etc. (हथियार आदि); abound in = be in plenty (प्रचुरता में); partially = in part (आंशिक); ripple =round waves formed in water (लहरें); scrubbed = rubbed (रगड़ना); mahout = man who controls the elephant (महावत); converts = people who change (लोग जो बदल जाते हैं); adventure = risky work (जोखिम भरा काय); rafting = sailing in a raft (रेफ्ट किश्ती में सफर करना); canoeing = sailing in a canoe (नौका विहार); rappelling = going down a cliff by a rope (रस्सी के सहारे सीधी चट्टान से उतरना)।

[PAGE 92] : Trails = paths for walking (चलने के रास्ते); region = area (इलाका); trekkers = those who undertake walking tours (भ्रमणकारी); macaques = monkeys (बंदर); squirrels = a kind of animal (गिलहरियाँ); langurs = a,kind of monkey (लंगूर); panoramic = beautiful (सुन्दर); misty = full of mist (धुंध भरा); landscape = land scene (धरती का दृश्य); settlement = place of residence (रहने का स्थान); bonus = plus point (अच्छी बात); monks = mendicants (भिक्षु); ochre = a colour (गेरुआ, भगवा रंग); robes = dresses (पोशाक)।

Coorg Translation in Hindi

कुर्ग कॉफी, वर्षा वनों और मसालों के लिए प्रसिद्ध देश है।

[PAGES 90-91] : मैसूर और तटीय नगर मंगलौर के मध्य मार्ग में स्वर्ग का एक भाग रखा है जोकि भगवान के राज्य से कहीं भटककर आ गया है। उतार-चढ़ाव वाली पहाड़ियों का यह क्षेत्र वीर पुरुषों, सुन्दर स्त्रियों तथा वन्य जीवों का निवास स्थान है।

कुर्ग अथवा कोडागु, कर्नाटक का सबसे छोटा ज़िला सदाबहार वनों, मसालों और कॉफी के बागानों का घर है। इस जिले के 30 प्रतिशत क्षेत्र पर सदाबहार वन हैं। मानसून के दौरान यहाँ इतनी ज्यादा वर्षा होती है कि बहुत-से पर्यटक स्वयं को यहाँ से दूर ही रखते हैं। खुशियों का मौसम सितम्बर से शुरु होकर मार्च तक चलता है। मौसम हर तरह से ठीक रहता है, कभी कुछ ज्यादा वर्षा भी हो जाती है। हवा में शक्ति-वर्धक कॉफी की गंध भरी होती है। कॉफी पैदा करने वाले क्षेत्र तथा औपनिवेशिक काल के बंगले अति सुन्दर कोनों में वृक्ष रूपी छतरों के नीचे सुरक्षित खड़े नज़र आते हैं।

आक्रामक रूप से स्वतंत्र रहने वाले कुर्ग लोग संभवतया यूनानी या अरबी लोगों के वंशज हैं। एक कहानी के अनुसार सिकन्दर की सेना तट के साथ-साथ दक्षिण की ओर चली गई और जब वापसी असंभव हो गई तो वे लोग यहीं पर बस गए। इन लोगों ने स्थानीय लोगों में शादियाँ कर ली और इनकी संस्कृति सैनिक परम्पराओं, शादी और धार्मिक रीतियों में साफ दिखाई देती है, जो कि हिन्दू धर्म की मुख्य धारा से अलग है। अरबी वंश से उत्पत्ति के सिद्धांत को उनके लम्बे, काले कोट, जिस पर कढ़ाई वाली कमर-पेटी, जिसे कोडावु लोग पहनते हैं, से पता चलता है, कुपिया के नाम से प्रसिद्ध यह कुफ़िया जैसा लगता है, जिसे अरबी और कुर्द लोग पहनते हैं। .

[PAGE 91] : कुर्गी घरों में अति सत्कार की एक परंपरा है, और वे अपने बेटों तथा पिताओं की वीरता की कहानियों को सुनाने के लिए सदा तत्पर रहते हैं। कुर्ग रेजिमेंट भारतीय सेना की सबसे अधिक सुसज्जित रेजिमेंट है और भारतीय सेना का पहला मुखिया, जनरल करियप्पा एक कुर्गी था। आज भी भारत में कोडावु एकमात्र ऐसे लोग हैं, जिन्हें बिना लाइसेंस के आग्नेयास्त्र रखने की अनुमति है।

कावेरी नदी पहाड़ियों और कुर्ग के जंगलों से इस क्षेत्र का जल हासिल करती है। महासीर जो कि ताजे पानी की एक मछली है इस क्षेत्र में बहुत अधिक संख्या में पाई जाती है। राम चिरैया पक्षी अपना शिकार करने के लिए इसमें गोते लगाते हैं, जबकि गिलहरियाँ और लंगूर आधे खाए हुए फलों को इसमें गिराकर पानी की छपाक और छोटी-छोटी उठने वाली तरंगों का आनन्द लेते हैं। हाथी नदी में अपने महावतों के द्वारा नहलाए जाने और रगड़े जाने का आनन्द लेते हैं।

सबसे अधिक शांत स्वभाव वाले लोग भी बहुत ताकत वाले साहसिक कारनामें अपना लेते हैं जैसेकि नदी में रैफ्टिंग करना, नौका चलाना, रस्सियों के सहारे पहाड़ी पर चढ़ना-उतरना, चट्टानों पर चढ़ना और पर्वतारोहण करना। इन क्षेत्रों में अनेकों पगडंडियाँ पैदल चलने वालों की सबसे अधिक पसन्द वाली चीज़ हैं।

[PAGE 92] : यहाँ पर पक्षी, मधुमक्खियाँ और तितलियाँ आपकी संगति करने के लिए विद्यमान हैं। अफ्रीकी लंगूर, मालबारी गिलहरियाँ, लंगूर और पतले तोते वृक्षों के छत्रों में बैठे हुए आपको बड़े गौर से देखते रहते हैं। लेकिन जंगली हाथियों को देखने के लिए मैं एक तरफ होकर चलना पसन्द करता हूँ।

ब्रह्मगिरी पहाड़ियों की चढ़ाई करने के पश्चात् आप कुर्ग के सम्पूर्ण धुंधले भू-दृश्य का अवलोकन कर सकते हो। रस्सियों से बने एक पुल को पैदल पार करके आप चौंसठ एकड़ क्षेत्र में बने निसर्गधाम द्वीप पर पहुँच जाते हो। वहाँ पर भारत की सबसे बड़ी तिब्बती (बस्ती बाइलाकुप्पे) में भिक्षुकों से अचानक भेंट हो जाने पर आपको अतिरिक्त प्रसन्नता का लाभ प्राप्त हो जाता है। लाल, गेरुए और पीले परिधान पहने हुए भिक्षुक जो बहुत-से अजूबों के मध्य में हैं, जो आगन्तुकों द्वारा भारत की आत्मा और दिल की टोह की प्रतीक्षा करते हैं, यहाँ पर वे कुर्ग में ही हैं।

तथ्य संचिका
कैसे पहुँचा जाए
मादीकेरी, जिला मुख्यालय कुर्ग का केवल मात्र एक प्रवेशद्वार है। रहस्यमयी पहाड़ियों, हरे-भरे जंगलों और कॉफी के बागान आप पर जादू कर देंगे। सचमुच में एक कुर्गी अनुभव के लिए कोई पर्यटक विश्राम गृह, कॉफी बागान या किसी घर में ठहर जाइए।
हवाई जहाज से : निकटतम हवाई अड्डे मंगलौर 135 कि०मी० और बंगलौर 260 कि०मी० हैं। मंगलौर के लिए मुम्बई से उड़ान है, जबकि बंगलौर के लिए अहमदाबाद, चेन्नई, दिल्ली, गोवा, हैदराबाद, कोच्चि, कोलकाता, मुम्बई और पुणे से उड़ान है।
रेल से ; निकटतम रेलवे मुख्यालय मैसूर, मंगलौर और हासन में है। ,
सड़क से : बंगलौर से कुर्ग जाने के दो रास्ते हैं। दोनों की दूरी लगभग एक-समान (250-260 कि०मी०) है। मैसूर से होकर जाने वाला रास्ता अधिक प्रचलित है। दूसरा रास्ता नीलमंगल, कुनिगल, चनरायणापतना से होकर जाता है।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

Tea from Assam Summary

Tea from Assam Introduction in English

This is a very short description of Assam, a North-Eastern State of India. This state is famous for its tea plantations. In this extract Pranjol, a youngster from Assam, is Rajvir’s classmate at school in Delhi. Pranjol’s father is the manager of a tea-garden in Upper Assam and Pranjol has invited Rajvir to visit his home during the summer vacation.

Tea from Assam Summary in English

Pranjol belonged to Assam. He was studying in a school in Delhi. Rajvir was his classmate. Pranjol’s father was the manager of a tea-garden in Upper Assam. Pranjol invited Rajvir to visit his home during the summer vacation. Both of them travelled to Assam in a train. When the train stopped on the way at a station, a vendor called, ‘chai-garam … garam-chai’. They took tea and started sipping it. Rajvir told Pranjol that over eighty crore cups of tea are drunk every day throughout the world.

Pranjol started reading his detective book again. But Rajvir looked out of the window of the moving train. There was beautiful scenery outside. Soon the soft green paddy fields were left behind and there were tea bushes everywhere. Rajvir was fascinated by the magnificent view of tea gardens. There were shade trees also. He was very excited. Pranjol didn’t share Rajvir’s excitement because he had been born and brought up on a plantation. He told Rajvir that Assam has the largest concentration of tea plantation in the world.

Rajvir said that no one really knows who discovered tea. He told Pranjol that there are many legends attached to tea, to discovery of tea. According to one story a Chinese emperor discovered tea by chance. He always boiled water before drinking it. One day a few leaves of the twigs burning under the pot fell into the water. As a result, the boiled water got a delicious flavour. It is said they were tea leaves. According to another Indian legend, Bodhidharma, an ancient Buddhist monk, felt sleep during meditations. So he cut off his · eyelids. Ten tea plants grew out of the eyelids. The leaves of these plants when put in hot water and drunk banished sleep.

Rajvir told Pranjol that tea was first drunk in China in 2700 B.C. Words like ‘chai’ and ‘chini’ are Chinese. Tea came to Europe in the sixteenth century. At first it was used more as a medicine than as a beverage. Both Rajvir and Pranjol reached Mariani junction. Pranjol’s parents received them on the platform. They took them in a car to Dhekiabari, the tea estate managed by Pranjol’s father. On both sides of the road there were acres and acres of tea bushes. Women with bamboo baskets on their backs were plucking the new tea leaves. They had come there in the sprouting season. Rajvir said that this season lasts from May to July The best tea is produced during this season. Pranjol’s father told Rajvir that he knew many things about tea plantations. He said that he would learn more about tea there..

Tea from Assam Introduction in Hindi

(यह भारत के उत्तर-पूर्वी राज्य आसाम का एक संक्षिप्त विवरण है। यह राज्य अपने चाय बागानों के लिए प्रसिद्ध है। इस अंश में प्रांजल, आसाम का एक छोटा लड़का दिल्ली के एक स्कूल में राजवीर का सहपाठी है। प्रांजल के पिता ऊपरी आसाम में एक चाय बागान के प्रबंधक हैं और प्रांजल राजवीर को ग्रीष्मावकाश में अपने घर पर आमंत्रित करता है।)

Tea from Assam Summary in Hindi

प्रांजल आसाम का रहने वाला था। वह देहली के एक स्कूल में पढ़ता था। राजवीर उसका सहपाठी था। प्रांजल का पिता ऊपरी आसाम में चाय के एक बाग का प्रबंधक था। प्रांजल ने राजवीर को गर्मी की छुट्टियों में अपने घर आने के लिए आमंत्रित किया। दोनों ने एक रेलगाड़ी से आसाम के लिए यात्रा की। रास्ते में जब एक स्टेशन पर गाड़ी रुकी तो एक चाय वाले ने कहा, “चाय गरम, गरम चाय”। उन्होंने चाय ली और उसे पीना आरंभ कर दिया। राजवीर ने प्रांजल को कहा कि सारे संसार में प्रतिदिन अस्सी करोड कप से अधिक चाय पी जाती है।

प्रांजल ने अपनी जासूसी पुस्तक फिर से पढ़नी आरंभ कर दी। मगर राजवीर चलती हुई गाड़ी से बाहर देखने लगा। बाहर का दृश्य सुन्दर था। शीघ्र ही धान के नर्म हरे खेत पीछे रह गए और चारों तरफ चाय की झाड़ियाँ थीं। राजवीर चाय के बागों के शानदार नज़ारे से आकर्षित हो गया। वहाँ पर छायादार वृक्ष भी थे। वह बहुत उत्तेजित हो गया। प्रांजल ने राजवीर की उत्तेजना में कोई भाग नहीं लिया क्योंकि उसका पालन-पोषण चाय के बागानों में ही हुआ था। उसने राजवीर को बताया कि आसाम में संसार के सबसे ज्यादा चाय के बागान हैं।

राजवीर ने कहा कि इस बात का किसी को पूरा ज्ञान नहीं है कि चाय की खोज किसने की। उसने प्रांजल को बताया कि चाय की खोज के साथ बहुत-सी किवदंतियाँ जुड़ी हुई हैं। एक कहानी के अनुसार एक चीनी सम्राट् ने संयोग से इसकी खोज कर दी। वह पानी सदा उबालकर पिया करता था। एक दिन बर्तन के नीचे जलती हुई टहनियों के कुछ पत्ते पानी में गिर गए। परिणामस्वरूप, पानी में स्वादिष्ट सुगंध आ गई। यह कहा जाता है कि वे चाय के पत्ते थे। एक अन्य भारतीय कहानी के अनुसार, बोधिधर्म, नाम के एक प्राचीन बौद्ध भिक्षु को, साधना के दौरान नींद आया करती थी। इसलिए उसने अपनी पलकों को काटकर फेंक दिया। उसकी पलकों से चाय के दस पौधे पैदा हुए। इन पौधों के पत्तों को गर्म पानी में डालकर पीने से नींद गायब हो जाती थी।

राजवीर ने प्रांजल को बताया कि सबसे पहले चाय को 2700 ईसा पूर्व चीन में पिया गया। ‘चाय’ और ‘चीनी’ जैसे शब्द चीन के हैं। चाय यूरोप में सोलहवीं शताब्दी में आई। शुरु में इसे पेय पदार्थ से अधिक एक दवाई के रूप में पिया जाता था। राजवीर और प्रांजल दोनों मैरियानी स्टेशन पहुंचे। प्रांजल के माता-पिता ने उनका प्लेटफार्म पर स्वागत किया। वे उन्हें कार में धेकियाबारी ले गए, जोकि चाय का बाग था जहाँ प्रांजल के पिता प्रबंधक थे। सड़क के दोनों ओर कई-कई एकड़ों तक चाय की झाडियाँ थीं। अपनी पीठ पर बाँस की टोकरियाँ रखे हुए औरतें चाय के ताजे पत्तों को तोड़ रही थीं। वे वहाँ पर नई पत्तियाँ उगने के मौसम में आए थे। राजवीर ने कहा कि यह मौसम मई से जुलाई तक चलता है। इस मौसम के दौरान सर्वोत्तम चाय उगती है। प्रांजल के पिता ने राजवीर से कहा कि वह चाय के बागों के बारे में बहुत कुछ जानता है। उसने कहा कि वह वहाँ पर चाय के बारे में और बहुत कुछ सीखेगा।

Tea from Assam Word-Meanings

[PAGE 94] : Vendor = seller (फेरी वाला, विक्रेता); high-pitched = sharp sound (तीखी आवाज़); sipped = drink with lips (चुस्की लेना); steaming = emitting steam (धुआँ छोड़ना); whew = word of exclamation (विस्मय का . शब्द); pulled out = came out (बाहर आना); detective = suspenseful (जासूसी); ardent = strong (तीव्र); keener = very much (बहुत अधिक); magnificent = beautiful (सुन्दर); backdrop = background (पृष्ठभूमि); densely wooded = thick forest (घना जंगल); stretched = spread (फैला हुआ); dwarfing = making others look small (छोटा करते हुए); sturdy = strong (मज़बूत)।

[PAGE 95] : Billowing out = coming out (बाहर आना); excitedly = with excitement (उत्तेजना से); concentration = with a large number (बड़ी संख्या में); legends = myths (किवदंतियाँ); twigs = branches (टहनियाँ); delicious = tasty (स्वादिष्ट); flavour = smell (सुगंध); scoffed = laughed (हँसे); ascetic = monk (भिक्षु); eyelids = the layers covering the eyes (पलकें); meditations = deep thoughts (साधना चिन्तन); banished = removed (दूर करना); beverage=adrink (पेय); clattered = made aclattering sound (खड़खड़ की आवाज़ करना); veered =moved (हिला); pruned = cut (काटना); aprons = outer dress (एप्रन); sprouted = grown (उगना)।

[PAGE 96] : Second-flush = second season (दूसरा मौसम); lasts == remains (रहना); yields = gives out (प्रदान करना)।

Tea from Assam Translation in Hindi

(PAGE 94] : प्रांजल, आसाम का एक छोटा लड़का, दिल्ली के एक स्कूल में राजवीर का सहपाठी है। प्रांजल के पिता ऊपरी आसाम में एक चाय बागान के प्रबंधक हैं और प्रांजल राजवीर को ग्रीष्मावकाश में अपने घर पर आमंत्रित करता है।

“चाय-गर्म, गर्म-चाय…….” एक फेरी वाले ने ऊँचे स्वर में आवाज़ लगाई। वह उनकी खिड़की तक आया और पूछा, “चाय, साहब?” “हमें दो कप दे दो,” प्रांजल ने कहा।
उन्होंने भाप उठाते हुए गर्म पेय पदार्थ के चूंट भरे। उनके विभाग में लगभग हर व्यक्ति चाय पी रहा था।
“क्या आप जानते हो कि हर रोज पूरे विश्व में 80 करोड़ से भी अधिक चाय के कप पिए जाते हैं?” राजवीर ने कहा।

हैरानी के साथ प्रांजल ने कहा, “चाय वास्तव में बहुत लोकप्रिय है।”
गाड़ी स्टेशन से बाहर आ गई। प्रांजल फिर से अपनी जासूसी की पुस्तक पढ़ने लग जाता है। राजवीर भी जासूसी की कहानियों का बहुत बड़ा प्रशंसक था, लेकिन उस समय वह सुंदर दृश्यों को देखने में रुचि ले रहा था।
चारों ओर हरियाली-ही-हरियाली थी। राजवीर ने पहले कभी इतनी अधिक हरियाली नहीं देखी थी। तब धान के हरे खेतों का स्थान चाय की झाड़ियों ने ले लिया।

यह एक शानदार दृश्य था। घने जंगलों वाली पहाड़ियों की पृष्ठभूमि के लिए चाय की पहाड़ियों का सागर वहाँ तक फैला हुआ था जहाँ तक नज़र जाती थी। बड़े और शक्तिशाली छायादार पेड़ों के नीचे चाय के छोटे पौधे थे जो क्रमबद्ध पंक्तियों के बीच में गुड़ियों जैसी छोटी तस्वीरों की भाँति झाड़ियों की तरह हिलते थे। दूर एक भद्दी-सी ईमारत थी जिसकी चिमनी में से धुंआ बाहर आ रहा था।

PAGE 95] : “अरे, चाय का बाग!” राजवीर ने जोश सहित कहा। प्रांजल जिसका जन्म और पालन-पोषण बागान में ही हुआ था, ने राजवीर की उत्सुकता में भागीदारी नहीं की। __“अरे, अब यह चाय का प्रदेश है” उसने कहा! आसाम संसार में चाय का सबसे बड़ा उत्पादन केंद्र है। तुम्हें यहाँ इतने बागान दिखाई देंगे कि इसमें तुम्हारा पूरा जीवन निकल जाएगा!
“मैं चाय के बारे में जितना पढ़ सकता था पढ़ता रहा हूँ,” राजवीर ने कहा। “कोई भी नहीं जानता कि चाय की खोज किसने की लेकिन बहुत-सी दंत कथाएँ प्रचलित हैं।”
“कौन-सी दंत कथाएँ?”
“अच्छा, इनमें से एक दंत कथा एक चीनी सम्राट् के बारे में है जो पीने से पहले अपने पानी को उबालता था। एक दिन बर्तन के नीचे जल रही टहनियों के कुछ पत्ते पानी में गिर गए जिससे इसमें एक स्वादिष्ट गंध आ गई। ऐसा कहा जाता है कि वे चाय के पत्ते थे।”

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India

“मुझे कोई दूसरी कहानी बताओ!” प्रांजल ने मजाक उड़ाते हुए कहा।
“हमारे यहाँ एक भारतीय दंत कथा भी है। बोधिधर्म नाम का एक प्राचीन बौद्ध तपस्वी था। उसने अपनी पलकें इसलिए काट दी थीं क्योंकि उसको समाधि के दौरान नींद आ जाती थी। इन पलकों में चाय के दस पौधे उग आए। इन पौधों के पत्तों को जब गर्म पानी में डाला गया और पिया गया तो उससे नींद गायब हो गई।”
“चाय पहली बार चीन में पी गई,” राजवीर ने बात को आगे बढ़ाते हुए कहा, “2700 ई० पू० की बात है! ‘वास्तव में ‘चाय’ और ‘चीनी’ जैसे शब्द चीन से आए हैं। यूरोप में चाय का आगमन सोलहवीं सदी में हुआ था और इसे एक पेय की अपेक्षा दवाई के रूप में अधिक पिया जाता था।”
रेलगाड़ी मैरियानी जंक्शन पर प्रवेश कर गई। लड़कों ने अपना सामान उठाया और भीड़ भरे प्लेटफार्म से अपने रास्ते पर आगे बढ़ गए।

प्रांजल के माता-पिता उनकी प्रतीक्षा कर रहे थे।
शीघ्र ही वे धेकियाबारी की ओर यात्रा कर रहे थे, वह चाय बागान जिसका प्रबंधक प्रांजल का पिता था।
एक घंटे के पश्चात् कार ने मुख्य सड़क पर अचानक एक मोड़ लिया। उन्होंने एक पुल को पार किया और धेकियाबारी चाय बागान में प्रवेश किया।

पथरीली सड़क के दोनों ओर चाय की झाड़ियों के अनेक एकड़ खेत थे, सभी एक-जैसी ऊँचाई पर सफाई के साथ छांटकर काटी गई थीं, अपनी पीठों पर, बांस की टोकरियाँ लगाए चाय तोड़ने वालों की टोलियाँ जिन्होंने प्लास्टिक के एपरन पहने हुए थे, हाल ही में उगी हुई पत्तियों को तोड़ रहे थे।

(PAGE 96] : प्रांजल के पिता ने चाय की पत्तियों से भरे एक ट्रेलर को खींच रहे ट्रैक्टर के गुजर जाने के लिए, कार की गति कम कर ली।
“यह पौधों का दूसरी बार फूटना (अंकुरित होना) है, क्या ऐसा नहीं है, मि० बरुआ?” राजवीर ने पूछा। “यह मई से जुलाई तक चलता है और इसमें सर्वोत्तम चाय का उत्पादन होता है।”
“ऐसा लगता है कि आपने यहाँ आने से पहले पूरी तैयारी की है,” प्रांजल के पिता ने हैरानीपूर्वक पूछा।
“हाँ, मि० बरुआ,” राजवीर ने स्वीकार किया, “लेकिन मैं यहाँ रहते हुए और बहुत कुछ सीखना चाहता हूँ।”

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 7 Glimpses of India Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions Grammar Reported Speech Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 9th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Direct Speech and Indirect Speech :
किसी व्यक्ति द्वारा कही गई बात को दो प्रकार से व्यक्त कर सकते हैं-
(a) पहला तरीका है वक्ता के शब्दों को ज्यों का त्यों व्यक्त करना। इसे Direct Speech कहते हैं। इसमें वक्ता के शब्दों को Inverted Commas (” “) के अंदर रखते हैं, जैसे
Mohan said, “I am going to Delhi.”

(b) दूसरा तरीका है कि हम वक्ता की बात को अपने शब्दों में कहें। इसे Indirect Speech कहते हैं, जैसे
Mohan said that he was going to Delhi.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

* Direct Speech के बारे में कुछ महत्त्वपूर्ण बातें :
(a) Direct Speech के दो भाग होते हैं। इसमें Inverted Commas से बाहर के भाग को Reporting Verb कहते हैं।
(b) वक्ता के कथन को अर्थात “Inverted Commas” के अंदर के भाग को Reported Speech कहते हैं।
(c) वक्ता को Reporting Verb का subject कहते हैं। अगर वह किसी को संबोधित कर रहा है तो उसे Reporting Verb का object कहते हैं। निम्नलिखित उदाहरण से यह बात स्पष्ट हो जाएगी :
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech -1
(d) Reported Speech को सदा Inverted Commas के बीच में रखा जाता है।
(e) Reporting Verb और Reported Speech को Comma द्वारा अलग किया जाता है।

* Indirect Speech के बारे में महत्त्वपूर्ण बातें:
(a) इसमें Inverted Commas (” “) का प्रयोग नहीं किया जाता।
(b) Reporting Verb और Reported Speech के बीच वाला Comma हटा दिया जाता है।
(c) बहुत से वाक्यों में Reported Speech से पहले that, if, whether आदि conjunction का प्रयोग होता है।
(d) Reporting Verb का tense कभी नहीं बदलता।
(e) Reporting Verb में Reported Speech के भाव के अनुसार कुछ परिवर्तन होता है।
(f) Reported Speech को assertive sentence में बदल देते हैं।
(g) Reported Speech में tense और pronouns आदि के आधार पर कुछ परिवर्तन किए जाते हैं।
इन परिवर्तन करने के नियमों का अब हम अध्ययन करेंगे।

* Rules for the Change of Tenses :
(a) अगर Reporting Verb वर्तमान काल या भविष्य काल में हो तो Reported Speech का tense नहीं बदलता, जैसे-
Direct : He says, “I am going to Agra.”
Indirect : He says that he is going to Agra.

Direct : Amit says, “Ram will write a letter.”
Indirect : Amit says that Ram will write a letter.

Direct : He will say, “Sudha has a doll.”
Indirect : He will say that Sudha has a doll.

Direct : They say, “Raju will be late.”
Indirect : They say that Raju will be late.

(b) अगर reporting verb भूतकाल में हो तो reported speech के tense निम्नलिखित प्रकार से बदले जाते हैं :

(i) Present Indefinite

do go, does go,

do not go, does not go

changes into

changes into

changes into

Past Indefinite

went

did not go

(ii) Present Continuous

is/am/are going

changes into

changes into

Past Continuous

was or were going

(iii) Present Perfect

have or has gone

changes into

changes into

Past Perfect

had gone

(iv) Present Perfect Continuous

has or have been write

changes into

changes into

Past Perfect Continuous

had been writing

(v) Past Indefinite

wrote

changes into

changes into

Past Perfect

had written

(vi) Past Continuous

was writing

changes into

changes into

Past Perfect Continuous

had been writing

(vii) Past Perfect and Past Perfect Continuous Tense change
(viii) Shall, will

May

Can

changes into

changes into

changes into

should or would

might

could

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Tense बदलने के नियर्मों का सार :
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech -2

Examples:
I. Direct : He said, “The servant has posted the letter.”
Indirect : He said that the servant had posted the letter.

2. Direct : I said, “It has been raining since morning.”
Indirect : I said that it had been raining since morning.

3. Direct : She said, “I gave him the pen.”
Indirect : She said that she had given him the pen.

4. Direct : He said, “I was solving sums.”
Indirect : He said that he had been solving sums.

5. Direct : Ram said, “I shall nor lake part in the drama.”
Indirect : Ram said that he would not take part in the drama.

6. Direct : The teacher said, “The boys may go home.”
Indirect : The teacher said that the boys might go home.

(ix) ‘Must’ वाले वाक्यों का Tense निम्नलिखित ढंग से बदला जाता है :
(a) अगर ‘Must’ का अर्थ कथन के समय अनिवार्यता या बाध्यता (Necessity or Compulsion at the moment of speaking) हो तो इसे ‘had to’ में बदला जाता है, जैसे
Direct : He said, “Rani must go at once.”
Indirect : He said that Rani had to go at once.

(b) अगर ‘Must’ का अर्थ भविष्य काल की अनिवार्यता या बाध्यता (Necessity or Compulsion in the Future) हो तो ‘Must’ को ‘Would have to’ में बदलते हैं, जैसे
Direct : He said, “Rani must go after a week.”
Indirect . He said that Rani would have to go after a week.

(c) अगर ‘Must’ का अर्थ मनाही (Prohibition) या Permanent Ruling (स्थायी आदेश या व्यवस्था) हो तो Must को नहीं बदला जाता, जैसे
Direct : He said, “One must be punctual.”
Indirect : He said that one must be punctual.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Change of Person :
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech -3
Rule 1. Direct Speech में यदि Reported Speech में Ist Person का प्रयोग किया हो तो उसे Reporting Verb के Subject के अनुसार बदलते हैं; जैसे-

Direct : He said, “I am reading my book.”
Indirect : He said that he was reading his book.

Direct : She said, “We are reading our books.”
Indirect : She said that they were reading their books.

Direct : Geeta said. “Mine is the best school.”
Indirect : Geeta said that hers is the best school.

Direct : Gopal said, “Ours is the best team.”
Indirect : Gopal said that theirs is the best team.

Rule 2. Direct Speech में यदि Reported Speech में 2nd Person का प्रयोग किया हो तो उसे Reporting Verb के Object के अनसार बदलते हैं; जैसे-

Direct : He said to me, ‘TOM are helping your brother.”
Indirect : He told me that I was helping my brother.

Direct : He said to her, “You are wasting your time.”
Indirect : He told her that she was wasting her time.

Direct : He said to us, ‘TOM have not doneyour duty.”
Indirect : He told us that we had not done our duty.

Direct : Renu said to me, “Yours is the best painting.”
Indirect : Renu told me that mine is the best painting.

Rule 3. Direct Speech में यदि Reported Speech में 3rd Person का प्रयोग किया हो तो उसे नहीं बदलते है; जैसे

Direct : Ram said, ”He\s working in the office.”
Indirect : Ram said that he was working in the office.

Direct : I said,”She is preparing herself.”
Indirect : I said that she was preparing herself.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

इसे हम निम्न सूत्र की सहायता से आसानी से याद रख सकते हैं –
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech -4
The change of words showing nearness:
Direct Speech को Indirect Speech में बदलते समय Reported Speech में प्रयोग किए गए समय व स्थान की निकटता प्रकट करने वाले शब्दों को प्रायः दूरी प्रकट करने वाले शब्दों में बदल दिया जाता है। ऐसे शब्द नीचे दिए गए हैं-

निकटता प्रकट करने वाले शब्द

(Direct Speech)

दूरी प्रकट करने वाले शब्द

(Indirect Speech)

thisthat
thesethose
herethere
hitherthither
nowthen
thusso F in that way
hencethence
agobefore F earlier
todaythat day
yesterdaythe day before F the previous day
tomorrowthe next day
tonightthat night
last night, week, etc.the previous night, week etc.
next week, month, etc.the following week, month, etc.

Direct : He said to me, “I shall meet you here tomorrow.”
Indirect : He told me that he would meet me there the next day.

Direct : She said to me, “I will meet you now.” .
Indirect : She told me that she would meet me then.

Direct : They said, “We bought the new house six months ago.”
Indirect : They said that they had bought the new house six months before.

I. Assertive Sentences

(a) यदि Direct Speech में Reporting Verb वर्तमान काल या भविष्य काल में हो तो Indirect Speech में Reported Speech के Tense को नहीं बदलते; जैसेsay को बदलते हैं-

say को बदलते हैं – say में
says को बदलते हैं – says में
say to को बदलते हैं – tell में
says to को बदलते हैं – tells में

Direct : He says, “I am going to Agra.”
Indirect : He says that he is going to Agra.

Direct : Ramesh says to me, “I need your help.”
Indirect : Ramesh tells me that he needs my help.

Direct : He will say to me, “It is your book.”
Indirect : He will tell me that it is my book.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Exercise 1

Change the following sentences into indirect speech :
1. He says, “1 am going to Agra.”
2. Amit says, “Ram will write a letter.”
3. He will say, “Sudha has a doll.”
4. They say, “Raju will be late.”
5. The crow will say, “1 cannot sing so well.”
6. The oldman says to his sons, “I need some money.”
7. He will say to me, “1 am not telling a lie.”
8. He says to his father, “I have done my work.”
9. I say to Sheela, “You are my best friend.”
10. Harish will say to me, “You have spoiled my pen.”
Answers:
1. He says that he is going to Agra.
2. Amit says that Ram will write a letter.
3. He will say that Sudha has a doll.
4. They say that Raju will be late.
5. The crow will say that it cannot sing so well.
6. The oldman tells his sons that he needs some money.
7. He will tell me that he is not telling a lie.
8. He tells his father that he has done his work.
9. I tell Sheela that she is my best friend.
10. Harish will tell me that I have spoiled his pen.

(b) यदि Direct Speech में Reporting Verb Past Tense अर्थात said या said to में हो और Reported Speech में किसी संज्ञा की नियमित आदत या सार्वजनिक सच्चाई या कहावतों का वर्णन किया होता है तो Reported Speech का Tense नहीं बदलते हैं।

said को बदलते हैं – said में
said to को बदलते हैं – told में
Reporting Verb को Reported Speech के साथ जोड़ने के लिए that का प्रयोग करते हैं।

Direct : He said to me, “I go for a walk daily.”
Indirect : He told me that he goes for a walk daily.

Direct : The teacher said, “The earth revolves round the sun.”
Indirect : The teacher said that the earth revolves round the sun.

Direct : The father said, “Slow and steady wins the race.”
Indirect : The father said that slow and steady wins the race.

Exercise 2

Change the following sentences into indirect speech :
1. The oldman said, “Eyes are a great blessing.”
2. The saint said, “Man is mortal.”
3. Gopal said, “My father often gets up at 5 a.m.”
4. He said, “Two and two make four.”
5. The teacher said, “The Ganga rises from the Himalayas.”
6. He said, “Honesty is the best policy.” ‘
7. The oldman said, “Union is strength.”
8. The teacher said, “The sun is stationary.”
9. He said to me, “Hard work is the key to success.”
10. The teacher said, “The Himalaya stands in the north of India.”
Answers:
1. The oldman said that eyes are a great blessing.
2. The saint said that man is mortal.
3. Gopal said that his father often gets up at 5 a.m.
4. He said that two and two make four.
5. The teacher said that the Ganga rises from the Himalayas.
6. He said that honesty is the best policy.
7. The oldman said that Union is strength.
8. The teacher said that the sun is stationary.
9. He told me that hard work is the key to success.
10. The teacher said that the Himalayas stand in the north of India.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

(c) यदि Direct Speech में Reporting Verb Past Tense अर्थात said/said to में हो और Reported Speech में कोई सामान्य Statement हो तो Reported Speech के Tense को नियमानुसार बदलते हैं।
said को बदलते हैं – said में
said to को बदलते हैं – told में
Reporting Verb को Reported Speech के साथ जोड़ने के लिए that का प्रयोग करते हैं।

Direct : He said to me, “You are not helping me.”
Indirect : He told me that I was not helping him.

Direct : He said, “I can drive a car.”
Indirect : He said that he could drive a car.

Direct : He said, “I can do this work.”
Indirect : He said that he could do that work.

Exercise 3

Change the following sentences into Indirect Speech :

1. She said to her mother, “It is no longer safe to live here.”
2. Sita said to the teacher, “I need your help.”
3. Margie said, “I hate school.”
4. The little girl said to me, “This is my doll.”
5. John said to me, “1 hope to win this prize.”
6. I said to Anil, “You are not coming to school regularly.”
7. “Last week our school won a football match,” said Mohan to Leela.
8. The teacher says to the boys, “You can play now.”
9. Rahim said to his brother, “Fortune favours the brave.”
10. Rahul said to me, “I posted your letter.”
Answers:
1. She told her mother that it was no longer safe to live there.
2. Sita told the teacher that she needed her help.
3. Margie said that she hated school.
4. The little girl told me that this was her doll.
5. John told me that he hoped to win that prize.
6. I told Anil that he was not coming to school regularly.
7. Mohan told Leela that the previous week their school had won a football match.
8. The teacher tells the boys that they can play then.
9. Rahim told his brother that fortune favours the brave.
10. Rahul told me that he had posted my letter.

Exercise 4

Change the following sentences into Indirect Speech :

1. He said, “1 do not like coffee.”
2. My teacher says to me, “You are a brilliant student.”
3. Priyanka said, “Mine is the best school.”
4. The teacher said, “The sun sets in the west.”
5. My father says, “You can be a good player.”
6. Mohan said to me, “I met your brother yesterday.”
7. He said to me, “Slow & steady wins the race.”
8. He said , “Light travels in a straight line.”
9. They said, “The captain will not play the match.”
10. She said, “1 gave him the pen.”
Answers:
1. He said that he did not like coffee.
2. My teacher tells me that I am a brilliant student. .
3. Priyanka said that hers was the best school.
4. The teacher said that the sun sets in the west.
5. My father says that I can be a good player.
6. Mohan told me that he had met my brother the previous day.
7. He told me that slow and steady wins the race.
8. He said that Light travels in a straight line.
9. They said that the captain would not play the match.
10. She said that she had given him the pen.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

II. Interrogative Sentences

Interrogative Sentences या Questions को Direct Speech से Indirect Speech में बदलने के नियम-
1. Reporting Verb ‘say’ को ‘ask’, ‘demand’, ‘enquire’ या ‘inquire’ आदि में बदला जाता है।

2. ‘Ask’ के बाद Reporting Verb के Object से पहले to’ का प्रयोग नहीं किया जाता। लेकिन ‘demand’, ‘enquire’ या inquire’ के बाद और Reporting Verb के Object से पहले ‘of’ का प्रयोग करते हैं।

3. यदि Direct Question किसी सहायक क्रिया (is, am, are, was, were, shall, should, will, would, can, could, may, might, do, does, did, have, has, had, must, ought; need, dare आदि) से आरंभ हो तो Indirect Question से पहले Conjunction के रूप में ‘if’ या ‘whether’ का प्रयोग होता है।

4. अगर Direct Question किसी Question Word (what, where, why, which, who, whom, how आदि) से आरंभ हो तो Indirect Question से पूर्व ‘if’ या ‘whether’ आदि किसी भी Conjunction का प्रयोग नहीं होता।

5. Direct Speech के Question को Statement (Assertive Sentence) में बदल दिया जाता है, अर्थात सहायक क्रियाओं का प्रयोग Subject के बाद किया जाता है और प्रश्नचिह्न (?) के स्थान पर full stop (.) का प्रयोग किया जाता है।

6. अगर Direct Question ‘do’, ‘does’ या ‘did’ से आरंभ हो तो Indirect Question में इनका प्रयोग नहीं करते। और do या does को हटाकर verb की Ist Form को verb की 2nd Form में बदल देते हैं तथा Did को हटाकर verb की Ist Form को had + verb की 3rd Form में बदल देते हैं।

7. Direct Speech के Inverted Commas तथा Reporting Verb और Reported Speech को अलग करने वाले Comma को हटा दिया जाता है।

8. Words showing Nearness, Tenses तथा Pronouns आदि नियमानुसार बदल दिए जाते हैं।

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Some Solved Examples

Direct

  1. She said to him, “Why did you keep me waiting?”
  2. The policeman said to Ram, “Did you go out yesterday?”
  3. I say to you, “Have you gone off your head?”
  4. He said to me, “Who taught me English ?”
  5. The teacher said to him, “When did the bus leave?”
  6. He said to me, “Have you taken your lunch?”
  7. My father said to me “why have you failed?”
  8. My mother said to me, “Have you done your homework?”
  9. The doctor said to me, “How is your mother?”
  10. She said to me, “Are you going to Agra tomorrow?”
  11. I said to Ram, “Do you know Sita?”
  12. He asked me, “Where is the station?”
  13. The Postmaster said to Lencho, “Why are you sad?”
  14. The landlady wondered, “Why does Griffin wear bandages on his face?
  15. He said to her, “Will you accompany me to the theatre.”

Indirect

  1. She asked him why he had kept her waiting.
  2. The policeman asked Ram if (whether) he had gone out the previous day.
  3. I ask you if you have gone off your head.
  4. He asked me who had taught him English.
  5. The teacher asked him when the bus had left.
  6. He asked me if 1 had taken my lunch.
  7. My father asked me why I had failed.
  8. My mother asked me if I had done my home work.
  9. The doctor asked me how my mother was.
  10. She asked me if (whether) 1 was going to Agra the next day.
  11. I asked Ram if he knew Sita.
  12. He asked me where the station was. .
  13. The Postmaster asked Lencho why he was sad.
  14. The landlady wondered why Griffin wore bandages on his face.
  15. He asked her if she would accompany him to the theatre.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Exercise 5

Change the following sentences into Indirect Speech :

1. She said to me, “Are you going to Agra tomorrow?”
2. He said to me, “Can you meet me at the bus stand?”
3. The stranger said to man “can you tell me the way to a good hotel?
4. The mother said, “What do you want, my children?”
5. The teacher said, “Boys, why are you making a noise?”
6. The lion said to the mouse, “Why were you jumping on me?”
7. He said to me, “Why does your uncle not help you ?”
8. The boss said to the clerk, “Are you satisfied with your salary?”
9. I said to him, “Please don’t smoke here.”
10. Mother said to me, “Go and wash your hand.”
Answers:
1. She asked me whether I was going to Agra the next day.
2. He asked me if I could meet him at the bus stand.
3. The stranger asked me if 1 could tell him the way to a good hotel.
4. The mother asked her children what they wanted.
5. The teacher asked the boys why they were making a noise.
6. The lion asked the mouse why it had been jumping on him.
7. He asked me why my uncle did not help me.
8. The boss asked the clerk whether he was satisfied with his salary.
9. I requested him not to smoke there.
10. Mother ordered me to go and wash my hands.

III. Imperative Sentences

आज्ञासूचक वाक्यों को Direct से Indirect Speech में बदलने के लिए निम्नलिखित बातों को ध्यान में रखें
Rule 1.
Reporting Verb को भावों के अनुसार tell, ask, request, order, beg, command, forbid आदि में बदला जाता है।
1. उपदेश वाले वाक्यों में said to को advised में बदला जाता है।
2. आदेश वाले वाक्यों में said to को ordered में बदला जाता है।
3. प्रार्थना वाले वाक्यों में said to को requested में बदला जाता है।
4. याचना वाले वाक्यों में said to को begged में बदला जाता है।
5. साधारण Imperative वाक्यों में said to को asked में बदला जाता है।
6. नकारात्मक वाक्यों में said to को forbade में बदल दिया जाता है। याद रहे कि forbade के बाद ‘not’ का प्रयोग नहीं किया जाता।

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Rule 2.
Comma को हटाकर उसके स्थान पर ‘to’ शब्द का प्रयोग किया जाता है। ‘to’ के बाद verb की पहली form का प्रयोग करते हैं।
7. ‘Let’ वाले वाक्यों का भावार्थ अगर ‘अनुमति’ हो तो ‘Let’ को ‘to let’ या ‘might be allowed to’ में बदला जाता है। ‘Let’ को ‘should’ में बदला जाता है।
8. ‘Let’ वाले वाक्यों का भावार्थ अगर ‘सुझाव’ या ‘प्रस्ताव’ हो तो Reporting Verb ‘say’ को Suggest to + Object या Propose to + object में बदला जाता है। तथा ‘Let’ को ‘should’ में बदलकर इसे subject के बाद लगाया जाता है।
9. ‘Let us’ वाले वाक्यों का भावार्थ अगर ‘सुझाव’ या ‘प्रस्ताव’ हो तो Reported Speech के ‘us’ को निम्नलिखित ढंग से बदला जाता है-
(a) अगर Reporting Verb का Subject या Object उत्तम पुरुष (First Person) हो तो ‘us’ को ‘we’ में बदला जाता है।
(b) अगर Reporting Verb का Subject या Object मध्यम पुरुष (Second Person) हो तो ‘us’ को ‘you’ में बदला जाता है।
(c) बाकी सभी अवस्थाओं में ‘us’ को ‘they’ में बदला जाता है।

Rule 3.
Reported Speech में यदि do not या never शब्द हों तो Inverted Commas को हटाकर not to या never to लगा दिया जाता है। परंतु जब said to को forbade में बदलें तो do not तथा never को हटाकर उनके स्थान पर केवल ‘to’ ङ्के शब्द का प्रयोग किया जाना चाहिए।

Direct SpeechIndirect Speech
1. He said to me, “Help the poor.”He asked me to help the poor.
2. The mother said to Leela, “Do not waste your time.”The mother advised Leela not to waste her time.

Or

The mother forbade Leela to waste her time.

3. Harish said to Mohan, “Listen to what I say.”Harish asked Mohan to listen to what he said.
4. I said to my father, “Allow me to go on an educational trip, please.”I requested my father to allow me to go on an educational trip.
5. The commander said to his men, “March forward.”The commander ordered his men to march forward.
6. He said to me, “Open the door.”He ordered me to open the door.
7. The teacher said to the boys, “Obey your parents.”The teacher advised the boys to obey their parents.
8. He said to me, “Put it on the table.”He asked me to put it on the table.
9. “Work hard if you want to pass,” said the teacher.The teacher advised him to work hard if he wanted to pass.
10. Father said to his son, “Do not mix up with bad boys.”Father advised his son not to mix up with bad boys.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Exercise 6

Change into Indirect Speech :

1. I said to Naman, “Look at the map.”
2. He said to me, “Help the poor.”
3. The mother said to Ritu, “Do not waste your time.”
4. Radha said to Reeta, “Do what I say.”
5. I said to my teacher, “Allow me to meet my uncle.”
6. “Work hard if you want to pass,” said the teacher.
7. He sai’d to me, “Don’t touch this wire. It’s live.”
8. The beggar said to the traveller, “Give me some money, please.”
Answers:
1. I asked Naman to look at the map.
2. He advised me to help the poor.
3. The mother advised Ritu not to waste her time.
4. Radha asked Reeta to do what she said.
5. I requested my teacher to allow me to meet my uncle.
6. The teacher advised the students to work hard if they wanted to pass.
7. He forbade me to touch that wire because it was live.
8. The beggar requested the traveller to give him some money.

Exercise 7

Change the following sentences into Indirect Speech :

1. The Principal said to the peon, “Ring the bell.”
2. The teacher said to the boys, “May you pass in the first division!”
3. The hostess said, “Did you sleep well?”
4. She said to the servant, “Open the door.”
5. He said to his son, “Never tell a lie.”
6. The captain said to the soldiers, “Fire at the enemy.”
7. Ram said to Mohan, “Listen to what I say.”
8. The manager said to the servant, “Go and post this letter.”
9. The teacher said to the Vishal, “Get out of the class.”
10. Mother said to her son, “Do what you are told.”
Answers:
1. The Principal ordered the peon to ring the bell.
2. The teacher blessed the boys that they might pass in the first division.
3. The hostess asked if he had slept well.
4. She ordered the servant to open the door.
5. He advised his son never to tell a lie.
6. The captain ordered the soldiers to fire at the enemy.
7. Ram asked Mohan to listen to what he said.
8. The manager ordered the servant to go and post that letter.
9. The teacher ordered vishal to get out of the class.
10. Mother ordered her son to do what he was told.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Exercise 8

Change the form of narration in the following sentences:

1. I said to her, “Let us sit in the shade.”
2. Mohan said to me, “Let us take tea.”
3. He said to his friend, “Please lend me your book.”
4. I said to him, “Let the child sleep.”
5. Ramesh said to me, “My book is better than yours.”
6. I said, “Let us go out for a walk.”
Answers:
1. 1 proposed to her that we should sit in the shade.
2. Mohan proposed to me to take tea.
3. I requested his friend to lend him his book.
4. I asked him to let the child sleep.
5. Ramesh told me that his book was better than mine.
6. I proposed that we should go out for a walk.

IV. Exclamatory Sentences

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech -5

Direct SpeechIndirect Speech
1. The captain said, “Hurrah ! We have won the match.”The captain exclaimed with joy that they had won the match.
2. The oldman said, “Alas ! I am ruined.”The oldman exclaimed with sorrow that he was ruined.
3. The captain said, “Bravo ! Well done, boys.”The captain applauded the boys saying that they had done well.
4. She said, “What a clever boy !”She exclaimed with wonder that he was a very clever boy.
5. I said, “How tall you are !”I exclaimed with wonder that you are very tall.
6. She said to me, “Goodbye !”She bade me goodbye.
7. I said to him, “Good morning !”I wished him good morning.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

V. Opetative Sentences

Optative Sentences May या Would that से शुरू होते हैं और वाक्य के अंत में Mark of Exclamation (!) लगा होता है।
Rule 1. said को prayed या wished में बदलते हैं।
Rule 2. Reporting Verb को Reported Speech के साथ जोड़ने के लिए that का प्रयोग करते हैं।
Rule 3. वाक्य के अंत में Mark of Exclamation (!) के स्थान पर Full Stop (.) का प्रयोग करते हैं।

1. I said, “May our teacher live long”.
I prayed that our teacher might live long.

2. The beggar said, “May God bless you!”.
The beggar wished that God might bless me/him.

3. He said, “Would that I were a bird!”
He wished that he had been a bird.

4. He said to me, “May you win a scholarship!”
He wished that I might win a scholarship.

5. They said, “May her soul rest in peace!”
They prayed that her soul might rest in peace.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech

Exercise 10

Change the following into Indirect Speech :

1. Mohan said, “I met her last year.”
2. He said, “Will you listen to me” ?
3. Sonali said, “Where did you find it ?”
4. My teacher said to me, “How many brothers & sisters are you ?”
5. She said to me, “Welcome to the party.”
6. The teacher said to me, “Why have you been absent ?”
7. He said to his brother, “Go and post the letter”.
8. You said to me, “Where there is a will, there is a way.”
9. You said to me, “I am thankful to you.”
10. She said to me, “Has Ravi invited you to the party?”
Answers:
1. Mohan said that he had met her the previous year.
2. He said me if 1 would listen to him.
3. Sonali asked me where I had found that.
4. My teacher asked me how many brothers & sisters are we.
5. She welcomed me to the party.
6. The teacher asked me why I had been absent.
7. He ordered his brother to go and post the letter.
8. You told me that where there is a will there is a way.
9. You told me that you were thankful to me.
10. She asked me that if Ravi had invited me to the party.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Reported Speech Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 9th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

What is a Sentence ?
A sentence is a group of words which makes complete sense.
(शब्दों के सार्थक समूह को वाक्य कहते हैं।)
He goes to school.
She runs a race.
I won a prize.
They made a mistake.
उपरोक्त सभी शब्द समूह Sentence का निर्माण करते हैं।

* Phrase : Phrase is also a group of words which makes complete sense.
(Phrase भी शब्दों का एक सार्थक समूह होता है।)
Here and there
in my pocket
on the roof.
उपरोक्त सभी शब्द समूह Phrase के उदाहरण हैं।

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Sentence और Phrase में अन्तर:

A sentence has a Subject and a Predicate of its own but a Phrase has no Subject or a Predicate of its own. He goes. (यह वाक्य है क्योंकि इसका Subject (He) और Predicate (goes) है।)
here and there. (यह एक सार्थक शब्द समूह तो है परन्तु वाक्य नहीं है क्योंकि इसका न तो कोई Subject है और न ही Predicate है।)

* Clause:
A group of words which is meaningful and has a subject and a Predicate of its own but forms part of a sentence is called a clause.
(Clause शब्दों का सार्थक समूह होता है जिसका अपना Subject और Predicate होता है लेकिन यह स्वतन्त्र न होकर एक वाक्य का अंग होती है।)

Kinds of Sentences :

There are three kinds of sentences from structure point of view. They are :
1. Simple Sentence
2. Compound Sentence
3. Complex Sentence.
Now we shall discuss the features of these types of sentences :

1. Simple Sentence :
(साधारण वाक्य में केवल एक Subject और एक Predicate होता है)
The predicate has one finite verb.

Examples:
Gurpreet is writing a letter.
Satwant is proud of her new dress.
Manoj invited his friends to tea.
Swami solved the sum.
Sid and Tom studied together.

In the above sentences ‘Gurpreet’, ‘Satwant’, ‘Manoj’, ‘Swami’ ‘Sid and Tom’ are subjects. The rest of each sentehce is a predicate.
‘writing’, ‘is’, ‘invited’, ‘solved’ and ‘studied’ are finite verbs.

2. Compound Sentence :
A compound sentence is that sentence which consists of two or more co-ordinate or independent clauses. These clauses are joined to each other by means of conjunctions. (दो या दो से अधिक Independent Clauses के मेल से बने वाक्य को Compound (संयुक्त) Sentence कहते हैं।)

Note : The following are the main co-ordinating conjunctions :
and, as well as, so, therefore, or, otherwise, but, yet, still, nevertheless, consequently, either…or, neither…nor, not only…but (also), etc.

Examples:
Mohan met me and gave me a pen.
Hurry up or you will miss the train.
He wanted to study, but his father asked him to run the family business.
He came late, so he was fined.
He is poor, yet he is honest.
He is mischievous, nevertheless, he is intelligent.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

3. Complex Sentence:
A complex sentence has one Main Clause and one or more Subordinate Clauses.
(जिस वाक्य में एक Main Clause और एक Subordinate Clause होती है, उसे Complex (मिश्रित) Sentence कहते हैं।)

Examples:
I met a man who was an engineer.
He walks as if he were the king of Patiala.
When he saw the police, he ran away.
You will pass if you work hard.

Exercise 1

Tell whether the following sentences are simple, complex or compound :

1. Work hard otherwise you will fail.
2. I will tell you the whole truth about the matter.
3. Since you say so, I believe it.
4. He approached me to get my favour.
5. Two and two make four.
6. She does not want to oblige you.
7. If you have a ticket, you may go inside.
8. You cannot come in until you feel sorry.
9. Walk fast lest you should miss the train.
10. As soon as I reached my house, it started raining.
Answers:
1. compound sentence
2. simple sentence
3. complex sentence
4. simple sentence
5. simple sentence
6. simple sentence
7. complex sentence
8. complex sentence
9. complex sentence
10. complex sentence.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Kinds of Subordinate Clauses :

Three kinds of Subordinate Clauses :
(i) Noun Clauses
(ii) Adjective Clauses
(iii) Adverb Clauses

(i) Noun Clauses

A noun in a sentence functions as a subject or an object. So a noun clause also does the function either of subject or of an object.
(एक वाक्य में संज्ञा एक कर्ता या कर्म के रूप में कार्य करती है। इसलिए एक Noun clause भी एक कर्ता या कर्म का कार्य करती है।)

How can we recognise a noun clause in a complex sentence ?
Replace the whole subordinate clause with the word‘something’.
If the sentence remains grammatical it will be a Noun Clause.

(पूरी Subordinate Clause के स्थान पर ‘something’ शब्द लिखो।)
यदि वाक्य व्याकरण के आधार पर सही लगता है तो वह clause निश्चित रूप से Noun Clause ही होगी। जैसे-
He told me that he would go to Mumbai.
Subordinate Clause = that he would go to Mumbai = something.
Sentence = He told me something.
(उसने मुझे कुछ बताया।)

Something what ?
Ans. ‘that he would go to Mumbai’ = Noun Clause.
(जब Subordinate Clause, Principal Clause के main verb से किए गए प्रश्न ‘क्या ?’ का उत्तर दे देती है, तब भी वह Noun Clause ही होती है।)

Combination of Simple Sentences into a complex sentence by using a noun clause:

(दो वाक्य दिए होंगे। जिनमें से एक वाक्य Noun Clause होता है और दूसरा वाक्य Principal Clause होता है। इन्हें एक वाक्य में जोड़ना है।)

1. यदि Noun Clause Question Word से शुरू होती है और Principal Clause के अन्त में thisit लगा होता है तो Principal Clause को पहले लिखते हैं, This या it को हटा देते हैं और Noun Clause को बाद में लिखते हैं लेकिन Noun Clause को लिखते समय इस बात का ध्यान रखते हैं कि Helping Verb (सहायक क्रिया) को Noun/Pronoun के बाद लिखते हैं।

(a) Where is your pen ? Tell me this.
Tell me where your pen is.

(b) When will the next train arrive ? Go and ask the guard.
Go and ask the guard when the next train will arrive.

2. यदि Noun Clause Question Word से शुरू होती है और This/It Principal Clause के शुरू में लगा होता है तो Noun Clause को वाक्य के शुरू में लिखते हैं और This/lt को हटाकर Principal Clause को वाक्य के अंत में लिखते हैं।

(a) When did he leave the town ? It is a wonder.
When he left the town is a wonder.

(b) What does he do for a living ? It is a mystery.
What he does for a living is a mystery.

3. यदि Noun Clause साधारण वाक्य में है और Principal Clause के अंत में this/it लगा है तो Principal Clause को पहले लिखते हैं (this/it को हटाकर) और उसके बाद that लगाकर Noun Clause को लिखते हैं
(a) He would pass. I knew it.
I knew that he would pass.

(b) The patient will recover soon. The doctor is confident of it.
The doctor is confident that the patient will recover soon.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

4. निम्नलिखित परिवर्तनों पर ध्यान दीजिए
(a) (Something को हटाकर योजक शब्द What का प्रयोग करते हैं।)
(i) He said something. I am not impressed by it.
I am not impressed by what he said.

(ii) He does something. It is not known to me.
What he does is not known to me.

(b) (Somewhere और the place को हटाकर योजक शब्द Where का प्रयोग करते हैं।)
He worked somewhere. Tell me the place.
Tell me where he worked.

(c) (The reason को हटाकर योजक शब्द Why का प्रयोग करते हैं।)

(i) You have rejected my application. Tell me the reason.
Tell me why you have rejected my application.

(ii) You come late daily. I want to know the reason.
I want to know why you come late daily.

HBSE 9th Class English Grammar Transformation of Sentences

(d) (Someone को हटाकर who का प्रयोग करते हैं।)
Someone has stolen your book. I know him.
I know who has stolen your book.

5. (Noun Clause का प्रयोग Verb (क्रिया) के complement के रूप मैं)
(i) He will improve. This is our hope.
Our hope is that he will improve.

(ii) I have not got the money. This is the fact.
The fact is that I have not got the money.

6. (Noun Clause का प्रयोग Noun/Pronoun के object के रूप में)
(i) Who is responsible for the loss ? My question has not been answered.
My question who is responsible for the loss has not been answered.

(ii) India has won the match. The news is true.
The news that India has won the match is true.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 1

Combine the following pairs of sentences into complex sentences by using Noun Clause:
1. What the thieves did with all the money. It is a mystery.
2. The prices will not come down. You can be sure.
3. He will pass. I am confident.
4. He was saying something. They were listening to it.
5. He has lost his way. This is my fear.
6. He would go on a pilgrimage. He said that.
7. He will win the election. It is clear.
8. The bridge will collapse. The engineers are afraid.
9. They suggested something. We were all against it.
10. He will win a scholarship. I am sure.
Answers:
1. What the thieves did with all the money is a mystery.
2. You can be sure that the prices will not come down.
3. I am confident that he will pass.
4. They were listening to what he was saying.
5. My fear is that he has lost his way.
6. He said that he would go on a pilgrimage.
7. It is clear that he will win the election.
8. The engineers are afraid that the bridge will collapse.
9. We were all against what he suggested.
10. I am sure that he will win a scholarship.

Exercise 2

Combine the following sentences into complex sentences by using one of the sentences in each set into a Noun Clause:

1. He says something. We can’t rely on that.
2. You demand some money. I am ready to lend it.
3. You are innocent. That is a fact.
4. He would soon pay back the debt. He promised it.
5. He was a party to the plot. It is not a fact.
6. The result will be out tomorrow. I am sure of it.
7. He may be honest. I do not know.
8. The accident took place somewhere. I shall take you to the place.
9. I said something. I am sorry for it.
10. Death keeps no calendar. We all know it.
Answers:
1. I can’t rely on what he says.
2. I am ready to lend you what you demand.
3. The fact is that you are innocent.
4. He promised that he would soon pay back the debt
5. It is not a fact that he was a party to the plot
6. I am sure that the result will be out tomorrow.
7. I do not know that he is honest.
8. I shall take you to the place where the accident took place.
9. I am sorry for what I said.
10. We all know that death keeps no calendar.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 3

Join the following pairs of sentences, into complex sentences using noun clauses:

1. The patient has died. This is my fear.
2. The police has arrested the murderer. This is the news.
3. She was taking a risk. She realised that.
4. He will get first division. This is certain.
5. The conversation was upsetting him. It was a fact.
6. We should drop the plan. This is my suggestion.
7. There is a lot of corruption in the country. The opposition pointed out this fact.
8. The audience listened to the speech. The speaker gave that speech.
9. The audience followed the speaker. It was a wonder.
10. Mohan has no money. That is a fact.
Answers:
1. My fear is that the patient has died.
2. The news is that the police has arrested the murderer.
3. She realised that she was taking a risk.
4. This is certain that he will get first division.
5. The fact was that the conversation was upsetting him.
6. My suggestion is that we should drop the plan.
7. The opposition pointed out the fact that there was a lot of corruption in the country.
8. The audience listened to what the speaker said.
9. It was a wonder that the audience followed the speaker.
10. The fact is that Mohan has no money.

Exercise 4

Combine the sentences using a noun clause in each case.

1. Why is he coming here? Does Mohan know this?
2. When will I catch the train ? I don’t know this.
3. Why does Mohan beat his brother ? I cannot understand this.
4. The money is missing. This is the fact.
5. When did she leave the town? It is a mystery.
6. How does he earn so much money? Nobody knows this.
7. He would come. I was certain of that.
8. What does the teacher say? Listen to it.
9. He did something. I am not impressed by it.
10. The principal was coming. The whole class knew it.
Answers:
1. Does Mohan know why he is coming here ?
2. I don’t know when I will catch the train.
3. I can’t understand why Mohan beats his brother.
4. The fact is that the money is missing.
5. When she left the town is a mystery.
6. Nobody knows how he earns so much money.
7. I was certain that he would come.
8. Listen to what the teacher says.
9. I am not impressed by what he did.
10. The whole class knew that the principal was coming.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

(ii) Adjective Clauses

An adjective qualifies a noun or a pronoun. So an adjective clause also qualifies a noun or a pronoun. (विशेषण किसी संज्ञा या सर्वनाम की विशेषता बताता है। इसलिए Adjective Clause भी किसी संज्ञा या सर्वनाम की विशेषता बताती है।)

जैसे- This is the house where I was born.
(यह वह घर है जहाँ पर मेरा जन्म हुआ था।)

Here, the adjective clause ‘where I was born’ qualifies the house’.
(यहाँ पर adjectiveclause where I was born’ ‘the house’ की विशेषता बताती है।)

How to recognise an adjective clause ?
Conjunction (योजक) से पहले कोई संज्ञा या सर्वनाम अवश्य होंगे; (जैसे उपरोक्त वाक्य में योजक ‘where’ से पहले ‘the house’ था।)

Sub ordinate clause (Adjective Clause) ‘something’ शब्द को अपना स्थान नहीं देगी। (यदि ‘something’ उसके स्थान पर रख भी दिया तो वाक्य निरर्थक हो जाएगा; जैसे)
This is the house something.

(वाक्य निरर्थक है। Main clause से मुख्य verb से यदि प्रश्न किया जाए कि ‘कौन’, ‘कौन-सा’, किसे ?, किसका ? तो subordinate clause उसका उत्तर देती है; जैसे This is the house where I was born.)

Principal Clause = This is the house.
(प्रश्न करो-कौन-सा घर ?)
(उत्तर मिलेगा-where I was borm.)
(जहाँ पर मेरा जन्म हुआ था।)

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Similarly we may have one more example:
The boy who is wearing a red shirt is a friend of mine.

Principal Clause = The boy is a friend of mine.
(प्रश्न करो कि कौन-सा लड़का है ?)
(उत्तर Subordinate Clause देगी-)
(‘जिसने लाल कमीज पहन रखी है।’)

‘Whois wearing a red shirt’.
Thus we can recognise an adjective clause.
Conjunctions of relative clauses:
(i) Relative Pronouns: who, whose, whom, which, that etc.
(ii) Relative adverbs when, how, where, why, etc.

Exercise 1

Combine the following pairs of sentences by using defining relative (adjectival) clauses:

1. The man composed this song. He is visiting us tomorrow.
2. I saw several houses. They were quite unsuitable.
3. She was dancing with a student. He had a slight limp.
4. The woman is begging. Her husband is dead.
5. This is Jaidev. His son won the scholarship this year.
6. I saw a picture. It fascinated me.
7. I have bought a watch. It shows date.
8. I met Mohan. He gave me ten rupees.
9. This is Miss Deepika. I talked to you about her.
10. This is Harish. His pocket was picked yesterday.
11. That is the painting. It was praised by everyone.
12. He is the man. I went to see him.
13. The man was sitting in the chair. I had gone to meet him.
14. I was waiting for a man. He did not come.
15. He introduced me to Sheela. She has become famous for painting.
Answers:
1. The man who composed this song is visiting us tomorrow.
2. I saw several houses which were quite unsuitable.
3. She was dancing with a student who had a slight limp.
4. The woman whose husband is dead is begging.
5. This is Jaidev whose son won the scholarship this year.
6. I saw a picture which fascinated me.
7. I have bought a watch which shows date.
8. I met Mohan who gave me ten rupees.
9. This is Miss Deepika about whom I talked to you.
10. This is Harish whose pocket was picked yesterday.
11. That is the painting which was praised by everyone.
12. He is the man with whom I went to see him.
13. The man whom I had gone to meet was sitting in the chair.
14. I was waiting for a man who did not come.
15. He introduced me to Sheela who has become famous for painting.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

(iii) Adverb Clauses

An adverb clause functions as an adverb in the sentence.
(एक adverb clause में क्रिया विशेषण का कार्य करती है।)

Kinds of Adverb Clauses:
1. Adverb Clauses of Time (कब ?):
Conjunctions: when, whenever, while, after, before, since, as soon as etc. You may come to my office whenever you like.
The bell rang after I reached school.
The patient had died before the doctor came.

2. Adverb Clauses of Place (कहाँ ?):
Conjunctions: where, wherever, whence.
I left the car where it broke down.
You may go wherever you like Go whence you came.

3. Adverb Clause of Reason/cause (क्यों ?):
Conjunctions: because, since, as, etc.
I could not attend you properly because I was so busy.
Since you say so, I believe you.

4. Adverb Clause of Manner (कैसे ?):
Conjunctions: as if, as though, as Do as I tell you.
She behaves as though she is a fairy queen.

5. Adverb Clause of Purpose (उद्देश्य):
Conjunctions: that, so that, in order that, for fear that etc.
We eat so that we may live. He drove fast in order that he might reach on time.

6. Adverb Clause of Result (परिभाषा):
Conjunctions: So + adjective + that etc.
He worked so hard that he scored 80% marks.

7. Adverb Clause of Contrast/concession:
Conjunctions: though, although, even though etc.
Although he has crossed seventy, he is very active.
Though he is poor, he is very contented.

8. Adverb Clause of Comparison:
Conjunctions: as-as; so-as; than.
She is not so rude as her mother.
She is as bold as her father.
He speaks more softly than his friends.

9. Adverb Clause of Condition:
Conjunctions: if, in case, unless, whether, provided that, as long as supposing that, etc.
If you work hard, you will pass.
Unless you work, you cannot succeed in life.

10. Adverb Clause of Proportion:
The higher you go, the cooler it is.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 1

Combine the following sentences using an Adverb Clause in each case:

1. He injured himself. He was alighting from the bus. (use as or while)
2. The platform became quiet. The train had left. (use when or after)
3. Arrange these books. I have shown you. (use as)
4. I was veiy upset. I felt like crying. (use so + adj + that)
5. Your brother is tall. My brother is taller. (use then)
6. You finish the work early. We can play tennis. (use if)
7. It was raining cats and dogs. They were playing football. (use although)
8. Mohan should start very early. It will be better. (use the earlier, yhe better)
9. My brother could not do homework. There was no power last night. (use because)
10. She dan’ces extremely well. You cannot help clapping. (use so…. that)
Answers:
1. He injured himself as/while he was alighting from the bus.
2. The platform became quiet after the train had left.
3. Arrange these books as I have shown you.
4. I was so upset that I left like crying.
5. My brother is taller than your brother.
6. If you finish the work early, we can play tennis.
7. Although it was raining like cats and dogs, they were playing football.
8. The earlier Mohan start, the better it will be for him.
9. My brother could not do homework because there was no power last night
10. She dances so extremely well that you cannot help clapping.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Compound Sentences:

A compound sentence has more than one main clauses. These clauses are joined together by co-ordinating conjunctions such as…… (and, but, yet, still, so, therefore, or, otherwise, neither……. nor, not only but also, either……. or)

(एक compound sentence में एक से अधिक main clauses होती हैं। ये clauses co-ordinating conjunctions के द्वारा जुड़ी होती हैं।

Co-ordinating conjunctions के द्वारा जोड़ी गई दोनों clause एक समान status की होती हैं।
He came in.
He saw everything with his own eyes.
He said nothing.
He came in and he saw everything with his own eyes but he kept silent.
(उपरोक्त वाक्य में तीन main clauses को co-ordinating conjunctions का प्रयोग करके जोड़ा गया है अतः यह एक compound sentence (संयुक्त वाक्य) है।)

Examples:
He should work hard or he will fail.
you can either eat an apple or you can drink apple juice.
He is neither intelligent nor is he a hard worker.
He is ill but he is still working.
He closed the shop and then he went to a temple.

Exercise 1

Combine each of the following groups of sentences into compound sentences using co-ordinating conjunctions.

1. He got the best treatment. He is not out of danger.
2. Mohan worked hard. He passed the examination.
3. He was absent. He was fined.
4. Vinod burnt the midnight oil. He did not get 1st division.
5. Kamla went to the market. She purchased a suit.
6. Work hard. You will fail otherwise.
7. Suresh is very rich. He is not happy.
8. You may write with a pen. You may use a pencil.
9. He knocked several times. No one came to open the door.
10. He is honest. He is faithful.
Answers:
1. He got the best treatment, yet he is not out of danger.
2. Mohan worked hard and passed the examination.
3. He was absent, so he was fined.
4. Vinod burnt the midnight oil, but he did not get 1st division.
5. Kamla went to the market and purchased a suit.
6. Work hard or you will fail.
7. Suresh is very rich, yet he is not happy.
8. You may either write with a pen or you may use a pencil.
9. He knocked several times, but no one came to open the door.
10. He is honest as well as faithful.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 2

Combine each of the following groups of sentences into compound sentences using co-ordinating conjunctions.

1. You may read. You may play.
2. The villager could not read. He could not write.
3. Radha’s marks were not high. She was able to get admission to a College.
4. Suresh is intelligent. His brother is dull.
5. I lost my way. I asked a passer-by the way. Being new he could not guide me.
6. He took me to his home. He gave me good food. He helped me with money.
7. He taught me. He also gave me books free.
8. He is very rich. He is not proud.
9. Mohan is not at school. He is not at home.
10. Iam tired. I have been working all day.
Answers:
1. You may either read or play.
2 The villager could neither read nor write.
3. Radha’s marks were not high, yet she was able to get admission to a college.
4. Suresh is intelligent, but his brother is dull.
5. I lost my way and asked a passer-by the way, but being new he could not guide me.
6. He took me home, gave me good food and helped me with money.
7. He not only taught me, but also gave me books free.
8. He is very rich yet he is not proud.
9. Mohan is neither at school nor at home.
10.1 am tired as I have been working all day.

Exercise 3

Combine each of the following groups of sentences into compound sentences using co-ordinating conjunctions.

1. Gopal passed. His sister failed.
2. Work hard. You will fail.
3. I help the poor. You tease them.
4. He did not come. He did not send any message.
5. Hire a taxi. You will miss the train.
6. We visited Agra. We visited Mathura also.
7. You should give up smoking. You will suffer from cancer.
8. He talked. The teacher taught.
9. Our team played well. We won the match.
10. Our team played well. We lost the match.
Answers:
1. Gopal passed, but his sister failed.
2. Work hard or you will fail.
3. I help the poor while you tease them.
4. Neither he came nor sent any message.
5. Hire a taxi or you will miss the train.
6. We visited not only Agra but Mathura also.
7. You should give up smoking otherwise you will suffer from cancer.
8. He talked while the teacher taught.
9. Our team played well and we won the match.
10. Our team played well but we lost the match.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

  • What is transformation?

When a sentence is changed from one grammatical form to another, without changing its meaning, it is called Transformation or Conversion of a sentence.

I. Change Of Simple Sentences Into Compound Sentences

1. Simple : You must work hard to get good marks
Compound : You must work hard and get good marks.

2. Simple : To our disgrace, he betrayed the country.
Compotind : He betrayed our country and this was a disgrace to us.

3. Simple : Seeing the police, the culprit escaped.
Compound : The culprit saw the police and escaped.

4. Simple : To our surprises he had reached home before us.
Compound : He had reached home before us and it surprised us.

5. Simple : He fell on the ground to escape being crushed.
Compound : He fell on the ground or he would have been crushed.

6. Simple : Owing to ill health he could not get a promotion.
Compound : He was ill, therefore, he could not get a promotion.

7. Simple : Besides being beautiful, the girl is clever.
Compound : The girl is not only beautiful but also clever.

8. Simple : Being hungry, he demanded food.
Compound : He was hungry and demanded food.

9. Simple : Inspite of being tired, he went on.
Compound : He was tired, but he went on.

10. Simple : Mohan having confessed, Sudhir will now be acquitted.
Compound : Mohan has confessed and Sudhir will now be acquitted.

II. Change Of Compound Sentences Into Simple Sentences

1. Compound : He climbed up the tree and plucked some mangoes.
Simple : Climbing the tree, he plucked some mangoes.

2. Compound : You must take some medicine, otherwise you cannot get well.
Simple : You cannot get well without taking some medicine.

3. Compound : I gave him not only food, but some money also.
Simple : Besides food, I gave him some money also.

4.Compound : He had good luck and was advised by a clever advocate.
Simple : Owing to his good luck he was advised by a clever advocate.

5. Compound : He made sincere efforts and got good marks.
Simple : Through his sincere efforts, he got good marks.

6. Compound : He worked hard but failed.
Simple : Now withstanding his hard work, he failed.

7. Compound : He appeared in the examination a third time and was successful.
Simple : After appearing in the examination a third time, he was successful.

8. Compound : Not only was the stranger given food but was provided with money.
Simple : Besides being given food the stranger was provided with money.

9. Compound : The president arrived and the meeting began.
Simple : The president having arrived, the meeting began.

10. Compound : The train stopped and we returned home.
Simple : The train having stopped, we returned home.

11. Compound : He went to London and studied English.
Simple : He went to London in order to study English.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

III. Change Of Simple Sentences Into Complex Sentences Using Noun Clauses

Transform the following simple sentences into complex sentences using noun clauses:
1. Simple : Mohan promised to help me.
Complex : Mohan promised that he would help me.

2. Simple : According to his order, it must be done.
Complex : He ordered that it must be done.

3. Simple : He admitted defeat.
Complex : He admitted that he had been defeated.

4. Simple : Please listen to me.
Complex : Please listen to what I am saying.

5. Simple : This is my pay.
Complex : This is what I am paid.

6. Simple : He will certainly help you.
Complex : That he will help you is certain.

7. Simple : I am glad to hear of your success.
Complex : I am glad to hear that you have succeeded.

8. Simple : I cannot understand the reason of his failure.
Complex : I cannot understand why he has failed.

9. Simple : The clerk admitted his mistake.
Complex : The clerk admitted that he was mistaken.

10. Simple : Do you want me to go there ?
Complex : Do you want that I should go there ?

IV. Change Of Simple Sentences Into Complex Sentences Using Adjective Clauses

Transform the following simple sentences into complex sentences using adjective clauses:

1. Simple : He has a mischievous son.
Complex : He has a son who is mischievous. Please bring the big chair.

2. Simple : Please bring the chair which is big.
Complex : I have loving parents.

3. Simple : I have parents who love me.
Complex : This is my book.

4. Simple : This is the book which belongs to me.
Complex : He was the first man to come.

5. Simple : He was the first man who came.
Complex : I saw a girl in a red dress.

6. Simple : I saw a girl who was in a red dress.
Complex : This is the time to go.

7. Simple : This is the time when you should go.
Complex : The writer of this book is coming tomorrow.

8. Simple : The man who wrote this book is coming tomorrow.
Complex : The man who wrote this book is coming tomorrow.

9. Simple : I want a red pen.
Complex : I want a pen which is red.

10. Simple : He was coming with a lame man.
Complex : He was coming with a man who was lame.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

V. Change Of Simple Sentences Into Complex Sentences Using Adverbial Clauses

1.Simple : The cat being absent, the mice will play.
Complex : When the cat is away, the mice will play.

2. Simple : I will go on receiving his message.
Complex : I will go when I receive his message.

3. Simple : We eat to live.
Complex : We eat so that we live.

4. Simple : I went early to get a good seat.
Complex : I went early so that I could get a good seat.

5. Simple : We waited for his finishing his work.
Complex : We waited until he finished his work.

6. Simple : He is honest inspite of his poverty.
Complex : Although he is poor, he is honest.

7. Simple : We stayed at home because of the bad weather.
Complex : We stayed at home as the weather was bad.

8. Simple : He acted according to my expectation.
Complex : He acted as I had expected.

9. Simple : He could not speak because of his anger.
Complex : He was so angry that he could not speak.

10. Simple : I met him at our usual meeting place.
Complex : I met him where we usually meet.

VI. Change Of Complex Sentences Into Simple Sentences

1. Complex : He remarked how beautiful the sunset was
Simple : He remarked on the beauty of the sunset.

2. Complex : He said that he was innocent.
Simple : He declared his innocence.

3. Complex : I cannot tell you how long my speech will be.
Simple : I cannot tell you about the length of my speech.

4. Complex : This is the letter which he was written by him.
Simple : This was the letter written by him.

5. Complex : Such as are wise can think.
Simple : Only the wise can think.

6. Complex : This is the road which marks the frontier.
Simple : This is the road marking the frontier.

7. Complex : Give me the book which is red.
Simple : Give me the red book.

8. Complex : I saw an animal which was three-footed.
Simple : I saw a three-footed animal.

9. Complex : I was glad when I heard of your success
Simple : 1 was glad to hear of your success.

10. Complex : The boy is so weak that he cannot walk.
Simple : The boy is too weak to walk.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

VII. Change Of Compound Sentences Into Complex Sentences

1. Compound : Spare the rod and spoil the child.
Complex : If you spare the rod, you will spoil the child.

2. Compound : You must work hard or face punishment.
Complex : If you don’t work hard, you will get punishment.

3. Compound : He took medicine but he did not get well.
Complex : He did not get well although he took medicine.

4. Compound : She worked hard so she got a prize.
Complex : She got a prize as she had worked hard.

5. Compound : Trust God and you will not fail.
Complex : You will not fail if you trust God.

6. Compound : I did not go to Kashmir and missed the fun.
Complex : I missed the fun because I did not go to Kashmir.

7. Compound : Ask no questions and you will be told no lies.
Complex : If you ask no questions, you will not be told lies.

8. Compound : The teacher was strict but always loving.
Complex : Though the teacher was strict, he was always loving.

9. Compound : It is now late, so we had better go to bed.
Complex : As it is now late, we had better go to bed.

10. Compound : Take care of your money, and you will be happy in your old age.
Complex : If you take care of your money, you will be happy in your old age.

VIII. Transformation Of Complex Sentences Into Compound Sentences

1. Complex : Although he is poor, he is contented.
Compound : He is contented, though poor.

2. Complex :As he is generous, people like him.
Compound :He is generous, so people like him.

3. Complex :He would began again after he had taken off his coat.
Compound : He would take off his coat and begin again.

4. Complex :When the nail was found, he would have lost the hammer.
Compound :The nail would be found but he would have lost the hammer.

5. Complex :If you do not hold your tongue, you will be beaten.
Compound :Hold your tongue or you will be beaten.

6. Complex :As soon as the bell rang, the school work commenced.
Compound :The bell rang and the school work commenced.

7. Complex :I am glad that you have recovered from illness.
Compound :You have recovered from illness and I am glad.

8. Complex :Unless you do your home work, your teacher will be angry with you.
Compound :You must do your work or the teacher will be angry with you.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Solved Exercises

Exercise 1

Transform the following simple sentences into compound sentences:

1. He was too honest a man to tell a lie.
2. Besides the judge the jury believe the man to be guilty.
3. The sun having shone the mist cleared up.
4. Inspite of my advice, he made no use of his time.
5. Through his sincere efforts, he succeeded in life.
6. Not with standing his hard work, he failed.
7. Though frightened, he was not much hurt.
8. On this verandah the poet sat gazing at the scenery.
9. The man sat near the house, smoking and drinking.
10. Though young, he was wise.
Answers:
1. He was very honest and would not tell a lie.
2. He Jury as well as the judge believed the man to the guilty.
3. The sun shone and the mist cleared up.
4. I advised him but he made no use of his time.
5. He made sincere efforts and succeeded in life.
6. He worked hard but failed.
7. He was frightened but not much hurt.
8. The poet sat in the verandah and gazed at the scenery.
9. The man sat near the bouse and smoked and drank.
10. He was young but wise.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 2

Transform the following compound sentences into simple sentences:

1. The thief saw the police and ran away.
2. He finished the exercise and put away his books.
3. He put the spade aside and took rest.
4. We are tired, so we should take some tea.
5. The work was completed so I made the payment.
6. He finished his work in the city and came back by train.
7. He slept late and got up late next morning.
8. The child saw the sweets, and his mouth watered.
9. He burst into tears and went away.
10. I looked at the scene and was surprised.
Answers:
1. Seeing the police, the thief ran away.
2. Having finished the exercise, he put away his books.
3. Putting aside the spade, he took rest.
4. Being tired, we should take some tea.
5. The work having been completed, I made payment.
6. Having finished the work in the city, he came back by train.
7. Having slept late, he got up late next morning.
8. Seeing the sweets, the child’s mouth watered.
9. Bursting into tears, he went away.
10. Looking at the scene, I was surprised.

Exercise 3

Transform the following simple sentences into complex sentences using noun clauses:

1. I saw the trouble brewing.
2. This is not the way to clean things.
3. He had evidently expected the challenge.
4. His main work seems to make cigarettes.
5. They seemed to enjoy it.
6. We never expected to see such an animal.
7. The island seemed to be divided up into squares.
8. His aptitude for science was soon apparent.
9. And 1 don’t expect to see his here again.
10. 1 want you to take him out.
Answers:
1. I saw that the trouble was brewing.
2. This is not the way how things are cleared.
3. It was evident that he had expected the challenge.
4. It seemed that his main work was to make cigarettes.
5. It seemed that they enjoyed it
6. We never expected that we would see such an animal.
7. It seemed that the island was divided up into squares.
8. It was soon apparent that he had aptitude for science.
9. And I don’t expect that I should see him again.
10. I want you should take him out.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 4

Transform the following simple sentences into complex sentences using adjective clauses:

1. I want to talk to this man.
2. He was bom in this city.
3. He got my letter.
4. Yesterday I met an intelligent girl.
5. Uneasy lies the crowned head.
6. She is a stupid girl.
7. He left because of this reason.
8. Mihir Sen undertook a perilous swim.
9. A hardworking man is liked by all.
10. I cannot understand the hard sum.
Answers:
1. This is the man to whom I want to talk.
2. This is the city where he was born.
3. He got the letter which I sent.
4. Yesterday I met a girl who was intelligent.
5. Uneasy lies the head which wears the crown.
6. She is the girl who is stupid.
7. This is the reason why he left.
8. Mihir Sen undertook the swim which was perilous.
9. A man who is hardworking is liked by all.
10. I cannot understand the sum which is hard.

Exercise 5

Change the following simple sentences into complex sentences using adverbial clauses:

1. It makes my flesh crawl to hear you.
2. Your tooth being out, you can go to school.
3. His mouth began to water at the thought of mangoes.
4. I met him at our usual place.
5. She walks like a queen.
6. Inspite of being poor, he is honest.
7. The conductor pulled the bell and the bus stopped.
8. He will die of sun stroke by keeping on like this.
9. 1 looked at it more closely and found her right.
10. She talked like a mad woman.
Answers:
1. It makes my flesh crawl when I hear you.
2. You can go to school as your tooth is out
3. His mouth began to water when he thought of the mangoes.
4. I met him where we usually met
5. She walks as if she were a queen.
6. Although he is poor, yet he is honest
7. The bus stopped when the conductor pulled the bell.
8. He will die if he keeps on like this.
9. I found her right when I looked at it more closely.
10. She talked as if she were a mad woman.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 6

Transform the following complex sentences into simple sentences:

1. I know that you are the noblest of men.
2. I have no sentiments in this matter which are religious.
3. He sat down with us after he had taken bath.
4. I wept when I thought of my own calamity.
5. I bid them that they should drink the poison.
6. It was only Socrates who remained calm.
7. You know what my errand is.
8. We were ashamed when we heard his words.
9. The boy who was carrying a letter, entered.
10. I shall look as if I were poverty stricken.
Answers:
1. I known you to be the noblest of men.
2. I have no religious sentiments in this matter.
3. He sat down with us after taking bath.
4. I wept when 1 thought of my own calamity.
5. I bid them to drink the poison.
6. Only Socrates remained calm.
7. You know my errand.
8. We were ashamed when we heard his words.
9. The boy carrying a letter entered.
10. I shall look poverty stricken.

Exercise 7

Transform the following compound sentences into complex sentences:

1. Do the sum and I will let you go.
2. They reached the top and looked for the man.
3. He is poisonous and will cause sores.
4. He is old but he is full of activity.
5. We started for home and the rain came at once.
6. The TV was not working properly and the mechanic repaired it.
7. He worked hard but he did not get good marks.
8. The teacher came and the students became calm.
9. She came late, so she was punished.
10. He picked up the bag and went to the car.
Answers:
1. If you do the sum, I will let you go.
2. They looked for the man when they reached the top.
3. As he is poisonous the will cause sores.
4. Although he is old, he is full of activity.
5. As soon as he started for home the rain came.
6. As the TV was not working properly, the mechanic repaired it.
7. Although he worked hard, he did not get good marks.
8. When the teacher came, the students became calm.
9. She was punished because she came late.
10. He went to the car after he had picked the bag.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences

Exercise 8

Transform the following complex sentences into compound ones :

1. I am certain that you have broken the glass.
2. As soon as I received the information I left for Delhi.
3. The rain came as soon as we started for home.
4. Although he is strict, he is good at heart.
5. Although he was defeated, he could still argue.
6. If you buy a cheap thing, you will repent.
7. As he was sick, he could not eat.
8. I shall receive you at the station when the train arrives.
9. He works hard so that he can please his master.
10. The sun rose and the fog disappeared.
Answers:
1. You have broken the glass and I am certain of it.
2. I received the information and immediately left for Delhi.
3. I started for home and the rain came immediately.
4. He is strict, but he is good at heart
5. He was defeated but he could still argue.
6. Buy a cheap thing and you will repent
7. He was sick and could not eat
8. The train arrives and I will receive at the station.
9. He wants to please his master and therefore works hard.
10. The fog disappeared when the sun rose.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Simple Compound Complex Sentences Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions Grammar Idioms Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 9th Class English Grammar Idioms

1. Above all (chiefly, before everything else) – He is rich and good. Above all, he is honest.
2. Above-board (not open to question, honest, straightforward, beyond reproach) – His integrity is above-board.
3. Above par (of superior quality) – Of all my suits, the blue one is above par.
4. On account of – (for the sake of) – The college will be closed on account o/holidays.
5. On no account (not for any reason) – On no account will I help you.
6. To give a good account of oneself (to act with credit to oneself) – She gave a good account of herself in singing.
7. A fidus Achates (a faithful friend) – I can trust Gurgeet as he is a fidus Achates.
8. The heel of Achilles (a weak spot) – Drinking of wine proved to be the heel ofAchilles for him.
9. An Adonis (a very handsome man) – Simran fell in love with Harjeet as he is an Adonis.
10. To build castles in the air (to think of something impossible of realisation; to day-dream; to conceive fanciful ideas) – Do some solid work; do not build castles in the air.
11. To assume airs (to affect superiority) – He is an egoist; he always assumes airs.
12. To air one’s opinions (to give vent to one’s feelings in public) – Don’t air your opinions in this controversial matter.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

13. To stand aloof (to keep to oneself and not mix with others) – I have decided to stand aloof on this issue.
14. To lead to the altar (to marry) – He is willing to lead Harsharan to the altar.
15. An Amazon (a warlike woman) – He fears his wife as she is an Amazon.
16. An Ananias (a liar) – Nobody trusts him, because he is known as an Ananias.
17. To weigh anchor (to be about to sail) – I boarded the ship as it was to weigh anchor.
18. To cast anchor (to drop anchor into the sea; to fix oneself) – The captain ordered the crew to cast anchor at New York.
19. An Apollo (a man with a perfect physique) – Even an Apollo cannot lift this stone.
20. The apple of discord (a cause of strife, contention, or quarrel) – Land is the apple of discord between the two brothers.
21. To upset the apple cart (to disturb the peace) – His tricks have upset the apple cart of his rival.
22. Apple pie order (in perfect order) – I keep all my things in an apple pie order.
23. To be tied to his mother’s apron strings (to be under the control and influence of his mother) – As he is tied to his mother’s apron strings, he cannot take any decision by himself.
24. Arcadian life (A blissfully happy rural and simple life) – People living in big cities are not acquainted with the Arcadian life.
25. To keep a person at arm’s length (to avoid coming in contact with a person) – I always keep selfish friends at arm’s length.
26. To take up arms (to fight; to go to war) – Bhagat Singh took up arms against the British Rule.
27. To receive with open arms (to welcome cordially) – My friend in Mumbai received me with open arms.
28. Attic salt [refined subtle wit (for which the Athenians were famous)] – Among the scholarly circles, he is known as a man of attic salt.
29. To cleanse the Augean stables (to effect great improvements in government, or to abolish great abuses) – To remove corruption is like cleansing the Augean stables.
30. To have an axe to grind (to have some selfish objective in view) – Behind his offer of help, he has an axe to grind.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

31. Not to know B from a bull’s foot (to be ignorant of even the simplest things) – He cannot succeed in life as he does not know B from bull s foot.
32. A Babel (A confused noise) – I was disturbed by a Babel of voices from the next room.
33. To break the back of anything (to perform the most difficult part of it) – I have broken the backbone of the problem.
34. To backbite a person (to slander or to speak ill of someone) – He is in the habit of backbiting others.
35. To get one’s back up (to rouse one s anger) – By making a noise, the students got the teacher s back up.
36. He is the backbone of his team (he is the one on whom his team mainly relies for its successes) – Virat is the backbone of our cricket team.
37. He has no backbone (he has no will of his own) – A henpecked husband has no backbone.
38. Backstairs influence (influence exerted in an underhand or clandestine manner) – He went scot-free in the case because of his backstairs influence.
39. To cause bad blood (to cause strife and enmity) – The land dispute has caused bad blood between the two brothers.
40. A bad egg (a bad penny a worthless fellow) – He has proved a bad egg!penny in his family.
41. Bad form (bad manners) – To curse is bad form.
42. Bag and baggage (with all one’s belongings) – He has shifted from Ludhiana to Phagwara with bag and
baggage. .
43. To keep the ball rolling (to keep things going on) – Don’t stop the fun; keep the ball rolling.
44. To bandy words (to wrangle or exchange arguments) – You should not bandy words with your seniors.
45. Baptism of fire (a soldier’s first experience of actual war) – He faced his baptism office in the Kargil sector.
46. To call to the bar (to admit as a barrister) – Kulwant was called to the bar last year.
47. Barmicide’s feast (imaginary benefits) – Barmicide s feast has no charm for me.
48. Off one’s own bat (on one s own initiative) – I’ll succeed in life off my own bat.
49. To bear down on (to sail in the direction of) – The angry mob was bearing down on the culprit.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

50. To lose one’s bearings (to be uncertain of one sposition) – He is sure to lose his bearings when confronted with corrupt police.
51. To beat about the bush (to talk in a round about manner) – Come to point; don’t beat about the bush.
52. To be dead beat (worn out by fatigue) – After a long journey, I am dead beat.
53. Bed and board (lodgings and food) – You will be provided with bed and board at our expenses.
54. As you make your bed, so you must lie on it (you will have to bear the consequences of your own mistakes or misdeeds) – You will have to suffer for your sins for as you make your bed, so you must lie on it.
55. To take to one’s bed (to have to be confined to bed as a result of sickness) – Due to over work, he took to his bed.
56. To have a bee in one’s bonnet (to be cranky) – He is a mechanic but wants to buy a Roll Royce car. He must be having a bee in his bonnet.
57. Bee-line (the shortest distance between two places) – There is no bee-line to success. You must work hard for it.
58. To go a-begging (to be sold very cheaply because no one cares to buy) – Soon after the summer season, fans go a begging.
59. Behind one’s back (without one’s knowledge) – My son started learning music behind my back.
60. Behind the scenes (in private; out of sight) – Most of the politicians do evil things behind the scenes.
61. To make’believe (to feign or pretend) – He made me believe that he was rich.
62. To bell the cat (to do something extremely dangerous) – Asking the boss for Increasing the salary was like belling the cat.
63. To hit below the belt (to act unfairly in a contest) – If you hit below the belt, you will be punished.
64. To give a person a wide berth (to keep as far away from him as possible) – As he is dishonest, I always like to give him a wide berth.
65. His better half (a man s wife) – He is fully under the control of his better half.
66. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush (certainly is better than possibility) – I don’t want to wait for the prices to go up for selling my scooter as I believe that a bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.
67. An old bird is not to be caught with chaff (Experienced people are not easily fooled or deceived)-You cannot make him pay you money; an old bird is not to be caught with chaff.
68. To take the bit between one’s teeth (to get out of control; to become unmanageable) – Because his father’s excessive love, Manpreet has taken the bit between his teeth.
69. To bite the dust (to be defeated in war) – In the war India made Pakistan bite the dust.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

70. The bitter bit (to cheat the cheater) – The bitter was bitten at last when he picked the pocket of a thief.
71. His bark was worse than his bite (He usually makes a lot of vain verbal threats) – Although his actions were harmless his bark was worse than his bite.
72. Let me see it in black and white (Write it down) – The agreement was in black and white.
73. A wet blanket (a person who discourages others; one who is a damper to enjoyment) – Don’t take him to the picnic, he is like a wet blanket.
74. To have kissed the blarney stone (to have a very persuasive tongue) – Although he has kissed the blarney storie, he cannot be fool me.
75. In cold blood (deliberately; not in passion) – It was a murder in cold blood.
76. Blood is thicker than water (One usually takes the side of one s relation against another who is not of one s own blood) – He appeared as a witness in favour of his criminal son; after all blood is thicker than water.
77. To blow hot and cold (to do one thing at one time and the opposite soon after) – I don’t trust him, for he always blows hot and cold.
78. A blue stocking (a learned woman, inclined to pedantry) – She is respected in the society of scholars, as she is a blue stocking.
79. Once in a blue moon (a very rare occurrence) – He visits me once in a blue moon.
80. Blue Ribbon (the highest prize in any sport competition or tournament) – He won the Blue Ribbon in the athletic meet.
81. At first blush (at first sight) – He fell in love with her at first blush.
82. In the same boat (in the same misfortune or circumstances) – My friends and I are sailing in the same boat.
83. A bolt from the blue (a sudden and unexpected occurrence) – The crash of the stock market was bolt from the blue for him.
84. A bone of contention (a cause of dispute) – Property is the bone of contention between the two brothers.
85. To have a bone to pick with someone (to have something to say to someone which might cause a quarrel) – He is rough and always has a bone to pick with one or the other.
86. A bookworm (a person who has excessive love of reading books) – He spends most of his time in the library as he is a bookworm.
87. By leaps and bounds (with remarkable speed) – India is making progress by leaps and bounds.
88. Homeward bound (on the way home) – As our cricket team did not reach the semifinals, it was soon homeward bound.
89. To Bowdlerise (to remove all the objectionable passages from a book (Thomas Bawdier in 1818 published an expurgated version of Shakespeare s works) – hence the name)-His speech was published after it had been bowdlerised.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

90. To boycott (to avoid; to shun; to have no dealings with) – Lala Lajpat Rai boycotted the Simon Commission.
91. Breach of promise (Failure to keep a promise to marry one to whom you are betrothed) – She accused Jhanda Singh of breach of promise.
92. One’s bread and butter (one s means of livelihood) – He earns his bread and butter by selling fruit.
93. His bread is well buttered (He is in fortunate circumstances As his bread is well buttered; he does not care for expenses.)
94. To bread winner – (one who provides the means of livelihood for himself and his family) – Kuldeep is the breadwinner of his family.
95. To break in (to tame; to bring under control in a gentle manner) – The lion was broken in with a great difficulty.
96. To break the news (to reveal something unpleasant in a gentle manner) – I don’t know how to break the news of his failure.
97. To break the ice (to be the first to begin; to break the silence) – Mohan broke the ice in this matter.
98. To make a clean breast of anything (to make a full confession) – He made a clean breast of having committed the theft. Rahul made a clean breast his role in the conspiracy.
99. To breathe one’s last (to die) – He breathed his last after a long illness.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

100. To breathe freely again (to feel comfortable) – She was able to breathe freely again after the death of her mother-in-law.
101. To make bricks without straw (to attempt to do something without proper materials or due preparation) – Trying to cross the ocean in a boat is like trying to make bricks without straw.
102. Never cross the bridge until you come to it (Do not anticipate difficulties) – Your fear about offending your officer is baseless. In fact, never cross the bridge until you come to it.
103. To bring down the house (to cause rapturous applause) – His musical performance brought down the house.
104. To bring up the rear (to be the last in the line) – As I reached, late, I brought up the rear.
105. It is as broad as it is long (It is the same whichever way you view it) – This room is as broad as it is long.
106. To knit the brow (to frown) – It is a bad habit to knit one’s brow.
107. To brow beat (to bully) – He is in the habit of brow beating others.
108. To kick the bucket (to die) – He kicked the bucket after a long distance.
109. To buckle on one’s armour (to set to work energetically) – During the examination days, students buckle on their armour.
110. To take the bull by the horns (to tackle any difficulty in a bold and direct manner) – Don’t be afraid of the difficulty and take the bull by the horns.
111. John Bull (an Englishman) – A John Bull considers himself superior to others.
112. To burke a question (to suppress or prevent any discussion on it.) – The Prime Minister tried to burke the question raised by the opposition parties.
113. To bury the hatchet (to forget past quarrels and be friends again) – The American Indians had the custom of burying their tomahawks when peace was concluded, as a symbol of their peaceful intentions – Let us bury the hatchet and be good friends once again.
114. Good wine needs no bush (there is no need to advertise something good) – Every student knows a good professor because a good wine needs no bush.
115. But me no buts (Do not bring forward objections) – But me no buts in my efforts to help the poor.
116. To raise cain (to rebuke severely) – Do not raise coin your child.
117. To take the cake (to take the first prize; to be the best of the lot) – He, being the best player, took the cake.
118. To burn the candle at both ends (expend energy in two directions at the same time) – He is a spendthrift and bums the candle at both ends.
119. The game is not worth the candle (the undertaking is not worth the trouble) – Don’t run after that worthless girl; the game is not worth the candle.
120. To paddle your own canoe (to be responsible for your actions; to act independently) – Now you are a grown up boy and must learn to paddle your own canoe.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

121. If the cap fits, wear it (If you think the remarks made refer to you, then act accordingly) – The officer has great trust in you; if the cap fits, wear it.
122. To go cap in hand (to beseech in a humble manner) – After making mischief, he went cap in hand to apologise to the teacher.
123. Capital punishment (the death sentence or penalty) – Some people think that capital punishment is better than life imprisonment.
124. Capital ship (a warship of the most powerful kind) – The Capital ship was sunk in the war.
125. To put the cart before the horse (to do first what ought to be done afterwards; to reverse the proper order of things) – By taking the last step first, he tried to put the cart before the horse.
126. To let the cat out of the bag (to expose the trick; to let out the secret) – He let the cat out of the bag by disclosing that his friend was the culprit.
127. To fight like cats and dogs (to be always quarrelling and fighting) – Gurbux and his wife always fight like cats and dogs.
128. Care killed the cat (Don’t worry and fret yourself to death) – You should not worry much about this problem, for care killed the cat.
129. See which way the cat jumps (Sit on the fence; see how things are likely to turn out before deciding on a course of action) – Before joining any party, I will see which way the cat jumps.
130. To rain cats and dogs (to rain incessantly) – It has been raining cats and dogs since morning.
131. He is a cat’s paw (one used as a tool to do something dangerous.) – In the fable the Monkey used the Cat’s paw to pull chestnuts out of the fire. He is not guilty but he has been used as a cat’s paw by his officer.
132. To catch one’s eye (to attract attention)- – -She caught everyone’s eye at the function.
133. To give a sop to Cerberus (to appease someone by gift or bribe; to bribe) – These days you have to give a sop to Cerberus in every office for getting your work done.
134. To take the chair (to preside at a meeting) – Mohan took the chair at the meeting of the working committee.
135. To ring the changes (to be continually making alterations and trying new methods) – He never follows old methods and is always ringing the changes.
136. Chauvinism (absurd patriotism which manifests itself in warlike conduct) – From Nicholas Chauvin, a soldier ardently devoted to Napoleon. Chauvinism is a dangerous trait of character.
137. Catch at a straw (a help in dire need) – A drowning man catches at a straw.
138. She is no chicken (She is older than she says, or appears to be) – She appears to be very young but she is no chicken.
139. Chicken-hearted (weak timid, cowardly) – He appears to be very brave but in fact he is a chicken- hearted fellow.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

140. Don’t count your chickens before they are hatched (Don’t calculate your gains before they are realised) – Let the result come; don t count your chickens before they are hatched.
141. A chip of the old block (a son resembling his father in face, disposition, habits etc) – He resembles his father in appearance and actions; he is a chip of the old block.
142. Chock full (full to overflowing) – The drains of the city are chock full.
143. Hobson’s choice (no alternative; take what you are offered or none at all.) – Girls these days are not given Hobson ’s choice at the time of their marriage.
144. To pick and choose (to make a careful selection) – It is not easy to pick and choose a wife.
145. A Cicerone (a guide who takes strangers and tourists over a country and explains to them all the curiosities and features of the place ) – A Cicerone enlighted us about the importance of the ancient monument.
146. Cimmerian darkness (profound darkness) – There was Cimmerian darkness in the room.
147. To square the circle (to attempt something impossible) – By trying to reform Harbhajan, you are trying to square the circle.
148. Close fisted (mean, miserly) – Don’t expect any charity from him as he is a close-fisted man.
149. Every cloud has a silver lining (Adverse conditions do not last for ever, brighter days are usually in store) – Don’t lose heart in your adversity as every cloud has a silver lining.
150. To have one’s head in the clouds (to live in dreamland; to have fanciful ideas) – He is not a practical man; he has his head in the clouds.
151. To live in clover; to be in clover (to be living in great luxury) – Almost all the film stars live in clover he is the son of a millionaire and lives in clover.
152. To carry coals to Newcastle (to do anything superfluous or unnecessary) – Newcastle, a great coal port in England.’ By teaching business tips to that great businessman, you are trying to carry coal to Newcastle.
153. To haul over the coals (to scold severely; to reprimand) – If you make a noise, your teacher will haul you over the coals.
154. To heap coals of fire (to return good for evil) – A saint has no ill will; he heaps coals of fire.
155. The coast is clear (the danger is past; there is no sign of interference) – Don’t be afraid. Everybody is asleep and the coast is clear.
156. Cut your coat according to your cloth (Live within your income; make what you possess serve your needs) – If you don’t cut your coat according to your cloth, you will repent.
157. A cock and bull story (a foolishly incredible story) – Nobody will believe your cock and bull story of having seen a ghost.
158. To be cock-sure (to be absolutely certain; extremely self-reliant) – He is cock-sure of getting first division.
159. To throw cold water upon anything (to discourage effort) – His treachery threw cold water upon my plans.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

160. To give the cold shoulder (to rebuff, to treat with indifference) – He went to meet his friend with great hope but was given a cold shoulder by him.
161. Off colour (not in the usual form) – He is off colour and does not appear cheerful.
162. To show one’s colours (to reveal one s true intentions by no longer pretending) – In time of my need he showed his colours.
163. To come off flying colours (to succeed brilliantly) – He came off with flying colours in the final examination.
164. To commit to memory (to learn by heart) – He has committed the whole book to memory.
165. Too many cooks spoil the broth (When there are more workers than necessary they are likely to get in each other s way and the result is apt to be a failure) – He was attended by four doctors, yet he died; too many cooks spoiled the broth.
166. To send to Coventry (to boycott; to refuse to be on familiar terms or to have any dealings with someone) – He tried to be friendly with his class-fellows but they sent him to Coventry.
167. An admirable Crichton (a very talented person) – An admirable Crichton is successful in life.
168. Crocodile tears (hypocritical tears) – He shed crocodile’s tears at his uncle’s death.
169. By hook or crook (by fair means or foul) – He wants to succeed in life by hook or crook.
170. As the crow flies (in a direct line, the shortest distance between two points) – For reaching the post office, turn left and then go as the crow flies.
171. To take up the cudgels (to champion or fight for someone) – He has taken up the cudgels against his corrupt officer.
172. To curry favour (to seek favour by flattery) – He does not work but tries to curry favour of his officer.
173. Cut and dry (ready made) – He is in search of a cut and dry formula for success.
174. To cut a dash (to make an impression) – He cut a dash by his excellent performance.
175. A cut-throat (a murderer) – The police has caught the cut-throat who committed two murders.
176. To be at daggers drawn (to be deadly enemies) – Santa Singh dnd Banta Singh are at daggers drawn over a piece of land.
177. To have the sword of Damocles hanging over one’s head (to be in imminent danger of losing one’s life; to live in constant fear of some impending danger) – As his post is temporary, he has the sword of Damocles hanging over his head.
178. A Daniel – (an imperial judge) (‘Shakespeare, “Merchant of Venice”; Daniel I-VI) – The officer is so honest that people call him a Daniel.
179. A dare-devil (a fearless, reckless man) – He fought like a dare-devil in the battle.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

180. Up to date (recent, modem) – This is an up to date directory.
181. In Davy Jones’s locker (drowned, at the bottom of the sea) – He got in Davy Jones’s locker when swimming.
182. He has seen better days (He was once prosperous) – He is a bankrupt, but he has seen better days.
183. Evil days (a period of misfortune) – I have fallen on evil days. You should face these evil days bravely.
184. To gain or win the day (to be victorious) – Our hockey team has won the day.
185. Halcyon days (a time when there is peace and happiness in the land) – During the reign of Harshwardhan India witnessed its Halcyon days.
186. Dead beat (quite exhausted) – After the long journey, I am dead beat.
187. Dead broke (penniless) – Gambling made him dead broke.
188. To run dead heat (a race in which the contestants came in together) – It was a dead heat race and the winner was judged with the help of video re-play.
189. A dead letter (something which no longer exists) – In some parts of India Sati system is still not a dead letter.
190. To step into dead man’s shoes (to come into an inheritance; to succeed someone who died) – He has stepped into the dead man’s shoes and is managing his father’s business.
191. To give the devil his due (give a person credit for his good qualities however worthless he may be) – He is mischievous, but to give the devil his due he is intelligent also.
192. Go to the devil (Be off) – Go to the devil, and don’t disturb me.
193. Devil’s playthings (playing cards) – He has been ruined by Devil’s playthings.
194. Devil’s bones (dice) – In the past a kind of gambling was played with Devil s bones.
195. To be between the devil and the deep sea (to be faced with two dangerous situations, each of which is to be dreaded as much as the other) – I will be ruined both ways; I am between the devil and the deep sea.
196. To be on the horns of a dilemma (to be in such a position that it is difficult to decide what to do) – I am on the horns of a dilemma whether I should lend him money or not.
197. Give a dog a bad name and hang him (Once a person loses his reputation, he is likely to be blamed for the misdeeds of other) – He is not guilty, but the opposition parties are trying to give a dog a bad name and hang him.
198. To be a dog in the manger (to prevent others from using what one cannot use oneself; to be selfish) – He neither plays himself nor lets others play. He is a dog in the manger.
199. Every dog has his day (Sooner or later, everyone has his share of good fortune) – From a clerk, he has become an officer. Every dog has his day.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

200. To be in the doldrums (to be in low spirits; to be out of sorts) – After losses in business Mahinder is in doldrums.
201. The Dole (money given in charity, and also allowances to the unemployed) – The dole granted to the war widow is not sufficient.
202. To dole out (to give out in small quantities) – A very small amount of money is being doled out to the flood victim.The government has doled out a small amount of money to be spent on education.
203. To darken one’s door (to pay a visit to one’s house) – Yesterday, one of my old friends darkened my door.
204. Ups and downs (varying fortunes; changes and chances of life) – Life is full of ups and downs.
205. Down and out (penniless, ruined) – After loss in business, he is down and out.
206. Draconian legislation (very severe laws) – From Draco an Athenian legislator, whose laws were extremely severe) – The government passed Draconian legislation during the emergency.
207. To draw the long bow (to relate fantastic stories) – He draws the long bow about his visit to America.
208. To draw the line at (to refuse to go beyond a certain limit) – I have drawn the line and will not give you any more money.
209. To throw dust in one’s eyes (to try to deceive someone) – He threw dust in the police’s eyes and ran away.
210. Dutch courage (bravery induced by alcoholic liquors) – His Dutch courage has been of no use to him.
211. Eagle-eye (quick to discover, very discerning) – Nothing can escape Mohan’s eagle-eye.
212. To set by the ears (to cause strife or incite to quarrel) – The clever wife set her husband by the ears against his own brother.
213. To eat one’s words (to apologise; to take back what one has said) – He spoke without thinking and had to eat his words later.
214. A bad egg (a worthless person) – Satvinder is a bad egg in the whole class.
215. To egg on (to spur on to further action) – He egged me on to talk to the officer, but I was hesitant.
216. Do not put all your eggs in one basket (Do not stake all your money on a single industry; Spread your resources over a variety of transactions) – By purchasing the shares of one company, he has put all his eggs in one basket.
217. A white elephant (a useless possession which is extremely expensive to keep) – His imported car is a white elephant for him.
218. At the eleventh hour (at the last moment) – I reached the railway station at the eleventh hour and caught the train.
219. Give him an inch he’ll take an ell (He will abuse his privilege and take great libertie) – Don’t give him any concession, for if you give him an inch, he ‘ll take an ell.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

220. Elysian happiness (a state of perfect bliss) – The period of a few months after marriage was Elysian happiness for him.
221. At his Writ’s end (utterly confounded) – He was at his wit’s end when he got the news of his failure.
222. At the end of his tether (unable to proceed any further) – After working for ten hours, I was at the end of my tether.
223. Odds and ends (remnants) – He gathered his odds and ends and went away.
224. To make both ends meet (lo keep expenses within one income) – These days it is difficult for a poor man lo make both ends meet.
225. Without end (forever lasting) – These days student unrest seems to be without end
226. A blot on the escutcheon (a disgrace on the reputation of a family) – His bad ways are a blot on the escutcheon
227. An exodus (the departure of a large body of people. From the Exodus of the is raelites from Egypt under Moses) – These days there is an exodus of people from villages to cities.
228. An eye for an eye (tit for tat; to return evil for evil; retaliaze) – He believes in the principle of an eye for an eye.
229. To keep an eye on (to watch carefully) – You should keep an eye on your expenses.
230. To see eye to eye (to be in complete agreement with the views of another) – The two brothers cannot see each other eye to eye.
231. Fabian tactics (a policy of wearing down an opponeni by delaying action; harassing an enemy by avoiding open battle) – Fabians Maximus, a Roman Consul, wore down Hannibal by refraining from engaging him in actual battle in the second Public War. The employers adopted Fabian tactics when the workers went on strike.
232. To save one’s face (to avoid disgrace) – In order lo save face, the corrupt minister resigned.
233. The fairer sex (women) – Many battles have been fought for the sake of the fairer sex.
234. Bad faith (dishonest intentions) – I cannot trust him as he is a man of bad faith,
235. In good faith (with honest intentions) – l told him my secret in good faith.
236. A breach of faith (to act contraly to what one had professed) – It was a breach off faith on your part to disclose my secret to my enemies.
237. To fall out (lo quarrel) – The two friends have fallen out on a trivial matter.
238. To fall through (to fail) – The plan fell through for want of funds.
239. To fall upon (to anack) – The lion fell upon the lamb.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms

240. To sail under false colours (to attempt to deceive) – The criminal tried to sail under false colours but was caught.
241. A feather In one’s cap (an honour; a distinction) – He added another feather in his cap by getting first division.
242. Birds of a feather flock together (People of similar tastes and dispositions crave each other s company) – Most of his friends are of his age, for birds of a feather flock together.
243. To feather one’s nest (to provide for the furture) – He has feathered his nest by saving a lot of money.
244. To show the white feather (to show signs of cowardice) – H e showed a white feather in the battle.
245. To sit on the fence (to remain neutral; to take neither side in a conhvversy) – He has not joined any party; he is sitting on the fence.
246. As fit as a fiddle (in excellent health) – He remained ¡II for many days but now he is flt as a fiddle.
247. To play second fiddle (to take a subordinate position) – He plays second fiddle to his wife.
248. To march In single, or Indian file (to march in a single line, one behind another) – The students came out of the class in Indian file.
249. To have at one’s finger tips (to know thoroughly) – I have all the details of the case at my finger tips.
250. To set the Thames on fire (to do something sensational or remarkable) – His interview to the press has set the Thames on fire.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Idioms Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions Grammar Modals Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 9th Class English Grammar Modals

What is a Modal?
Modals एक प्रकार की सहायक क्रियाएं हैं। ये main verb के साथ मिलकर कार्य करने के mode या तरीके को बताती हैं। ये योग्यता, अनुमति, संभावना, कर्तव्य जैसे विचारों को व्यक्त करती हैं। मुख्यतः will, shall, would, should, can, could, may, might, must, need, dare, ought to और used to आदि modal auxiliaries हैं।

Features of Modals (सहायक क्रियाओं की विशेषताएँ)
(a) Modals कभी अकेली नहीं आतीं। इनका प्रयोग सदा main verb के साथ किया जाता है; जैसे
You must do this work.
I can solve this sum.

(b) Subject के number, gender या person का modals पर कोई प्रभाव नहीं होता; जैस
I can go there.
We can go there.
You can go there.
They can go there.
He can go there.
She can go there.

(c) Modals के साथ verb की Ist form का प्रयोग होता है। परंतुought और used के साथ ‘to’ Infinitive का प्रयोग होता है; जैसे
He will leave for Mumbai today.
You should work hard.
I can help you.
We ought to serve our country.
He used to help me in the past

(d) Modals के साथ ‘be’ लगाने पर उसके बाद verb की Ist form और ing का प्रयोग करते हैं, जैसे
Sudha will be writing a letter.
I shall be travelling in a train tomorrow.
Poonam will be dancing.

(e) Modals के बाद ‘have’ लगने पर उसके बाद verb की IIIrd form का प्रयोग करते हैं, जैसे
He must have done this work.
He should have passed the test.
He may have gone to Delhi.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

Uses of Modals:

1. SHALL

(i) Shall का प्रयोग Ist person (I, we) के साथ साधारण future tense को व्यक्त करने के लिए किया जाता है; जैसे
I shall know my result tomorrow.
We shall leave for Mumbai in the evening.

(ii) आदेश (command) के लिए second और third persons के pronouns के साथ; जैसे
You shall do as I say.
You shall not disobey your parents.

(iii) वचन (promise) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
You shall get a prize.
You shall have a wrist watch on your birthday

(iv) बाध्यता या अनिवार्यता (compulsion or necessity) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
You shall not enter the kitchen with dirty feet.
You shall not make a noise.

(v) संकल्प (determination) अथवा निश्चय (certainty) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
He shall take revenge on his enemy.
He shall get good marks, I am sure.

(vi) प्रश्नवाचक वाक्यों (interrogative sentences) में shall का प्रयोग I/we के साथ किसी दूसरे के सामने अपनी सेवा . प्रस्तुत करने के लिए या प्रार्थना करने के लिए किया जाता है; जैसे
Shall I carry your heavy bag ?
Shall we go to see a film today ?

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

2. WILL

(i) Will का प्रयोग IInd और IIIrd person (you, he, she, they, it आदि) के साथ simple future tense को व्यक्त करने के लिए किया जाता है; जैसे
He will come here at Diwali.
They will never learn good manners.

(ii) प्रार्थना या निमंत्रण के लिए; जैसे
Will you open the door, please?
Will you have a cup of tea?

(iii) आदत के लिए; जैसे
A dog’s tail will never become straight.
He will never tell the truth.

(iv) Ist person (I/we) के साथ निश्चय (certainty) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I will write a letter to her in the evening.
We will visit the theatre next week.

(v) I/we के साथ संकल्प (determination) को व्यक्त करने के लिए, जैसे
I will get 1st division.
We will win the race.
I will become a great man one day.

(vi) ‘इच्छा’ (willingness) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I will come with you if you want.
I will help you in this matter.

(vii)आदेश (order) या निर्देश (instruction) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
You will do as I say.
You will not beat your brother.

(viii) अनुमान या संभावना (inference or probability) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
The boys in blue dress will be his brother.
By this time Mohan will be there.

(ix) शर्त वाले (conditional) वाक्य के लिए; जैसे
If you work hard, you will pass.
If you don’t run, you will miss the train.

(x) चेतावनी देने के लिए or या otherwise वाले वाक्यों में; जैसे
Work hard otherwise you will fail.
Run fast or you will miss the train.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

3. SHOULD

(i) Indirect speech में shall के past tense के रूप में; जैसे-
I told him that I should help him.
He said that they should go there.

(ii) कर्त्तव्य (duty) की भावना प्रकट करने के लिए; जैसे-
We should obey our parents.
We should help the poor.

(iii) सलाह तथा सझाव (advice or suggestion) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे-
You should work hard.
You should take exercise.

(iv) Lest के पश्चात उद्देश्य (purpose) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे-
Work hard lest you should fail.
Walk carefully lest you should fall.

(v) नैतिक उत्तरदायित्व (moral obligation) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे-
You should not drink wine.
You should help your sister.

(vi) कल्पना (supposition), संभावना (possibility) तथा शर्त (condition) की भावना को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे-
Should you see my brother ? Tell him to send me a good book.
I think you should win the championship.

(vii) अनुमान (assumption) की भावना को दर्शाने के लिए; जैसे-
She should be here by now.
They should have reached Delhi.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

4. WOULD

(i) Indirect speech में will के past के रूप में; जैसे
He told me that he would go to Mumbai.
Mohan said that he would not do that work.

(ii) Past के किसी कार्य को करने की आदत को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
Gandhiji would spin for hours.
He would often study till late in the night.

(iii) विनम्र प्रार्थना (polite request) के लिए; जैसे
Would you open the door, please?
Would you lend me your bicycle for an hour?

(iv) किसी की इच्छा को जानने के लिए; जैसे
Would you have a cup of tea?
Would you like to come with me?

(v) कोरी कल्पना (wish) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
Would that I were a king!
Would that my son were a hard worker!

(vi) असंभावित परिस्थिति (improbable condition) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
If a thief came here, he would find only books.
If I got a lottery, I would be very happy.

(vii) दृढ़-निश्चय (determination) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
He would have his own way.
I would buy that car at any cost.

(viii)अधिमान (preference) को बताने के लिए; जैसे
I would like to have coffee.
I would rather starve than beg.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

5. CAN

(i) योग्यता (ability) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे

He can swim across the river.
Can you stand on your head ?

(ii) अनुमति (permission) देने के लिए; जैसे
You can see a film if you like.
You can go home if you have done your work.

(iii) अनुमति मांगने के लिए; जैसे
Can I use your dictionary?
Can I go home?

(iv) संभावना (possibility) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
Death can come anytime.
He can reach here anytime.

(v) क्षमता या शक्ति (capacity or power) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I can lift this heavy table.
The headmaster can remit your fine.

HBSE 9th Class English Grammar Modals

6. COULD

(i) Indirect speech में can के past के रूप में; जैसे
Mohan said that he could solve the sum.
He asked me if I could help him.

(ii) Past की अनुमति (permission) को दर्शाने के लिए; जैसे
Father said that he could see the film.
She asked me if she could meet me.

(iii) Past की संभावना (possibility) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
If he had money, he could buy a scooter.
I wondered whether the news could be true.

(iv) भूतकाल में क्षमता (capacity) या योग्यता (ability) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I could swim when I was young.
She could solve the sum when she was only five years old.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

7. MAY

(i) औपचारिक अनुमति (formal permission) लेने या देने के लिए; जैसे
May I come in, Sir ? Yes, you may.
May I use your book? Yes, you may use it.

(ii) इच्छा (wish), प्रार्थना (prayer) या आशीर्वाद (blessing) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
May you live long !
May I be able to cross the river !
May God bless her with a son!

(iii) संभावना (possibility) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
There are clouds in the sky. It may rain.
Mohan may reach here anytime.

(iv) उद्देश्य (purpose) को बताने के लिए so that से पहले verb की Ist Form लगी होती है। जैसे
We eat so that we may live.
I go to school so that I may become a great man.

(v) अतीत की संभावना (Past possibility) को व्यक्त करने के लिए may have का प्रयोग होता है; जैसे
He may have reached Kanpur.
You may have heard about Akbar.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

8. MIGHT

यह may का past रूप है। इसका प्रयोग निम्नलिखित अवस्थाओं में किया जाता है।
(i) भूतकाल में अनुमति लेने या देने के लिए; जैसे
I asked him if I might use his book.
My father told me that I might see a picture.

(ii) भूतकाल (past) में संभावना (possibility) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
The doctor said that the patient might recover.

(iii) भूतकाल की इच्छर (wish) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I wished that I might pass the examination.
Mohan wished that his sister might win the race.

(iv) भविष्य काल में किसी क्षीण संभावना (remote possibility) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I might go to the market, but I am not sure.
He might come, if he gets time.
The prices might fall down a little.

(v) उद्देश्य को बताने के लिए; so that से पहले verb की 2nd form लगी होती है। जैसे
He died so that his country might survive.
He worked hard so that he might pass.
If he worked hard, he might get 1st prize.

9. MUST

(i) तीव्र आवश्यकता (dire necessity) को व्यक्त करने के लिए: जैसे
You must take an umbrella as it is raining.
We must run if we want to catch the train.

(ii) अनिवार्यता (compulsion) या बंधन (obligation) को व्यक्त करने के लिए कार्य न करने पर यदि सजा मिलने का प्रावधान हो; जैसे
A servant must obey his master.
We must obey the laws of our country.

(iii) दृढ़-संकल्प (determination) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
I must finish this work by evening.
We must attack the enemy before day-break.

(iv) कर्त्तव्य (duty) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
You must obey your parents.
We must serve our country.

(v) मनाही (prohibition) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
We must not touch electricity.
You must not disobey your elders.
Children must not play on the road.

(vi) संभावना (possibility) को व्यक्त के लिए; जैसे
He must have reached Delhi,
She must have gone to bed by now.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

10. OUGHT

Ought का प्रयोग should के स्थान पर किया जा सकता है, मगर इसके साथ ‘to’ का प्रयोग आवश्यक है। इसके प्रयोग निम्नलिखित हैं

(i) नैतिक एवं सामाजिक कर्त्तव्य (moral and social duty) के लिए; जैसे
We ought to obey our teachers.
You ought to help the poor and the needy.
We ought to take pity on the beggars.

(ii) सलाह (Advice) या सुझाब (Suggestion) को व्यक्त करने के लिए; जैसे
You ought to work hard for the examination.
You ought to consult the doctor.

(iii) Ought to + have + verb की IIIrd form के द्वारा यह व्यक्त किया जाता है कि कार्य होना चाहिए था, मगर हुआ नहीं; जैसे
You ought to have met the principal (but you did not).
You ought to have informed the police.

11. NEED

Need एक नियमित क्रिया भी है और एक modal भी। Modal के रूप में इसका प्रयोग केवल नकारात्मक (Negative) तथा प्रश्नवाचक (Interrogative) वाक्यों में होता है; जैसे
(i) आवश्यकता का न होना; जैसे
You needn’t take an umbrella as it has stopped raining.
You need not go on foot.

(ii) आवश्यकता के बारे में कोई प्रश्न पूछना; जैसे
Need you go home so soon? .
Need you speak so fast?
Need she run for catching the bus ?

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

12. DARE

Need की तरह dare का प्रयोग भी नियमित क्रिया एवं modal दोनों प्रकार से होता है। Modal के रूप में इसका प्रयोग केवल नकारात्मक (Negative) और प्रश्नवाचक (Interrogative) वाक्यों में निम्नलिखित रूप से होता है
(i) साहस का न होना; जैसे-
I dare not enter the Headmaster’s office.
The child dare not go into a dark room at night.

(ii) साहस के बारे में प्रश्न करना; जैसे
Dare you catch a lion by its tail?
How dare you insult me?

13. USED TO

Used to का प्रयोग निम्नलिखित अवस्थाओं में किया जाता है :

(i) भूतकाल की किसी आदत (past habitual action) को दशनि के लिए; जैसे
In the past people used to believe that the earth was flat.
Before marriage, he used to drink a lot.

(ii) भूतकाल में किसी वस्तु के अस्तित्व के लिए; जैसे-
There used to be a big building at the comer.
A fair used to be held in this ground every year.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

Exercise 1

Fill in the blanks-with the models given in brackets :

1. We …………… (serve) our country, (must, should, could)
2. He has burnt midnight oil. He …………… win a scholarship, (will/would/ought to)
3. He …………… read and write english. (can, could, must)
4. …………… your future be bright! (Would/May/Might)
5. …………… we go to see a movie today ? (Will/Would/Shall)
6. …………… you like to come with me? (would, should, could)
7. I have no pets. They …………… be very troublesome, (can, must, should)
8. Before marriage, he …………… drink a lot. (would/could/used to)
9. ……….. she have good health ! (Might/Would/May)
10. It …………… be not in the evening; who knows? (will, shall, may)
Answers:
1. We must (serve) our country, (must, should, could)
2. He has burnt midnight oil. He ought to win a scholarship, (will/would/ought to)
3. He can read and write english. (can, could, must)
4. May your future be bright! (Would/May/Might)
5. Shall we go to see a movie today ? (Will/Would/Shall)
6. Would you like to come with me? (would, should, could)
7. I have no pets. They can be very troublesome, (can, must, should)
8. Before marriage, he used to drink a lot. (would/could/used to)
9. May she have good health ! (Might/Would/May)
10. It may be not in the evening; who knows? (will, shall, may)

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

Exercise 2

Fill in the blanks with the modals given in brackets :

1. The candidates …………… to appear for an interview, (must, will, have)
2. Work hard lest you …………… fail, (must, will, should)
3. …………… that I were rich (would, could, may)
4. Radha…………… play harmonium well, (will/shall/can)
5. …………… I fetch a doctor, (will, shall, can)
6. We …………… practise virtue, (must/may/might)
7. I still remember my childhood. I …………… play hockey then, (might, used to, must)
8. …………… you have a cup of tea? (Would, Can, Must)
9. I go to school so that I …………… become a great man. (can/may/might)
10. …………… that I were a millionaire, (can, shall, would)
Answers:
1. The candidates have to appear for an interview, (must, will, have)
2. Work hard lest you should fail, (must, will, should)
3. Would that I were rich (would, could, may)
4. Radha can play harmonium well, (will/shall/can)
5. shall I fetch a doctor, (will, shall, can)
6. We must practise virtue, (must/may/might)
7. I still remember my childhood. I used to play hockey then, (might, used to, must)
8. Would you have a cup of tea? (Would, Can, Must)
9. I go to school so that I may become a great man. (can/may/might)
10. Would that I were a millionaire, (can, shall, would)

Exercise 3

Fill in the blanks with the modals given in brackets:

1. Walk slowly lest you …………… fall, (should, could, may)
2. We …………… try to speak correct English, (may/shall/should)
3. …………… that I were a bird ! (Must/Should/Would)
4. You …………… give him a lift. He has his own car. (shouldn’t/mustn’t/needn’t)
5. You …………… to pay your debts, (should, ought, could)
6. He …………… come home late at night, (used, used to, use to)
7. I …………… study day and night in my student life, (can/would/used to)
8. If you work hard, you …………… pass, (could, will, would)
9. …………… I assist you? (shall, will would)
10. …………. build a hospital if I won a lottery, (might, must, wolud)
Answers:
1. Walk slowly lest you should fall, (should, could, may)
2. We should try to speak correct English, (may/shall/should)
3. Would that I were a bird ! (Must/Should/Would)
4. You needn’t give him a lift. He has his own car. (shouldn’t/mustn’t/needn’t)
5. You ought to pay your debts, (should, ought, could)
6. He used to come home late at night, (used, used to, use to)
7. I used to study day and night in my student life, (can/would/used to)
8. If you work hard, you will pass, (could, will, would)
9. Shall I assist you? (shall, will would)
10. Would build a hospital if I won a lottery, (might, must, wolud)

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

Exercise 4

Fill in the blanks with modals given in the brackets:

1. A dog ………… usually obey his master. (will/can/must)
2. I …………. rather have coffee than tea. (would/should/could)
3. …………. you succeed in the exams ! (may/can/would)
4. …………. that I were a king ! (Would/Should/Might)
5. If you do not run, you …………. miss the flight. (will/shall/can)
6. Rani said that she …………. solve the sum. (could/should/would)
7. …………. that I were a rich man. (Shall/Should/Would)
8. They …………. to pass the exams to appear for interview. (must/have/will)
9. You are strong & wise, you help me. (will/may/can)
10. Children …………. obey their parents. (must/should/would)
11. Talk slowly lest you …………. awaken the baby. (should/would/could)
12. ………. I help you ? (May/Can/Shall)
Answers:
1. A dog must usually obey his master. (will/can/must)
2. I would rather have coffee than tea. (would/should/could)
3. May you succeed in the exams ! (may/can/would)
4. Would that I were a king ! (Would/Should/Might)
5. If you do not run, you will miss the flight. (will/shall/can)
6. Rani said that she could solve the sum. (could/should/would)
7. Would that I were a rich man. (Shall/Should/Would)
8. They have to pass the exams to appear for interview. (must/have/will)
9. You are strong & wise, you help me. (will/may/can)
10. Children should can obey their parents. (must/should/would)
11. Talk slowly lest you should awaken the baby. (should/would/could)
12. May I help you ? (May/Can/Shall)

Exercise 5

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals

We use would to express willingness, an unreal condition and a past habit Example:

(a) If he were a millionaire, he would donate every penny to the needy, (unreal condition)
(b) She would sit for hours listening to music, (past habit)

Complete the following paragraph using will/won’t/would/wouldn’t. ‘

We won’t be here in the school next July. It is hard to believe, isn’t it ? Soon we ____ (a) ____ complete our ten years of general education. Once the results are out, I ____ (b) ____ be sure what stream I should take. Then I ____ (c) ____ know where I am heading. It ____ (d) ____ take long. Who knows what the future ____ (e) ____ bring ? I ____ (f) ____ agree with this idea. I feel, as a student I ____ (g) ____ put in my sincere efforts and ____ (h) ____ let any obstacle come in my way. I ____ (i) ____ go by my teacher’s advice. ____ (j) ____ you mind taking a tip ? ‘To achieve something in life one should have faith in oneself.
Answers:
We won’t be here in the school next July. It is hard to believe, isn’t it ? Soon we Will complete our ten years of general education. Once the results are out, I would be sure what stream I should take. Then I will know where I am heading. It won’t take long. Who knows what the future will bring ? I would agree with this idea. I feel, as a student I will put in my sincere efforts and won’t let any obstacle come in my way. I will go by my teacher’s advice. would you mind taking a tip ? ‘To achieve something in life one should have faith in oneself.

Exercise 6

Complete the conversation. Fill ¡n the blanks with should/can/could/mwst/wih/would/can ‘t.

Suhani : How many instruments (a) ______ you play?
Deepak : Three — the harmonium, the flute and the violin.
Suhani : That’s terrific. (b) ______ you please play violin for us?
Deepak : Yes, of course. But you’ve to come to my house with me.
Suhani : I (c) ______ say this music room looks like a place of worship.
Deepak : Yes. One has to concentrate and practice a lot to have a mastery over a particular art.
Suhani : How many hours (d) ______ you practise at a stretch?
Deepak : It depends. Normally I practise two hours a day in this room. (e) ______ you like to try the harmonium?
Suhani : I’m not musical at all. I (j) ______ sing.
Deepak : But you appreciate music! You (g) ______ learn if you are interested. For that matter every individual is musical. Even animals, birds and plants react to music.
Suhani : With your encouragement I (h) ______ definitely try.
Answers:
Suhani : How many instruments (a) can you play?
Deepak : Three — the harmonium, the flute and the violin.
Suhani : That’s terrific. (b) will you please play violin for us?
Deepak : Yes, of course. But you’ve to come to my house with me.
Suhani : I (c) must say this music room looks like a place of worship.
Deepak : Yes. One has to cóncentrate and practice a lot to have a mastery over a particular art.
Suhani : How many hours (d) can you practise at a stretch?
Deepak : It depends. Normally I practise two hours a day in this room. (e) would you like to try the harmonium?
Suhani : I’m not musical at all. I (j) can’t sing.
Deepak : But you appreciate music! You (g) should learn if you are interested. For that matter every individual is musical. Even animals, birds and plants react to music.
Suhani : With your encouragement I (h) will definitely try.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Modals Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions Grammar Articles Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 9th Class English Grammar Articles

Articles :
The demonstrative adjectives a, an and the have been given the collective name ‘Articles’. These are divided into two categories :
(a) The Definite Article : The
(b) The Indefinite Article : A or an

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

The Definite Article:

Uses of the Definite Article:

(a) ‘The’ is used before a noun which has become definite as it has been mentioned a second time. When it is introduced the first time, it takes ‘a/an’.
(‘The’ का प्रयोग ऐसी संज्ञा से पहले किया जाता है जो दोबारा जिक्र करने के कारण विशेष हो जाती है। जब इसका जिक्र पहली बार करते हैं तो इसके साथ a / a n लगाते हैं।)
A man is going on a road. The man has a bag.
The bag contains clothes. The road goes to Kamal.

(b) It is used before nouns of which there is only one, or which are considered as one:
(ऐसी संज्ञाओं के साथ जो केवल एक ही हैं या एक ही माने जाते हैं।)
The earth, the sky, the weather, the North Pole

(c) It is also used with a noun of which there is only one example in some given situation.
(ऐसी संज्ञा के साथ जिसका किसी विशेष हालत में केवल एक ही उदाहरण है।)
The Principal is on leave.
Has the postman come yet ?

(d) The definite article is placed before the superlative degree of adjectives.
(विशेषण के तीसरे दर्जे से पहले ‘The’ लगाते हैं।)
He is the best teacher I have known.
She is the most intelligent girl in the class.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

(e) When the nouns like English, Russian, French, and Greek mean language’ no article is placed before them. But when they stand for People (Nations), they are preceded by the definite article :
(ऐसी संज्ञाएँ जैसे कि English, Russian, French, Greek आदि के साथ अगर article न लगा तो उनका अर्थ है वह भाषा। लेकिन इनसे पहले ‘The’ लगाने से उनका अर्थ लोग या राष्ट्र हो जाता है।)

The English ruled India for a long time. They introduced English as a medium of education in India.

(f) The nouns like hospital, school, college, church, temple, prison, cinema, bed, table, market, office, etc. denote their primary function if no article is placed before them. The use of the’ before them makes them definite and particular.

(इस प्रकार की संज्ञाएँ जैसे कि हस्पताल, स्कूल, कॉलेज, गिरजाघर, जेल, सिनेमा, बिस्तर, मेज, बाजार, दफतर आदि से पहले अगर कोई article न हो तो उनका प्राथमिक कार्य स्पष्ट होता है। उनसे पहले ‘The’ लगाने से वह विशेष हो जाते हैं।)
He met with an accident and was taken to hospital.
When I came to know of it, I went to the hospital to meet him.

(g) It is used before singular nouns to represent a class of things.
(इसका प्रयोग एकवचन संज्ञाओं के साथ चीजों के वर्ग को बताने के लिए होता है।)
The donkey is lazy (All donkeys are lazy).

(h) It is used before an adjective to represent a class of things.
(इसका प्रयोग तब भी होता है जब किसी विशेषण द्वारा पूरे वर्ग को बताया जाए।)
The rich should not exploit the poor.
Today a gap exists between the old and the young.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

(i) ‘The’ is used when we refer to a particular thing or a person.
(‘The’ का प्रयोग तब होता है जब हम विशेष वस्तु या व्यक्ति का जिक्र करें।)
In that group, the boy in red shirt is my son.

(j) The definite article is used before ‘first/second’, etc. and ‘only’.
(‘प्रथम द्वितीय’ आदि तथा ‘केवल’ से पहले ‘The’ का प्रयोग करते हैं।)
He was the first man to reach the party. Sunita was the second guest. In fact, she was the only lady present there.

(k) Before the plural names of countries.
(उन देशों के साथ जिनके नाम बहुवचन में हैं।)
The United States of America, The West Indies.

(l) Before Special meals; as (विशेष भोजनों के साथ।)
I take dinner at 9.00 p.m. (usual dinner)
but Are you attending the dinner being given by Mohan ?

(m) Article the is used before the names of the following nouns:
Mountain ranges : The Himalayas, the Alps. the Pyrenees etc.
Rivers : The Ganga, The Brahamputra, the Thames, etc.
Oceans : The Indián Ocean, the Pacific, the Antractic, etc.
Islands : The Andamans, The West Indies etc.
Holy Books : The Geeta, The Quran, The Bible etc.
Newspapers : The Indian Express, The Times of India. etc.
Magazines : The Reader’s Digest. The Competition Master. etc.
Historical Buildings : The Parliament. The White House. etc.
Historical Events : The First Battle of Panipat. The First/Second World War.
Trains, Ships. Planes : The Shatabadi Express, The Vikrant. The Ashoka. etc.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

The Indefinite Article:

Form
The form of the Indefinite article is a or an. The form ‘a’ is used before a word beginning with a consonant. It is also used with a word beginning with a vowel which sounds like a consonant:
a pen, a table, a boy
also : a university, a European, a useful thing.

The form ‘an’ is used before words beginning with a vowel (a, e, i. o, u) or words beginning with a mute ‘h’.
an owl, an elephant, an apple, an hour, an honourable man.

Uses of the Indefinite Article
(a) It is used before a singular noun which is countable, when it is mentioned for the first time.
(इसका प्रयोग ऐसी एकवचन संज्ञा के साथ होता है जो गिनी जा सके और जब इसका जिक्र पहली बार हो।)
I see a bird on that tree.
A house has a roof.

(b) Before a singular countable noun which is used as an example of the class of things or species.
(ऐसी एकवचन गिनी जा सकने योग्य संज्ञा के साथ, जो चीजों के वर्ग या जाति का उदाहरण हो।)
A horse is an animal. A cow has homs.
A pine tree grows very tall.

(c) In the numerical sense of the word ‘one’
(‘एक’ शब्द के गणनात्मक भाव के रूप में।)
He gave me a gift.
Not a word was spoken.

(d) In expressions of price, speed, etc. ‘alan’ are used in the sense of ‘per’.
(‘a/an’ का प्रयोग कीमत, गति आदि के लिए “प्रति” के अर्थ के रूप में किया जाता है।)
Milk sells eight rupees a kilo.
He drives at forty miles an hour.

(e) The names of professions and occupations take the indefinite article:
(व्यवसायों या धन्धों के नामों के साथ हम Indefinite article लगाते हैं।)
My father is a doctor.
He grew up to be a politician.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

(f) Sometimes ‘a’ can be used before Mr./Mrs./Miss + surname. Then it means a man/woman/girl of that name:
(कई बार ‘a’ का प्रयोग श्री/श्रीमती कुमारी के नाम के पहले लगता है। तब इसका अर्थ है कि उस नाम का कोई आदमी, औरत, लड़की आदि।)
Mr. Mehta came to see you when you were away.
(This sentence means : “Aman called Mr. Mehta came …..”)

(g) Use of ‘a’ before few and little :

(i) a few and a little mean a small number or a small amount (‘few stands for number and little for amount).
(a few और alittle का अर्थ है कुछ संख्या या कुछ मात्रा। few का अर्थ संख्या और little का अर्थ मात्रा से होता है।)

(ii) ‘few’ and ‘little without article have an almost negative meaning.
(बिना article के few और little का अर्थ लगभग नकारात्मक होता है।)

I am thirsty but I am afraid there is little water in the pitcher.
But there is a little water in the fridge.
The college reopened today but there were few students in the classes. A few senior students came to the college but remained away from the classes.

(h) To attribute the qualities of a man (usually someone famous) to another person.
(किसी प्रसिद्ध व्यक्ति के गुणों का जिक्र किसी अन्य व्यक्ति के नाम के साथ करने के लिए।)

He is a Shakespeare (He is a genius like Shakespeare).

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

Omission of Articles :

Articles are not used in the following cases :
(Articles का प्रयोग निम्नलिखित हालातों में नहीं किया जाता।)

(a) No article is placed before abstract nouns when they are used in a general sense.
(जिस भाववाचक संज्ञा का प्रयोग सामान्य रूप से किया जाता है तो उसके साथ article नहीं लगता।)
Honesty is the best policy.
Happiness is what everyone longs for.

But abstract nouns take “the” before them when they are used in the particular sense.
(मगर-जब भाववाचक संज्ञा का प्रयोग विशेष रूप से होता है तो उसके साथ ‘The’ लगता है।)

We must work for the happiness of all sections of society.

(b) The article is omitted before ‘man’ and ‘woman’ when they are used in a general sense.
(जब man या woman का प्रयोग सामान्य रूप से हो तो उनके साथ article नहीं लगता।)
Man is mortal.
Woman is considered weaker than man.

(c) The article ‘the’ is omitted before the names of meals when used in a general sense. But we use ‘the’ when a specific meal is mentioned.
(सामान्य रूप से प्रयोग किए जाने पर भोजनों के नाम से पहले हम ‘the’ नहीं लगाते। मगर जब भोजन का जिक्र विशेष रूप से हो तो ‘the’ का प्रयोग करते हैं।)
He invited me to dinner. We take breakfast at 8 a.m.
The lunch given by him was fine.

(d) Collective nouns such as humanity, labour, mankind, posterity, society, don’t usually take an article.
(सामूहिक संज्ञाओं के साथ आमतौर पर article नहीं लगाते।)
Society must take care of its old persons.
Mother Teresa has devoted her life to the welfare of humanity.

(e) Articles are not used before proper nouns :
(व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञा से पहले articles नहीं लगाते।)
Shakespeare was a genius.
Mumbai is a metropolitan city.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

(f) No article is placed before the names of metals, materials and games when used in a general sense. But when they are used specifically, the is placed before them.
(सामान्य रूप से प्रयोग किए जाने पर धातुओं, पदार्थों तथा खेलों के नाम से पहले article नहीं लगाते। मगर जब वे विशेष रूप से प्रयोग किए जाएँ तो ‘the’ उनसे पहले लगता है।)

Gold is a costly metal. Many people in India play cricket
The Gold found in Kolar mines is of superior quality.

(g) Articles are not used in certain phrases consisting of a preposition followed by its object :
(उन निश्चित वाक्यांशों में जहाँ preposition का प्रयोग कर्म के साथ किया हो तो articles का प्रयोग नहीं होता।)
at home, in hand, in debt, by day/night, on demand, at sunset/night, on earth, by land/water/air, on foot etc.
You must finish the work in hand.
He started the journey at day break.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

Exercise 1

Fill in the blanks with ‘a’, ‘an’ or ‘the’:

1. The box was made of ……………. wood.
2. According to ……………. Bible, God Made ……………. the world in six days.
3. I saw ……………. one-rupee note lying on the ground.
4. ……………. rose smells sweet.
5. By ……………. united effort w’e may achieve success.
6. He is ……………. African by birth, not European.
7. ……………. camel is ……………. ship of the desert.
8. ……………. man is mortal.
9. This is ……………. first time I have asked for help.
10. My son will be old enough to go to …………… school next year.
Answers:
1. The box was made of wood.
2. According to the Bible, God Made the the world in six days.
3. I saw a one-rupee note lying on the ground.
4. Rose smells sweet.
5. By a united effort w’e may achieve success.
6. He is an African by birth, not European.
7. The camel is a ship of the desert.
8. ……………. man is mortal.
9. This is the first time I have asked for help.
10. My son will be old enough to go to school next year.

Exercise 2

Fill in the blanks with appropriate articles, wherever necessary:
1. Ink is ……………. useful article .
2. ……………. Taj Mahal is ……………. most beautiful building.
3. ……………. flowers in that vase are very beautiful.
4. ……………. Gold is found in Australia and South Africa.
5. The more you earn ……………. more you spend.
6. What are we having for ……………. lunch ?
7. He did not speak ……………. word in self-defence.
8. Have you read ……………. Ramayana.
9. ……………. owl cannot see during day time.
10. She thanked me for ……………. present I gave her.
Answers:
1. Ink is a useful article .
2. The Taj Mahal is the most beautiful building.
3. The flowers in that vase are very beautiful.
4. Gold is found in Australia and South Africa.
5. The more you earn the more you spend.
6. What are we having for lunch ?
7. He did not speak a word in self-defence.
8. Have you read the Ramayana.
9. Owl cannot see during day time.
10. She thanked me for the present I gave her.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

Exercise 3

Fill in the blank spaces in the following sentences with the word or words given in brackets. Use either the plain noun, or the noun preceded by the (whichever you think is correct) :

1. In Austria the people speak ……………. (German).
2. ……………. (English) is spoken in many countries.
3. ……………. lunch given by him was fine.
4. Can you speak ……………. ?
5. ……………. (Italians) are a very musical nation.
6. ……………. wise should be sober.
7 ……………. (India) is a very large country in ……………. (Asia)
8. ……………. wisdom is better than wealth.
9. His uncle is manager of ……………. (Overseas Bank) in this town.
10. Everest is ……………. highest mountain peak in ……………. world.
Answers:
1. In Austria the people speak German.
2. English is spoken in many countries.
3. The lunch given by him was fine.
4. Can you speak ?
5. The (Italians) are a very musical nation.
6. The wise should be sober.
7 India is a very large country in Asia.
8. Wisdom is better than wealth.
9. His uncle is manager of the (Overseas Bank) in this town.
10. Everest is the highest mountain peak in the world.

Exercise 4

Insert a or an in the blank spaces in the following sentences:

1. ……………. elephant is a very strong animal.
2. He had always hoped that his son would go to ……………. university.
3. Italy is ……………. European country.
4. He has ……………. ulcer on his mouth.
5. Is there ……………. hospital in this town?
6. Everyone respects ……………. honest person.
7. His brother is ……………. university professor.
8. Ram is ……………. one eyed person.
9. He is ……………. M.P
10. ……………. honour was conferred on him for his services to his country.
Answers:
1. An elephant is a very strong animal.
2. He had always hoped that his son would go to a university.
3. Italy is a European country.
4. He has an ulcer on his mouth.
5. Is there a hospital in this town?
6. Everyone respects an honest person.
7. His brother is a university professor.
8. Ram is a one eyed person.
9. He is an M.P
10. An honour was conferred on him for his services to his country.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

Exercise 5

Fill in the blanks with appropriate articles, wherever necessary:

1. Westayedat ……………. hotel in the centre of the town.
2. It is ……………. great honour to be invited to such a gathering.
3. The English introduced ……………. English as a medium of education in India.
4. ……………. honorary secretary is one who is not paid for his services.
5. The proposal was accepted by ……………. unanimous vote.
6. There is ……………. hourly bus service on this route.
7. ……………. pine tree grows very tall.
8. We shall come if we get ……………. opportunity.
9. That was not ……………. very honest thing to do.
10. He gave me ……………. one rupee note.
Answers:
1. Westayedat a hotel in the centre of the town.
2. It is a great honour to be invited to such a gathering.
3. The English introduced English as a medium of education in India.
4. An honorary secretary is one who is not paid for his services.
5. The proposal was accepted by a unanimous vote.
6. There is an hourly bus service on this route.
7. A pine tree grows very tall.
8. We shall come if we get an opportunity.
9. That was not a very honest thing to do.
10. He gave me a one rupee note.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles

Exercise 6

Fill in the blanks with ‘a’, ‘an’ or ‘the’:

1. I ate ……………. orange.
2. This is ……………. first university in Northern India.
3. ……………. Tribune is a daily newspaper.
4. ……………. dinner given by me was appreciated by all.
5. I shall be back in less than ……………. hour.
6. ……………. rose smells sweet.
7. New York is ……………. large city.
8. I respect him because he is ……………. honest man.
9. ………. little knowledge is ……………. dangerous thing.
Answers:
1. I ate an orange.
2. This is the first university in Northern India.
3. The Tribune is a daily newspaper.
4. The dinner given by me was appreciated by all.
5. I shall be back in less than an hour.
6. Rose smells sweet.
7. New York is a large city.
8. I respect him because he is an honest man.
9. A little knowledge is a dangerous thing.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Articles Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions Grammar Tenses Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Tense :
(काल किसे कहते हैं ?)
The tense of a verb shows the time of an action or event. (क्रिया का काल, कार्य या घटना के समय के बारे में । जानकारी देता है।)

Verb (क्रिया किसे कहते हैं ?)
The word that tells us about the process of doing any action or event is known as a verb. (जो शब्द किसी कार्य या घटना के करने या होने के बारे में जानकारी देता है, उसे क्रिया कहते हैं।)
अंग्रेज़ी भाषा में verb के तीन रूप होते हैं-
(1) Present
(2) Past
(3) Past Participle.

Some Important Three Forms of The Verb:
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -1
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -2
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -3.1
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -3.2
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -4.1

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -4.2
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -5.1

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -5.2
HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -6.1

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -6.2

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -7

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -8

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses -9

There ate three main tenses corresponding the three divisions of time, these are :
(काल मुख्य रूप से तीन प्रकार के होते हैं।)
(a) The Present Tense.
(b) The Past Tense.
(c) The Future Tense.

Sack of these thtee main tenses has four forms :
(i) Simple or Indefinite
(ii) Continuous or Progressive
(iii) Perfect
(iv) Perfect Continuous

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

There are three main, tenses corresponding the three divisions of time. These are:

(a) The Present Tense.
(b) The Past Tense.
(c) The Future Tense.

Each of these three main tenses has four forms :
(i) Simple or Indefinite
(ii) Continuous or Progressive
(iii) Perfect
(v) Perfect Continuous

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

(A)

I. The Simple Present (Or The Present Indefinite)

Form:
इस Tense से संबंधित वाक्य का जब हिंदी में उच्चारण किया जाता है तो वाक्य के अंत में ता है, ती है, ता हूँ… ते हैं, की आवाज आती है।
HBSE 9th Class English Grammar Tenses -10

S= Subject (कर्ताकारक)
V= Verb (क्रिया)
O= Object (कर्म कारक)
यदि Subject (he, she, it, singular Noun हो तो V1 के साथ s/es लगाते हैं। जैसे-)
My mother goes to temple daily.
My mother does not go to temple daily.
Does your mother go to temple daily?
I play cricket.
They work in a factory.

Uses :
इन वाक्यों में daily, every, always, often, usually, generally शब्द लगे होते हैं।
(a) To describe habitual actions.
(आदत वाले कार्य को बताने के लिए।)
Ram gets up early in the morning. Then he goes for a walk.
He always speaks the truth.

(b) To express a general, universal or scientific truth.
(सामान्य, शाश्वत या वैज्ञानिक तथ्य को बताने के लिए।)
The sun rises in the east.
The rain falls from the clouds.

(c) To express a fact which is true at the time of speaking.
(ऐसे तथ्य को व्यक्त करने के लिए जो बात करते समय सत्य है।)
Krishma lives in Mumbai.
The Express train does not stop at this station.

(d) In describing running commentaries :
(आँखों देखा हाल बताने के लिए।
Raman passes the ball to Kamal and he hits it into the goal.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

II. The Present Continuous Tense

Form :
इस Tense से संबंधित वाक्य का जब हिंदी में अनुवाद किया जाता है तो वाक्य के अंत में रहा है, रही है, रहे। हैं, की आवाज आती है।

Simple Sentences – S+ Is/Am/Are + Vi+ing +O
Negative Sentences – S + Is/Am/Are +not+V, + ing+O
Interrogative Sentences – Is/Am/Are +S+V.+ing +O?

I के साथ am का प्रयोग करते हैं।
He, She, It और singular noun के साथ is का प्रयोग करते हैं।
We, you, they और Plural Noun के साथ are का प्रयोग करते हैं; जैसे-
Look ! the two boys are fighting. I am doing my work.

Uses :
(a) It shows what is happening now, at the time of writing or speaking.
(जो कार्य अब बात करते या लिखते समय हो रहा है।)
Shubham is studying in his room, but his brother Arun is playing in the garden.

(b) To express an action which may not be actually going on at the time of speaking, but it is going on in general.
(जो कार्य बात करते समय नहीं चल रहा, मगर सामान्य रूप से चल रहा है, उसे व्यक्त करने के लिए।)
She is writing a book on Economics.
He is building a new house.

(c) To express an action which is likely to happen in near future.
(उस घटना को व्यक्त करने के लिए जो निकट भविष्य में हो सकती है।)
My brother is coming next week.
I am going to Delhi tomorrow.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 1

Put the verbs in brackets into the simple present tense or the present continuous tense :
1. Suman generally (wear) a white suit but today she (wear) a blue one.
2. He (go) for a walk everyday.
3. What (make) the moon go round the earth?
4. Crime never (pay).
5. The workers (repair) the road at present.
6. People (wear) new clothes at Diwali.
7. My children generally (go) to their uncle during the holidays. But they (not go) this summer as we all (go) to Shimla.
8. I usually (drink) coffee but now I (drink) tea.
9. We (have) our lunch at the Ashoka Restaurant this afternoon.
10. Look! she (tremble) with fear.
11. The doctor (examine) the patient in the next room.
12. Do not make a noise. The baby (sleep) in the cradle. .
13. Bad students never (work) hard.
14. Going to war (mean) killing a lot of people.
15. He (want) to buy a scooter.
Answers:
1. wears; is wearing
2. goes
3. makes
4. pays
5. are repairing
6. wear
7. go ; are not going; are going
8. drink; am drinking
9. are having
10. is trembling
11. is examining
12. is sleeping
13. work
14. means
15. wants.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 2

Put the verbs in brackets into the simple present or present continuous tense:
1. Ice (melt) at 0” centigrade.
2. ‘Silence please’. The students (write) their examination in the next room.
3. What (make) an apple fall ?
4. I (hear) a continuous noise in the next room. What (go on) there ?
5. She (write) a book on English nowadays.
6. The car (need) servicing. I (send) it to the garage tomorrow.
7. It (rain) hard. 1 am afraid the match will have to be cancelled.
8. My sister (take) lessons in Western music. She (practise) on the piano everyday.
9. He (say) that he (not leave) now.
10. The boys (rehearse) a play for College Day.
Answers:
1. melts
2. are writing
3. makes
4. hear; is going on
5. is writing
6. needs; am sending
7. is raining
8. is taking; practises
9. says; is not leaving
10. are rehearsing.

Exercise 3

Put the verbs in brackets into the simple present or present continuous tense :
1. Snakes (not make) holes. They (live) in the holes made by other creatures.
2. You cannot see Raman; he (have) a bath.
3. Kalpana usually (drink) tea, but today she (drink) coffee.
4. I (write) a book at a present moment.
5. Our teacher (speak) so quickly that most of the students (not understand) him.
6. In Tamil Nadu men usually (wear) lungis.
7. He (wear) a coat today as it is very cold.
8. I cannot answer the telephone because I (make) an omelette.
9. He always (buy) tickets but he never (win) anything.
10. You (love) her ? No, I (like) her manners but I (not love) her.
11. You (know) why water (boil) when we (heat) it ?
12. Who (make) so much noise in the next room ?
13. Irregular work (not bring) success.
14. The stars (shine) during the night.
15. Look! The two boys (fight).
Answers:
1. do not make; live
2. is having
3. drinks; is drinking
4. am writing
5. speaks; do not understand
6. wear
7. is wearing
8. am making
9. buys; wins
10. Do you love; like; do not love
11. Do you know; boils; heat
12. is making
13. does not bring
14. shine
15. are fighting.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

III. The Present Perfect Tense

Form :
इस Tense से संबंधित वाक्य का जब हिंदी में अनुवाद किया जाता है तो वाक्य के अंत में चुका है, या लिया है, की आवाज आती है।

Simple Sentences – S + has/have + V3 + O
Negative Sentences – S + has/have + not + V3 + O
Interrogative Sentences – Has/Have + S + V3 + 0 + ?

He, she, it और singular noun के साथ has का प्रयोग होता है।
I, we, you, they और plural noun के साथ have का प्रयोग होता है। जैसे-
The Bell has gone.
I have learnt my lesson.
Have you returned the library books ?

Uses
(a) To express an action which has just been completed.
(किसी ऐसे कार्य का वर्णन करने के लिए जो अभी-अभी पूर्ण हुआ है।)
Have you written a letter ?
Yes, I-have just completed it.

(b) To express an action which began in the past and has continued upto the present. For this use of the tense, for and since can be used to denote the length of time. For is used to show the length of time and since to show the point of time.
(किसी ऐसे कार्य का वर्णन करने के लिए जो भूतकाल से चलकर वर्तमान समय तक जारी रहा हो। समय की अवधि कां वर्णन करने के लिए since और for का प्रयोग किया जाता है। For का प्रयोग समय की अवधि दर्शाने के लिए और Since का प्रयोग निश्चित समय-बिंदु को दर्शाने के लिए किया जाता है।)
He has been a teacher since 1995.
I have known him for the last ten years.

(c) To express an action which happened in the past at an indefinite time. We either don’t know the time of its happening or we don’t mention it.
(भूतकाल में किसी अनिश्चित समय में घटित होने वाले कार्य का वर्णन करने के लिए। हम कार्य के होने के समय के बारे में नहीं जानते और न ही उसका वर्णन करते हैं।)
I have seen the Taj Mahal.
I have met the author of this book.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

(d) In the sentences having ‘yet’, negative sentences of this are formed.
(जिस वाक्य में yet लगा होता है उसमें इस tense के साथ not का प्रयोग करते हैं।)
The match has not started yet.
He has not come yet.
They have not visited us yet.

IV. The Present Perfect Continuous Tense

पहचान : वाक्य के अंत में से रहा है, से रही है, से रहा हूँ, से रहे हैं, इत्यादि लगा होता है।
Simple Sentences – S + has/have + been + V1 + ing + O
Negative Sentences – S + has/have + not been + V1 + ing + O
Interrogative Sentences – Has/Have + S + been + V1 + ing + O + ?

I have been living here only for five years.
No, I have not been living here since long.
Have you been living here for a long time ?

Uses :
(a) To express an action which began in the past but is still continuing. Since and For are used to denote the length of time.
(किसी ऐसे कार्य का वर्णन करने के लिए जो भूतकाल में किसी समय से आरंभ होकर अभी भी निरंतर रूप से चल)
It has been raining since morning.
We have been waiting for the rain to stop.

(b) To express an action, which has just finished, but whose effect or result still continues.
(किसी ऐसे कार्य का वर्णन करने के लिए जो अभी-अभी पूरा हुआ है लेकिन उसका प्रभाव या परिणाम अभी भी जारी है।)
I am tired; I have been watering the plants since morning.
I am late because I have been washing my car.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 4

Put the verbs in the present perfect or present perfect continuous tense:
1. He (take) his meal and is playing in the garden now.
2. Please give me your pen. I (forget) mine at home.
3. I (ring) the bell for five minutes, but nobody (come) to answer.
4. This woman (visit) the shop five times, but so far she (not purchase) anything.
5. He is a famous player. He (play) football since he was ten years old.
6. I (wait) for you for the last one hour.
7. Mohan (live) in this town since 1985.
8. You cannot meet Rajesh. He (just go) out.
9. Geeta went to Delhi six months ago, but I (not hear) from her so far.
10. I (not see) the Taj Mahal but I am planning to visit Agra next week.
11. India and Pakistan (fight) three wars.
12. You cannot go out till you (complete) your home work.
13. I (help) him five times in the past, but he (not improve).
14. He already (write) five letters and is still writing.
15. My uncle just (arrive) from Kolkata.
Answers:
1. has taken
2. have forgotten
3. have been ringing; has come
4. has visited; has not purchased
5. has been playing
6. have been waiting
7. has been living
8. has just gone
9. have not heard
10. have not seen
11. have fought
12. have completed
13. have helped; but has not improved
14. has already written
15. has just arrived.

Exercise 5

Put the verb in brackets into the correct tense (simple present, present continuous, present perfect or present perfect continuous) :
1. He always (find) fault with others.
2. He (play) for two hours and still (not stop).
3. The burglars (try) to get into the house for two hours.
4. We (wait) for the school bus at the moment.
5. He generally (go) to college in a car, but today he (go) on a cycle.
6. Sugar (cost) thirty rupees a kilo.
7. I (not met) the minister so far but I (meet) him tomorrow.
8. There is no use of calling the doctor; the patient already (die).
9. He (work) in the bank since 1976.
10. No one besides the nurse (know) this secret.
11. He (wear) that coat for fifteen years and it (wear out) at the elbows.
12. I never (see) such a beautiful garden.
13. I shall not go to his house unless he (invite) me.
14. I hear that Ram Lai (go) to London.
15. I want to go to the theatre; I not (see) a good play for a long time.
Answers:
1. finds
2. has been playing; has still not stopped
3. have been trying
4. are waiting
5. goes; is going
6. costs
7. have not met; am meeting
8. has already died
9. has been working
10. knows
11. has been wearing; has worn out
12. have never seen
13. invites
14. has gone
15. have not seen.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

(B)
I. The Simple Past Tense

Form:
इस Tense वाले वाक्यों का हिंदी अनुवाद करने पर वाक्य के अंत में आ, ए, ई, की आवाज आती है।
Simple Sentences – S + V2 + O
Negative Sentences – S + did not + V1 + O
Interrogative Sentences – Did + S + V1 + O?
Mohan went to Agra.
Mohan did not go to Agra.
Did Mohan go to Agra?

Some other examples :

AffirmativeNegativeInterrogative
I sang a song.I did not sing a song.Did I sing a song?
Anu sang a song.Anu did not sing a song.Did Anu sing a song?
They sang a song.They did not sing a song.Did they sing a song?
He sang a song.He did not sing a song.Did he sing a song?

(a) To express an action completed in the past at a definite time.
(अतीत में निश्चित समय पर पूरे हुए कार्य को व्यक्त करने के लिए।)

Nehru died in 1964. (die)
I met Shyam yesterday, (meet)
I visited Lucknow four years ago. (visit)
She did not visit us last year, (visit)

इन वाक्यों में भूतकाल का वर्णन करने के लिए yesterday, last, ago और in + सन् (year) आदि शब्द लगे होते हैं।

(b) To express a past habit.
(अतीत की आदत को व्यक्त करने हेतु।)

My grandfather always went for a walk in the morning, (go)
He always carried an umbrella, (carry)

(c) To express an action which took place at a definite time in the past even though the time is not given.
(अतीत के उस कार्य को व्यक्त करने के लिए जो किसी निश्चित समय पर हुआ था चाहे उसका समय नहीं बताया गया।)

Kamal arrived ten minutes late and his officer rebuked him. (arrive)
I bought this suit at Connaught Place, (buy)

(d) To express some historical events.
(कुछ ऐतिहासिक घटनाओं का वर्णन करने के लिए, जैसे-)

Shahjahan built the Taj. (build)
Babar founded the Mughal Empire, (found)
Columbus discovered America, (discover)
Gandhiji span on the charkha daily, (spin)

(e) If one part of the sentence is in Past Continuous Tense.
(यदि वाक्य का एक भाग Past Continuous Tense में है।)

I was taking my lunch when he arrived, (arrive)
I saw that the two boys were fighting. (see)

(f) To express the condition of past.
(भूतकाल की शर्त का वर्णन करने के लिए if वाले वाक्यों में यदि एक भाग में would/should/could + Verb की 1st form लगी हो तो दूसरे भाग में Verb की IInd form का – प्रयोग करते हैं।)
He would pass if he worked hard, (work)
She would get a job if she applied for it. (apply)

(g) Connectors (neither, and, but, because, as) के साथ यदि एक भाग में Verb की IInd form लगी हो तो दूसरे भाग में भी Verb की IInd form का प्रयोग करते हैं।

Neither he came nor sent any message, (send)
He failed because he did not work hard, (fail)
He came in and saw everything with his own eyes, (see)

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 6

Fill in the blanks with the simple Past Tense:
1. I was walking along the road when suddenly I ………….. (meet) an old lady.
2. My uncle just ………….. (arrive) from Kolkata.
3. I ………….. (tell) him that I was going to Pindara.
4. The old man was a beggar. He ………….. (beg) me to give him something.
5. “I have not eaten anything since morning,” the old man ………….. (say).
6. I ………….. (save) fifty hundred rupees last month.
7. I ………….. (feel) happy for helping an old and hungry man.
8. I returned from Pindara after one hour and ………….. (meet) the same old man again.
9. I recognised him but he ………….. (not recognise) me.
10. My servant ………….. (leave) me two weeks ago.
Answers:
1. I was walking along the road when suddenly I met (meet) an old lady.
2. My uncle just arrived (arrive) from Kolkata.
3. I told (tell) him that I was going to Pindara.
4. The old man was a beggar. He begged (beg) me to give him something.
5. “I have not eaten anything since morning,” the old man said (say).
6. I saved (save) fifty hundred rupees last month.
7. I felt (feel) happy for helping an old and hungry man.
8. I returned from Pindara after one hour and met (meet) the same old man again.
9. I recognised him but he did not recognise (not recognise) me.
10. My servant left (leave) me two weeks ago.

II. Past Continuous Tense

Form
वाक्य का हिंदी अनुवाद करने पर वाक्य के अंत में रहा था, रही थी, रहे थे की आवाज आती है।
Simple Sentences – S + was/were + V) + ing + O
Negative Sentences – S + was/were + not + V, + ing + O
Interrogative Sentences – Was/Were + S + V] + ing + 0?

He was writing a letter.
He was not writing a letter.
Was he writing a letter?

Uses
(a) इस Tense का प्रयोग भूतकाल में किसी निश्चित समय पर किसी क्रिया के निरंतर रूप से जारी रहने के बारे में किया जाता है; जैसे,

The teacher found that the boys were making a noise.
When I visited his house, he was taking his bath.

(b) Past Continuous Tense के साथ मुख्य रूप से when या while के साथ Past Indefinite Tense का प्रयोग होता है।
Past Indefinite Tense में क्रिया पूर्ण हो जाती है और Past Continuous Tense में क्रिया चल रही होती है।

A car left me when I was crossing the road.
He fell down while he was trying to climb a tree.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 7

Fill in the blanks using Simple Past or Past Continuous Tense:
1. When the teacher came, the students …………. (make) a noise.
2. I …………. (not notice) that the teacher was standing behind me.
3. I did not see the teacher …………. (stand) behind me.
4. I …………. (take) my breakfast when the door bell rang.
5. The snake bit the boy while he …………. (try) to catch it.
6. Columbus …………. (discover) America.
7. A thief …………. (break) into our house last night.
8. He jumped off the train while it …………. (move).
9. She …………. (copy) from a paper when the teacher caught her red handed.
10. Who …………. (found) the Mughal Empire ?
Answers:
1. When the teacher came, the students were making (make) a noise.
2. I did not notice (not notice) that the teacher was standing behind me.
3. I did not see the teacher was standing (stand) behind me.
4. I was taking (take) my breakfast when the door bell rang.
5. The snake bit the boy while he was trying (try) to catch it.
6. Columbus discovered (discover) America.
7. A thief broke (break) into our house last night.
8. He jumped off the train while it was moving (move).
9. She was copying (copy) from a paper when the teacher caught her red handed.
10. Who founded (found) the Mughal Empire ?

III. Past Perfect Tense

Form
वाक्य का हिंदी अनुवाद करने पर वाक्य के अंत में चुका था, चुके थे, चुकी थी की आवाज आती है।

Simple Sentences S + had + V3 + O
Negative Sentences S + had + not + V3 + O
Interrogative Sentences Had + S + V3 + O ?
Mohah had made a plan.
Mohan had not made a plan.
Had Mohan made a plan?

Some other examples :

AffirmativeNegativeInterrogative
I had sung a song.I had not sung a song.Had I sung a song?
She had sung a song.She had not sung a song.Had she sung a song?
They had sung a song.They had not sung a song.Had they sung a song?
The boys had sung a song.The boys had not sung a song.Had the boys sung a song?

Uses

(a) To express an action that has completed before the fixed time in past.
(किसी ऐसे कार्य को व्यक्त करने के लिए जो किसी दूसरे कार्य के आरंभ होने से पहले पूरा हो चुका था;)
जैसे-
The fire had burnt the huts before the fire brigade came, (bum)
The thief had run away before the police came, (run)
The patient had died before the doctor came, (die)
The train had left before we reached the station, (leave)

नोट-इन वाक्यों में कार्य के संपन्न होने का वर्णन करने के लिए before, after, already, by, till और until शब्द लगे होते हैं।

(b) To express an action that has completed before the beginning of second action. (किसी ऐसे कार्य को व्यक्त करने के लिए जो past के निश्चित समय से पहले पूरा हो गया था;) जैसे-
I had already done my work by 6 p.m. yesterday, (do)
He had not met me before, (not meet)
She had not reached Agra till yesterday, (not reach)

(c) To express an unfulfilled wish of the past. (अतीत की किसी अपूर्ण इच्छा को व्यक्त करने के लिए);
जैसे-
He wished that he had accepted the offer, (accept)
If only you had worked hard, (work)

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

(d) If in past happens more than one action, for former action past perfect is used.
(अगर past में एक से अधिक कार्य हुए हों तो पहले होने वाले कार्य के लिए Past Perfect का प्रयोग करते हैं);
जैसे-
I went home after I had finished the work, (finish)
He returned after he had seen off his wife at the station, (see)

(e) To express an impossible condition of the past.
(अतीत की असंभव शर्त को व्यक्त करने के लिए if वाले वाक्यों में); जैसे-
If he had walked carefully, he would not have fallen, (walk)
If you had worked hard, you would have passed, (work)
You would have caught the train if you had run faster, (run)

Exercise 8

Supply the correct Past Tense of the verb given in the brackets:
1. He told the doctor that his son just …………… (break) his leg.
2. The accident …………… (occur) at 6 o’clock this evening.
3. When I reached the house I …………… (find) that thieves …………… (break) into it.
4. I …………… (finish) my homework.
5. The thieves …………… (run) away before I reached the house.
6. If I …………… (have) a dictionary of my own, I would not bother you.
7. The thieves …………… (run) away before the police (arrive).
8. When I reached the cinema hall, the picture already …………… (begin).
9. I wish I …………… (work) harder.
10. If he …………… (walk) carefully, he would not have fallen.
Answers:
1. He told the doctor that his son just had just broken (break) his leg.
2. The accident occurred (occur) at 6 o’clock this evening.
3. When I reached the house I found (find) that thieves had broken (break) into it.
4. I had finished (finish) my homework.
5. The thieves had run away (run) away before I reached the house.
6. If I had (have) a dictionary of my own, I would not bother you.
7. The thieves had run away (run) away before the police arrived (arrive).
8. When I reached the cinema hall, the picture already had already begun (begin).
9. I wish I had worked (work) harder.
10. If he had walked. (walk) carefully, he would not have fallen.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

IV. Past Perfect Continuous Tense

Form
वाक्य का हिंदी अनुवाद करने पर वाक्य के अंत में, से रहा था, से रही थी, से रहे थे की आवाज आती है।

Uses
(I) इस Tense से संबंधित वाक्यों में since/for के साथ वाक्य के एक भाग में verb की 2nd Form लगी होती है अर्थात् भूतकाल में किसी निश्चित समय तक कोई कार्य किसी समय से निरंतर रूप से चला आ रहा था।

Exercise 9

Fill in the blanks with correct forms of verbs given in the brackets:
1. She …………. (sleep) for half an hour w hen I w’ent to her house.
2. I …………. (study) for three hours when the lights off.
3. The maid …………. (cook) the vegetables for fifteen minutes when my mother came.
4. The earthquake …………. (occur) before we reached there.
5. The clouds …………. (gather) in the sky since morning when the storm came.
6. I …………. (wait) for him for an hour when I received this message.
7. It …………. (rain) heavily for a week and the dam was flooded.
8. When I saw her, she …………. (weep).
9. I …………. (prepare) for the test for the last two months, when I received your letter.
10. We …………. (go) for a walk after the rain had stopped.
Answers:
1. She had been sleeping (sleep) for half an hour w hen I w’ent to her house.
2. I had been studying (study) for three hours when the lights off.
3. The maid had been cooking (cook) the vegetables for fifteen minutes when my mother came.
4. The earthquake had occurred (occur) before we reached there.
5. The clouds had been gathering (gather) in the sky since morning when the storm came.
6. I had been waiting (wait) for him for an hour when I received this message.
7. It had been raining (rain) heavily for a week and the dam was flooded.
8. When I saw her, she was weeping (weep).
9. I had been preparing (prepare) for the test for the last two months, when I received your letter.
10. We went (go) for a walk after the rain had stopped.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

(C)
I. The Simple Future Tense

Form
वाक्य का हिंदी अनुवाद करने पर गा, गे, गी की आवाज़ आएगी।
Simple Sentences – S + will/shall + V, + O
Negative Sentences – S + will/shall + not + V] + O
Interrogative Sentences – Will/Shall + S + V, + O ?

Geeta will visit us next week.
Geeta will not visit us next week.
Will Geeta visit us next week?

Uses
(a) To show future. (भविष्य को दर्शाने के लिए)
की राय या
He will go to Mumbai next week.

(b) To express the speaker’s opinions or assumptions about the future. (भविष्य के बारे में वक्ता मत को व्यक्त करने के लिए)
I think he will not come back.
We hope that Mohan will get First Division.

(c) Sometimes, the simple future tense is used to express habitual actions or general truths.
(का प्रयोग कई बार आदत संबंधी कार्यों और सामान्य सच्चाइयों के लिए भी किया जाता है।)
He will always tell lies.
A dog’s tail will remain crooked.

(d) Generally, shall is used with first person (I, we) and will is used with 2nd and 3rd persons. But will can be used with 1st person in order to express intention or promise. Shall can be used with promise, prohibition, etc. etc.
(प्रायः I, we के बाद shall तथा अन्य Nouns/pronouns के साथ will का प्रयोग होता है, लेकिन धमकी देने या वचन देने के बदले I, we के बाद will तथा अन्य Nouns के साथ shall का प्रयोग होता है।)

I will always help you in your need (promise).
We will fight to the finish (determination).
You shall not enter my room with muddy feet (prohibition).

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

II. The Future Continuous Tense

Form
इस Tense के वाक्यों के अन्त में रहा होगा, रही होगी, रहे होंगे की आवाज आती है।
Simple Sentences S + will/shall + be + V, + ing + O
Negative Sentences S + will/shall + not + be + V| + ing + O
Interrogative Sentences Will/Shall + S + be + Vj + ing + O ?

She will be watching movie.
She will not be watching movie.
Will she be watching movie?

Uses
(a) To express an action which is expected to take place in the normal course. It is less definite than the present continuous.
(भविष्यकाल में सामान्य रूप से होने के कार्य का वर्णन करने के लिए। यह Present Continuous से कम निश्चित होता है।)
We are seeing the manager tomorrow (definite arrangement).
We shall be seeing the manager tomorrow (less definite).

(b) To express an action that will be in progress at a given point of time in future :
(भविष्यकाल में किसी निश्चित समय पर कोई कार्य चल रहा होगा।)
When you reach Shimla, it will be snowing there.
At this time tomorrow, I shall be travelling in a train.

(c) In the interrogative, the Future Continuous implies a polite request or query.
(प्रश्नवाचक वाक्यों में Future Continuous बिना प्रार्थना को व्यक्त करता है।)
Will you be coming with me?

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

III. The Future Perfect Tense

Form
इस Tense के वाक्यों के अन्त में चुका होगा या लिया होगा इत्यादि की आवाज आती है।

Simple Sentences – S + will/shall + have + V3 + O
Negative Sentences – S + will/shall + not + have + V3 + O
Interrogative Sentences – Will/Shall + S + have + V3 + O ?

She will have done this work.
She will not have started the next work. She will have gone home.
Will she have started the next work also ?

Uses
(a) To express an action which is expected to be completed by a given future time.
(भविष्यकाल में किसी निश्चित समय से पहले किसी कार्य के पूर्ण होने का वर्णन करने के लिए)
By the time the doctor arrives, the patient will have died.

(b) To express the speaker’s belief or guess about an action.
(वक्ता के अनुमान का वर्णन करने के लिए)
Mohan will have reached Chandigarh by now.
You will have read about Alexander the Great.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

IV. The Future Perfect Continuous Tense

Form
वाक्य के अन्त में से रहा होगा, से रही होगी, से रहे होंगे, की आवाज़ आती है।
Simple Sentences S + will/shall + have been + V j + ing + O
Negative Sentences S + will/shall + not + have been + V, + ing + O
Interrogative Sentences Will/Shall + S + have been + Vj + ing + O ?
She will have been waiting for you for two hours when you reach there.
She will not have been watering the plants.
Will the gardener have been watering the plants in the evening ?

Uses

This tense is used to express an action which began in the past, or will begin before a certain time in the future, will be continuing at that certain point of time and will continue even after that.
(भविष्यकाल में किसी point of time से पहले कार्य आरंभ होकर उस point of time के बाद तक भी जारी रहेगा।)

When you reach the ground, the match will have been going on for one hour. (The match will begin, one hour before you reach, will still be in progress at the time of your reaching there and will continue even after your arrival).

Exercise 10

Put the verbs in brackets into the correct future form :
1. I wonder if I ………… (get) tickets in advance.
2. I ………… (know) the results in a week’s time.
3. This is February. Then the next month ………… (be) march.
4. Perhaps he ………… (arrive) in time for lunch.
5. At this time tomorrow, I ………… (travel) in a train.
6. By six p.m. tomorrow, I ………… (do) this work.
7. You ………… (open) the door, please ?
8. There is going to be a bus strike. Everyone ………… (look) for taxis and rickshaws next week.
9. I don’t like that man and I ………… (not help) him.
10. Mohan says that he ………… (not lend) me the book, because I never return the books.
Answers:
1. I wonder if I shall get (get) tickets in advance.
2. I shall know (know) the results in a week’s time.
3. This is February. Then the next month will be (be) march.
4. Perhaps he will arrive (arrive) in time for lunch.
5. At this time tomorrow, I shall be travelling (travel) in a train.
6. By six p.m. tomorrow, I shall have done (do) this work.
7. You will you open (open) the door, please ?
8. There is going to be a bus strike. Everyone will be looking (look) for taxis and rickshaws next week.
9. I don’t like that man and I will not help (not help) him.
10. Mohan says that he will not lend me (not lend) me the book, because I never return the books.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 11

Put the verbs in brackets into the correct future form (Future Simple, Future Continuous, Future Perfect, Future Perfect Continuous) :
1. If you walk fast, you ………… (catch) the train.
2. When you reach there he ………… (read) a book.
3. By evening I ………… (read) half the book.
4. By the end of this month I ………… (learn) driving for two months.
5. I ………… (return) your book tomorrow.
6. I ………… (finish) my work by 12 p.m.
7. You ………… (know) your result next week.
8. A number of tourists (arrive) Shimla next summer.
9. The train ………… (leave) by the time you reach the station.
10. As you sow, so you ………… (reap).
11. The gardener ………… (water) the plants before the sun rises.
12. The sun ………… (rise) before we reach the top.
13. I ………… (do) the washing tomorrow morning.
14. I ………… (buy) a shirt for you, if I go to market.
15. He ………… (be) sixteen next Monday.
Answers:
1. If you walk fast, you will catch (catch) the train.
2. When you reach there he will be reading (read) a book.
3. By evening I will have read (read) half the book.
4. By the end of this month I shall have been learning (learn) driving for two months.
5. I shall return (return) your book tomorrow.
6. I will finish (finish) my work by 12 p.m.
7. You shall know (know) your result next week.
8. A number of tourists will arrive (arrive) Shimla next summer.
9. The train will have left (leave) by the time you reach the station.
10. As you sow, so you shall you reap (reap).
11. The gardener will have watered (water) the plants before the sun rises.
12. The sun will have arisen (rise) before we reach the top.
13. I will do (do) the washing tomorrow morning.
14. I shall buy (buy) a shirt for you, if I go to market.
15. He will be (be) sixteen next Monday.

Exercise 12

Supply the correct tense forms of the verbs given in brackets:
1. I …………. (finish) my homework.
2. India …………. (get) independence in 1947.
3. It …………. (rain) since morning. .
4. He …………. (kill) a tiger before I reached the forest.
5. They …………. (live) here for many years.
6. The river …………. (overflow) its banks before the dam was built.
7. He …………. (stand) first in the class.
8. I …………. (like) to take tea daily.
9. I …………. (go) out for a walk daily.
10. It …………. (rain) when you reach home.
11. The police …………. (catch) the thief last night.
12. I …………. (not finish) my work yet.
Answers:
1. I have finished (finish) my homework.
2. India got (get) independence in 1947.
3. It has been raining (rain) since morning. .
4. He had killed (kill) a tiger before I reached the forest.
5. They lived (live) here for many years.
6. The river had overflown (overflow) its banks before the dam was built.
7. He stood (stand) first in the class.
8. I like (like) to take tea daily.
9. I go (go) out for a walk daily.
10. It will be raining (rain) when you reach home.
11. The police caught (catch) the thief last night.
12. I have not finished (not finish) my work yet.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses

Exercise 13

Supply the correct tense forms of the verbs given in brackets:
1. What you …………. (do) in the afternoon ?
2. You …………. (like) playing cricket ?
3. I …………. (live) here since 1958.
4. Curd …………. (cost) fifty rupees a litre.
5. My mother just …………. (arrive) from Kamal.
6. My sister …………. (write) a book at the present moment.
7. Why not two & two …………. (make) five ?
8. Kashmir …………. (call) heaven on the earth by people.
9. My friend recognized one but I …………. (not recognize) him.
10. Our school …………. (begin) with prayer everyday.
11. We …………. (do) our homework. Do not disturb us.
12. He …………. (buy) a new house last year.
Answers:
1. What you do you do (do) in the afternoon?
2. You Do you like (like) playing cricket ?
3. I have been living (live) here since 1958.
4. Curd costs (cost) fifty rupees a litre.
5. My mother just arrived (arrive) from Kamal.
6. My sister is writing (write) a book at the present moment.
7. Why not two & two do not two & two make (make) five?
8. Kashmir is called (call) heaven on the earth by people.
9. My friend recognized one but I did not recognize (not recognize) him.
10. Our school begins (begin) with prayer everyday.
11. We are doing (do) our homework. Do not disturb us.
12. He bought (buy) a new house last year.

HBSE 10th Class English Grammar Tenses Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

HBSE 10th Class English The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Textbook Questions and Answers

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 74)

1. What did Mr Petronski’s letter say? (मि० पेट्रोंसकी के पत्र में क्या कहा गया था?)
Answer:
Miss Mason received a letter from Wanda’s father, Mr Petronski. The letter said that Wanda would not come to school any more. They were moving to a big city. In that city, there would be no more fun on names. There were plenty of funny names in the city.
(मिस मेसन को वाण्डा के पिता मि० पेट्रोंसकी का पत्र मिला। पत्र में कहा गया था कि अब वाण्डा स्कूल में नहीं आएगी। वे एक बड़े शहर में जा रहे थे। उस शहर में, नामों को लेकर मजाक नहीं किया जाएगा। शहर में बहुत सारे मजाकिया नाम पाए जाते थे

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

2. Is Miss Mason angry with the class, or is she unhappy and upset ?
(क्या मिस मेसन कक्षा से नाराज है, अथवा क्या वह दुखी और परेशान है?)
Answer:
Miss Mason is not angry with the class. She is unhappy and upset with the class. She feels sad that Wanda has left because the other students made fun of her. She calls it unfortunate. She advises the class to think and not hurt anyone’s feelings because of a longer name.
(मिस मेसन कक्षा से नाराज नहीं है। वह कक्षा के व्यवहार से दुखी और परेशान है। उसे महसूस होता है कि वाण्डा ने स्कूल इसलिए छोड़ा क्योंकि दूसरे विद्यार्थी उसका मजाक उड़ाते थे। वह इसे दुर्भाग्यपूर्ण मानती है। वह कक्षा से विचार करने और किसी के लंबे नाम के कारण उसकी भावनाओं को आहत न करने की सलाह देती है।)

3. How does Maddie feel after listening to the note from Wanda’s father? (वाण्डा के पिता के नोट को सुनने के पश्चात् मैडी को कैसा महसूस होता है?)
Answer:
Maddie is very sad. She feels greatly hurt. She has a very sick feeling in the bottom of her stomach. She has a feeling to go and tell Wanda that they hadn’t meant to make fun of her and hurt her feelings.
(मैडी बहुत उदास है। वह बहुत अधिक आहत महसूस करती है। अपने पेट के निचले हिस्से में वह बहुत अस्वस्थ महसूस करती है। वह वाण्डा के पास जाकर यह बताने की सोचती है कि उनका भाव उसका मजाक उड़ाने अथवा उसकी भावनाओं को आहत करना नहीं था।)

4. What does Maddie want to do? (मैडी क्या करना चाहती है?)
Answer:
Maddie wants to go to Wanda at once and feel sorry for her behaviour. She wants to tell her that they hadn’t meant to hurt her feelings. She wants to tell Wanda that they thought her to be smart and her dresses were beautiful.
(मैडी तुरंत वाण्डा के पास जाना चाहती है और अपने व्यवहार के लिए क्षमा माँगना चाहती है। वह उसे बताना चाहती थी कि उनका भाव उसकी भावनाओं को आहत करना नहीं था। वह वाण्डा को बताना चाहती है कि वे उसे चुस्त मानते थे और उसकी सभी पोशाकें सुंदर थीं।)

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 76)

1. What excuses does Peggy think up for her behaviour ? Why ?
(पेग्गी अपने व्यवहार के लिए कौन-से बहाने सोचती है? क्यों?)
Answer:
Peggy is also sad that Wanda has left the school. But she tries to make excuses for her behaviour. She says that she didn’t call her a foreigner. She also did not make fun of her name. She only thought that Wanda was dumb and had no sense to know that they were mocking at her.
(पेग्गी भी उदास है कि वाण्डा ने स्कूल छोड़ दिया है। लेकिन वह अपने व्यवहार के लिए बहाने बनाने का प्रयास करती है। वह कहती है कि वह उसे विदेशी नहीं कहती थी। वह उसके नाम का भी मजाक नहीं उड़ाती थी। वह तो वाण्डा को केवल गूंगी मानती थी और यह मानती थी कि उसमें इतनी बुद्धि ही नहीं थी कि वह यह समझ सके कि वे उसका मजाक उड़ा रहे थे।)

2. What are Maddie’s thoughts as they go to Boggins Heights ? (जब वे बोगिंस हाईट्स जाती है तो मैडी क्या सोच रही होती है?)
Answer:
Maddie goes to Boggins Heights in order to meet Wanda. On the way she hopes that they will find Wanda. She wants to tell her that they are sorry. The whole school thinks that she is just wonderful.
(मैडी वाण्डा से मिलने के लिए बोगिंस हाईट्स जाती है। रास्ते में वह सोचती है कि वह वाण्डा को ढूँढ़ लेंगी। वह उसे बताना चाहती है कि उन्हें खेद है। सारा स्कूल सोचता है कि वह सिर्फ एक अद्भुत लड़की है।)

3. Why does Wanda’s house remind Maddie of Wanda’s blue dress ? (वाण्डा का घर मैडी को उसकी नीली पोशाक की याद क्यों दिलाता है?)
Answer:
Wanda’s house is simple, shabby but clean. The house reminds Maddie of Wanda’s blue dress because both look similar. Wanda’s faded blue cotton dress was also shabby but clean.
(वाण्डा का घर सादा, भद्दा दिखने वाला लेकिन साफ है। वह घर मैडी को वाण्डा की नीली पोशाक की याद दिलाता है क्योंकि दोनों एक-जैसे दिखते थे। वाण्डा की रंग उड़ी हुई नीली पोशाक देखने में तो भद्दी थी परंतु साफ थी।)

4. What does Maddie think hard about ? What important decision does she come to ? (मैडी किस विषय में जोर लगाकर सोचती है? वह किस महत्त्वपूर्ण निर्णय पर पहुँचती है?)
Answer:
She decides that in future she will not just stand by see girls making fun of others. She will speak up if she finds someone treating others unkindly. She won’t mind even losing Peggy’s friendship for that. She will never make anybody unhappy.
(वह निर्णय लेती है कि भविष्य में वह लड़कियों को किसी दूसरे का मजाक उड़ाते हुए चुपचाप सहन नहीं करेगी। भविष्य में यदि वह किसी को भी किसी के साथ निर्दयता का व्यवहार करता देखेगी तो अपनी आवाज उठाएगी। वह इसके लिए पेग्गी की मित्रता के खो जाने की भी परवाह नहीं करेगी। वह कभी किसी को भी दुखी नहीं करेगी।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 79)

1. What did the girls write to Wanda ? (लड़कियों ने वाण्डा को क्या लिखा?)
Answer:
Maddie and Peggy wrote a letter to Wanda. In the letter, they wrote about Wanda’s pretty drawings. They asked her if she liked her new place and her new teacher. They had meant to feel sorry for their behavior. But in the end, it turned out to be just a friendly letter.
(मैडी और पेग्गी ने वाण्डा को एक पत्र लिखा। पत्र में उन्होंने वाण्डा के सुंदर चित्रों के बारे में लिखा। उन्होंने उससे पूछा कि क्या उसे अपना नया स्थान और नई शिक्षक पसंद आ गई है। वे अपने व्यवहार के लिए खेद प्रकट करना चाहती थीं। लेकिन आखिर में, वह केवल एक मैत्री पत्र के रूप में ही प्रतीत हुआ।)

2. Did they get a reply? Who was more anxious for a reply, Peggy or Maddie? How do you know?
(क्या उन्हें उत्तर प्राप्त हुआ? उत्तर के लिए कौन ज्यादा उत्तेजित हो रही थी, पेग्गी या मैडी? आपको कैसे पता चला?)
Answer:
No, they did not get a reply to their letter. Maddie was more anxious for a reply. Peggy had begun to forget the whole incident. But Maddie still couldn’t sleep properly. She tried to go to sleep making speeches
about Wanda.
(नहीं, उन्हें अपने पत्र का कोई उत्तर प्राप्त नहीं हुआ। उत्तर के लिए मैडी अधिक उत्तेजित थी। पेग्गी ने तो सारी घटना को ही भूलना शुरू कर दिया था। लेकिन मैडी अभी भी ठीक ढंग से नहीं सो सकती थी। वह वाण्डा के बारे में भाषण बना-बनाकर सोने का प्रयास करती थी।)

3. How did the girls know that Wanda liked them even though they had teased her ?
(लड़कियों को कैसे पता चला कि वाण्डा उन्हें पसंद करती थी यद्यपि वे उसे चिड़ाया करती थी?)
Answer:
In her letter Wanda wrote that two special drawings should be given to Peggy and Maddie. She wished all a merry Christmas. This shows that Wanda liked the girls.
(अपने पत्र में वाण्डा ने लिखा कि उसके दो खास चित्र पेग्गी और मैडी को दे दिए जाएँ। वह सभी को खुशहाल क्रिसमस की बधाई देती है। इससे पता चलता है कि वाण्डा लड़कियों को पसंद करती थी।)

Thinking about the Text

1. Why do you think Wanda’s family moved to a different city? Do you think life there was going to be different for their family?
(आपके विचार में वाण्डा का परिवार एक दूसरे शहर में क्यों गया था? क्या आपके विचार में उनके परिवार का जीवन एक भिन्न प्रकार का होगा?)
Answer:
It is possible that Wanda’s family moved to a different city in order to avoid the racial prejudice. In a big city people are busy with their own life and have no time to make fun of others only because of their funny names. Moreover, there are other people with funny names and Wanda will not feel isolated.
(यह संभव हो सकता है कि वाण्डा के परिवार ने जातीय भेदभाव से बचने के लिए दूसरे शहर में जाने का निर्णय लिया हो। एक बड़े शहर में लोग अपने जीवन के साथ ही व्यस्त रहते हैं और उनके पास दूसरों के मजाकिया नामों का मजाक उड़ाने का समय ही नहीं होता। साथ-ही-साथ वहाँ पर मजाकिया नामों वाले बहुत-से लोग होते हैं। इससे वाण्डा वहाँ पर अलग-थलग महसूस नहीं करेगी।)

2. Maddie thought her silence was as bad as Peggy’s teasing. Was she right?
(मैडी सोचती थी कि उसकी चुप्पी, पेग्गी के चिड़ाने जितनी ही बुरी थी। क्या वह सही थी?)
Answer:
Yes, Maddie thought that her silence was as bad as Peggy’s teasing. She thought that she was a cowards because she did not stop Peggy from teasing Wanda. Remaining silent amounted to supporting Peggy. She was right in thinking so.
(हाँ, मैडी सोचती थी कि उसकी चुप्पी भी पेग्गी के चिड़ाने के जितनी ही बुरी थी। वह स्वयं को कायर मानती थी क्योंकि वह पेग्गी को वाण्डा को चिड़ाने से नहीं रोकती थी। शांत रहने का मतलब पेग्गी को समर्थन देना था। ऐसा वह बिल्कुल सही सोच रही थी।)

3. Peggy says, “I never thought she had the sense to know we were making fun of her anyway. I thought she was too dumb. And gee, look how she can draw!” What led Peggy to believe that Wanda was dumb ? Did she change her opinion later ?
(पेग्गी कहती है, “मैंने तो कभी सोचा भी नहीं था कि उसमें ऐसी बुद्धि भी है जिससे उसे पता चल जाएगा कि हम उसका मजाक उड़ा रहे थे। मैं तो उसे बिल्कुल गूंगी मानती थी। और हाँ, वह कितने अच्छे चित्र बना लेती है।” पेग्गी वाण्डा को गूंगी क्यों मानती थी? क्या बाद में उसने अपना दृष्टिकोण बदल लिया? ) ,.
Answer:
Peggy and other girls often teased Wanda. They made fun of her by asking her how many dresses she had. But Wanda never got angry. She would only draw her mouth tight. She would reply innocently that she had hundred dresses. She said everything silently and seriously. That is why Peggy thought that Wanda was dumb. Peggy changed her opinion later.
(पेग्गी और दूसरी लड़कियाँ प्रायः वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाया करती थीं। वे उससे यह पूछकर कि उसके पास कितनी पोशाकें हैं उसका मजाक उड़ाती थीं। लेकिन वाण्डा को कभी गुस्सा नहीं आता था। वह केवल अपने मुँह को कसकर बंद कर लेती थी। वह भोलेपन से उत्तर दिया करती थी कि उसके पास एक सौ पोशाकें हैं। वह सब कुछ शांत और गंभीर भाव से कहती थी। यही कारण था कि पेग्गी वाण्डा को गूंगी समझती थी। पेग्गी ने बाद में अपने दृष्टिकोण को बदला।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

4. What important decision did Maddie make ? Why did she have to think hard to do so ?
(मैडी ने क्या महत्त्वपूर्ण निर्णय लिया? उसे ऐसा करने के लिए बहुत अधिक क्यों सोचना पड़ा?)
Answer:
Maddie decided that in future she would not just stand silently when someone was making fun of others. She would speak up even if that meant breaking Peggy’s friendship. She would not make anybody unhappy.
(मैडी ने निर्णय लिया कि भविष्य में वह उस समय एक मूकदर्शक बनकर खड़ी नहीं रहेगी जब कोई दूसरों का मजाक उड़ा रहा होगा। वह अपनी आवाज उठाएगी चाहे इससे पेग्गी की मित्रता ही क्यों न टूट जाए। वह किसी को भी दुख नहीं पहुंचाएगी।)

5. Why do you think Wanda gave Maddie and Peggy the drawings of the dresses ? Why are they surprised ?
(आपके विचार में वाण्डा ने मैडी और पेग्गी को पोशाकों के चित्र क्यों दिए थे ? वे हैरान क्यों हैं?)
Answer:
Wanda was a girl with a golden heart. Although Peggy made fun of her and Maddie kept silent, she never hated them. In her letter she asked her teacher to give a drawing each to.Peggy and Maddie. This shows that Wanda did not hate them. She was above petty things like dresses etc. She had great human qualities.
(वाण्डा एक सुनहरी हृदय वाली लड़की थी। यद्यपि पेग्गी उसका मजाक उड़ाया करती थी और मैडी उसे चुपचाप देखा करती थी, फिर भी वह उनसे नफरत नहीं करती थी। टीचर के नाम अपने पत्र में वह अपना एक-एक चित्र पेग्गी और मैडी को देने के लिए कहती है। इससे पता चलता है कि वाण्डा उनसे घृणा नहीं करती थी। वह पोशाकों जैसी छोटी-छोटी चीजों से कहीं ऊपर थी। उसमें महान् मानवीय गुण थे।)

6. Do you think Wanda really thought the girls were teasing her ? Why or Why not?
(आपके विचार में क्या वाण्डा सचमुच जानती थी कि लड़कियाँ उसे चिड़ा रही हैं? क्यों अथवा क्यों नहीं ?)
Answer:
Yes, she really thought so. She was an intelligent and sensitive girl. She had more understanding and maturity of mind than others. But she was very wise. She never hated even those who laughed at her. She forgave Peggy and Maddie and gifted them two of her drawings.
(हाँ, वह सचमुच में ऐसा सोचती थी। वह एक बुद्धिमान और भावुक लड़की थी। उसमें दूसरों की अपेक्षा अधिक समझ और मन की परिपक्वता थी। लेकिन वह बहुत बुद्धिमान थी। वह कभी उनसे भी नफरत नहीं करती थी जो उस पर हँसते थे। उसने पेग्गी और मैडी को क्षमा कर दिया और अपने दो चित्र उन्हें भेंट कर दिए।)

Thinking about Language

I. Here are thirty adjectives describing human qualities. Discuss them with your partner and put them into two word webs (given below) according to whether you think they show positive or negative qualities. You can consult a dictionary if you are not sure of the meanings of some of the words. You may also add to the list the positive or negative ‘pair of a given word.

kind, sarcastic, courteous, arrogant, insipid, timid, placid, cruel, haughty, proud, zealous, intrepid, sensitive, compassionate, introverted, stolid, cheerful, contented, thoughtless, vain, friendly, unforgiving, fashionable, generous, talented, lonely, determined, creative, miserable, complacent

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2 1
Answer:
Meant for class level. These adjectives can be classified as given below :
im

II. What adjectives can we use to describe Peggy, Wanda and Maddie ? You can choose adjectives from the list above. You can also add some of your own.

1. Peggy
2. Wanda
3. Maddie
Answer:
1. Peggy : sarcastic, arrogant, cruel, haughty, proud, zealous, thoughtless, vain, unforgiving.
2. Wanda : kind, courteous, intrepid, sensitive, compassionate, introverted, contented, friendly, generous, talented, lonely, determined, creative, complacent.
3. Maddie : insipid, timid, placid, stolid.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

III. 1. Find the sentences in the story with the following phrasal verbs.

lined up
thought up
took off
stood by
Answer:
(a) “Yeah, a hundred and all lined up,” said Wanda.
(b) Peggy, who had thought up this game, and Maddie, her inseparable friend, were always the last to leave.
(c) Miss Mason took off her glasses.
(d) She had stood by silently and that just as bad as Peggy had done.

2. Look up these phrasal verbs in a dictionary to find out if they can be used in some other way. (Look at the entries for line, think, take and stand in the dictionary.) Find out what other prepositions can go with these verbs. What does each of these phrasal verbs mean?
Answer:
Line with-
lined with trees
line up (form a queue)
line something up (arrange or organize)

Think up-
(make a plan)
think about (recall)
think ahead (anticipate)
think back (recall, reconsider)
Think over (reflect upon)

Take off-
(remove)
take on (assume)
take out (bring out )
take over (take charge of)
take away (bought)

Stand by-
(stand near, give support)
stand back (move back)
stand down (leave the witness box)
stand in (take someone’s place)
stand out (be prominent)

3. Use at least five such phrasal verbs in sentences of your own.
Answer:
(i) Line with : This road is lined with beautiful trees.
(ii) Think about : I thought about what I had done and felt regret.
(iii) Took off : He took off his shirt and jumped into the river.
(iv) Stood by : My friend has always stood by me through thick and thin.
(v) Take over : The new manager has taken over the charge of his office.

IV. Colours are used to describe feelings, moods and emotions. Match the following ‘colour expressions’ with a suggested paraphrase.

(i) the Monday morning blues — feel embarrassed/angry/ashamed
(ii) go red in the face – feel very sick, as if about to vomit
(iii) look green – sadness or depression after a weekend of fun .
(iv) the red carpet – the sign or permission to begin an action
(v) blue-blooded – a sign of surrender or acceptance of defeat, a wish to stop fighting
(vi) a green belt in an unlawful act; while doing something wrong
(vii) a blackguard a photographic print of building plans; a detailed plan or scheme
(viii) a grey area
land around a town or city where construction is prohibited
by law
(ix) a white flag :- an area of a subject or a situation where matters are not very clear
(x) a blueprint – a dishonest person with no sense of right or wrong
(xi) red-handed – a special welcome
(xii) the green light – of noble birth or from a royal family
Answer:
(i) the Monday morning blues – sadness or depression after a weekend of fun (ii) go red in the face — feel/embarrassed/angry/ashamed
(ii) look green – feel very sick, as if about to vomit
(iv) the red carpet – a special welcome
(v) blue-blooded – of noble birth or from a royal family
(vi) a green belt — land around a town or city where construction is prohibited by law
(vii) a blackguard – a dishonest person with no sense of right or wrong
(viii) a grey area – an area of a subject or a situation where matters are not very clear
(ix) a white flag – a sign of surrender or acceptance of defeat, a wish to stop fighting
(x) a blueprint – a photographic print of building plans; a detailed plan or scheme
(xi) red-handed – in an unlawful act; while doing something wrong
(xii) the green light – the sign or permission to begin an action.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Speaking

Role Play The story of Wanda Petronski presents many characters engaged in many kinds of behaviour (teasing, playing, sitting in class. ….). Form groups. Choose an episode or episodes from the story. Assign roles to each member of the group from that episode, and try to act it out like a play, using the words in the story.
Answer:
For doing at class level.

Writing

1. Look again at the letter which Wanda’s father writes to Miss Mason, Wanda’s teacher. Mr Petronski is not quite aware how to write a formal letter in English. Can you rewrite it more appropriately ? Discuss the following with your partner before you do so.

The format of a formal letter: How to begin the letter and how to end it; the language of the letter needs to be formal. (Avoid informal words like “holler” and fragments like “No more ask why funny name.”) Write complete sentences.
Answer:
For discussion with a partner at class level. The following language shall help in understanding the appropriateness of language for such letters. The formal letter shall be written like the one given below:

Dear Miss Mason
I am father of Wanda Petronski. I wish to inform you that my daughter, Wanda, shall not be able to come to your school any more. Jake is also leaving your school. We all are moving away to another city. In a big city nobody makes fun of someone because of his long and funny name. We hope that in that city we shall have good times.

Thanking you
Yours sincerely
Jan Petronski

2. Are you interested in drawing and painting ? Ritu Kumar, one of India’s best known dress designers, has no formal training in designing. She started by sketching ideas for her own dresses, and getting them stitched by a tailor. Ritu’s friends liked her dresses so much that they asked her to design clothes for them, and even paid her for it!

Imagine you are going to make a career out of your hobby. What sort of things will you need to learn ? Write a paragraph or two on this topic after consulting an expert or doing reference work on your chosen area.
Answer:
Students should themselves undertake such tasks.

3. Rewrite a part of the story as if Wanda is telling us her own story.
Answer:
I have left my old school as my family has moved to a big city. In that school, I had a very bad time. There was racial discrimination. Some girls laughed at me because of my strange and long name. They considered me a foreigner. Although, they did not say it openly, yet it was clear that they made fun of me because of my poverty. I came to the school daily in a blue faded dress. That is why they asked me how many dresses I had in my closet. I always tried to evade their answers. I said that I had a hundred dresses. And when my back was turned, I could hear their laughter and giggling. My teacher, Miss Mason was a kind and understanding teacher. The two girls, Peggy and Maddie also joined the girls in making fun of me. However, Maggie never said anything. But she did not stop Peggy either. My father was hurt when I told him these things. In the end, he decided to leave that city and move to a big city. Now, in this city, I am at peace. However, I often remember my school and my teacher.

HBSE 10th Class English The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Important Questions and Answers

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What was the content of Mr Petronski’s letter ?
Answer:
The letter said that Wanda would come no more to that school because students made fun of her strange name.

Question 2.
Where was Wanda’s family moving ?
Answer:
Her family was moving to a big city.

Question 3.
Who read Mr Petronski’s letter to the class ?
Answer:
Miss Mason read Mr Petronski’s letter to the class.

Question 4.
What happened when Miss Mason read the letter ?
Answer:
There was a deep silence in the class.

Question 5.
What did Miss Mason say about the hurting of any one’s feeling ?
Answer:
She said that it was unfortunate and sad to hurt someone’s feelings.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Question 6.
Why did Maddie have a sick feeling at the bottom of her stomach ?
Answer:
Maddie felt it very bad of making fun of Wanda by Peggy for her poverty.

Question 7.
Where did Peggy and Maddie go that evening after the school hours ?
Answer:
They both went to the Boggins Heights to meet Wanda.

Question 8.
What did Wanda’s house remind Maddie of ?
Answer:
Wanda’s shabby but clean house reminded Maddie of her faded blue cotton dress.

Question 9.
Who did Maddie and Peggy write a letter to ?
Answer:
They wrote a letter to Wanda

Question 10.
What gift did Wanda give to Peggy ?
Answer:
She gave her the drawing of a dress with green colour.

Question 11.
What gift did Wanda give to Maddie ?
Answer:
She gave her the drawing of a dress with blue colours.

Question 12.
What did Maddie find when she looked at the drawing intently ?
Answer:
She found that the head and face in the drawing resembled her own.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Which drawing did Wanda ask to give to Peggy ? (वाण्डा ने पेग्गी को कौन-सा चित्र देने के लिए कहा?)
Answer:
Wanda wrote in the letter that she would like Peggy to have the drawing of the green dress with the red trimming.
(वाण्डा ने अपने पत्र में लिखा कि वह चाहेगी कि पेग्गी लाल गोटा लगी हुई हरी पोशाक का चित्र ले जाए।)

Question 2.
Where had Maddie pinned Wanda drawing in her bed room ? (मैडी ने वाण्डा के चित्र को अपने कमरे में कहाँ लगा दिया?).
Answer:
Maddie carried Wanda’s drawing carefully. She pinned her drawing over a torn place in the pinkflowered wall paper in her bedroom. The shabby room came alive from the brilliancy of the colours.
(मैडी वाण्डा के चित्र को सावधानीपूर्वक ले गई। उसने उस चित्र को अपने शयनकक्ष की गुलाबी फूलों वाले दीवारी कागज के एक फटे हुए स्थान पर लगा दिया। शानदार रंगों के कारण वह भद्दा-सा दिखने वाला कमरा सजीव हो उठा।)

Question 3.
What did Wanda do for the dresses ? .. (वाण्डा ने पोशाकों का क्या किया था?)
Answer:
Wanda gave away hundred dresses to the girls and blue as well as green to Maddie and Peggy respectively. .
(वाण्डा ने सभी सौ पोशाकें लड़कियों को दे दी और नीली तथा हरी पोशाकें क्रमशः मैडी और पेग्गी को दे दी।)

Question 4.
Mention the important conclusion of Maddie. (मैडी के द्वारा लिए गए महत्त्वपूर्ण निष्कर्ष के विषय में बताइए।)
Answer:
Maddie was deeply troubled. She took up an important decision. She found that if anyone speaks unkindly she would speak up. She would not make anybody unhappy again.
(मैडी बहुत अधिक व्यथित थी। उसने एक महत्त्वपूर्ण निर्णय लिया। उसने तय किया कि यदि कोई निर्दयतापूर्वक बोलता है तो वह उसके खिलाफ बोलेगी। अब वह कभी भी किसी को दुखी नहीं करेगी।)

Question 5.
How did Peggy and Maddie find Wanda house at Boggins Heights ? (पेग्गी और मैडी ने बोगिंस हाईट्स पर वाण्डा के घर को कैसे पाया?)
Answer:
They found that it was a little white house. Straws of old grass stuck up here and there along the pathway. The house and its little yard looked shabby but clean.
(उन्होंने पाया कि वह एक छोटा-सा सफेद घर था। पुराने घास के तिनके रास्ते के साथ-साथ लगे हुए थे। घर और उसका छोटा-सा आँगन भद्दे दिख रहे थे परंतु स्वच्छ थे।)

Question 6.
How was Room Thirteen decorated ? (कमरा नंबर तेरह कैसे सजाया गया?)
Answer:
Room Thirteen was decorated with Christmas bells and a small tree. (कमरा नंबर तेरह क्रिसमस घंटियों और एक छोटे-से पेड़ के साथ सजाया गया।)

Essay Type Question

Question 1.
What did Wanda’s father wrote in his letter ? How did Maddie feel after listening to that . letter ?
(वाण्डा के पिता ने अपने पत्र में क्या लिखा? उस पत्र को सुनकर मैडी को कैसा लगा?)
Answer:
In his letter, Wanda’s father had informed Miss Mason that Wanda would not come to the school any more. They were moving to a big city. In that city nobody would consider her name funny and laugh at her. The entire class became silent and felt bad about Wanda. Miss Mason understood their feelings. She told them that no one should hurt anyone’s feelings because his or her name was long or funny. She said that what had happened in the school about Wanda was bad. She asked them to think about that. Maddie listened to what Miss Mason said about Wanda. She could not concentrate on her studies. She had a sick feeling. It was true that she had never made fun of Wanda herself. But at the same time, she had not objected Peggy’s asking Wanda about her dresses. She felt that she was a coward.

(अपने पत्र में, वाण्डा के पिता ने मिस मेसन को सूचित किया था कि अब वाण्डा उस स्कूल में और अधिक नहीं आएगी। वे एक बड़े शहर में जा रहे थे। उस शहर में कोई भी उसके नाम को मजाकिया नहीं मानेगा और उस पर हँसेगा नहीं। सारी कक्षा शांत हो गई और उन्हें वाण्डा के बारे में बुरा लगा। मिस मेसन ने उनकी भावनाओं को समझ लिया। उसने उन्हें बताया कि किसी को भी दूसरे की भावनाओं को आहत नहीं करना चाहिए क्योंकि उसका नाम लंबा है अथवा मजाकिया। उसने कहा कि स्कूल में वाण्डा के साथ जो कुछ भी हुआ वह बुरा था। उसने उन्हें उसके बारे में विचार करने को कहा। मैडी ने मिस मेसन के द्वारा वाण्डा के बारे में कही गई सारी बातें सुनीं। वह अपनी पढ़ाई पर ध्यान केंद्रित न कर सकी। उसे एक अस्वस्थ भावना का अहसास हो रहा था। यह सच था कि उसने स्वयं कभी वाण्डा का मजाक नहीं उड़ाया था। लेकिन साथ-ही-साथ उसने कभी भी पेग्गी के द्वारा वाण्डा से उसकी पोशाकों के बारे में पूछे जाने का विरोध नहीं किया था। उसे लगता था कि वह तो कायर है।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Question 2.
What did Maddie decide to do after listening to the letter from Wanda’s father ? (वाण्डा के पिता के पत्र को सुनने के पश्चात् मैडी ने क्या करने का निर्णय लिया?)
Answer:
Maddie wondered if she could do anything. She wanted to meet Wanda and tell her that she had never meant to hurt her feelings. She made up her mind to go to her house and tell Wanda that she had won the contest and her hundred dresses were beautiful. She decided that she would find out Wanda Petronski. She and Peggy would go to her house to meet her. When school was over, Maddie told Peggy to go to Wanda’s house. They walked towards her colony. On the way, Peggy said that she had never called Wanda a foreigner. She always thought that Wanda was a dumb girl. She never imagined that Wanda could sense the girls had been making fun of her. Maddie said nothing. She just wanted to meet Wanda and tell her that they were sorry for their rude treatment. She would request her not to move away.

(मैडी हैरान थी कि क्या वह कुछ कर सकती थी। वह वाण्डा से मिलकर उसे यह बताना चाहती थी कि उसका आशय कभी भी उसकी भावनाओं को आहत करना नहीं था। उसने अपना मन बनाया कि वह वाण्डा के घर जाएगी और उसे बताएगी कि उसने मुकाबला जीत लिया है और उसकी सौ पोशाकें बहुत सुंदर थीं। उसने तय कर लिया कि वह वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी का पता लगाएगी। वह और पेग्गी उससे मिलने के लिए उसके घर जाएँगी। जब स्कूल की छुट्टी हुई तो मैडी न पेग्गी से वाण्डा के घर चलने को कहा। वे उसकी कालोनी की ओर चले। रास्ते में पेग्गी ने कहा कि उसने वाण्डा को कभी भी विदेशी नहीं कहा है। वह तो हमेशा ही वाण्डा को एक गूंगी लड़की मानती थी। वह कभी भी ऐसा नहीं मानती थी कि वाण्डा को पता होगा कि अन्य लड़कियाँ उसका मजाक उड़ा रही हैं। मैडी ने कुछ नहीं कहा। वह तो केवल वाण्डा से मिलना चाहती थी और उसे यह बताना चाहती थी कि उन्हें अपने अभद्र व्यवहार का खेद है। वह उससे वहाँ से न जाने की प्रार्थना करेगी।)

Question 3.
What happened when Maddie and Peggy reached to Wanda’s house ? What decision did Maddie make ?
(जब मैडी और पेग्गी वाण्डा के घर पहुँचे तो क्या हुआ? मैडी ने क्या निर्णय लिया?)
Answer:
Peggy and Maddie found Wanda’s house in Boggins Heights. The house looked shabby but clean. It reminded Maddie of Wanda’s one dress. But there was no one in the house. Peggy knocked at the door. There was no response. Wanda and her family had already left the place. They came back. Peggy said that her asking Wanda about her dresses actually helped her. Otherwise, perhaps she might not have won the drawing contest. But Maddie was not satisfied. She could not sleep that night. She thought of Wanda, her drawings and her house. At last she made a decision. She decided that she would not keep quiet if someone made fun of anybody before her. She would not mind even she had to lose Peggy’s friendship. She had no way of making things right with Wanda, but now she would never make anybody unhappy.

(पेग्गी और मैड़ी ने बोगिंस हाईट्स में वाण्डा का घर खोज निकाला। घर भद्दा लेकिन स्वच्छ दिखाई दे रहा था। यह मैडी को वाण्डा की एक पोशाक की याद दिला रहा था। लेकिन घर में कोई नहीं था। पेग्गी ने दरवाजे पर दस्तक दी। लेकिन किसी ने उत्तर नहीं दिया। वाण्डा और उसका परिवार पहले ही उस स्थान को छोड़कर जा चुके थे। वे वापस आ गईं। पेग्गी ने कहा कि पोशाकों के बारे में उसके द्वारा पूछे गए सवालों ने उसकी बहुत अधिक मदद की है। वरना, शायद वह चित्रकारी मुकाबला नहीं जीत सकती थी। लेकिन मैडी संतुष्ट नहीं थी। वह उस रात सो न सकी। वह वाण्डा, उसके चित्रों और उसके घर के बारे में सोचती रही। अंततः उसने एक निर्णय लिया। उसने तय किया कि भविष्य में यदि कोई उसके सामने किसी का भी मजाक उड़ाएगा तो वह चुप नहीं. रहेगी। इसके लिए वह पेग्गी की मित्रता के खो जाने की भी परवाह नहीं करेगी। उसके पास वाण्डा के साथ मामलों को सही करने का कोई रास्ता नहीं था, लेकिन अब वह किसी को भी दुखी नहीं करेगी।)

Question 4.
What did Peggy and Maddie write to Wanda ? What happened on the last day of the school before Christmas ?
(पेग्गी और मैडी ने वाण्डा को क्या लिखा? क्रिममस से पहले स्कूल के आखिरी दिन क्या हुआ?)
Answer:
Peggy and Maddie wrote a letter to Wanda. They praised Wanda’s drawings. They wrote to her that she had won the contest. A number of days passed but there was no answer from Wanda. Peggy had begun to forget the whole incident. Maddie tried to sleep at night making speeches about Wanda. Then it was Christmas time. On the last day of the school, Miss Mason received a letter from Wanda. She showed the letter to the class and read it. Wanda had written that the girls could keep those hundred dresses because in her new house she had hundred new ones. She had gifted the green dress with the red trimmings to Peggy. She wrote that Maddie could have the blue dress. She wished merry Christmas to all. They accepted the drawings. On the way home Peggy and Maddie held their drawings very carefully:

(पेग्गी और मैडी ने वाण्डा को एक पत्र लिखा। उन्होंने वाण्डा के चित्रों की प्रशंसा की। उन्होंने उसे लिखा कि उसने मुकाबला जीत लिया था। बहुत दिन बीत गए परंतु वाण्डा का कोई पत्र नहीं आया। पेग्गी ने तो इस सारी घटना को ही भूलना शुरू कर दिया था। मैडी रात को वाण्डा के बारे में भाषण तैयार करते हुए सोने का प्रयास करती थी। तब क्रिसमस के त्योहार का समय आ गया। स्कूल में आखिरी दिन मिस मेसन को वाण्डा का एक पत्र प्राप्त हुआ। उसने वह पत्र कक्षा को दिखाया और उसे पढ़ा। वाण्डा ने लिखा था कि लड़कियाँ उन सभी सौ पोशाकों को अपने पास रख सकती थीं क्योंकि उसके नए घर में उसके पास सौ पोशाकें और
थीं। उसने लाल गोटे वाली हरी पोशाक पेग्गी को भेंट कर दी। उसने लिखा कि नीली पोशाक मैडी ले सकती थी। उसने सभी को क्रिसमस की शुभ कामनाएँ दीं। उन्होंने चित्रों को स्वीकार कर लिया। घर लौटते समय पेग्गी और मैडी अपने चित्रों को बड़ी सावधानी से सँभाल रही थीं।)

Question 5.
How did Maddie and Peggy realize that Wanda loved them ? (मैडी और पेग्गी ने कैसे महसूस किया कि वाण्डा उन्हें प्यार करती थी?)
Answer:
Maddie was missing Wanda too much. There were tears in her eyes. She felt sad to think that she would never see Wanda again. She felt that Wanda had been nice to her. She gazed at the drawing for a long time. Suddenly, she noticed the face and head in the drawing. It looked like her own head and face. She was excited to find that Wanda had made that drawing specially for her. She ran to Peggy’s house. She told Peggy that Wanda had drawn the drawing for her. Then they saw her drawing also. There was Peggy’s face in the drawing. Peggy was also happy to see that the face and head of the drawing looked like her. Peggy told Maddie that Wanda really liked them. There were tears in Maddie’s eyes every time, she thought of Wanda Petronski.

(मैडी को वाण्डा की बहुत अधिक याद आ रही थी। उसकी आँखों में आँसू थे। वह यह सोचकर उदास हो जाती थी कि अब कभी वह वाण्डा से नहीं मिल पाएगी। उसे लगता था कि वाण्डा उसके प्रति अच्छी थी। वह बहुत देर तक चित्र की ओर निहारती रही। अचानक ही उसने चित्र में बने चेहरे और सिर को देखा। यह उसके सिर और चेहरे जैसा था। वह यह जानकर उत्तेजित हुई कि वाण्डा ने वह चित्र खासतौर पर उसी के लिए बनाया था। वह भागकर पेग्गी के घर गई। उसने पेग्गी को बताया कि वाण्डा ने वह चित्र उसी के लिए बनाया था। तब उन्होंने उसका चित्र भी देखा। इस चित्र में पेग्गी का चेहरा था। पेग्गी भी यह देखकर खुश . . थी कि चित्र का चेहरा और सिर उसके जैसा दिखाई देता है। पेग्गी ने मैडी को बताया कि वाण्डा सचमुच ही उन्हें पसंद करती थी। जब भी मैडी वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी के विषय में सोचती थी तो हर बार उसकी आँखों में आँसू आ जाते थे।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Who wrote a letter to Miss Mason ?
(A) Mr Petronski
(B) the headmistress .
(C) Peggy .
(D) Maddie
Answer:
(A) Mr Petronski

Question 2.
What was the content of Mr Petronski’s letter ?
(A) grant leave to Wanda for one month
(B) Wanda will not come to school any more
(C) Wanda will attend the school regularly
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(B) Wanda will not come to school any more

Question 3.
Who read Mr Petronski’s letter to the class ?
(A) the headmistress
(B) Peggy
(C) Maddie
(D) Miss Mason
Answer:
(D) Miss Mason

Question 4.
Who visited Boggins Heights that evening ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Maddie
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(C) both (A) and (B)

Question 5.
Where had Wanda’s family gone ?
(A) to a village
(B) to a big city
(C) to their own country
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(B) to a big city

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Question 6.
Who has hurt the feelings of Wanda ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Maddie
(C) Miss Mason
(D) the whole class
Answer:
(D) the whole class

Question 7.
Who wrote a letter to Wanda ?
(A) Miss Mason
(B) the headmistress
(C) both Peggy and Maddie
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(C) both Peggy and Maddie

Question 8.
Where did Peggy and Maddie mail the letter to Wanda ?
(A) Boggirts Heights
(B) the big city
(C) Poland
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(A) Boggins Heights

Question 9.
How did Wanda’s house at Boggins Heights look ?
(A) shabby
(B) clean
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) beautiful
Answer:
(C) both (A) and (B)

Question 10.
Who is Miss Mason ?
(A) headmistress
(B) teacher
(C) Wanda’s mother
(D) a student
Answer:
(B) teacher

Question 11.
Who did Wanda send a letter to ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Maddie
(C) the headmistress
(D) Miss Mason
Answer:
(D) Miss Mason

Question 12.
Who was really troubled over Wanda’s incident ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Maddie
(C) Miss Mason
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(B) Maddie

Question 13.
What drawing did Peggy get ?
(A) the green coloured dress with red trimmings
(B) the blue coloured dress the hundred dresses
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(A) the green coloured dress with red trimmings

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Question 14.
What drawing did Maddie get ?
(A) the green dress with red trimmings
(B) the blue dress
(C) all the hundred dresses
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(B) the blue dress

Question 15.
Who did Maddie find in her bedroom drawing ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Wanda Petronski.
(C) Maddie herself
(D) an unknown girl
Answer:
(C) Maddie herself

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Important Passages for Comprehension

Read the following passages and answer the questions that follow :

PASSAGE 1

While the class was circling the room, the monitor from the principal’s office brought Miss Mason a note. Miss Mason read it several times and studied it thoughtfully for a while. Then, she clapped her hands.
“Attention, class. Everyone back to their seat.”
When the shuffling of feet had stopped and the room was still and quiet, Miss Mason said, “I have a letter from Wanda’s father that I want to read to you.”
Miss Mason stood there a moment and the silence in the room grew tense and expectant. The teacher adjusted her glasses slowly and deliberately. Her månner indicated that what was coming—this letter from Wanda’s father—was a matter of great importance. Everybody listened closely as Miss Mason read the brief note.

Word-meanings : Circling = moving around (आसपास घूमना); shuffling = making sound of feet while walking (चलते समय पैरों से आवाज़ करना); tense = serious (गंभीर); deliberately = knowingly (जान-बूझकर); brief = short (संक्षिप्त )

Questions :

(a) What happened when the class was circling the room ?
(b) Why did Miss Mason read the letter of Wanda’s father several times ?
What happened when she said that she wanted to read the letter to the class ?
(d) How did Miss Mason treat the letter of Wanda’s father ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘showed’.
Answers :
(a) The monitor from the principal’s office came and brought a note to Miss Mason.
(b) She read it several times because it had important things about the class.
(c) The shuffling of feet stopped and the room became calm and quiet.
(d) She treated the letter as something very important.
(e) ‘indicated’.

PASSAGE 2

A deep silence met the reading of this letter. Miss Mason took off her glasses, blew on them and wiped them on her soft white handkerchief. Then she put them on again and looked at the class. When she spoke her voice was very low.
“I am sure that none of the boys and girls in Room Thirteen would purposely and deliberately hurt anyone’s feelings because his or her name happened to be a long, unfamiliar one. I prefer to think that what was said was said in thoughtlessness. I know that all of you feel the way I do, that this is a very unfortunate thing to have happened—unfortunate and sad, both. And I want you all to think about it.”

Word-meanings : Unfamiliar = unacuainted (अपरिचित); thoughtlessness = without thinking (बिना सोचे); unfortunate = unlucky (अभागा)

Questions :

(a) What happened when Miss Mason read the letter ?
(b) How did Miss Mason behave after reading the letter ?
(c) What did Miss Mason say about the hurting of anyone’s feelings ?
(d) What advice did she give to the class ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘injure’.
Answers :
(a) There was a deep silence in the class.
(b) She took off her glasses, blew on them and wiped them on her handkerchief. ”
(c) She said that it was ‘unfortunate and sad’ to hurt someone’s feeling. .
(d) She advised the class to think about the incident deeply.
(e) ‘hurt.

PASSAGE 3

The first period was a study period. Maddie tried to prepare her lessons, but she could not put her mind on her work. She had a very sick feeling in the bottom of her stomach. True, she had not enjoyed listening to Peggy ask Wanda how many dresses she had in her closet, but she had said nothing. She had stood by silently, and that was just as bad as what Peggy had done. Worse. She was a coward. At least Peggy hadn’t considered they were being mean but she, Maddie, had thought they were doing wrong. She could put herself in Wanda’s shoes.

Word-meanings : Closet = almirah (अलमारी ); coward = lacking courage (कायर); mean = with bad meantality (कमीना)

Questions :

(a) How did Maddie feel in the first period ?
(b) How did Maddie behave when Peggy teased Wanda ?
(c) What had Maddie not enjoyed ?
(d) Why did Maddie think that she herself was a coward & mean?
(e) Find words from the passage which mean the same as : (a) almirah, (b) lacking courage.
Answers :
(a) In the first period, Maddie had a very sick feeling at the bottom of her stomach.
(b) She felt very bad.
(c) She had not enjoyed listening to Peggy ask Wanda how many dresses she had in her closet.
(d) Maddie thought that she herself was a coward because she remained silent when Peggy teared Wanda.
(e) (a) closet, (b) coward.

PASSAGE 4

“I think that’s where the Petronskis live,” said Maddie, pointing to a little white house. Wisps of old grass stuck up here and there along the pathway like thin kittens. The house and its sparse little yard looked shabby but clean. It reminded Maddie of Wanda’s one dress, her faded blue cotton dress, shabby but clean.
There was not a sign of life about the house. Peggy knocked firmly on the door, but there was no answer. She and Maddie went around to the backyard and knocked there. Still there was no answer.
There was no doubt about it. The Petronskis were gone. How could they ever make amends ? ‘ They turned slowly and made their way back down the hill.

Word-meanings : Wisps = pieces (टुकड़े); kittens = young ones of cats (बिल्ली के बच्चे); sparse = not dense (पतला); shabby = simple and cheap (सादा एवं सस्ता)।

Questions :

(a) Why did Maddie and Peggy go Wanda’s house?
(b) How did Wanda’s house look ?
(c) What did Wanda’s house remind Maddie of?
(d) Were Maddie and Peggy able to meet Wanda ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘young ones of cats’.
Answers :
(a) They went to Wanda’s house to feel sorry what they had done to Wanda.
(b) Wanda’s house looked shabby but clean.
(c) Wanda’s house reminded Maddie of Wanda’s one dress, her faded blue cotton dress.
(d) No, they were not able to meet her as Wanda’s family had already moved to another city:
(e) ‘kittens’.

PASSAGE 5

Maddie turned this idea carefully over in her head, for if there were anything in it she would not have to feel so badly. But that night she could not get to sleep. She thought about Wanda and her faded blue dress and the little house she had lived in. And she thought of the glowing picture those hundred dresses made—all lined up in the classroom. At last Maddie sat up in bed and pressed her forehead tight in her hands and really thought. This was the hardest thinking she had ever done. After a long, long time, she reached an important conclusion.

She was never going to stand by and say nothing again.
If she ever heard anybody picking on someone because they were funny looking or because they had strange names, she’d speak up. Even if it meant losing Peggy’s friendship. She had no way of making things right with Wanda, but from now on she would never make anybody else that unhappy again.

Word-meanings : Faded = insipid (फीका); glowing = beautiful (सुंदर); conclusion = result (परिणाम); picking on someone = teasing someone (किसी को तंग करना) |

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

Questions :

(a) Maddie could not sleep that night. What did she think about ?
(b) What did Maddie do at last ?
(c) What was the hardest thing she had ever done ?
(d) What decision did Maddie take that night ?
(e) Find a phrase from the passage which means ‘teasing someone’.
Answers :
(a) She thought Wanda and her faded blue dress and her little house.
(b) She sat up in bed and pressed her forehead tight in her hands and really thought about the matter.
(c) Thinking really was the hardest thing she had ever done.
(d) She decided that from now onwards she would not make anybody unhappy again.
(e) “picking on someone’.

PASSAGE 6

Now it was Christmas time and there was snow on the ground. Christmas bells and a small tree decorated the classroom. On the last day of school before the holidays, the teacher showed the class a letter she had received that morning.
“You remember Wanda Petronski, the gifted little artist who won the drawing contest? Well, she has written me, and I am glad to know where she lives, because now I can send her medal. I want to read her letter to you.” The class sat up with a sudden interest and listened intently.

Word-meanings : Decorated = (here) beautiful (सुंदर), gifted = talented (गुणी), glad=happy (प्रसन्ना )

Questions :

(a) Name the chapter and its author.
(b) When and how was the classroom decorated?
(c) From whom did the teacher receive the letter and when?
(d) Why was the teacher glad to have this letter?
(e) How did the class react to what the teacher was saying?
Answers :
(a) The name of the chapter is ‘The Hundred Dressés-II’ and author is Eleanor Estes.
(b) The classroom was decorated with bells and small tree on the occasion of christmas.
(c) The teacher received the letter from wanda that morning.
(d) The teacher was glad to receive this letter because she came to know where Wanda lived.
(e) The class sat up with a sudden interest and listened intently.

PASSAGE 7

On Saturday Maddie spent the afternoon with Peggy. They were writing a letter to Wanda Petronski. It was just a friendly letter telling about the contest and telling Wanda she had won. They told her how pretty her drawings were. And they asked her if she liked where she was living and if she liked her new teacher. They had meant to say they were sorry, but it ended up with their just writing a friendly letter, the kind they would have written to any good friend, and they signed it with lots of X’s for love. They mailed the letter to Boggins Heights, writing ‘Please Forward’ on the envelope.

Days passed and there was no answer, but the letter did not come back, so maybe Wanda had received it. Perhaps she was so hurt and angry she was not going to answer. You could not blame her.

Word-meanings : Contest = competition (मुकाबला); mailed = sent by post (डाक से भेजना); maybe = perhaps (शायद); blame = censure (दोष लगाना)।

Questions :

(a) What did they write about in the letter?
(b) What did they mean to say by their letter ?
(c) What did they write to Wanda about her drawings ?
(d) Why did they write “Please Forward’ on the letter ?
(e) Find out a word from the passage similar in meaning to ‘Censure’.
Answers :
(a) They wrote about the painting contest and told Wanda that she had won.
(b) They meant to say sorry him their letter.
(c) They wrote to Wanda that her drawing were very pretty.
(d) They wrote ‘Please Forward’ on the letter because Wanda’s family was not living at Boggins Heights, now. They had moved to a new place.
(e) Blame.

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Summary in English

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Introduction in English

In this Lesson the author teaches us a lesson of not to hurt anybody’s feelings. All the girls in the school made fun of Wanda, a Polish girl. As a result she left the school. Then the feeling of repentance arose among the students who teased Wanda. Peggy and Maddie even goes to her house to stop her from leaving that place but they could not meet her as she had already left. They write a letter to her accepting their fault. Wanda sends a letter to Miss Mason on the eve of Christmas. She greets everybody ‘Merry Christmas’ and give them the gifts of her paintings.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Summary in English

The students were circling the room and admiring the dress designs made by Wanda. A notice from the principal’s office came. Miss Mason told the class that she had received a letter from Wanda’s father. She said that she was going to read it before the class. The students got ready to listen. In his letter, Wanda’s father had informed Miss Mason that Wanda would not come to the school any more. They were moving to big city. In that city nobody would consider her name funny and laugh at her.

The entire class became silent and felt bad about Wanda. Miss Mason understood their feelings. She told them that no one should hurt anyone’s feelings because his or her name was long or funny. She said that what had happened in the school about Wanda, was bad. She asked them to think about that. Maddie listened to what Miss Mason said about Wanda. She could not concentrate on her studies. She had a sick feeling. It was a true that she had never made fun of Wanda herself. But at the same time, she had not enjoyed Peggy’s asking Wanda about her dresses. On such occasions, she said nothing and stood silently. But that was also bad. She felt that she was a coward and never stopped Peggy from making fun of Wanda.

Maddie wondered if she could do anything. She wanted to meet Wanda and tell her that she had never meant to hurt her feelings. She made up her mind to go to her house and tell Wanda that she had won the contest and her hundred dresses were beautiful. She decided that she would find out Wanda Petronski. She and Peggy would go to her house to meet her. When school was over, Maddie told Peggy to go to Wanda’s house. They walked towards her colony. On the way, Peggy said that she had never called Wanda a foreigner. She always thought that Wanda was a dumb girl. She never imagined that Wanda could sense the girls had been making fun of her. Maddie said nothing. She just wanted to meet Wanda and tell her that they were sorry for their rude treatment. She would request her not to move away.

After sometime, Peggy and Maddie found Wanda’s house in the Boggins Heights. The house looked shabby but clean. It reminded Maddie of Wanda’s one dress. But there was no one in the house. Peggy knocked on the door. There was no response. Wanda and her family had already left the place. They came back. Peggy said that her asking Wanda about her dresses actually helped her. Otherwise, perhaps she might not have won the drawing contest. But Maddie was not satisfied. She could not sleep that night. She thought of Wanda, her drawings and her house. At last, she made a decision. She decided that she would not keep quiet if someone made fun of anybody before her. She would not mind even she had to lose Peggy’s friendship. She had no way of making things right with Wanda, but now she would never make anybody unhappy.

On Saturday, Peggy and Maddie wrote a letter to Wanda. It was just a friendly letter. They praised Wanda’s drawings. They wrote to her that she had won the contest. They mailed it to Boggins Heights with the request that it be sent to her new address: A number of days passed but there was no answer from Wanda. Peggy had begun to forget the whole incident. Maddie tried to sleep at night making speeches about Wanda.

Then it was Christmas time. On the last day of the school, Miss Mason received a letter from Wanda. She showed the letter to the class and read it. Wanda had written that the girls could keep those hundred dresses because in her new house she had hundred new ones. She had gifted the green dress with the red trimmings to Peggy. She wrote that Maddie could have the blue dress. She wished merry Christmas to all. They accepted the drawings. On the way home Peggy and Maddie held their drawings very carefully. They pinned the drawings in their bed rooms.

Maddie was missing Wanda too much. There were tears in her eyes. She felt sad to think that she would never see Wanda again. She felt that Wanda had been nice to her. She gazed at the drawing for a long time. Suddenly, she noticed the face and head in the drawing. It looked like her own head and face. She was excited to find that Wanda had made that drawing specially for her. She ran to Peggy’s house. She told Peggy that Wanda had drawn the drawing for her. Then they saw her drawing also. There was Peggy’s face in the drawing. Peggy was also happy to see that the face and head of the drawing looked like her. Peggy told Maddie that Wanda really liked them. There were tears in Maddie’s eyes every time she thought of Wanda Petronski.

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Summary in Hindi

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Introduction in Hindi

(इस लेख में लेखक हमें सबक सिखाता है कि हमें किसी भी व्यक्ति की भावनाओं को ठेस नहीं पहुँचानी चाहिए। स्कूल में सभी लड़कियाँ वाण्डा नाम की पोलैंड वासी एक लड़की का मजाक उड़ाया करती थीं। परिणामस्वरूप उसने स्कूल छोड़ दिया। तब उन विद्यार्थियों में, जो वाण्डा को चिड़ाया करते थे, पश्चाताप की भावना पैदा हुई। पेग्गी और मैडी तो उसके घर भी जाती हैं ताकि उसे वह स्थान छोड़कर जाने से रोक सकें लेकिन वे उससे नहीं मिल सकी क्योंकि वह पहले ही जा चुकी थी। वे अपनी गलती को स्वीकार करते हुए उसे एक पत्र लिखती हैं। वाण्डा क्रिसमस की पूर्व संध्या पर मिस मेसन को एक पत्र लिखती है। वह सभी को ‘क्रिसमस की शुभकामनाएँ देती है और उन्हें अपने चित्रों के उपहार देती है।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Summary in Hindi

छात्र कमरे का चक्कर लगा रहे थे और वाण्डा द्वारा बनाए गए डिज़ाइनों की प्रशंसा कर रहे थे। प्रिंसिपल के कमरे से एक नोटिस आया। मिस मेसन ने कक्षा को बताया कि उसे वाण्डा के पिता से एक पत्र मिला है। उसने कहा कि वह इस पत्र को कक्षा में पढ़ने जा रही है। छात्र पत्र को सुनने के लिए तैयार हो गए। अपने पत्र में वाण्डा के पिता ने मिस मेसन को बताया कि वाण्डा अब स्कूल में नहीं आएगी। वे एक बड़े शहर में जा रहे हैं। उस शहर में कोई भी उसके नाम को हास्यपूर्ण नहीं समझेगा और उस पर हँसेगा नहीं।
सारी कक्षा शांत हो गई और उन्हें वाण्डा के बारे में बहुत दुःख हुआ। मिस मेसन उनकी भावनाओं को समझ गई। उसने उन्हें बताया कि किसी को किसी की भावनाओं को इसलिए ठेस नहीं पहुँचानी चाहिए क्योंकि उसका नाम लंबा या हास्यपूर्ण है। उसने कहा कि स्कूल में वाण्डा के बारे में जो कुछ हुआ वह बुरा था। उसने उन्हें कहा कि वे इस बारे में सोचें। मैडी ने उसके बारे में सोचा जो कुछ मिस मेसन ने वाण्डा के बारे में कहा। वह अपनी पढ़ाई पर ध्यान नहीं दे पाई। उसे बीमारी जैसी भावनाएँ महसूस हुईं। यह सच था कि उसने खुद कभी वाण्डा का मजाक नहीं उड़ाया था। मगर इसके साथ-साथ, उसने कभी भी पेग्गी को तब नहीं रोका था जब वह वाण्डा से उसकी पोशाकों के बारे में पूछती थी। ऐसे अवसरों पर वह कछ नहीं कहती थी और खामोश खडी रहती थी। मगर यह बात भी बुरी थी। उसने महसूस किया कि वह कायर है और उसने कभी भी पेग्गी को वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाने से नहीं रोका।

मैडी को हैरानी हुई कि क्या वह कुछ कर सकती है। वह वाण्डा से मिलना चाहती थी और उसे बताना चाहती थी कि उसका इरादा कभी भी उसकी भावनाओं को ठेस पहुँचाना नहीं था। उसने फैसला किया वह उसके घर जाएगी और वाण्डा को बताएगी कि उसने प्रतियोगिता जीत ली है और उसकी सौ पौशाकें बहुत सुंदर हैं। उसने फैसला किया कि वह वाण्डा पेट्रोस्की को ढूंढ निकालेगी। वह और पेग्गी उससे मिलने उसके घर जाएँगी। जब स्कूल का समय खत्म हो गया तो मैडी ने पेग्गी से वाण्डा के घर चलने को कहा। वे उसकी कॉलोनी की तरफ चल दी। रास्ते में पेग्गी ने कहा कि उसने कभी भी वाण्डा को विदेशी नहीं कहा था। वह सदा सोचती थी कि वाण्डा बुद्ध लड़की है। उसने कभी कल्पना भी नहीं की थी कि वाण्डा को इस बात का आभास होगा कि लड़कियाँ उसका मजाक उड़ा रही हैं। मैडी ने कुछ नहीं कहा। वह तो केवल वाण्डा से मिलना चाहती थी और उसे बताना चाहती थी कि वे उसके प्रति किए गए अपने अभद्र व्यवहार के लिए शर्मिंदा हैं। वह उससे प्रार्थना करेगी कि वह उस शहर को छोड़कर न जाए।

कुछ देर बाद पेग्गी और मैडी को बोगिंज़ हाईट्स में वाण्डा का घर मिल गया। घर सस्ता मगर साफ था। इससे मैडी को वाण्डा की वह एकमात्र पोशाक याद आ गई। मगर घर में कोई नहीं था। पेग्गी ने दरवाजे पर दस्तक दी। कोई उत्तर नहीं मिला। वाण्डा और उसका परिवार पहले ही वहाँ से जा चुका था। वे वापिस आ गईं। पेग्गी ने कहा कि उसके द्वारा वाण्डा को उसकी पोशाकों के बारे में पूछने से वास्तव में उसे फायदा हुआ था। नहीं तो शायद वह ड्राइंग प्रतियोगिता न जीत पाती। मगर मैडी संतुष्ट नहीं थी। वह उस रात को सो नहीं सकी। वह वाण्डा, उसकी ड्राइंग और उसके घर के बारे में सोचती रही। अंत में उसने एक फैसला किया। उसने फैसला किया कि भविष्य में अगर कोई उसके सामने किसी का मजाक उड़ाएगा तो वह चुप नहीं रहेगी। अगर ऐसा करने से उसे पेग्गी की मित्रता भी गँवानी पड़े तो भी वह परवाह नहीं करेगी। उसके सामने वाण्डा से माफी माँगने का कोई रास्ता नहीं था। मगर वह अब किसी को भी दुःखी नहीं करेगी।

शनिवार को पेग्गी और मैडी ने वाण्डा को एक पत्र लिखा। यह केवल एक मित्रतापूर्ण पत्र था। उन्होंने वाण्डा की ड्राइंगों की तारीफ की। उन्होंने उसे लिखा कि वह प्रतियोगिता जीत गई है। उन्होंने वह पत्र बोगिंज़ हाईट्स के पते पर भेज दिया और साथ ही यह प्रार्थना भी लिख दी कि इसे उसके नए पते पर भेज दिया जाए। कई दिन बीत गए, मगर वाण्डा से कोई जवाब नहीं आया। पेग्गी ने सारी घटना को भूलना आरंभ कर दिया। मैडी रात को वाण्डा के बारे में भाषण बनाते हुए सोने का प्रयत्न करती थी।

फिर क्रिसमस का समय आ गया। स्कूल के अंतिम दिन, मिस मेसन को वाण्डा से एक पत्र मिला। उसने वह पत्र कक्षा को दिखाया और उसे पढ़कर सुनाया। वाण्डा ने उसे लिखा था कि लड़कियाँ उन सौ पोशाकों की ड्राइंगों को रख सकती हैं क्योंकि उसके घर में सौ नई पोशाकें हैं। उसने लाल सजावट वाली हरी पोशाक पेग्गी को उपहार में दी। उसने लिखा कि मैडी नीली पोशाक ले सकती है। उसने सबको क्रिसमस की बधाई दी। उन्होंने ड्राइंगों को स्वीकार कर लिया। घर के रास्ते में पेग्गी और मैडी ने अपनी ड्राइंगों को सावधानी से पकड़े रखा। उन्होंने अपनी ड्राइंगों को अपने-अपने बेडरूम में लगा दिया।

मैडी को वाण्डा की बहुत याद आ रही थी। उसकी आँखों में आँसू थे। उसे यह सोचकर उदासी हुई कि वह अब वाण्डा को कभी नहीं मिल पाएगी। उसे महसूस हुआ कि वाण्डा उसके प्रति अच्छी थी। वह ड्राइंग को बड़ी देर तक देखती रही। अचानक उसने ड्राइंग के सिर और चेहरे पर ध्यान दिया। यह उसके अपने सिर और चेहरे की तरह लगता था। उसे यह सोचकर उत्तेजना हुई कि वाण्डा ने वह ड्राइंग विशेष तौर पर उसके लिए बनाई थी। वह भागकर पेग्गी के घर गई। उसने पेग्गी को बताया कि वाण्डा ने उसके लिए ही ड्राइंग बनाई थी। तब उन्होंने पेग्गी की ड्राइंग भी देखी। ड्राइंग में पेग्गी का चेहरा था। पेग्गी को भी यह देख कर खुशी हुई कि ड्राइंग का सिर और चेहरा उससे मिलता है। पेग्गी ने मैडी को कहा कि वाण्डा सचमुच उनसे प्यार करती थी। जब भी मैडी वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी के बारे में सोचती थी तो उसकी आँखों में आँसू आ जाते थे।

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Translation in Hindi

[PAGES73-74] : जिस समय कक्षा कमरे का चक्कर लगा रही थी, मॉनिटर प्रधानाचार्य कार्यालय से मिस मेसन के लिए एक नोट लेकर आया। मिस मेसन ने उसे कई बार पढ़ा और थोड़ी देर के लिए उसका ध्यानपूर्वक अध्ययन किया। तब उसने अपने हाथों से ताली बजाई।
“सभी बच्चो, सुनिए, सभी अपनी-अपनी सीटों पर वापस चले जाएँ।” जब पैरों के रगड़ने की आवाज बंद हो गई और कमरा पूर्ण रूप से शांत हो गया, मिस मेसन ने कहा, “मेरे पास वाण्डा के पिता का पत्र है जो मैं आपको पढ़कर सुनाना चाहती हूँ।”
मिस मेसन एक क्षण के लिए वहाँ खड़ी रही और कमरे के अंदर की खामोशी तनावपूर्ण तथा उत्सुकतापूर्ण हो गई थी। अध्यापिका ने धीरे-से और जान-बूझकर के अपने चश्मों को ठीक करके लगाया। उसका भाव दिखा रहा था कि क्या होने जा रहा था यह वाण्डा के पिता की ओर से पत्र था। प्रत्येक ने बड़े ध्यान के साथ सुना। जब मिस मेसन ने उसे छोटे-से नोट को पढ़ा।

प्रिय अध्यापक,

अब मेरी वाण्डा आपके स्कूल में नहीं आएगी, जेक भी नहीं आएगा। अब हम एक बड़े शहर में जा रहे हैं अब हमें ‘पोलक’ कहकर पुकारा जाना और अधिक नहीं सुनना है। अब हमें और अधिक यह नहीं सुनना है कि यह मजाकिया नाम क्यों है। बड़े शहर में मजाकिया नामों वाले बहुत-से लोग होते हैं।

भवदीय
जॉन पेट्रोंसकी

इस पत्र को पढ़े जाने के समय गहरी खामोशी रही। मिस मेसन ने अपना चश्मा उतारा, उसने शीशों पर फूंक मारी और उन्हें अपने नर्म सफेद रूमाल के साथ पोंछ दिया। तब उसने चश्में को पुनः पहन लिया और कक्षा की ओर देखा। जब वह बोली तो उसकी आवाज बहुत धीमी थी।

“मुझे पक्का यकीन है कि कमरा नंबर तेरह में किसी भी लड़के या लड़की ने जान-बूझकर किसी की भावनाओं को इस कारण तो ठेस नहीं पहुँचाई होगी कि उसका नाम लंबा है अथवा अपरिचित है।

मैं यही सोचना पसंद करूँगी कि जो कुछ भी कहा गया है वह बिना सोच-विचार के कहा गया है। मैं जानती हूँ कि आप सभी भी मेरी तरह ही सोचते होंगे, और ऐसा घटित होना एक बहुत ही दुर्भाग्यपूर्ण घटना है दुर्भाग्यपूर्ण और दुखद दोनों, और मैं चाहती हूँ कि आप . सभी इसके बारे में विचार करें।”

पहला पीरियड पढ़ाई करने का पीरियड था। मैडी ने अपने पाठ तैयार करने की कोशिश की। लेकिन वह अपने दिमाग को अपने काम पर नहीं लगा पाई। उसे अपने पेट के सबसे निचले हिस्से में बहुत अस्वस्थता महसूस हो रही थी। सचमुच, उसे पेग्गी द्वारा वाण्डा को यह पूछते हुए सुनना बिल्कुल अच्छा नहीं लगा था कि उसके पास अलमारी में कितनी पोशाकें हैं, लेकिन उसने तो कुछ नहीं कहा था। वह तो चुपचाप खड़ी रहती थी और वह भी उतना ही बुरा काम था जितना कि पेग्गी ने किया था। उससे भी बुरा था। वह एक कायर थी। कम-से-कम पेग्गी ने ऐसा तो नहीं सोचा था कि वे नीचता वाला काम कर रही है, परंतु उसने, मैडी ने, ऐसा अवश्य सोचा था। वह स्वयं को वाण्डा की स्थिति में रखकर महसूस कर सकती थी।

हे भगवान! क्या वह अब कुछ भी नहीं कर सकती थी? काश वह वाण्डा को यह बता सकती कि उसका भाव उसकी भावनाओं को ठेस पहुँचाना नहीं था। वह पीछे की ओर घूमी और चोरी से पेग्गी की ओर देखा, लेकिन पेग्गी ने ऊपर आँख उठाकर नहीं देखा। वह अपनी पढ़ाई में गहराई से डूबी हुई लग रही थी। ठीक है, चाहे पेग्गी को अच्छा लगे या बुरा मैडी को कुछ-न-कुछ तो करना था। उसे वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी को ढूँढना था। हो सकता है कि वह अभी न गई हो। शायद पेग्गी भी उसके साथ Heights पर चढ़ जाएगी, और वे वाण्डा को बताएँगी कि उसने, मुकाबला जीत लिया है, तथा यह कि वे उसे होशियार मानती थी और उसकी सौ पोशाकें सुंदर थीं।

[PAGE 75] : जब दोपहर बाद स्कूल से छुट्टी हुई, पेग्गी ने बनावटी लापरवाही के भाव से कहा, “अरे, आओ जाकर देखते हैं अतः पेग्गी के दिमाग में भी वही विचार था। मैडी खिल उठी। सचमुच ही पेग्गी ठीक कह रही थी।”

दोनों लड़कियाँ तेजी के साथ उस भवन से बाहर निकलीं और बोगिंस हाईट्स की ओर जाने लगी, नगर का वह हिस्सा जहाँ नवंबर मास की शाम को बूंदा-बाँदी वाली, नमीयुक्त, मनहूस डरावनी हवा चल रही थी।

“तो आखिर” पेग्गी ने कर्कश स्वर में कहा, “मैंने तो उसे कभी विदेशी नहीं कहा अथवा उसके नाम का मजाक नहीं उड़ाया। मैंने कभी ऐसा नहीं सोचा था कि उसमें इतनी बुद्धि होगी कि वह जान जाएगी कि हम उसका मजाक उड़ा रहे हैं। मैं तो उसे बिल्कुल गूंगी समझती थी और देखो वह कैसे चित्र बना सकती है।” ।

मैडी कुछ भी नहीं कह सकी। वह तो सिर्फ यह आशा लगाए थी कि उन्हें वाण्डा मिल जाए। वह उसे बताना चाहती थी कि उन्हें इस बात का खेद था कि उन्होंने उसके साथ ऐसा व्यवहार किया था और किस प्रकार से सारा स्कूल उसे एक अद्भुत लड़की समझता था और कृपया वह वहाँ से कहीं न जाए और हर कोई उसके साथ अच्छा व्यवहार करेगा।

दोनों लड़कियाँ जल्दी-से आगे बढ़ती गईं। वे अँधेरा होने से पहले पहाड़ी के शिखर पर पहुँचने की आशा लगाए थी।

“मेरे विचार में पेट्रोसकी यहीं पर रहते हैं,” मैडी ने एक छोटे-से सफेद घर की ओर इशारा करते हुए कहा। पगडंडी के साथ-साथ इधर-उधर पुरानी घास के छोटे-छोटे गट्ठर से लटक रहे थे जैसे कि वे बिल्ली के बच्चे हों घर और उसका छोटा-सा आँगन देखने में भद्दा परंतु साफ प्रतीत होता था। यह मैडी को वाण्डा की एक पोशाक की याद दिला रहा था, उसकी रंग उड़ी हुई नीली पोशाक जोकि देखने में भद्दी परंतु साफ लगती थी।

घर के आस-पास जीवन के होने का कोई संकेत नहीं था। पेग्गी ने दरवाजे पर जोर-से दस्तक दी, लेकिन कोई उत्तर नहीं मिला। वह और मैडी पीछे वाले आँगन की तरफ गए और वहाँ जाकर दस्तक दी। वहाँ भी कोई उत्तर नहीं मिला।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

[PAGE 76] : इसके बारे में कोई संदेह नहीं था। पेट्रोसकी जा चुके थे वे कभी भी अपना पश्चाताप कैसे व्यक्त कर सकेंगी? वे धीमे-से मुड़ी और पहाड़ी से नीचे उतरने का रास्ता लिया।
“चलो, कुछ भी हो” पेग्गी ने कहा, “अब वह जा चुकी है, अतः अब हम क्या कर सकते हैं? इसके अतिरिक्त जब मैं उससे उसकी सभी पोशाकों के बारे में पूछ रही थी, तो संभवतः वह अपनी चित्रकारी के लिए अच्छे विचार प्राप्त कर रही थी। वरना शायद वह उस मुकाबले को जीत न पाती।” .

मैडी ने इस विचार को ध्यानपूर्वक अपने दिमाग में घुमाया क्योंकि यदि इसमें कुछ भी ऐसी बात थी तो उसे इतना बुरा लगना ही नहीं चाहिए था। लेकिन उस रात वह सो न सकी। वह वाण्डा और उसकी रंग उड़ी हुई नीली पोशाक और उस छोटे-से घर जिसमें वह रहती थी, के बारे में सोचती रही। और वह उन चमकदार सौ पोशाकों से बने नजारे के बारे में सोचती रही। सभी कक्षा के कमरे में एक पंक्ति में थीं। अंततः मैडी बिस्तर पर उठ बैठी और अपने माथे को अपने हाथों से कसकर दबाया और सचमुच में सोचने लगी। यह सबसे गहन विचार था जो मैडी ने कभी किया था। काफी देर के बाद वह एक निष्कर्ष पर पहुँची।

वह न तो कभी किसी ऐसी बात का साथ देगी और न ही कभी कुछ कहेगी। .
यदि कभी वह किसी को किसी के साथ अभद्रता का व्यवहार करता देखेगी सिर्फ इस कारण से कि वे दिखने में मजाकिया हैं, या, फिर उनके अजीबो-गरीब नाम हैं तो वह चुप नहीं रहेगी। चाहे इससे पेग्गी की मित्रता ही क्यों न खो जाए। अब उसके पास वाण्डा से रिश्ते सुधारने का कोई रास्ता नहीं बचा था, लेकिन अब के बाद से वह कभी भी दोबारा किसी को इतना दुखी नहीं करेगी।

[PAGE 77]: शनिवार के दिन मैडी ने दोपहर बाद का समय पेग्गी के साथ बिताया। वे वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी को पत्र लिख रही थी। यह एक मित्रता भरा पत्र था जिसमें उसे मुकाबले के बारे में और वाण्डा की विजय के बारे में बता रही थी। उन्होंने उसे बताया कि उसकी चित्रकारियाँ कितनी सुंदर थीं और उन्होंने उससे पूछा कि क्या उसे वह जगह पसंद आ गई थी जहाँ वह रह रही थी और कि क्या उसे अपनी नई टीचर पसंद आ गई थी। उनका कहने का भाव था कि उन्हें खेद है। किंतु अंत में यह एक मित्रों वाले पत्र के रूप में समाप्त हो गया, एक ऐसा पत्र जो वे किसी एक अच्छे मित्र को लिखती, उन्होंने इस पर प्यार के अनेक प्रतीकों के रूप में x अक्षर बनाकर इसे Boggins Heights के पते पर डाक में डाल दिया और लिफाफे पर लिख दिया, “कृपया अग्रेषित करें।”

कई दिन बीत गए परंतु कोई उत्तर नहीं आया लेकिन पत्र भी वापस नहीं आया, शायद वह वाण्डा को मिल गया हो। शायद वह इतनी आहत और क्रोधित हो कि पत्र का उत्तर ही न देना चाहती हो। आप उसे दोष नहीं दे सकते थे।

कई सप्ताह बीत गए परंतु वाण्डा ने अभी भी उत्तर नहीं दिया। पेग्गी ने इस सारे मामले को भूलना शुरू कर दिया था और मैडी रात को वाण्डा के बारे बातें करते हुए स्वयं को सुला लेती थी, उसे लड़कियों की भारी भीड़ों से बचाते हुए जो उसे यह कह कर सताने की कोशिश कर रही होती-“तुम्हारे पास कितनी पोशाकें हैं?” और इससे पहले कि वाण्डा अपने होठों को एक पतली रेखा के रूप में कसकर बंद कर लेती जैसा कि वह उत्तर देने से पहले किया करती थी। तब मैडी चिल्ला उठती, “बंद करो।” तब हर कोई शर्मिंदा महसूस करता जैसाकि वह स्वयं को किया करती थी।

अब क्रिसमस का समय था और जमीन बर्फ से ढक गई थी। क्रिसमस की घंटियों और एक छोटे-से वृक्ष ने कक्षा के कमरे को सजा दिया। छुट्टियों से पहले स्कूल के आखिरी दिवस को अध्यापिका ने कक्षा को एक पत्र दिखाया जो उसे उस सुबह ही मिला था।

[PAGE 78] : क्या आपको वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी की याद है, वह छोटी-सी प्रतिभावान कलाकार जिसने चित्रकारी मुकाबला जीता था? हाँ, उसने मुझे पत्र लिखा है, और मैं यह जानकर प्रसन्न हूँ कि वह कहाँ रहती है, क्योंकि अब मैं उसे पदक भेज़ सकती हूँ। मै उसका पत्र आपको पढ़कर सुनाती हूँ।”

कक्षा एकदम से पैदा हुई रुचि के साथ ध्यान से सुनने के लिए बैठ गई।
प्रिय मिस मेसन,

आप और कमरा नंबर तेरह कैसे हैं? कृपया लड़कियों से कह दीजिएगा कि वे उन सौ पोशाकों को अपने पास रख सकती हैं क्योंकि मेरे नए घर में मेरे पास सौ नई पोशाकें हैं, मेरी अलमारी में सारी पोशाकें पंक्ति में रखी हैं। मैं चाहूँगी कि पेग्गी नाम की लड़की लाल गोटे वाली हरे रंग की पोशाक का चित्र रख ले; और उसकी सहेली मैडी नीले वाली पोशाक ले। क्रिसमस के समय मुझे उस स्कूल की बहुत याद आ रही है और नई शिक्षक आपकी बराबरी की नहीं है। आपको तथा सबको शुभ क्रिसमस।

आपकी अपनी
वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी

स्कूल से घर लौटते समय मैडी और पेग्गी अपने-अपने चित्रों को बड़ी सावधानी से पकड़े हुए थीं। सभी घरों की खिड़कियों पर मालाएँ और पवित्र पेड़ के पत्ते लटक रहे थे। करियाने की दुकान के बाहर क्रिसमस ट्री गड्डियों में बाँधकर रखे गए थे और खिड़की में मीठी पिपरमिंट और फूलों से भरे बर्तन जिनमें पारदर्शक चमकदार कागज लगे थे, वे बँधे हुए थे। हवा क्रिसमस की भाँति सुगंधित थी और प्रकाश की चमक बर्फ पर हर जगह भिन्न-भिन्न रंगों का प्रदर्शन कर रही थी।

“वाह!” पेग्गी ने कहा “इससे पता चलता है कि वह सचमुच हमें पसंद करती है। इससे पता चलता है कि उसे हमारा पत्र मिल गया था और यह उसका यह बताने का एक तरीका है कि सब कुछ ठीक ठाक है, और यही सब है।”

“मैं भी ऐसी ही आशा करती हूँ,” मैडी ने उदासीपूर्वक कहा। वह उदास थी क्योंकि वह जानती थी कि वह फिर कभी उस कसे हुए होठों वाली पोलैंड वासी लड़की को नहीं देख पाएगी और फिर कभी भी अपने बीच की बात को नहीं सुधार पाएगी।

वह घर चली गई और उसने अपने चित्र को सोने वाले गुलाबी फूलों वाली दीवारी कागज की फटी हुई जगह के ऊपर पिन लगाकर चिपका दिया। शानदार रंगों के कारण वह भद्दा-सा दिखने वाला कमरा चमक उठा। मैडी अपने बिस्तर पर बैठ गई और चित्र की ओर देखने लगी। वह पास खड़ी रहती थी और कुछ नहीं बोलती थी लेकिन फिर भी वाण्डा उससे कितनी अच्छी तरह से पेश आई थी।

[PAGE 79] : आँसुओं ने उसकी आँखों को धुंधला कर दिया और वह बहुत देर तक उस चित्र को देखती रही। तब जल्दी से उसने अपनी आँखों को रगड़ा और ध्यान से चित्र का अध्ययन किया। पोशाक में दिए गए रंग इतने स्पष्ट थे कि उसने चित्र में बने चेहरे और सिर की तरफ मुश्किल से ही कोई ध्यान दिया था। लेकिन वह उसके (मैडी) जैसा प्रतीत होता था। वह उसके अपने मुँह की भाँति दिखाई देता था। वह सचमुच में उसके जैसा क्यों दिखाई दे रहा था। वाण्डा ने सचमुच ही यह चित्र उसके लिए बनाया था। उत्तेजनापूर्वक वह भागकर पेग्गी के पास गई।

“पेग्गी।” उसने कहा, “मुझे अपने वाला चित्र देखने दो।”
“क्या बात है?” पेग्गी ने पूछा, जब वे खट-खट की आवाज करती हुई ऊपर उस कमरे में गई जहाँ वाण्डा का चित्र बिस्तर पर उल्टा पड़ा था। मैडी ने उसे ध्यानपूर्वक उठाया।
“देखो! उसने तुम्हारा चित्र बनाया है। यह तुम हो।” उसने विस्मयपूर्वक कहा। और चित्र का सिर और चेहरा पेग्गी की तरह दिख रहा था।
“मैंने क्या कहा था?” पेग्गी ने कहा, “वह सचमुच हमें पसंद करती थी, किसी भी तरह से।”
“हाँ, वह अवश्य ही पसंद करती होगी,” मैडी ने सहमति प्रकट की तथा उसने आँखें झपकते हुए उन आँसुओं को हटा दिया जो हर बार निकल आते थे, जब वह वाण्डा बारे मे सोचती थी कि वह किस तरह से स्कूल के प्रांगण में धूप वाली जगह पर अकेली खड़ी रहा करती थी। जब वह हँस रही लड़कियों के समूह को भावशून्य ढंग से देखने के बाद चल दी होती थी, यह कहने के बाद, “निश्चित रूप से एक सौ, और सभी एक पंक्ति में रखी हुई।”

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2

The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Word-Meanings in Hindi

[PAGE 73] : Circling = moving round (आसपास घूमना); thoughtfully = thinking deeply (गहरा सोचना); shuffling = making sound of feet while walking (चलते समय पैरों से आवाज़ करना); tense = serious (गंभीर); deliberately = intentionally (जान-बूझकर); indicated = showed (दिखाया); listened closely = heard attentively (ध्यान से सुना); holler = cry loudly (जोर-से चीखना); pollack = a word suggesting anger (गुस्सा दर्शाने वाला शब्द); plenty = enough (काफी); unfamiliar = unacquainted (अपरिचित)।

[PAGE 74] : Thoughtlessness == without thinking (बिना सोचे); unfortunate = unlucky (अभागा); stood by = supported (सहारा दिया); coward = lacking courage (कायर); mean = with bad mentality (कमीना); stoleaglance = looked secretly (चोरी से देखा)।

[PAGE 75] : Pretended = showy (दिखावापूर्ण); casualness = carelessness (लापरवाही); glowed= became hopeful (आशावान); forbidding = bad (बुरा); drizzly = rainy (बरसात वाला); damp = wet (गीला); dismal = sad (उदास); gruffly = roughly (कठोरता से); dumb = unfeeling (बिना भावना के); gee = exclamation of joy (खुशी की अभिव्यक्ति); wisps = pieces (टुकड़े); pathway = footpath (फुटपाथ); kittens = young ones of cats (बिल्ली के बच्चे); shabby = simple and cheap (सादा एवं सस्ता)।

[PAGE 76] : Make amends = patch up (समझौता करना); probably = perhaps (शायद); glowing = beautiful (सुंदर); conclusion = result (परिणाम); picking on someone = teasing someone (किसी को तंग करना)।

[PAGE 77]: Mailed = sent by post (डाक से भेजना); defending = protecting (बचाना); tease = trouble someone (किसी को तंग करना); decorated = beautiful (सुंदर)।

[PAGE 78] : Gifted = talented (गुणी); intently = with attention (ध्यान से); trimming = decorating (सजाना); wreaths = garlands (मालाएँ); holly = a plant (एक पौधा); grocery = a provisions shop (किरयाने की दुकान); stacked = kept (रखा); candy = a sweet (मिठाई); cornucopias = decorative containers (सजावटी डिब्बे); shiny = bright (चमकीला); reflected = shown back (परावर्तित किया); brilliancy = brightness (चमक)।

[PAGE 79] : Blurred = unclear (धुंधला); gazed = looked intently (ध्यान से देखा); vivid = clear (स्पष्ट); stolidly = without any feeling (बिना सोचे)।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 6 The Hundred Dresses Part 2 Read More »

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

HBSE 10th Class English The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Textbook Questions and Answers

Before You Read

1. How do we judge the people around us by their money, wealth and possessions ? Or is there something of more enduring value to look for in a person ?
(हम अपने इर्द-गिर्द लोगों की परख कैसे करते हैं उनके रुपया-पैसा, धन अथवा संपत्ति से? या और कोई चिरस्थायी मूल्य वाली वस्तु है जिसके गुण किसी व्यक्ति में पाकर उसकी परख करते हैं?) .
Answer:
In today’s life we usually judge the people around us by their money, wealth and possessions. But it is not of enduring value. We should judge people by their human qualities. It is the most enduring and appropriate.
(आज के जीवन में हम अपने इर्द-गिर्द के लोगों की परख उनके रुपए-पैसे, धन और संपत्ति के आधार पर करते हैं। लेकिन ये चीजें चिरस्थायी महत्त्व वाली नहीं हैं। हमें लोगों की परख उनके मानवीय गुणों के आधार पर करनी चाहिए। यही सबसे अधिक चिरस्थायी और उचित है।)

2. This story is a sensitive aecount of how a poor young girl is judged by her classmates. Wanda Petronski is a young Polish girl who goes to school with other American children in an American town. These other children see Wanda as ‘different’ in many ways. Can you guess how they treat her ?
(यह कहानी एक रोचक वर्णन है कि एक छोटी गरीब लड़की की परख उसके सहपाठियों के द्वारा कैसे की जाती है। वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी पोलैंड वासी एक छोटी लड़की है जोकि एक अमेरिकी कस्बे में अमेरिकी बच्चों के साथ स्कूल जाती है। ये दूसरे बच्चे वाण्डा को कई प्रकार से अपने से भिन्न पाते हैं। क्या आप अनुमान लगा सकते हो कि वे उससे कैसे व्यवहार करते हैं।) .
Answer:
These other children see Wanda as different’ in many ways. It may be because of her different physical appearance. Secondly her name is long and different from the names of other students. Thirdly, she wears the same dress everyday. So they make fun of her.
(ये दूसरे बच्चे वाण्डा को विभिन्न प्रकार से अपने से अलग पाते हैं। ऐसा उसकी शारीरिक बनावट की भिन्नता के कारण हो सकता है। दूसरे उसका नाम अन्य बच्चों की तुलना में लंबा और भिन्न है। तीसरे वह हर रोज़ एक ही पोशाक पहनकर आती है। इसलिए वे उसका मजाक उड़ाते हैं।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

3. Read the information in the box below. Find out more about this community (or about a related topic) from an encyclopedia, or the Internet.
(नीचे खाने में दी गई जानकारी को पढ़िए। इस समुदाय के बारे में विश्वकोष या इंटरनेट से और अधिक जानकारी हासिल कीजिए (या किसी और संबंधित विषय पर)

The Polish-American Community in the United States

The first Polish immigrants arrived in America in 1608, but the largest wave of Polish immigration occurred in the early twentieth century, when more than one million Poles migrated to the United States. The Polish State did not exist at that time, and the immigrants were identified according to their country of origin rather than to ethnicity. They were identified as Russian Poles, German Poles and Austrian Poles.

One of the most notable Polish-American communities is in Chicago and its suburbs; so Chicago is sometimes called the second largest ‘Polish’city in the world, next only to Warsaw, the capital of Poland. Polish-Americans were sometimes discriminated against in the United States, as were the Irish, Italians, and Jews.

According to the United States 2000 Census, 667,414 Americans of age Five years and older reported Polish as the language spoken at home, which is about 1.4 percent of the people who speak languages other than English, or 0.25 percent of the U.S. population.
Answer:
For self-attempt.

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 65)

1. Where in the classroom does Wanda sit and why ?
(कक्षा-कक्ष में वाण्डा कहाँ बैठती है और क्यों?)
Answer:
Wanda sits in the next to the last seat in the last row in Room Thirteen. She sits in the corner of the room. There is noise by the scuffling of feet and roar of laughter. Wanda is not rough and noisy. But she sits there as she does not mix with other students.
(वाण्डा कमरा नंबर तेरह में आखिरी पंक्ति की अंतिम सीट से आगे बैठती है। वह कमरे के कोने में बैठती है। वहाँ पर पैरों के रगड़े जाने और हँसी के ठहाकों का शोर है। वाण्डा अभद्र और शोर करने वाली नहीं है। लेकिन वह वहाँ इसलिए बैठती है क्योंकि वह दूसरे बच्चों के साथ घुली-मिली नहीं है।)

2. Where does Wanda live ? What kind of a place do you think it is ?
(वाण्डा कहाँ रहती है? यह किस तरह का स्थान है?) .
Answer:
Wanda lives at Boggins Heights. It is not a clean place. It is muddy. That is why, Wanda’s feet are usually caked with mud on her way to school daily.
(वाण्डा बोगिंस हाईट्स पर रहती है। यह एक साफ-सुथरा स्थान नहीं है। यह कीचड़ भरा है, यही कारण है कि वाण्डा के पाँव हर रोज़ स्कूल आते समय धूल से सन जाते हैं।)

3. When and why do Peggy and Maddie notice Wanda’s absence ? (पेग्गी और मैडी वाण्डा की अनुपस्थिति पर कब और क्यों ध्यान देती हैं?)
Answer:
Peggy and Maddie notice Wanda’s absence on Wednesday. It was because Wanda had made them late to school. They used to make fun of her for her muddy shoes.
(पेग्गी और मैडी बुधवार के दिन वाण्डा की अनुपस्थिति पर ध्यान देती हैं। ऐसा इसलिए था क्योंकि उस दिन वे वाण्डा के कारण स्कूल से लेट हो गई थीं। वे प्रायः उसके मिट्टी से सने जूतों के कारण उसका मजाक उड़ाती थीं।)

4. What do you think “to have fun with her” means ?
(इस कथन का क्या अर्थ है, “उसके साथ मजाक करें”?)
Answer:
“To have fun with her” means to laugh at her or to make a fool of her.
(“उसके साथ मजाक करें” का अर्थ है उस पर हँसे या उसको मूर्ख बनाएँ।)

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 67)

1. In what way was Wanda different from the other children ?
(वाण्डा दूसरे बच्चों से किस प्रकार भिन्न थी?)
Answer:
Wanda was different from the other children because her name was long and strange. Secondly, she always wore a faded blue dress. It didn’t hang right. She didn’t have any friends.
. (वाण्डा दूसरे बच्चों से भिन्न थी क्योंकि उसका नाम लंबा और अजीब था। दूसरे वह हमेशा हल्के नीले रंग की ही पोशाक पहनती थी। वह उसे ठीक प्रकार से नहीं पहनकर आती थी। उसका कोई भी मित्र नहीं था।)

2. Did Wanda have a hundred dresses ? Why do you think she said she did ? (क्या वाण्डा के पास एक सौ पोशाकें थीं? आपके विचार में उसने ऐसा क्यों कहा?)
Answer:
No, Wanda did not have a hundred dresses. She said this because she was making a hundred drawings of different kinds of dresses for the contest.
(नहीं, वाण्डा के पास एक सौ पोशाकें नहीं थीं। उसने ऐसा इसलिए कहा क्योंकि वह मुकाबले के लिए विभिन्न प्रकार की पोशाकों के चित्र बना रही थी।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

3. Why is Maddie embarrassed by the questions Peggy asks Wanda ? Is she also like Wanda, or is she different ?
(पेग्गी द्वारा वाण्डा से प्रश्न पूछे जाने पर मैडी क्यों घबरा जाती है? क्या वह भी वाण्डा की तरह है या उससे भिन्न है?)
Answer:
Maddie is embarrassed by the questions Peggy asks Wanda because she was also poor. She is like Wanda in temperament though she is an American
(पेग्गी द्वारा वाण्डा से पूछे गए प्रश्नों से मैडी घबरा जाती है क्योंकि वह भी गरीब थी। अमेरिकी मूल की होने पर भी उसका स्वभाव बिल्कुल वाण्डा जैसा है।)

Oral Comprehension Check (Page 70)

1. Why didn’t Maddie ask Peggie to stop teasing Wanda ? What was she afraid of ? (मैडी ने पेग्गी से क्यों नहीं कहा कि वह वाण्डा को चिढ़ाना बंद कर दे? वह किस बात से डरी हुई थी?)
Answer:
Maddie didn’t ask Peggy to stop teasing Wanda because she didn’t have the courage to say so. Secondly, she was afraid of losing her friendship with Peggy. Moreover, she shuddered to think what would happen if Peggy started making fun of Maddie instead of Wanda.
(मैडी ने पेग्गी से नहीं कहा कि वह वाण्डा को चिढ़ाना बंद कर दे क्योंकि उसके अन्दर ऐसा कहने का साहस नहीं था। दूसरे, उसे पेग्गी के साथ मित्रता टूट जाने का डर था। लेकिन फिर भी वह सोचकर काँपने लग जाती थी कि यदि पेग्गी ने वाण्डा के स्थान पर उसका मजाक उड़ाना शुरू कर दिया तो उसका क्या होगा।)

2. Who did Maddie think would win the drawing contest ? Why? (मैडी के विचार में चित्रकारी मुकाबला कौन जीतेगा और क्यों?)
Answer:
Maddie thought that Peggy would win the girls’ medal as she drew better than anyone else in the room.
(मैडी सोचती थी कि लड़कियों का पदक पेग्गी जीतेगी क्योंकि वह कमरे में अन्य सभी से अच्छे चित्र बनाती थी।)

3. Who won the drawing contest? What had the winner drawn ? (चित्रकारी मुकाबला किसने जीता? विजेता ने क्या बनाया था?)
Answer:
Wanda won the drawing contest. She had drawn the designs of one hundred dresses. These were all different and all beautiful.
(चित्रकारी मुकाबला वाण्डा ने जीता था। उसने एक सौ पोशाकों के नमूने बनाए थे। वे सभी भिन्न थे और सभी संदर थे।)

Thinking about the Text

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

1. How is Wanda seen as different by the other girls ? How do they treat her ? (दूसरी लड़कियाँ वाण्डा को किस प्रकार अलग देखती हैं ? वे उसके साथ कैसे व्यवहार करती हैं ?)
Answer:
The other girls see Wanda as different because of her origin and dress. She is Polish by origin. Her name is long and strange. She always wears the same faded blue dress. Her feet are usually caked with dry mud. The other girls often make fun of her.

(दूसरी लड़कियाँ वाण्डा को उसके जन्म और उसकी पोशाक के कारण भिन्न देखती हैं। जन्म से वह पोलैंड वासी है। उसका नाम लंबा और विचित्र है। वह हमेशा रंग उड़े हुए नीले रंग की एक ही पोशाक पहनती है। उसके पाँव हमेशा सूखी मिट्टी से सने रहते हैं। दूसरी लड़कियाँ प्रायः उसका मजाक उड़ाती रहती हैं।)

2. How does Wanda feel about the dresses game ? Why does she say that she has a hundred dresses ?
(पोशाकों वाले खेल के विषय में वाण्डा क्या महसूस करती है? वह क्यों कहती है कि उसके पास एक सौ पोशाकें हैं?)
Answer:
Wanda feels badly about the dresses game. She tells them that she has a hundred dresses at home. In fact, she doesn’t have these dresses. She says so because she is making a hundred drawings of dresses.
(पोशाकों वाले खेल के बारे में वाण्डा को बुरा लगता है। वह उन्हें बताती है कि उसके पास घर पर एक सौ पोशाकें हैं। वास्तव में उसके पास ये पोशाकें नहीं हैं। वह ऐसा इसलिए कहती है क्योंकि वह एक सौ पोशाकों के चित्र बना रही है।)

3. Why does Maddie stand by and not do anything ? How is she different from Peggy ? (Was Peggy’s friendship important to Maddie ? Why? Which lines in the text tell you this ?)
(मैडी पेग्गी का साथ क्यों देती है और वह कुछ नहीं करती है? वह किस प्रकार पेग्गी से अलग है। क्या पेग्गी की मित्रता मैडी के लिए महत्त्वपूर्ण थी? क्यों? अध्याय में कौन-सी लाइन आपको इसके बारे में बताती है?)
Answer:
In her heart Maddie does not like that Peggy should make fun of Wanda. But she stands by and does nothing because she doesn’t have the courage to do so. She does not want to lose Peggy’s friendship. She is different from Peggy as she doesn’t make fun of Wanda. Peggy’s friendship is important to her because she is the best-liked girl in the whole room. The lines are : “She was Peggy’s best friend and Peggy was the best-liked girl in the whole room. Peggy could not possibly do anything that was really wrong.”
(अपने हृदय से मैडी नहीं चाहती कि पेग्गी वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाए। लेकिन वह उसका साथ देती है और कुछ नहीं करती है क्योंकि उसमें ऐसा करने का साहस नहीं है। वह पेग्गी की मित्रता को खोना नहीं चाहती। वह पेग्गी से अलग है क्योंकि वह वाण्डा का मज़ाक नहीं बनाना चाहती। पेग्गी से मित्रता उसके लिए महत्त्वपूर्ण है क्योंकि वह पूरे कक्ष में सबसे अधिक पसंद की जाने वाली लड़की है।
ये पंक्तियाँ उसके बारे में बताती हैं “वह पेग्गी की सबसे पक्की मित्र थी और पेग्गी पूरे कमरे में सबसे अधिक पसंद की जाने वाली लड़की थी। पेग्गी संभवतः कुछ भी ऐसा काम नहीं कर सकती थी जो गलत हो।”)

4. What does Miss Mason think of Wanda’s drawings ? What do the children think of them ? How do you know?
(मिस मेसन वाण्डा की ड्राइंग के विषय में क्या सोचती थी? बच्चे उसके बारे में क्या सोचते थे? आप कैसे जानते हो?)
Answer:
Miss Mason thinks of Wanda’s drawings as “exquisite”, “all different and all beautiful”. The children think of them as amazing’. They stop short and gasp when they look at these drawings. The reaction of children shows that the dresses were beautiful. They praise their dazzling colours and lavish designs.
(मिस मेसन वाण्डा की चित्रकारी को “शानदार” मानती है, “बिल्कुल भिन्न और सुंदर।” बच्चे उन्हें विस्मयकारी मानते हैं। जब उन्होंने उन चित्रों की ओर देखा तो वे रुककर हैरानी’ से देखने लगे। बच्चों की प्रतिक्रियाएँ दिखाती हैं कि वे पोशाकें बहुत सुंदर थीं। वे उनके चमकदार रंगों और शानदार नमूनों की प्रशंसा करते हैं।)

Thinking about Language

I. Look at these sentences :

(a) She sat in the corner of the room where the rough boys who did not make good marks sat, the corner of the room where there was most scuffling of feet, …
(b) The time when they thought about Wanda was outside of school hours …
These italicised clauses help us to identify a set of boys, a place, and a time. They are answers to the questions ‘What kind of rough boys ?’ ‘Which corner did she sit in ?’ and ‘What particular time outside of school hours ?’ They are ‘defining’ or ‘restrictive’ relative clauses. (Compare them with the ‘non-defining’ relative clauses discussed in Unit 1.)

Combine the following to make sentences like those above.

1. This is the bus (what kind of bus ?). It goes to Agra. (use which or that)
2. I would like to buy (a) shirt (which shirt ?). (The) shirt is in the shop window. (use which or that)
3. You must break your fast at a particular time (when ?). You see the moon in the sky. (use when)
4. Find a word (what kind of word ?). It begins with the letter Z. (use which or that)
5. Now find a person (what kind of person). His or her name begins with the letter 2. (use whose)
6. Then go to a place (what place ?). There are no people whose name begins with Z in that place.(use where)
Answer:
1. This is the bus which (that) goes to Agra.
2. ‘I would like to buy the shirt which is in the shop window.
3. You must break your fast when you see the moon in the sky.
4. Find a word which begins with the letter Z.
5. Now find a person whose name begins with the letter Z.
6. Then go to a place where there are no people whose name begins with Z.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

II. The Narrative Voice

This story is in the third person’that is, the narrator is not a participant in the story. But the narrator often seems to tell the story from the point of view of one of the characters in the story. For example, look at the italicised words in this sentence. Thank goodness, she did not live up on Boggins Heights or have a funny name. Whose thoughts do the words ‘Thank goodness’ express ? Maddie’s, who is grateful that although she is poor, she is yet not as poor as Wanda, or as different’. (So she does not get teased; she is thankful about that.)

1. Here are two other sentences from the story. Can you say whose point of view the italicised words express ?

(i) But on Wednesday, Peggy and Maddie, who sat down front with other children who got good marks and who didn’t track in a whole lot of mud, did notice that Wanda wasn’t there.
(ii) Wanda Petronski. Most of the children in Room Thirteen didn’t have names like that. They had names easy to say, like Thomas, Smith or Allen.
Answer:
(i) The italicised words express the point of view of Peggy and Maddie.
(ii) These italicised words express the point of view of other children excluding Peggy and Maddie.

2. Can you find other such sentences in the story ? You can do this after you read the second part of the story as well.
Answer:
The other such sentences are there in the second part of the story which are as follows: “Goodness! Wasn’t there anything she could do ? If only she could tell Wanda she hadn’t meant to hurt her feelings.”

III. Look at this sentence. The italicised adverb expresses an opinion or point of view.
Obviously, the only dress Wanda had was the blue one she wore every day. (This was obvious to the speaker.)

Other such adverbs are apparently, evidently, surprisingly, possibly, hopefully, incredibly, luckily. Use these words appropriately in the blanks in the sentences below. (You may use a word more than once, and more than one word may be appropriate for a given blank.)

1. …………….., he finished his work on time.
2. ………………,it will not rain on the day of the match.
3. ……………., he had been stealing money from his employer.
4. Television is …………….. to blame for the increase in violence in society.
5.’ The children will …………………. learn from their mistakes.
6. I can’t ………….. lend you that much money.
7. The thief had …………. been watching the house for many days.
8. The thief …………….. escaped by bribing the jailor.
9. ……………… no one had suggested this before.
10. The water was ………………. hot.
Ans.
1. Surprisingly
2. Hopefully
3. Possibly
4. evidently
5. apparently
6. possibly
7. incredibly
8. luckily
9. Incredibly
10. incredibly

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

HBSE 10th Class English The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Important Questions and Answers

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Where did Wanda Petronski live ?
Answer:
She lived at Boggins Heights.

Question 2.
Where did Wanda use to sit in the class ?
Answer:
She used to sit in the seat next to the last.

Question 3.
Who was Peggy’s best friend ?
Answer:
Maddie was Peggy’s best friend.

Question 4.
Who was Miss Mason ?
Answer:
She was Peggy’s class teacher.

Question 5.
Why were Wanda’s shoes always mud caked ?
Answer:
Wanda’s shoes were always mud caked because she had to come on foot all the way from Boggins Height to the school.

Question 6.
What was strange about Wanda’s name?
Answer:
She had a long name which was a funny one.

Question 7.
What was the attitude of the other children towards Wanda ?
Answer:
They often made fun of her.

Question 8.
What was Wanda’s response to Peggy’s question about dresses?
Answer:
She said that she had one hundred dresses, all lined up in her closet.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Question 9.
How did Peggy react when she saw an animal mistreated ?
Answer:
When Peggy saw an animal mistreated, she would cry for hours.

Question 10.
What kind of dress did Wanda wear ?
Answer:
She always wore a faded blue dress.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Who was Maddie? (AST anta eft?)
Answer:
Maddie belonged to a poor family. She wore old clothes which were given by others. Her parents were not rich.’ They lived in a simple house.
(मैडी का संबंध एक गरीब परिवार से था। वह दूसरों के द्वारा दिए गएं पुराने कपड़े पहनती थी। उसके माता-पिता अमीर नहीं थे। वे एक साधारण मकान में रहते थे।)

Question 2.
What was the opinion of the judges about Wanda?
(वाण्डा के प्रति निर्णायकों का क्या मत था?)
Answer:
Wanda had drawn one hundred designs of dresses, which were all different and all beautiful. In the opinion of the judges any one of the drawings was worthy of winning the prize. So she was declared winner of the girls medal.
(वाण्डा ने पोशाकों के एक सौ नमूने चित्रित किए थे, जोकि सभी भिन्न और सुंदर थे। निर्णायकों के मतानुसार इन सभी चित्रों में से कोई एक पुरस्कार का पात्र था। इसलिए उसे लड़कियों के पदक का विजेता घोषित कर दिया गया।)

Question 3.
How can you say that Peggy was a soft girl ? (आप कैसे कह सकते हो कि पेग्गी एक सौम्य स्वभाव की लड़की थी?)
Answer:
Peggy was not really cruel. She protected smaller children from bullies. If she saw an animal mistreated, she would cry for hours.
(पेग्गी एक निर्दयी लड़की नहीं थी। वह छोटे बच्चों को धौंस जमाने वालों से बचाती थी। यदि वह किसी जानवर के साथ गलत व्यवहार होता देखती थी तो वह घंटों चिल्लाती रहती थी।)

Question 4.
Maddie wrote a note for Peggy but she tore it away. Why? (मैडी ने पेग्गी के लिए एक नोट लिखा परंतु उसने उसे फाड़ दिया। क्यों?)
Answer:
Maddie wanted that Peggy should stop teasing and making fun of Wanda. So she wrote a note to . Peggy. But she lacked courage to give that note to Peggy fearing lest she should lose Peggy’s friendship. So she tore the note.
(मैडी चाहती थी कि पेग्गी वाण्डा को चिढ़ाना और उसका मजाक उड़ाना बंद कर दे। इसलिए उसने पेग्गी को एक नोट लिखा। लेकिन उसमें इतना साहस नहीं था कि वह नोट पेग्गी को दे दे क्योंकि उसे पेग्गी की मित्रता के खो जाने का भय था। इसलिए उसने वह नोट फाड़ दिया।)

Essay Type Question

Question 1.
What does this story tell us about Wanda Petronski? (यह कहानी हमें वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी के विषय में क्या बताती है?)
Or
Give a brief character sketch of Wanda Petronski. (वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी का चरित्र-चित्रण कीजिए।) Or
What do you learn about Wanda Petronski from the stroy “The Hundred Dresses”? (“The Hundred Dresses” कहानी से वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी के विषय में तुमने क्या सीखा?) Or
Answer:
Wanda Petronski was a Polish girl. Her family had immigrated to America. She studied in a school with other American students. She belonged to a very poor family. Daily she came to school in a faded blue dress. It was clean but not properly ironed. She used to sit in the corner of room number thirteen in the last row. This was a corner where the rough boys, who did not make good marks, sat. Wanda did not sit there because she was rough and noisy. On the contrary she was very quiet. But she came on foot from Boggins Heights area and brought a lot of dirt with her shoes. She was a reserve girl and did not speak much in the class. No one had ever heard her laugh.

(वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी पोलैंड मूल की रहने वाली थी। उसका परिवार अमेरिका विस्थापित हो गया था। वह अन्य अमेरिकी विद्यार्थियों के साथ एक स्कूल में पढ़ती थी। वह एक बहुत ही गरीब परिवार से संबंध रखती थी। हर रोज़ वह रंग उड़ी हुई एक नीले रंग की पोशाक में स्कूल आती थी। वह साफ तो होती थी परंतु उस पर सही प्रकार से प्रैस नहीं की होती थी। वह कमरा नंबर तेरह में आखिरी पंक्ति में बैठा करती थी। यह वह कोना था जिसमें वे लड़के बैठते थे जिनके अच्छे अंक नहीं आते थे। वाण्डा वहाँ इसलिए नहीं बैठती थी कि वह अभद्र और शोर मचाने वाली थी। इसके बिल्कुल विपरीत वह बहुत शांत थी। परंतु वह बोगिंस हाईट्स से पैदल स्कूल आती थी और अपने जूतों के साथ ढेर सारी धूल मिट्टी लेकर आती थी। वह एक आत्मकेंद्रित लड़की थी और कक्षा में अधिक नहीं बोलती थी। कभी किसी ने भी उसे हँसते हुए नहीं सुना था।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Question 2.
Who were Peggy and Maddie? How did they and other girls make fun of Wanda? (पेग्गी और मैडी कौन थी? वे और दूसरी लड़कियाँ वाण्डा का मजाक कैसे उड़ाती थीं?)
Answer:
Peggy and Maddie were the two classmates of Wanda. Peggy was the most popular girl in the school. She was pretty and had curly hair. She belonged to a rich family. She had many pretty clothes. Maddie was her closest friend. Peggy and Maddie were not bad girls but they used to have some fun with Wanda Petronski. The students in Wanda’s class found her name funny. Wanda was always alone in her class. Peggy made fun of Wanda and asked her how many dresses she had in her closet. Wanda replied that she had one hundred dresses. Then Peggy would ask her whether the dresses were of silk or velvet. Wanda would reply that she had dresses of velvet as well as silk. The girls would ask her how many pairs of shoes she had. At this Wanda would tell them that she had sixty pairs of shoes. The girls would suppress their laugh while talking to her. But as soon as Wanda’s back was turned, they would burst into peals of laughter.

(पेग्गी और मैडी वाण्डा की दो सहपाठी थीं। पेग्गी स्कूल में सबसे प्रसिद्ध लड़की थी। वह सुंदर थी और उसके धुंघराले बाल थे। उसका संबंध एक अमीर परिवार के साथ था। उसके पास बहुत-से सुंदर कपड़े थे। मैडी उसकी सबसे निकटतम सहेली थी। पेग्गी और मैडी बुरी लड़कियाँ नहीं थीं लेकिन वे वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी के साथ मजाक कर लिया करती थी। वाण्डा की कक्षा के विद्यार्थियों को उसका नाम मजाकिया लगता था। वाण्डा अपनी कक्षा में हमेशा अकेली रहती थी। पेग्गी वाण्डा को मजाक करती थी और उससे पूछती थी कि उसकी अलमारी में उसके पास कितनी पोशाकें हैं। वाण्डा उत्तर देती थी कि उसके पास सौ पोशाकें हैं। तब पेग्गी उससे पूछती थी कि क्या वे पोशाकें रेशम की हैं या मखमल की। तब वाण्डा उत्तर देती थी कि उसके पास रेशमी और मखमली दोनों प्रकार की पोशाकें हैं। लड़कियाँ उससे पूछती थीं कि उसके पास कितने जोड़ी जूते हैं। इस पर वाण्डा उन्हें बताती थी कि उसके पास साठ जोड़ी जूते हैं। उससे बातें करते समय तो लड़कियाँ अपनी हँसी को दबाकर रखती थीं लेकिन जैसे ही वाण्डा अपनी पीठ घुमाती थी, तो वे ठहाके लगाकर हँसना शुरू कर देती थी।)

Question 3.
What do you know about Maddie? (आप मैडी के विषय में क्या जानते हो ?)
Answer:
Maddie was one of the classmates of Wanda. She was Peggy’s best friend. Maddie herself was a poor girl. She used to wear the clothes given by other persons. So she was sympathetic to Wanda. She and Peggy were fast friends. That is why she never said anything when Peggy made fun of Wanda. But she herself never laughed at Wanda. She did not like Peggy’s asking Wanda about the dresses. Whenever, Peggy mocked at Wanda, Maddie felt bad. She wished that Peggy would stop teasing Wanda Petronski. Maddie decided to write a note for Peggy asking her to stop making fun of Wanda but she could not muster the courage to give the note to her.

(मैडी वाण्डा की एक सहपाठी थी। वह पेग्गी की सबसे पक्की सहेली थी। मैडी स्वयं एक गरीब लड़की थी। वह हमेशा दूसरे लोगों द्वारा दिए गए कपड़े पहना करती थी। इसलिए उसे वाण्डा के प्रति सहानुभूति थी। वह और पेग्गी पक्की सहेलियाँ थीं। इसलिए जब भी पेग्गी वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाती थी तो मैडी कुछ नहीं करती थी। लेकिन वह स्वयं कभी भी वाण्डा पर नहीं हँसती थीं। वह पेग्गी के द्वारा वाण्डा को उसकी पोशाकों के बारे में पूछना पसंद नहीं करती थी। जब भी पेग्गी वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाती थी तो मैडी को बुरा लगता था। उसकी इच्छा थी कि पेग्गी वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाना बंद कर दे। मैडी ने पेग्गी के लिए एक नोट लिखने का भी निर्णय लिया जिसमें वह पेग्गी से वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाना बंद करने को कहेगी लेकिन वह उस नोट को पेग्गी को देने के लिए साहस नहीं जुटा सकी।)।

Question 4.
When did Peggy and Maddie notice Wanda’s absence from school?
(पेग्गी और मैडी ने वाण्डा की स्कूल से अनुपस्थिति पर कब ध्यान दिया?)
Answer:
Wanda did not come to school on Monday. But nobody noticed her. She did not come on Tuesday also. But when she missed the school on Wednesday also, Peggy and Maddie noted her absence. They wondered why she had not come to school. Maddie remembered Wanda talking about one of her dresses which was pale blue with coloured trimmings. Then Maddie thought about the drawing and colour contest in the school. The girls were to design dresses and the boys were to design motorboats. Maddie thought that Peggy would win the contest as she was very good in designing.

(वाण्डा सोमवार के दिन स्कूल नहीं आई। लेकिन किसी ने भी उसकी ओर ध्यान नहीं दिया। वह मंगलवार को भी नहीं आई। लेकिन जब वह बुधवार को भी स्कूल नहीं आई तो पेग्गी और मैडी ने उसकी अनुपस्थिति पर ध्यान दिया। वे हैरान थीं कि वह स्कूल क्यों नहीं आई है। मैडी को वाण्डा की वह बात याद आ रही थी जब वह हल्के नीले रंग की गोटा लगी हुई पोशाक के बारे में बात कर रही थी तब मैडी ने स्कूल में होने वाले चित्रकारी और रंगों के मुकाबले के बारे में सोचा। लड़कियों को पोशाकों के नमूने बनाने थे और लड़कों को मोटर वाली किश्तियों के। मैडी सोचती थी कि पेग्गी ही चित्रकारी प्रतियोगिता का पदक जीतेगी क्योंकि नमूने बनाने में वह माहिर थी।)

Question 5.
Describe the scene where Wanda’s dress drawings are displayed? Who won the drawing contest for the girls ?
(उस दृश्य का वर्णन कीजिए जहाँ वाण्डा की पोशाकें प्रदर्शित की गई थीं ? लड़कियों के लिए चित्रकारी मुकाबला किसने जीता था ?)
Answer:
The next day it was drizzling. Peggy and Maddie hurried to their school as Miss Mason would announce the results of the drawing contest. They did not wait for Wanda. When the girls reached their school they were surprised. There were hundreds of designs of dresses displayed in the room. Then Miss Mason announced the names of the winners. Jack Beggles had won for the boys. She said that all the hundred designs of dresses had been made by one girl and she had won the Medal. Her name was Wanda Petronski. But Wanda was absent. The children clapped their hands in joy. Maddie asked Peggy to look at the blue dress about which Wanda had told them earlier. They appreciated the drawings made by Wanda.

(अगले दिन दा-बाँदी हो रही थी। पेग्गी और मैडी जल्दी से स्कूल गईं क्योंकि मिस मेसन चित्रकारी मुकाबले का परिणाम घोषित करने जा रही थी। उन्होंने वाण्डा की प्रतीक्षा नहीं की। जब लड़कियाँ अपने स्कूल पहुंची तो वे बहुत हैरान थीं। कमरे में पोशाकों के सैकड़ों नमूने प्रदर्शन के लिए थे। तब मिस मेसन ने विजेताओं के नामों की घोषणा की। जैक बेग्गल्ज़ ने लड़कों का पदक जीता था। उसने कहा कि पोशाकों के सारे सैकड़ों नमूने एक ही लड़की के द्वारा बनाए गए हैं और उसी ने ही पदक जीता था। उसका नाम वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी था। लेकिन वाण्डा अनुपस्थित थी। बच्चों ने खुशी से तालियाँ बजाईं। मैडी ने वाण्डा से कहा कि वह उस नीली पोशाक को देखे जिसके बारे में वाण्डा ने उन्हें पहले बताया था। उन्होंने वाण्डा के द्वारा बनाए गए चित्रों की प्रशंसा की।)

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Who was Wanda ?
(A) a Polish girl
(B) a French girl
(C) anAmerican girl
(D) an English girl
Answer:
(A) a Polish girl

Question 2.
Who was the most popular girl of the school ?
(A) Wanda
(B) Peggy
(C) Maddie
(D) Miss Mason
Answer:
(B) Peggy

Question 3.
Who was Peggy’s closest friend ?
(A) Wanda
(B) Maddie
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(B) Maddie

Question 4.
Wanda’s class used to sit in Room No. :
(A) ten
(B) eleven
(C) twelve
(D) thirteen
Answer:
(D) thirteen

Question 5.
Where did Wanda Petronski live ?
(A) Poland
(B) Boston
(C) Boggins Heights
(D) London
Answer:
(C) Boggins Heights

Question 6.
On which particular day was Wanda’s absence noticed ?
(A) Sunday
(B) Monday
(C) Tuesday
(D) Wednesday
Answer:
(D) Wednesday

Question 7.
How did the other girls treat Wanda ?
(A) they made fun of her
(B) they helped her in studies
(C) they sympathised with her
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(A) they made fun of her

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Question 8.
What was the contest for the boys ?
(A) dress designs
(B) motorboats
(C) motorbikes
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(B) motorboats

Question 9.
Who was the first winner among the boys ?
(A) Thomas
(B) Smith
(C) Jack Beggles
(D) Bounce
Answer:
(C) Jack Beggles

Question 10.
What was the contest for the girls ?
(A) dress designs
(B) motorboats designs
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(A) dress designs

Question 11.
Who was the first winner among the girls ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Wanda
(C) Maddie
(D) Miss Mason
Answer:
(B) Wanda

Question 12.
Who decides to write a note to Peggy ?
(A) Maddie
(B) Wanda
(C) Smith
(D) Jack Beggles
Answer:
(A) Maddie

Question 13.
Who was Wanda’s friend in the school ?
(A) Peggy
(B) Maddie
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) she had no friend in the school
Answer:
(D) she had no friend in the school

Question 14.
Who did Peggy protect small children from ?
(A) bullies
(B) clever
(C) foolish
(D) teacher
Answer:
(A) bullies

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Question 15.
Where were Wanda’s designs at display?
(A) Room No. Ten
(B) Room No. Eleven
(C) Room No. Twelve
(D) Room No. Thirteen
Answer:
(C) Room No. Twelve

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Important Passages for Comprehension

Read the following passages and answer the questions that follow :

PASSAGE 1

Today, Monday, Wanda Petronski was not in her seat. But nobody, not even Peggy and Madeline, the girls who started all the fun, noticed her absence. Usually Wanda sat in the seat next to the last seat in the last row in Room Thirteen. She sat in the corner of the room where the rough boys who did not make good marks sat, the corner of the room where there was most scuffling of feet, most roars of laughter when anything funny was said, and most mud and dirt on the floor.

Wanda did not sit there because she was rough and noisy. On the contrary, she was very quiet and rarely said anything at all. And nobody had ever heard her laugh out loud. Sometimes she twisted her mouth into a crooked sort of smile, but that was all.

Word-meanings : Rough = indisciplined (अनुशासनहीन); scuffing of feet = creating noise by thumping shoes (पैर पटककर शोर करना); on the contrary = on the other hand (इसके विपरीत); roars = cries (चीखे); rarely = very seldom (बहुत कम); crooked sort = awkward ( बेढंगी) :

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

Questions :

(a) Where did Wanda Petronski usually sit ?
(b) Did Peggy and Madeline notice Wanda’s absence ?
(c) How did most of the boys create fun in the classroom?
(d) What kind of a girl was Wanda ?
(e) Find words or phrases from the passage which mean the same as :
(i) on the other hand,
(ii) very seldom.
Answers :
(a) She usually sat in the corner next to the last seat in the last row.
(b) No, Peggy and Madeline did not notice Wanda’s absence.
(c) They created fun by scuffling their feet on the ground and laughing loudly.
(d) Wanda was a quiet and calm girl.
(e) (i) on the contrary, (ii) rarely.

PASSAGE 2

Nobody knew exactly why Wanda sat in that seat, unless it was because she came all the way from Petronski, once she sat in the corner of the room.
The time when they thought about Wanda was outside of school hours – at noon-time when they were coming back to school or in the morning early before school began, when groups of two or three, or even more, would be talking and laughing on their way to the school yard.
Then, sometimes, they waited for Wanda – to have fun with her.

Word-meanings : Caked with = covered with (से ढकी हुई); exactly = correctly (सही ढंग से) I

Questions :

(a) Where did Wanda come from ?
(b) What happened after Wanda sat in the corner of the room ?
(c) When did classmates think of Wanda ?
(d) Why did they wait for Wanda ?
(e) Find a word in the passage which means ‘precise’.
Answers :
(a) Wanda came from Boggins Heights.
(b) After she sat in the corner of the room nobody thought much of her.
(c) They thought of her outsides of school hours.
(d) They waited for her to have fun with her.
(e) exactly

PASSAGE 3

Peggy was the most popular girl in school. She was pretty, she had many pretty clothes and her hair was curly. Maddie was her closest friend. The reason Peggy and Maddie noticed Wanda’s absence was because Wanda had made them late to school. They had waited and waited for Wanda, to have some fun with her, and she just hadn’t come.

They often waited for Wanda Petronski – to have fun with her.
Wanda Petronski. Most of the children in Room Thirteen didn’t have names like that. They had names easy to say, like Thomas, Smith or Allen. There was one boy named Bounce, Willie Bounce, and people thought that was funny, but not funny in the same way that Petronski was.

Word-meanings : Popular = famous (प्रसिद्धा ); curly hair = wavy hair (घुंगराले बाल)

Questions :

(a) Name the chapter.
(b) Who was Maddie’s closest friend ?
(c) Why did most of the children not like Wanda’s name?
(d) Why had Peggy and Maddie waited for Wanda ?
(e) Find out a word from the passage similar in meaning to ‘famous’.
Answers :
(a) The name of the chapter is ‘The Hundred Dresses-i’.
(b) Peggy was Maddie’s closest friend.
(c) They did not like Wanda’s name because it was a long and funny name.
(d) They wanted to have some fun with Wanda.
(e) Popular

PASSAGE 4

Wanda didn’t have any friends. She came to school alone and went home alone. She always wore a faded blue dress that didn’t hang right. It was clean, but it looked as though it had never been ironed properly. She didn’t have any friends, but a lot of girls talked to her. Sometimes, they surrounded her in the school yard as she stood watching the little girls play hopscotch on the worn hard ground.

“Wanda,” Peggy would say in a most courteous manner as though she were talking to Miss Mason. “Wanda,” she’d say, giving one of her friends a nudge, “tell us. How many dresses did you say you had hanging up in your closet ?”
“A hundred,” Wanda would say.

“A hundred!” exclaimed all the little girls incredulously, and the little ones would stop playing hopscotch and listen.

Word-meanings : Didn’t hang right = not fit properly (ठिक से न आना ); ironed = pressed with iron (प्रेस करना); surrounded = circled (दायरा बनाना); hopscotch = a kind of game (एक प्रकार का खेल); incredulously = showing disbelief (अविश्वास प्रकट करते हुए) |

Questions :
(a) What kind of dress did Wanda wear ?
(b) How did Peggy make fun of Wanda ?
(c) Did Wanda have many friends ?
(d) What would Wanda say when Peggy questioned her about dresses ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means “polite’.
Answers :
(a) She wore a faded blue dress.
(b) Peggy made fun of Wanda by asking a question about how many dresses she had at home.
(c) No, Wanda did not have many friends.
(d) Wanda would say that she had a hundred dresses lined up in her closet.
(e) courteous.

PASSAGE 5

Finally Wanda would move up the street, her eyes dull and her mouth closed, hitching her left shoulder every now and then in the funny way she had, finishing the walk to school alone.

Peggy was not really cruel. She protected small children from bullies. And she cried for hours if she saw an animal mistreated. If anybody had said to her, “Don’t you think that is a cruel way to treat Wanda ?” She would have been very surprised. Cruel ? Why did the girl say she had a hundred dresses ? Anybody could tell that was a lie. Why did she want to lie ? And she wasn’t just an ordinary person, else why did she have a name like that? Anyway, they never made her cry.
As for Maddie, this business for asking Wanda every day how many dresses and how many hats, and how many this and that she had was bothering her.

Word-meanings : Bullies = those who frighten the weaker persons (धौंसिया); mistreated = behaved cruelly (क्रूरतापूर्ण व्यवहार); cruel = unkind (निर्दयी); ordinary = simple (साधारण)।

Questions :

(a) Name the chapter.
(b) Who protected small children from bullies ?
(c) What was bothering Maddie ?
(d) What did Peggy think was clearly a lie ?
(e) Find out a word from the passage which means “those who use their strength to frighten weaker people’.
Answers:
(a) The name of the chapter is ‘The Hundred Dresses-l’.
(B) Peggy protected small children from bullies.
(c) The business for asking Wanda every day how many dresses, she had was bothering Maddie.
(d) Peggy thought that the girl’s saying that she had one hundred dresses was clearly a lie.
(e) Bullies.

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

PASSAGE 6

Sometimes, when Peggy was asking Wanda those questions in that mocking polite voice, Maddie felt embarrassed and studied the marbles in the palm of her hand, rolling them around and saying nothing herself. Not that she felt sorry for Wanda, exactly. She would never have paid any attention to Wanda if Peggy hadn’t invented the dresses game. But suppose Peggy and all the others started in on her next ? She wasn’t as poor as Wanda, perhaps, but she was poor. Of course she would have more sense than to say she had a hundred dresses. Still she would not like for them to begin on her. She wished Peggy would stop teasing Wanda Petronski.

Word-meanings : Mocking = making fun of (मज़ाक उड़ाना); embarrassed = ashamed of (शर्मसार होना); invented = discovered (आविष्कार किया); teasing = bothering (परेशान करना) |

Questions :

(a) How did Maddie feel and behave when Peggy mocked Wanda ?
(b) What made Maddie pay attention to Wanda ?
(c) What was the fear in Maddie’s mind when she saw Peggy mocking Wanda ?
(d) What did Maddie wish ?
(e) Name the chapter and its writer.
Answers :
(i) Maddie felt embarrassed and studied the marbles in the palm of hand, rolling them around but said nothing.
(ii) Peggy’s invention of the dresses game, made Maddie pay attention to Wanda. (iii) The fear in Maddie’s mind was that Peggy and other girls may start mocking her too.
(iv) Maddie wished that Peggy would stop tearing Wanda.
(v) Chapter : ‘The Hundred Dresses-l’. Writer : ‘Eleanor Estes’

PASSAGE 7

Today, even though they had been late to school, Maddie was glad she had not had to make fun of Wanda. She worked her arithmetic problems absent-mindedly. “Eight times eight-let’s see …” She wished she had the nerve to write Peggy a note, because she knew she never would have the courage to speak right out to Peggy, to say, “Hey, Peg, let’s stop asking Wanda how many dresses she has.” When she finished her arithmetic she did start a note to Peggy. Suddenly she paused and shuddered. She pictured herself in the school yard, a new target for Peggy and the girls. Peggy might ask her where she got the dress that she had on, and Maddie would have to say it was one of Peggy’s old ones that Maddie’s mother had tried to disguise with new trimmings so no one in Room Thirteen would recognise it.

Word-meanings : Absent-mindedly = without thinking much paused-stopped (बिना सोचे-समझे); shuddered = trembled (काँपने लगी); target = mark (निशाना); disguise = conceal (छुपाना) |

Questions :

(a) Why was Maddie glad ?
(b) How did Maddie want to ask Peggy not to make fun of Wanda ?.
(c) What made Maddie feel ‘shuddered’?
(d) How did Maddie think Peggy would humiliate her ?
(e) Find a word from the passage which means ‘trembled’.
Answers :
(a)Maddie was glad she had not had to make fun of Wanda.
(b) She wanted to ask Peggy not to make fun of Wanda by writing a note to her.
(c) She shuddered when she thought that Peggy would find Maddie a new target for making fun of her.
(d) She thought that Peggy would humiliate her by pointing out that she was wearing a dress given to her by her (Peggy’s) mother.
(e) ‘shuddered’.

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Summary in English

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Introduction in English

This is a beautiful story about a small girl Wanda by Eleanor Estes Ester. Wanda used to go to school on foot and sit next to the last bench in one corner of her room. All the girls of her class used to make fun of her poverty and funny name. She never quarrelled with anyone. She was always calm. When a drawing competition was held in her school, Wanda took part in that competition. He made design of one hundred dresses. All the designs were very beautiful. She was selected for the first prize. This surprised everyone very much.

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Summary in English

This is a story about a Polish girl. Her name was Wanda Petronski. Her family had immigrated to America. She studied in a school with other American students. She belonged to a very poor family. Daily she came to school in a faded blue dress. It was clean but not properly ironed. She used to sit in the corner of room number thirteen in the last row. This was a corner where the rough boys, who did not make good marks, sat. They made a lot of noise. There was the most noise of the feet when some fun occurred. Wanda did not sit there because she was rough and noisy. On the contrary she was very quiet. But she came on foot from Boggins Heights area and brought a lot of dirt with her shoes.

She was an introvert girl and did not speak much in the class. No one had ever heard her laugh. Nobody really thought much about Wanda. Students thought of Wanda only outside the school hours. They waited for her while she was going to or coming from home. They waited for her in order to have fun with her. Two girls of her class, Peggy and Maddie, often talked to her and made fun of her. Peggy was the most popular girl in the school. She was pretty and had curly hair. She belonged to a rich family. She had many pretty clothes. Maddie was her closest friend.

Peggy and Maddie were not bad girls but they used to have some fun with Wanda Petronski. The students in Wanda’s class found her name funny. Wanda was always alone in her class. Wanda did not have any friend but a lot of girls talked to her. They surrounded her in the school yard. Peggy made fun of Wanda and asked her how many dresses she had in her closet. Wanda replied that she had one hundred dresses. These dresses were of different colours and designs. Then Peggy would ask her whether the dresses were of silk or velvet. Wanda would reply that she had dresses of velvet as well as silk. The girls would ask her how many pairs of shoes she had. At this Wanda would tell them that she had sixty pairs of shoes. The girls would suppress their laugh when talking to her. But as soon as Wanda’s back was turned, they would burst into peals of laughter.

Peggy was rich but she was not arrogant. She was not cruel. On the other hand, she saved younger girls from bullies. But she and other girls could not understand why Wanda told a lie about her dresses and shoes. But the girls only made fun of Wanda. They never made her cry.

Maddie herself was a poor girl. She used to wear the clothes given by other persons. So she was sympathetic to Wanda. She and Peggy were fast friends. That is why she never said anything when Peggy made fun of Wanda. But she herself never laughed at Wanda. She did not like Peggy’s asking Wanda about the dresses. Whenever, Peggy mocked at Wanda, Maddie felt bad. She wished that Peggy would stop teasing Wanda Petronski. Maddie decided to write a note for Peggy asking her to stop making fun of Wanda but she could not muster the courage to do so.

Wanda did not come to school on Monday. But nobody missed her. She did not come on Tuesday also. But when she missed the school on Wednesday also, Peggy and Maddie noted her absence. They wondered why she had not come to school. Maddie remembered Wanda talking about one of her dresses which was pale blue with coloured trimmings. Then Maddie thought about the drawing and colour contest in the school. The girls were to design dresses and the boys were to design motorboats. Maddie thought that Peggy would win the contest as she was very good in designing.

Next day it was drizzled. Peggy and Maddie hurried to their school as Miss Mason would announce the results of the drawing contest. They did not wait for Wanda. When the girls reached their school they were surprised. There were hundreds of designs of dresses displayed in the room. Then Miss Mason announced names of the winners. Jack Beggles had won for the boys. She said that all the hundred designs of dresses had been made by one girl and she had won the Medal. Her name was Wanda Petronski.
But Wanda was absent. The children clapped their hands in joy. Maddie asked Peggy to look at the blue dress about which Wanda had told them earlier. They appreciated the drawings made by Wanda.

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Summary in Hindi

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Introduction in Hindi

(यह वाण्डा नाम की एक छोटी-सी लड़की के बारे में Eleanor Estes द्वारा लिखित एक सुंदर कहानी है। वाण्डा पैदल स्कूल जाया करती थी और अपने कमरे के कोने में आखिरी सीट से पहले वाली सीट पर बैठा करती थी। उसकी कक्षा की सभी लड़कियाँ उसकी गरीबी और उसके मजाकिया नाम का उपहास उड़ाया करती थीं। वह कभी किसी के साथ झगड़ा नहीं करती थी। वह हमेशा शांत रहती थी। जब उसके स्कूल में एक चित्रकारी प्रतियोगिता का आयोजन किया गया तो उसने भी इस प्रतियोगिता में हिस्सा लिया। उसने एक सौ पोशाकों के चित्र बनाए। सभी चित्र बहुत ही सुंदर थे। उसे प्रथम पुरस्कार के लिए चुना गया। उसकी इस उपलब्धि से प्रत्येक बहुत हैरान था।)

The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Summary in Hindi

यह एक पोलिश (पोलैंड के मूल की) लड़की की कहानी है। उसका नाम वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी था। उसका परिवार अमेरिका में आकर बसा हुआ था। वह एक स्कूल में अन्य अमेरिकी छात्रों के साथ पढ़ती थी। वह एक बहुत गरीब घर की लड़की थी। वह हर रोज स्कूल में मंद पड़े नीले रंग की पोशाक पहनकर आती थी। यह साफ-सुथरी होती थी मगर इस पर सही तरीके से इस्री नहीं की होती थी। वह कमरा नंबर तेरह की आखिरी पंक्ति में एक कोने में बैठती थी। यह वह कोना था जहाँ पर ऐसे लड़के बैठते थे जो या तो बहुत बातूनी थे या पढ़ाई में कमजोर थे। वे बहुत अधिक शोर मचाते थे। जब कोई मजाक की बात होती थी तो पैरों का बहुत अधिक शोर होता था। वाण्डा वहाँ इसलिए नहीं बैठती थी क्योंकि वह पढ़ाई में कमजोर और ज्यादा शोर मचाती थी। इसके विपरीत वह बहुत शांत थी। मगर वह बोगिंस हाईट्स के इलाके से पैदल आती थी और अपने पैरों के साथ बहुत अधिक मिट्टी लाती थी।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

वह एक अंतर्मुखी लड़की थी और कक्षा में अधिक नहीं बोलती थी। किसी ने उसे कभी हँसते हुए नहीं देखा था। कोई भी वाण्डा के बारे में अधिक नहीं सोचता था। छात्र वाण्डा के बारे में केवल स्कूल के समय के बाद सोचते थे। जब वह घर को जा रही होती थी या घर से आ रही होती थी तो वे उसका इंतजार करते थे। वे उसका मजाक उड़ाने के लिए उसका इंतज़ार करते थे। उसकी कक्षा की दो लड़कियाँ, पेग्गी और मैडी, अकसर उससे बात करती थीं और उसका मजाक उड़ाती थीं। पेग्गी स्कूल की सबसे लोकप्रिय लड़की थी। वह सुंदर थी और उसके बाल घुघराले थे। वह एक अमीर परिवार से थी। उसके पास बहुत-सी अच्छी-अच्छी पोशाकें थीं। मैडी उसकी सबसे पक्की सहेली थी।

– पेग्गी और मैडी बुरी लड़कियाँ नहीं थीं मगर वे वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी का कुछ मजाक उड़ाया करती थीं। वाण्डा की कक्षा के छात्र सोचते थे कि उसका नाम मज़ाकिया है। वाण्डा कक्षा में सदा अकेली थी। वाण्डा का कोई मित्र नहीं था मगर उससे बहुत-सी लड़कियाँ बातें करती थीं। वे उसे स्कूल के प्रांगण में घेर लेती थीं। पेग्गी वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाती थी और उससे पूछती थी कि उसकी अलमारी में कितनी पोशाकें हैं। वाण्डा उत्तर देती थी कि उसके पास एक सौ पोशाकें हैं। ये पोशाकें अलग-अलग रंगों और डिज़ाइनों की थीं। तब पेग्गी उससे पूछती थी कि क्या वे पोशाकें रेशम की हैं या मखमल की। वाण्डा उत्तर देती थी कि उसकी पोशाकें रेशम की और मखमल दोनों की हैं। लड़कियाँ उससे पूछती थीं कि उसके पास कितने जोड़ी जूते हैं। इस पर वाण्डा उन्हें बताती कि उसके पास साठ जोड़े जूते हैं। लड़कियाँ उससे बात करते समय अपनी हँसी को दबाए रखती थीं। मगर ज्यों ही वाण्डा की पीठ मुड़ती, वे ज़ोर-ज़ोर से हँस देती थीं।

पेग्गी अमीर थी मगर वह घमंडी नहीं थी। वह क्रूर भी नहीं थी। इसके विपरीत वह छोटी लड़कियों को धौंसिया लड़कियों से बचाती थी। मगर वह और अन्य लड़कियाँ यह नहीं समझ पाती थीं कि वाण्डा अपनी पोशाकों और जूतों के बारे में झूठ क्यों बोलती थी। मगर लड़कियाँ वाण्डा का केवल मजाक उड़ाती थीं। वे उसे कभी भी रुलाती नहीं थीं।

मैडी स्वयं एक गरीब लड़की थी। वह अन्य लोगों के द्वारा दिए गए कपड़े पहनती थी। इसलिए वह वाण्डा के प्रति सहानुभूतिपूर्ण थी। वह और पेग्गी पक्की सहेलियाँ थीं। इसीलिए जब पेग्गी वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाती थी तो वह कुछ नहीं बोलती थी। मगर वह स्वयं कभी भी वाण्डा पर नहीं हँसती थी। वह इस बात को पसंद नहीं करती थी कि पेग्गी वाण्डा से उसकी पोशाकों के बारे में पूछे। जब भी पेग्गी वाण्डा पर हँसती थी तो मैडी को बुरा लगता था। वह चाहती थी कि पेग्गी वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी को तंग करना बंद कर दे। मैडी ने फैसला किया कि वह पेग्गी को एक चिट्ठी लिखेगी और उससे कहेगी कि वह वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाना बंद कर दे मगर वह ऐसा करने का साहस नहीं जुटा पाई।

वाण्डा सोमवार को स्कूल नहीं आई। मगर किसी को भी उसकी अनुपस्थिति खली नहीं। वह मंगलवार को भी नहीं आई। मगर जब वह बुधवार को भी स्कूल नहीं आई तो पेग्गी और मैडी को उसकी अनुपस्थिति का आभास हुआ। उन्हें इस बात पर हैरानी हुई कि वाण्डा स्कूल क्यों नहीं आई। मैडी को याद आया कि वाण्डा ने एक ड्रैस के बारे में कहा था जो हल्के नीले रंग की थी और जिसमें रंगीन सजावट लगी हुई थी। तब मैडी ने स्कूल में हुए ड्राइंग और रंग के मुकाबले के बारे में सोचा। लड़कियों ने पोशाकों के डिज़ाइन बनाने थे और लड़कों ने मोटरबोटों के चित्र बनाने थे। मैडी ने सोचा कि पेग्गी मुकाबले को जीतेगी क्योंकि वह डिज़ाइनिंग में बहुत अच्छी थी।

अगले दिन बूंदा-बाँदी आरंभ हो गई। पेग्गी और मैडी स्कूल जल्दी-जल्दी गईं क्योंकि मिस मेसन ने ड्राइंग के मुकाबले के परिणाम घोषित करने थे। उन्होंने वाण्डा का इंतज़ार नहीं किया। जब लड़कियाँ अपने स्कूल में पहुँची तो वे हैरान हो गईं। कमरें में पोशाकों के सैकड़ों डिज़ाइन प्रदर्शित किए हुए थे। तब मिस मेसन ने विजेताओं के नाम घोषित किए। लड़कों की तरफ से जैक बेग्गल्ज़ ने इनाम जीता था। उसने कहा कि पोशाकों के सभी सौ डिज़ाइन एक ही लड़की ने बनाए थे और उसी ने इनाम जीता है। उसका नाम है वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी।

मगर वाण्डा अनुपस्थित थी। बच्चों ने खुशी से तालियाँ बजाईं। मैडी ने पेग्गी से कहा कि वह उस नीली पोशाक को देखे जिसके बारे में वाण्डा ने पहले उन्हें बताया था। उन्होंने वाण्डा के द्वारा बनाए गए चित्रों की सराहना की।

From the Diary of Anne Frank Translation in Hindi

[PAGE 64] : आज, सोमवार वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी अपनी सीट पर नहीं थी। लेकिन पेग्गी और मेडलीन सहित उन सभी लड़कियों ने जिन्होंने उसका मजाक उड़ाना शुरू किया था। किसी ने भी उसकी गैर-हाजिरी पर ध्यान नहीं दिया। आमतौर पर वाण्डा कमरा न० 13 में आखिरी सीट से आगे बैठती थी। वह कमरे के एक कोने में बैठती थी जहाँ पर अभद्र लड़के जो अच्छे अंक नहीं लेते थे बैठते थे, कमरे के इस कोने में अधिकतर बच्चे पैर रगड़कर शोर करते थे, अधिकतर बच्चे जरा-सी भी मजाक की बात होने पर जोर से हँसते थे और फर्श पर सबसे अधिक मिट्टी और धूल पड़ी होती थी।

वाण्डा वहाँ इसलिए नहीं बैठती थी कि वह अभद्र थी या शोर मचाती थी। इसके बिल्कुल विपरीत वह बहुत शांत थी और कभी-कभार ही कुछ बोलती थी। और किसी ने भी उसे कभी भी जोर से हँसते हुए नहीं सुना था। कई बार वह अपने मुँह को मरोड़कर हल्की मुस्कान भर लेती थी, बस इतना ही।

सचमुच में यह कोई भी नहीं जानता था कि वाण्डा उस सीट पर क्यों बैठती थी क्योंकि ऐसा था कि वह Boggins Height से सारे रास्ते पैदल चलकर आई थी और उसके पाँव सूखी मिट्टी से सने होते थे। लेकिन जब वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी कमरे के एक कोने में बैठ जाती थी तो कोई भी उसके बारे में कुछ नहीं सोचता था।

वे वाण्डा के बारे में केवल स्कूल के समय बाद ही सोचते थे-या तो दोपहर के समय जब वे स्कूल में वापस आ रहे होते थे या सवेरे जल्दी स्कूल लगने से पहले, जब दो या तीन समूहों अथवा इससे भी अधिक स्कूल प्राँगण तक आते समय बातें करते रहते थे या हँसते रहते थे।

तब कई बार तो वे वाण्डा की प्रतीक्षा भी करते थे-ताकि उसके साथ मजाक कर सकें।
अगला दिन, मंगलवार था। वाण्डा उस दिन भी स्कूल नहीं आई थी। और फिर किसी ने भी उसकी अनुपस्थिति पर ध्यान नहीं दिया। लेकिन बुधवार को पेग्गी और मैडी जोकि बाकी बच्चों के साथ अगली सीटों पर बैठती थीं और अच्छे अंक प्राप्त करती थीं और जोकि मिट्टी वाले रास्ते पर चलकर नहीं आती थीं, उन्होंने देखा कि वाण्डा नहीं आ रही थी। पेग्गी स्कूल की सबसे प्रसिद्ध लड़की थी। वह सुंदर थी, उसके पास बहुत-सी सुंदर पोशाकें थी और उसके बाल घुघराले थे। मैडी उसकी सबसे नजदीकी सहेली थी। पेग्गी और मैडी ने वाण्डा की अनुपस्थिति का कारण इसलिए सोचा क्योंकि वाण्डा ने उन्हें स्कूल से लेट कर दिया था।

[PAGE 65] : वे बहुत देर तक वाण्डा की प्रतीक्षा करती रहीं, ताकि उसके साथ कुछ मजाक कर सकें, और वह आई ही नहीं। वे उसके साथ मजाक करने के लिए हमेशा वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी की प्रतीक्षा करती थी।
वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी। कमरा नं० 13 में अधिकतर बच्चों के नाम इस तरह के नहीं थे। उनके ऐसे नाम थे जो आसानी से कहे जा सकें जैसे थॉमस, स्मिथ, अलैन। एक लड़के का नाम बाउन्स भी था-विली बाउन्स और लोग उसके नाम को मजाकिया मानते थे लेकिन उतना मजाकिया नहीं जितना कि पेट्रोंसकी को।

वाण्डा का कोई भी मित्र नहीं था। वह अकेली स्कूल आती थी और अकेली ही घर जाती थी। वह हमेशा ही रंग उड़ी हुई एक नीले रंग की पोशाक पहनती थी जो उसे ठीक से नहीं आती थी। वह साफ तो थी लेकिन ऐसा लगता था कि कभी भी उस पर ठीक प्रकार से प्रैस नहीं की गई थी। उसका कोई भी मित्र नहीं था, परंतु बहुत सारी लड़कियाँ उससे बात करती थीं। कई बार वह जब छोटी लड़कियों को टूटे-फूटे और कठोर मैदान में hopscotch(टप्पा) का खेल खेलते देखती थी तो दूसरी लड़कियाँ उसे घेर लेती थीं। _ “वाण्डा” पेग्गी अति विशिष्टता के साथ कहती थी जैसे कि वह मिस मेसन से बातें कर रही हो, वह अपनी एक सहेली को एक प्यार भरा धक्का देकर कहती थी “वाण्डा, हमें बताइए, तुम्हारे पास तुम्हारी अलमारी में कितनी पोशाकें लटक रही हैं।”

[PAGE66] : “एक सौ” वाण्डा कहती थी “एक सौ!” सभी छोटी लड़कियाँ अविश्वसनीय ढंग से आचंभित हो जाती थीं, और उनसे भी छोटी लड़कियाँ तो hopscotch का खेल बंद करके उसकी बात सुनती थी।
“हाँ, एक सौ, सभी एक पंक्ति में रखी हुई हैं” वाण्डा कहती थी और फिर उसके पतले होंठ खामोशी में इकडे मिल जाते थे।
“वे कैसी लगती हैं? सभी रेशमी हैं, मैं शर्त के साथ कह सकती हूँ, पेग्गी कहती थी।
“हाँ, सभी रेशमी हैं, सभी प्रकार के रंगों की हैं।”
“मखमली भी हैं?”
“हाँ, मखमली भी हैं, एक सौ पोशाकें हैं,” वाण्डा बिना किसी भावना के पुनः दोहराती, “सभी पोशाकें मेरी अलमारी में पंक्ति में रखी हैं।”

तब वे उसे जाने देती और तब जब वह अधिक दूर भी नहीं गई होती तो वे हँसी की चीखें और ठहाके लगाए बिना नहीं रह सकती थीं।
एक सौ पोशाकें! स्पष्टतया, वाण्डा के पास केवल एक ही नीले रंग वाली पोशाक थी जिसे वह हर रोज पहनकर आती थी। इसलिए वह क्यों कहती थी कि उसके पास सौ पोशाकें हैं? क्या कहानी है।

“तुम्हारे पास कितने जोड़ी जूते हैं?”
“साठ जोड़े! सारे जूते अलमारी में पंक्ति में रखे हैं?
बहुत बढ़ा-चढ़ाकर कही गई इस विनम्रता की चीखें इस उत्तर का स्वागत करतीं। “क्या सभी जूते एक-जैसे हैं?”
“अरे, नहीं, प्रत्येक जोड़ी अलग-किस्म की है। सभी रंगों के हैं। सभी एक पंक्ति में रखे हैं।”

पेग्गी और उसकी कभी जुदा न होने वाली सहेली मैडी जिन्होंने इस खेल के विषय में सोचा था, वहाँ से सबसे बाद में जाती थी। अंततः वाण्डा भी गली में आगे को बढ़ती उसकी आँखें नीरस और मुँह बंद होता तथा वह हर थोड़ी देर के बाद अपने कंधे को जैसी कि उसकी आदत थी झटक देती थी और स्कूल तक अपना रास्ता अकेले ही पूरा करती।

पेग्गी वास्तव में निर्दयी नहीं थी। वह छोटे-छोटे बच्चों की धौंस जमाने वालों से रक्षा करती थी। और यदि वह किसी जानवर के साथ दुर्व्यवहार होता देखती थी तो वह घंटों चिल्लाती थी यदि कोई उससे कहता, “क्या आपके विचार में कि वाण्डा के साथ ऐसा व्यवहार करना निर्दयी नहीं है? तो उसे बहुत हैरानी महसूस होती। निर्दयतापूर्वक? तो उस लड़की ने ऐसा क्यों कहा कि उसके पास एक थी? कोई भी समझ सकता था कि वह एक झूठी बात थी। वह झूठ क्यों बोलना चाहती थी। और वह एक साधारण व्यक्ति मात्र नहीं थी, वरना उसका ऐसा नाम क्यों था? कुछ भी हो वे उसे कभी रुलाती नहीं थी।”

जहाँ तक मैडी का संबंध है, वाण्डा से हर रोज यह पूछा जाना कि उसके पास कितनी पोशाकें, कितने टोप, कितनी ये चीजें, और कितने वे चीजें हैं, उसे परेशान करने लगी थी।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

(PAGE 67] : मैडी स्वयं गरीब थी। वह प्रायः दूसरों के पहने हुए कपड़े पहना करती थी। भगवान का शुक्र है कि वह Boggins Height पर नहीं रहती थी और उसका मजाकिया नाम नहीं था।

कई बार जब पेग्गी वाण्डा से अपनी विनम्र और मजाकिया शैली में प्रश्न पूछती थी, तो मैडी परेशान हो जाती थी और अपने हाथ में पकड़ी गोलियों को गिनने लग जाती थी और उन्हें इधर-उधर घुमाने लग जाती थी और कहती कुछ नहीं थी। ऐसा नहीं कि वह वास्तव में वाण्डा के लिए दुखी हो रही थी। यदि पेग्गी यह पोशाकों वाला खेल न खेलती तो उसका वाण्डा की ओर कभी भी ध्यान न गया होता। परंतु मान लो पेग्गी और दूसरी लड़कियों ने अगली बार अपना निशाना बना लिया? शायद वह वाण्डा जितनी गरीब नहीं थी लेकिन वह थी गरीब । निसंदेह उसमें यह कहने कि उसके पास सौ पोशाकें हैं की ज्यादा बुद्धि थी। फिर भी वह नहीं चाहती थी कि वे उसी पर शुरू हो जाए। वह चाहती थी कि पेग्गी वाण्डा पेट्रोसकी को चिढ़ाना बंद कर दे।

यद्यपि आज उन्हें स्कूल से देर हो गई थी, मैडी प्रसन्न थी क्योंकि आज उसे वाण्डा का मजाक नहीं उड़ाना पड़ा था। उसने अपने गणित के प्रश्न अनमने ढंग से पूरे कर लिए ‘आठ गुणा आठ-कितना होता है’-इसकी इच्छा थी कि काश वह पेग्गी को एक पत्र लिखने का साहस कर सके क्योंकि वह जानती थी कि वह कभी भी पेग्गी को यह कहने का साहस नहीं कर सकेगी, “अरे पेग्गी,

आओ हम वाण्डा से यह पूछना बद कर दें कि उसके पास कितनी पोशाकें हैं। जब उसने अपने गणित के प्रश्न हल कर लिए तो उसने पेग्गी को एक पर्ची लिखनी आरंभ की। अचानक ही वह रुक गई और काँप उठी। उसने अपने मन में कल्पना की कि वह स्कूल प्रांगण में खड़ी है, और पेग्गी तथा उसकी सहेलियों के लिए एक नया निशाना है। शायद पेग्गी उससे पूछ ले कि जो पोशाक उसने पहन रखी है वह कहाँ से प्राप्त की है, और मैडी को शायद कहना पड़े कि वह पेग्गी की पुरानी पोशाकों में से एक थी जिस पर मैडी की माँ ने गोटा-पट्टी लगाकर छिपाने की कोशिश की थी ताकि कमरा नं० 13 में कोई उसे पहचान न ले।”

[PAGE 68] : काश पेग्गी अपनी इच्छा से ही वाण्डा का मजाक उड़ाना बंद कर दे। चलो छोड़ो, मैडी ने अपना हाथ अपने छोटे-छोटे सुनहरी बालों में फेरा जैसे कि वह बेचैन करने वाले उन विचारों को दूर भगा दे। इससे क्या अंतर पड़ना था? धीरे-धीरे मैडी ने उस परची जो लिखनी शुरू की थी के छोटे-छोटे टुकड़े कर दिए। वह पेग्गी की सबसे घनिष्ठ मित्र थी और पेग्गी पूरे कमरे में सर्वप्रिय लड़की थी पेग्गी सम्भवतः कोई भी ऐसा काम नहीं कर सकती थी, जो गलत हो, उसने सोचा।

जहाँ तक वाण्डा का संबंध था वह तो मात्र एक लड़की थी जो Boggins Height पर रहती थी और स्कूल के प्रांगण में अकेली खड़ी रहती थी। उसने कभी किसी से कुछ भी नहीं कहा था। एकमात्र समय जब उसने स्कूल प्रांगण में अपनी सौ पोशाकों के बारे में कुछ कहा था। मैडी को याद था कि किस तरह उसने अपनी एक पोशाक के बारे में बताया था, हल्के नीले रंग की जिस पर विभिन्न रंगों के गोटे लगे हुए थे और उसे एक और पोशाक की याद आ रही थी जो गहरे रंग की थी और जिसकी कमर पर एक पेटी बनी हुई थी “इसमें तो तुम एक क्रिसमस ट्री की तरह लगोगी।” लड़कियों ने प्रशंसा करने का नाटक करते हुए कहा।

वाण्डा और उसकी अलमारी में एक पंक्ति में रखी सौ पोशाकों के विषय में सोचते हुए, मैडी को हैरानी होने लगी कि ड्राईंग और रंगों के मुकाबले में कौन जीतेगा। लड़कियों के लिए पोशाकों के चित्र बनाने का मुकाबला था और लड़कों के लिए मोटर वाली किश्तियों के चित्र बनाने का। निःसंदेह लड़कियों का पदक पेग्गी जीतेगी। पेग्गी पूरे कमरे में सबसे अच्छा चित्रांकन करती.थी। कम-से-कम प्रत्येक के दिमाग में यही बात थी। वह किसी पत्रिका में दिए गए चित्र को देखकर उसके जैसा चित्र बना सकती थी या किसी फिल्मी सितारे के सिर का चित्र बना सकती थी जिसे देखकर आप उसकी पहचान बता सकते थे। ओह, मैगी को पक्का यकीन था कि पेग्गी ही जीतेगी। ठीक है, कल अध्यापक विजेताओं के नाम घोषित करेंगे तब उन्हें पता चल जाएगा।

अगले दिन बूंदा-बाँदी हो रही थी। पेग्गी का छाता लेकर मैगी और पेग्गी जल्दी-जल्दी स्कूल गईं। स्वाभाविक रूप से ऐसे दिन उन्होंने ओलिवर स्ट्रीट के कोने पर खड़े होकर वाण्डा की प्रतीक्षा नहीं की। उसके बाद की सड़क, जो दूर स्थित थी जो रेल की पटरियों के नीचे से होकर जाती थी और ऊपर पहाड़ी पर जाती थी वह Boggins Heights जाती थी। कुछ भी हो उस दिन वे स्कूल से लेट होने का मौका नहीं पाना चाहती थी, क्योंकि आज का दिन महत्त्वपूर्ण था।

[PAGE 69] : “आपके विचार में क्या आज विजेताओं के नामों की घोषणा मिस मेसन करेंगी?” पेग्गी ने पूछा। “हाँ मुझे ऐसी आशा है, जैसे ही हम प्रवेश करेंगे,” मैडी ने कहा, “निःसंदेह तुम ही जीतोगी, पेग्गी।”

“ऐसी ही आशा है,” पेग्गी ने उत्सुकतापूर्वक कहा। जिस क्षण उन्होंने कक्षा में प्रवेश किया तो वे अचानक ठहर गई और हाँफने लगी। सारे कमरे में चित्र-ही-चित्र थे, प्रत्येक सिरे और खिड़की के बाहर निकले शेल्फों पर, चमकदार रंग और शानदार तथा प्रभावशाली नमूने थे, सभी बड़े-बड़े लपेटने वाले कागजों के ऊपर बने हुए थे। उनकी संख्या लगभग सौ होगी और वे सभी एक पंक्ति में रखे थे। वे चित्र अवश्य ही मुकाबले के लिए रखे गए होंगे। वे मुकाबले के लिए ही थे। हर कोई वहीं रुक गया और सीटियाँ बजाने लगा या धीमे स्वर में प्रशंसा करने लगा।

जैसे ही कक्षा एकत्रित हई मिस मेसन ने विजेताओं के नामों की घोषणा की। लड़कों में जैक बेग्गल्ज़ ने मुकाबला जीता था, उसने कहा और उसका किश्ती के बाहर की तरफ लगी हुई मोटर वाला नमूना बारह नंबर कमरे में नुमाइश के लिए पड़ा था, वहाँ दूसरे लड़कों के चित्र भी पड़े थे। – ‘जहाँ तक लड़कियों की बात है,’ उसने कहा, “यद्यपि अधिकतर लड़कियों द्वारा एक या दो चित्र ही प्रस्तुत किए गए-एक लड़की ने और कमरा नंबर तेरह को इसके लिए गर्व करना, चाहिए- इस एक लड़की ने वास्तव में ही सौ चित्र बनाए थे। सभी विभिन्न प्रकार के और सभी सुंदर थे। जजों (निर्णायकमंडल) के दृष्टिकोण में उन चित्रों में से कोई-सा भी इनाम जीतने का पात्र था। मुझे यह कहते हुए अति प्रसन्नता हो रही है कि लड़कियों के पदक की विजेता वाण्डा पेट्रोंसकी है।

[PAGE70] : दुर्भाग्यवश, वाण्डा कुछ दिनों से स्कूल से गैर-हाजिर चल रही है और वह उस प्रशंसा को प्राप्त करने के लिए वहाँ नहीं है जो उसे मिलनी चाहिए। आओ आशा करें कि वह कल स्कूल आ जाए। अब इस कक्षा के विद्यार्थियों, आप चुपचाप लाइन बनाकर उस कमरे का चक्कर लगाएँ और उसके शानदार चित्रों को देखें।”

बच्चे एकदम से तारीफ करने लगे, और लड़के तो अपने पाँवों को फर्श पर पटकने का अवसर पाकर, अपनी उँगलियों को मुँह में डालने और सीटियाँ बजाने का अवसर पाकर प्रसन्न थे, यद्यपि उनकी पोशाकों में कोई रुचि नहीं थी।
“पेग्गी देखो” मैडी धीरे-से बोली “ये रही वह नीले वाली पोशाक जिसके बारे में उसने हमें बताया था। क्या यह सुंदर नहीं है?” “हाँ” पेग्गी ने कहा, “और वहाँ वह हरे रंग की पोशाक है, बच्चे और मैंने सोचा कि मैं भी इसे चित्रित कर सकती थी।”

From the Diary of Anne Frank Word-Meanings in Hindi

[PAGE 63]:Possessions =wealth/things kept (दौलत/पास रखी वस्तुएँ); enduring = long lasting (देर तक चलने वाली);account=detail (विस्तार);judged = assessed (मूल्यांकन किया);encyclopedia=book dealing with all branches of knowledge (fagachtgt); immigrants = settlers in another country (Farcit); occurred = took place (ufca ESTT); identified =recognised (पहचाना); ethnicity =pertaining to race (जाति संबंधी); treat= behave with (व्यवहार करना); notable = famous (प्रसिद्ध); suburbs = outskirts of the city (बाहरी बस्ती); discriminated = made discrimination (भेदभाव किया); census = counting of people (जनगणना)।

[PAGE 64] : Rough = (here) indisciplined (अनुशासनहीन); scuffling of feet = creating noise by thumping shoes (पैर पटककर शोर करना); roars=cries (शोर चीखें); on the contrary = on the other hand (इसके विपरीत); rarely = very seldom (बहुत कम); twisted=moved (हिले); crooked sort=awkward (बेढंगी); caked with =covered with (से ढकी हुई); curly hair = wavy hair (घुघराले बाल)।

[PAGE 65] : Faded = dim coloured (मद्धम रंग की); hang right= fit properly (सही ढंग से फिट होना); ironed = pressed with iron (प्रेस करना); surrounded = encircled (दायरा बनाना); hopscotch = a kind of game (एक प्रकार का खेल); courteous = polite (विनम्र); nudge = a gentle push (हल्का-सा इशारा करना)।

[PAGE 66] : Incredulously = showing disbelief (अविश्वास प्रकट करते हुए); velvet = a kind of cloth (मखमल); stolidly = without showing any feeling (बिना भावना के); peals of laughter = loud laughter (जोरदार हँसी); obviously = apparently (स्पष्ट रूप से); exaggerated = enhanced (बढ़ा-चढ़ाकर कहना); greeted = welcomed (स्वागत किया); inseparable = that which cannot be separated (अभिन्न); hitching = catching (पकड़ना); protected = saved (बचाया); bullies = those who frighten the weaker persons (धौंसिया); cruel = unkind (क्रूर)।

[PAGE 67] : Mocking = making fun of (मज़ाक उड़ाना); embarrassed = ashamed of (शर्मसार होना); exactly = correctly (सही ढंग से); invented = discovered (आविष्कार किया); teasing = bothering (परेशान करना); absent-mindedly = without thinking much (बिना सोचे-समझे); paused = stopped (रुकी); shuddered = trembled (काँपने लगी); target = person chosen for attack (निशाना); disguise = conceal (छुपाना)।

[PAGE 68] : Trimmings = ornamentation of a dress (पोशाक की सजावट); accord = wish (इच्छा); blonde hair = golden hair (सुनहरी बाल); scarcely = hardly (मुश्किल से ही); brilliant = shining (चमकता हुआ); sash = scarf (स्काफ); pretended = false (झूठ); admiration = praise (तारीफ); probably = perhaps (शायद); announce = declare (घोषणा करना); drizzling = light rain (बूंदा-बाँदी)।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1

[PAGE 69] : Eagerly with eagerness (उत्सुकता से); gasped = breathed with open mouth (खुले मुँह से साँस लेना); ledge = outer part (बाहरी भाग); windowsill = lower portion of a window (खिड़की का नीचे का भाग); dazzling = shining (चमकता हुआ); lavish = grand (भव्य); wrapping = outer cover of something wrapped (बाहरी कवर); contest = competition (प्रतियोगिता); murmured = muttered (बुड़बुड़ाना); admiringly = in a praising manner (प्रशंसात्मक रूप से); assembled = gathered (इकट्ठे हुए) exhibition = on show (दिखाना); sketches = drawings (ड्राइंग)।

[PAGE 70] : Unfortunately = unluckily (दुर्भाग्यपूर्ण); applause = praise (तारीफ); exquisite = beautiful (सुंदर); stamp = strike floor with feet (पैरों से फर्श थपथपाना); whispered = spoke in a low voice (काना-फूसी करना)।

HBSE 10th Class English Solutions First Flight Chapter 5 The Hundred Dresses Part 1 Read More »